Prestige Estates Projects Ltd, the Bengaluru-based real estate developer, has entered into a framework agreement with Chennai-based Arihant Foundations & Housing Ltd to collaborate and jointly develop real estate projects in Chennai.
The two companies will explore opportunities across various real estate segments, including residential, commercial, retail, and hospitality developments.
The projects will be undertaken on a joint venture basis, with both parties bringing their respective expertise, strengths, brand value, and market knowledge to deliver high-quality developments that cater to the evolving needs of the Chennai market, the companies said in a release.
Each identified project will be governed by separate definitive agreements, which will outline the terms of the joint development and will be executed as and when specific opportunities are finalised.
This collaboration aligns with Prestige Group’s strategic growth plans to expand its presence in key cities across India by leveraging synergistic partnerships to create long-term value, the release said.
On the BSE, Prestige’s share price closed at ₹1,282.35, down ₹29.45 (–2.25 per cent), while Arihant’s share price closed at ₹810.60, up ₹32.20 (+4.14 per cent).
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
PRIJE nekoliko dana princeza od Walesa, 43-godišnja Kate Middleton, prisustvovala je misi zahvalnosti u Westminsterskoj opatiji povodom 80. obljetnice Dana pobjede u Europi. Pridružila se suprugu princu Williamu, kralju Charlesu, kraljici Camilli i drugim članovima kraljevske obitelji kako bi obilježili važan povijesni trenutak koji označava kraj Drugog svjetskog rata u Europi.
Za tu je prigodu princeza Kate odabrala već viđenu bijelu haljinu s crnim točkicama dugih rukava dizajnerice Alessandre Rich. Uz haljinu je nosila crni šešir, naušnice s bisernim privjeskom koje često nosi, DeMellier torbicu u boji devine dlake i usklađene salonke.
Često ponavlja modne kombinacije
Princeza od Walesa poznata je po tome što reciklira odjevne kombinacije, često s malim izmjenama koje daju novi dojam.
“Mislim da pokušava promovirati održiviji način odijevanja. Već ima golem ormar, pa zašto ne bi pronašla načine kako da stare komade osmisli na novi način”, rekla je Bethan Holt, modna urednica The Telegrapha, u razgovoru za People, komentirajući Katein noviji stil koji često uključuje šarmantne dodatke poput mašni.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Ako vam se sviđa njezino izdanje, pronašli smo slične komade uz koje ćete ga moći rekreirati.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Chet Lemon, a product of Los Angeles Fremont High during its heyday who became a three-time All-Star outfielder and a World Series champion during a 16-year major league career, died Thursday at age 70 after a decades-long fight with a blood disorder.
Lemon was a first-round draft pick of the Oakland Athletics at age 17 in 1972 and starred with the Chicago White Sox from 1975-81 and the Detroit Tigers from 1982-90, finishing with a .273 batting average, 215 homers, 396 doubles and 884 runs batted in.
He was the center fielder on the Tigers’ 1984 World Series championship team — making a spectacular catch to cement a Game 3 victory over the San Diego Padres — and became a favorite of eventual Hall of Fame manager Sparky Anderson.
“After watching Chester the last several years, I have to say without a doubt, he’s the best center fielder I’ve seen in my 31 years in the game,” Anderson said in 1984. “Chester is a Pete Rose type. He never complains. He’s always there and he plays each game as if it were the seventh game of the World Series. Chester doesn’t know any other way to play and that’s his greatest asset.
Detroit Tigers right fielder Chet Lemon takes a low-five from teammates as he returns to the dugout after hitting a home run on April 22, 1982, in New York.
(Ray Stubblebine / Associated Press)
“Combine all that with his little-boy desire to want to play every day and it is no wonder Chester has all those fans who sit in the bleachers in the palm of his hand.”
“The Detroit Tigers join all of baseball in mourning the passing of Chet Lemon,” the Tigers statement read. “While he was a World Series champion and All-Star on the field, perhaps his biggest impact came off of it. That includes creating the Chet Lemon Foundation and dedicating much of his post-playing career to youth baseball development. Our thoughts are with Chet’s family, friends and all those he coached, mentored and inspired.”
Former Tigers catcher Lance Parrish was one of several former teammates who remembered Lemon fondly.
“Chet was the kindest of men and always had that great smile on his face,” Parrish said in a statement. “He was also a fierce competitor on the baseball field and a great teammate. I loved him like a brother.”
Detroit’s Chet Lemon races to first to beat the throw after grounding to San Diego shortstop Garry Templeton during Game 3 of the World Series at Detroit’s Tiger Stadium on Oct. 12, 1984.
(Ron Heflin/AP)
Chester Earl Lemon was born in Jackson, Miss., on Feb. 12, 1955. He was the oldest of Ralph and Gloria Lemon’s four children and the family moved to Los Angeles when Chet was a child. Fremont High was a City Section power that produced a string of major leaguers including Bob Watson, Willie Crawford, Bobby Tolan and George Hendrick under legendary coach Phil Pote.
Pote had become a scout with the A’s by the time Lemon graduated from Fremont and they made him the 22nd overall pick in the June draft. Lemon hit well in the minor leagues but was a poor fielder at third base and shortstop. The A’s traded him to the White Sox in 1975 while he was in triple-A.
“I was ready in 1975 but had nowhere to play,” Lemon told White Sox Interactive. “I was an infielder and Oakland had guys like Sal Bando and Bert Campaneris in those positions. I had heard a lot of talk about teams being interested in me. When I found out about the deal, I thought it was a great move. I was finally going to get my chance — and in a big market as well.”
The White Sox moved Lemon to center field and he flourished, cracking the starting lineup in 1976, setting a still-standing AL record with 512 putouts in center field in 1977 and making the American League All-Star team in 1978 and ’79.
“It was a great feeling to be recognized as one of the best players,” Lemon said of his All-Star selections. “What also was nice was getting to know the other guys. You realize that they are all just like you.”
Lemon’s best season came in 1979 when he led the AL with 44 doubles and set career highs in batting average (.318) and RBIs (86). He also led the league in a less glamorous category: hit by pitches. It was the first of four seasons he was hit more than any other batter in the league, and he was plunked 151 times during his career, ranking 25th on the all-time list.
Why? He crowded the plate.
“I don’t think I realized I was that close to the plate,” he said. “You know, I actually didn’t mind being pitched inside. I felt I could always turn on pitches. If you look at my hits, like all those doubles, I think you’ll find that I went down the left-field line in most of them.”
Lemon was traded to Detroit after the 1981 season for outfielder Steve Kemp. Three years later, Lemon became an All-Star for the third time and helped the Tigers win the World Series for the first time since 1968.
“Chet Lemon is the best center fielder in the game today,” Anderson said in 1984. “He isn’t the fastest, but he’s the best at it because he works harder at it than anyone else.”
Detroit centerfielder Chet Lemon takes a fly from Terry Kennedy to end the Padres half of the seventh inning in Game 4 of the World Series at Tiger Stadium on Oct. 13, 1984. Detroit beat San Diego 5-2.
(Lenny Ignelzi / Associated Press)
Lemon continued to produce for the Tigers until 1991 when they released him at the end of spring training. Lemon noticed that it was taking him longer to recover from injuries and went to a doctor.
“I remember saying to myself, ‘Am I getting old?’ because I always took care of myself,” he said. “In spring training 1991 the Tigers discovered that I had too many red blood cells in my body. The Tigers thought the numbers they got were wrong. My stomach was always hurting. I thought maybe I had an ulcer or it was just stress. The doctors couldn’t find out what was causing it. They finally did an ultrasound and discovered that I had tiny blood clots in my portal veins.
“About 30 minutes after they discovered that, I was rushed to intensive care, hooked up to machines and given blood thinners. Not only did I have blood clots but I had too much blood and it was too thick, like a slush.”
Lemon nearly died from his blood disorder, polycythemia vera, spending three months in the hospital.
“Just trying to turn over in bed was agonizing,” he said. “I was being fed intravenously. I did not want to eat, I couldn’t eat. I lost about 60 or 70 pounds and was down to about 130 pounds.”
Lemon was a Jehovah’s Witness and declined to receive blood transfusions. Surgery was ruled out because he was on blood thinners to prevent clots. Still, Lemon recovered and eventually coached high school baseball near his home in Apopka, Fla.
He started the Chet Lemon School of Baseball in Lake Mary, Fla. in 1993, became president of the Amateur Athletic Union district near Orlando, and from 2001 to 2008 coached at Eustis High School, leading the team to a state title in 2003.
Former Detroit player Chet Lemon is presented with a framed Tigers jersey by Willie Horton before a game against the Chicago White Sox on June 5, 2016, in Detroit. Lemon was honored as part of Negro League weekend at Comerica Park.
(Duane Burleson / Associated Press)
Future MLB stars Prince Fielder, Zack Greinke, Casey Kotchman, and brothers Rickie and Jemile Weeks trained under Lemon, who also established the Chet Lemon Foundation, which provides support for people affected by strokes and aphasia.
“He was a coach, a friend and a mentor who will be highly missed by many in our Central Florida baseball community,” Central Florida coach Rich Wallace told the Orlando Sentinel.
Lemon suffered strokes in recent years that left him unable to walk or talk. He attended the 40th anniversary of the Tigers’ World Series title in Detroit in September 2024. He was in a wheelchair but enjoyed the reunion.
“Chet was a cherished teammate and friend,” former teammate and Hall of Famer Alan Trammell said in a statement. “I’m so thankful for the time we spent together last summer when the 1984 team had its 40th reunion at Comerica Park. Today is a sad day for us. He will be dearly missed.”
Lemon is survived by his wife of more than 30 years, Gigi, and their daughter, Brianna. Lemon’s first wife was Valerie Jones, with whom he had four children: Geneva, Chester Jr., David, and Marcus, who played 11 years of minor league baseball.
For many Indian travellers, Azerbaijan and Turkey had fast become favourites — with their history, architecture and relatively accessible travel options. But a shift in geopolitical winds is now casting a shadow on holiday plans.
Azerbaijan’s foreign ministry issued a statement backing Pakistan, saying, “We stand in solidarity with the people of Pakistan.” Turkey soon followed with similar remarks
It began in the wake of Operation Sindoor, India’s decisive military response to the heinous terror attack in Pahalgam, Kashmir, which claimed the lives of 26 innocent civilians. The operation targeted terror camps deep inside Pakistan and Pakistan-occupied Kashmir (PoK), sending a strong message against cross-border terrorism. In the aftermath, Azerbaijan’s foreign ministry issued a statement backing Pakistan, saying, “We stand in solidarity with the people of Pakistan.” Turkey soon followed with similar remarks.
Well, #BoycottAzerbaijan has begun trending across social media platforms, with users demanding why Indian travellers should spend their money in countries that openly support adversaries of the nation. Many not only cancelled trips but also urged fellow citizens to reconsider travel plans, calling for a show of unity through economic choices.
Tourism takes a hit
This backlash could derail a growing tourism trend. Turkey welcomed around 2,70,000 Indian tourists in 2024 and was expecting 350,000 visitors in 2025, according to Turkish tourism authorities — a 20.7% year-on-year jump. Those projections may now be under threat.
Several companies in the Indian travel ecosystem have already taken action: Goa Villas, a homestay company, announced it had cut ties with Turkish Airlines and would no longer accommodate Turkish citizens.
EaseMyTrip, one of India’s largest travel platforms, advised travellers to avoid Turkey and Azerbaijan, citing security and diplomatic concerns. Pickyourtrail, a customised holiday platform, paused all bookings to both countries as a symbolic move against their public support for Pakistan.
“There’s genuine concern among our clients,” said travel agent Loretta Nadar of Made in Banaras, who cancelled a group tour to Azerbaijan and Turkey: “We refunded everyone and stopped dealing with agents from those regions.”
Even, Karan Agarwal, Director, Cox & Kings, said, “Given recent developments, we’re pausing all new travel offerings to Azerbaijan, Uzbekistan and Turkey. We urge Indian travellers to avoid non-essential trips to these destinations until the geopolitical situation becomes clearer and more aligned with national interests.
Voices of reason
Not everyone is pressing pause. EK Gupta of Soul Voyage believes this may be a temporary phase. “Tourists will go where they want. It’s their choice. Our job is not to police their travel decisions.”
Meanwhile, some travellers currently in the region report no visible threat on the ground. “We’ve been safe and people have been helpful,” said Pratishtha Kaura, currently holidaying in Turkey.
What to do
Arrive at the airport at least 3 hours before departure
Confirm your flight status in advance
Carry a valid government photo ID
Follow updated baggage rules (one cabin bag, up to 7kg)
Prepare for heightened security checks under SLPC protocols
What to avoid
Don’t cut it close to your flight time
Avoid carrying prohibited items
Don’t bring visitors into the terminal
Never skip security instructions, no matter how routine they are
There have been hundreds of World War 2 movies over the years but only the very best get the Academy Awards attention.
On BBC iPlayer’s Film section, there are three Oscar-winning British films about the fight against the Nazis that are streaming for a limited time.
In fact, watching them together makes for a fantastic marathon to mark the 80th anniversary of VE Day this week
First up is 2010’s The King’s Speech (available for 9 days) starring Colin Firth as King George VI coping with his stammer ahead of his wartime radio broadcast upon the 1939 declaration of war.
Tom Hooper’s film, co-starring Helena Bonham Carter and Geoffrey Rush, won four Oscars, including Best Picture, Best Director, Best Actor for Firth and Best Original Screenplay.
Next is Christopher Nolan’s Dunkirk (available after broadcast on BBC Two this Sunday lunchtime), which depicts the 1940 Allied evacuation of France, as Hitler continued to conquer much of Europe. The 2017 film starred an ensemble cast including Harry Styles, Tom Hardy, Kenneth Branagh, Cillian Murphy, Barry Keoghan, Mark Rylance and Michael Caine. Dunkirk was nominated for eight Academy Awards and went home with three Oscars for Best Sound Editing, Best Sound Mixing and Best Film Editing.
We recommend following this film up with Darkest Hour (available for 26 days), which was released the same year and was also set in 1940. The movie focuses on Winston Churchill in his early days as Prime Minister during Dunkirk. Darkest Hour won two Oscars including Best Actor for Gary Oldman in the lead role.
The Isuzu MU-X range has been updated, and with the revamped and revised lineup, the Japanese brand has added a new range-topping X-Terrain variant of its popular seven-seat off-road SUV.
Yes, it’s a name borrowed from Isuzu’s flagship D-Max dual-cab 4×4 ute, but this one doesn’t feel like a truck to drive. In fact, there have been some important upgrades and inclusions that make this one of the most appealing takes on the MU-X theme to date.
So, read on and you’ll find out what it costs, what it’s like to drive, what it’s like inside and much, much more.
How does the Isuzu MU-X compare?
View a detailed breakdown of the Isuzu MU-X against similarly sized vehicles.
Isuzu
MU-X
How much does the Isuzu MU-X cost?
The MU-X range is bigger than ever, following the addition of the top-shelf X-T variant as part of the facelifted MY25 lineup.
Model
Price before on-road costs
2025 Isuzu MU-X LS-M 1.9L 4×2
$48,400 (+$1000) or $46,990 drive-away
2025 Isuzu MU-X LS-M 3.0L 4×2
$50,400 (+$1000)
2025 Isuzu MU-X LS-M 1.9L 4×4
$54,400 (+$1000)
2025 Isuzu MU-X LS-M 3.0L 4×4
$56,400 (+$1000)
2025 Isuzu MU-X LS-U 3.0L 4×2
$57,400 (+$1500)
2025 Isuzu MU-X LS-U 1.9L 4×4
$61,400 (+$1500)
2025 Isuzu MU-X LS-U 3.0L 4×4
$63,400 (+$1500)
2025 Isuzu MU-X LS-T 3.0L 4×2
$65,400 (+$2000)
2025 Isuzu MU-X LS-T 3.0L 4×4
$69,400 (+$2000) or $69,990 drive-away (+$2000)
2025 Isuzu MU-X X-Terrain 3.0L 4×4
$74,400, or $73,990 drive-away
Yes, the brand does have a strange habit of offering drive-away prices for some variants, which are lower than the list prices (before on-road costs), but it’s a good way for consumers to get an idea of what they’re looking at in terms of the bookends of the range.
The MU-X still compares favourably to the likes of the Ford Everest on pricing, not to mention the much more expensive Toyota Prado, but there are a number of other diesel seven-seater off-road SUVs that undercut it, including the LDV D90, Mahindra Scorpio and Mitsubishi Pajero Sport.
To see how the Isuzu MU-X lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
What is the Isuzu MU-X like on the inside?
Buy the X-Terrain and you can tell you’re getting something a bit more spesh as soon as you slide into the driver’s seat.
It has a host of model-specific changes that help it hold its own in the range, including red stitching details and highlights through the cabin, not to mention red LED ambient interior lighting. The 7.0-inch instrument cluster screen also has red fonts and specific graphics.
In addition, the X-Terrain has dark grey and piano black appointments instead of the chrome silver or black accents as seen across the rest of the range.
So, does it feel like almost $80K worth of interior? Not especially, but it is certainly the poshest MU-X ever seen in this market.
As part of the 2025 update, higher-spec grades scored a new 9.0-inch touchscreen media system (as seen in the D-Max), and it has both good and not-so-good points.
The screen glare is not great – if you’re in the driver’s seat, it can be difficult to see what’s going on on the screen at times. However, what is good is the volume dial, tuning dial, and a row of home buttons below the screen, making it much easier to interact with than the multimedia unit it replaces.
It also has wireless Apple CarPlay and Android Auto connectivity, if those are the things you like to use. There’s a drop-down screen to quickly jump between menus and settings, and the car adjustments are actually pretty deep.
You have access to the ADAS (Advanced Driver Assistance System) settings, so you can turn things off if you want. You can also adjust electrical elements, check off-road angles, see where your wheels are pointed, monitor tyre pressure, and view the transfer case display to see what’s happening with your powertrain.
The system is pretty good – easy to get your head around, and useable. It also includes built-in sat-nav, and you can jump between menus pretty quickly.
There’s also a new 7.0-inch driver info screen with some good features, including the aforementioned X-Terrain specific colouring.
You can navigate through menus using the steering wheel controls, and it provides a good at-a-glance view of fuel consumption and other useful information.
On the steering wheel you also have controls for adaptive cruise control, volume, voice control, and phone pickup/hang-up buttons. There’s a view mode button on the steering wheel, allowing you to quickly check the car and its surroundings – a neat feature, especially in a tight parking garage.
The unchanged bottom part of the dash includes fan and temperature control toggles, and easy adjustments for the direction and air recirculation.
There are USB-C ports, seat heating buttons, and a 12-volt port, but one thing still missing from this MU-X is a wireless phone charger – frustrating, especially considering it has Wireless CarPlay and Android Auto, and a phone-shaped storage box just begging for it. You can get a wireless charger as an accessory, but it should really come as standard at this money (and less!).
There’s a conventional gear shifter, and you’ve got traction control and Hill Descent Control buttons, but somewhat surprisingly the top-spec model has plenty of blanks, which cheapens the vibe a bit.
It also features a drive mode selector for four-wheel driving (2H, 4H, and 4L), a rear differential lock, rough terrain mode, and Auto Hold to prevent the car from creeping forward in traffic. The parking brake is electronic.
Now, storage. The front is decent, with cupholders, additional loose item storage, and large door pockets with bottle holders, but the glove box is completely full with books, and there’s no top glove box or extra storage on top, which is a bit of a downside. However, you do get a sunglasses holder.
Inside, there are yellowy halogen lights which again bring the vibe down a bit, as do the halogen lights for the vanity mirrors. An auto-dimming rear-view mirror is a bonus, but it’s not available in all variants.
Second-row space with the driver’s seat set for my position (I’m 6’0” or 182cm) is plenty in terms of legroom, footroom, and headroom. However, the interior feels quite dark because of the black headliner and the lack of a sunroof.
There are grab handles, coat hooks, and overhead vents, which are great, along with a fan control system that lets you adjust airflow.
In terms of amenities, you’ve got bottle holders in the doors, seatback pockets, and USB-C ports.
There’s not much intrusion from the transmission tunnel, but the seats don’t slide forward, so this is the amount of space you get, no matter what.
The second row has ISOFIX child seat anchors and top-tethers for child seats, and they even come with covers to prevent the seat from being damaged. There’s also a flip-down armrest with pop-out cupholders, which is a neat feature, though I had some issues with it being a bit finicky to put away.
The middle-row seat folds down easily for access to the third row, and you can push the seatbelt out of the way to make it easier to access the back.
As a grown adult, I can fit in the back with decent headroom, but it feels quite gloomy due to the dark interior. One thing to note is that entry-level versions have a lighter headliner, which might be more appealing for those who don’t like the dark feel.
The back row has overhead vents and small windows, and cupholders too.
However, there are no child seat anchors in the very back row, so if you’re planning to use this as a seven-seater for small children in the third row, it won’t work. If you’re looking for a more family-friendly seven-seater, you may want to check out other options.
As for the boot space, there is 311 litres of cargo capacity with all three rows up, and that expands to a generous 1119L with the third-row folded down.
Under the body of the vehicle is a full-size spare wheel – as you’d expect.
To see how the Isuzu MU-X lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
What’s under the bonnet?
The MU-X X-Terrain has Isuzu’s heralded 3.0-litre turbo-diesel four-cylinder engine (4JJ3-TC), which offers 140kW of power (at 3600rpm) and 450Nm of torque (1600-2600rpm).
Those are lower outputs than some rivals with a litre less engine capacity, but it is a tried and tested powertrain and doesn’t feel much less punchy. It’s matched as standard with an also-carryover six-speed automatic transmission and, for 4×4 variants including the X-Terrain, selectable four-wheel drive with 2H, 4H and 4L via a low-range transfer case, plus a locking rear differential.
The towing capacity for this model is 750kg for an unbraked trailer, and 3500kg for a braked trailer.
If you want to save cash, there’s a 1.9L turbo-diesel four-cylinder delivering lower 110kW/350Nm outputs, also with a six-speed auto. Like the 3.0L, you can get it with 4×2 or 4×4, but braked towing is capped at 3000kg for models with that powertrain.
Gross vehicle mass (GVM) for 4×2 models is 2700kg and 4×4 models is 2800kg, while gross combination mass (GCM) across the 1.9L range is 5500kg (5900kg for 3.0L models).
Fuel tank capacity is 80 litres, and the official combined cycle figure is 8.3L/100km for this grade, and all others with the 3.0L 4×4 powertrain.
Over my time with the X-Terrain, I saw a real-world figure of 8.5L/100km, with highway, urban and back-road driving thrown into the mix. Very impressive, I’d say – but my testing didn’t incorporate towing or off-roading.
To see how the Isuzu MU-X lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
How does the Isuzu MU-X drive?
There have been some changes to the driving experience, and since it had been a little while since I’d driven an MU-X, I noticed them straight away.
The ride comfort and compliance seem significantly better than the previous model I drove a while ago.
It still feels firm, as is the case with most ladder-frame SUVs derived from utes, but this particular version with 20-inch wheels and lowish-profile tires does have a slightly harsher ride than other grades.
But overall, the ride comfort is perfectly acceptable for a vehicle of this type – better than some competitors, and certainly better than a Toyota Fortuner or Pajero Sport.
When it came to the steering, I was also impressed. It’s light enough without feeling too airy, so you get some connection to the front wheels. The responsiveness of the steering is actually not too bad at all, and it handles itself well enough for a vehicle of this type.
While it’s designed for off-roading, I didn’t get a chance to test that aspect in this review – and honestly, if I was choosing a version of the MU-X to hit the trails in, it wouldn’t be one with 20-inch black wheels…
However, there are still some carryover complaints I have about the drive experience, primarily the engine noise.
It’s really loud. When you’re under throttle, that diesel rattle is ever-present. It’s less noticeable in stop-start traffic, for instance, but when you ask the engine to do more, it can get a little tiresome.
That’s probably my biggest complaint about the driving experience, apart from the fact the 3.0-litre turbo-diesel still continues in its least stressed form… as in, there’s more torque to be had here, but it hasn’t been let loose by Isuzu’s engineers.
I reckon they could easily eke out another 100Nm from this engine, as people do with aftermarket chips and tunes.
As it is, the engine feels a little bit lazy, and at high speeds on the highway, if you need to overtake, it takes a little bit of work to keep it going.
The six-speed auto does a good job though, managing the torque of the engine pretty well, and I do like the way it behaves at most speeds.
It’s focused and smooth enough to keep things moving without too much fuss. It even does a bit of engine braking when going downhill, dropping back a gear to help slow you down.
Braking performance is pretty good, though the pedal does have a spongy feel, and the body of the vehicle lurches forward a bit when you hit the brakes. Still, it pulls up strong enough.
To see how the Isuzu MU-X lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
What do you get?
Below you’ll see a rundown of the entire MY25 MU-X range, and the X-Terrain is the last one on the list because it builds upon all the grades below.
6-way adjustable driver’s seat, with electric adjustable lumbar support
Dual-zone climate control with rear passenger air vents and controls
4 x USB-C outlets (2 front, 2 in second row) (NEW)
Tyre pressure monitoring
MU-X LS-T adds:
20-inch six-spoke two-tone machined face alloy wheels with 265/50R20 Bridgestone 684II HT tyres
Door handles, window trims, front fender accents, roof rails, side steps in gloss black (NEW)
Rear privacy glass
Remote engine start
Power-folding and heated door mirrors w/ side cameras finished in gloss black (NEW)
White ambient interior lighting
Black headliner
Heated front seats
8-way power driver’s seat with power lumbar
4-way power passenger seat
Leather-accented upholstery with grey stitching and leatherette across door trims, centre console
MU-X X-Terrain adds:
20-inch gloss black alloys, coated with a smoked clear coat with 265/50R20 Bridgestone 684II HT tyres
Updated LED fog lights with black fog light bezels and gloss black surrounds
Gloss black fender flares
Lower body side skirt
Lower rear underbody spoiler
Piano black and silver metallic interior trim
Red stitching details
Red LED ambient interior lighting
7.0-inch instrument cluster screen with red fonts, graphics
To see how the Isuzu MU-X lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
Is the Isuzu MU-X safe?
The safety changes are a big story for the updated MU-X.
The Isuzu MU-X has a five-star safety rating from ANCAP that is datestamped July 2022, and it was issued following a redesign to the driver’s knee airbag and instrument panel.
In that testing the MU-X received an adult occupant protection score of 86 per cent, child occupant protection score of 85 per cent, vulnerable road user protection score of 69 per cent, and safety assist score of 84 per cent.
The updated MY25 MU-X’s advanced driver assistance systems (ADAS) suite adds new hardware such as a new ‘Gen4’ stereo camera that detects pedestrians, cyclists, motorcycles and other vehicles with greater speed and accuracy.
According to the brand this greatly improves the peripheral and field-of-view vision, while a new Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control (IACC) that can adjust your speed based on traffic sign recognition is also offered. Beyond that tech, there’s also Traffic Jam Assist (TJA) that can maintain vehicle speed and distance at speeds below 60km/h.
Updated lane-keep assist has been added with better lane-centring technology, and there’s a new reversing camera that includes a hitch guide and a hydrophobic coating to prevent muck obscuring the view. Choose one of the higher grades and you score a surround-view camera as well.
More new stuff includes Rear Cross Traffic Brake (RCTB), which acts like a rear AEB system to react to approaching vehicles, cyclists, and pedestrians when reversing.
Standard safety equipment includes:
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB) with Turn Assist
Adaptive cruise control
Blind-spot monitoring
Driver attention monitoring
Lane-keep assist
Emergency lane-keep assist
Mis-acceleration Mitigation
Rear cross-traffic assist (NEW)
Intelligent speed limiter
Reversing camera
Rear parking sensors
Traffic Jam Assist
Traffic sign recognition
Trailer sway control
Tyre pressure monitoring
The LS-U adds front parking sensors, while the LS-T and X-Terrain also get a surround-view camera.
All MU-X vehicles come with eight airbags – dual front, dual seat side, dual full-length curtain, front knee and front centre.
To see how the Isuzu MU-X lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
How much does the Isuzu MU-X cost to run?
Isuzu Ute Australia offers a six-year/150,000km warranty plan, which is a longer duration than that offered by Ford and Toyota (both five-year/unlimited-km), but not quite as generous as the SsangYong Rexton’s seven-year/unlimited-km warranty.
The brand will back your vehicle with up to seven years of roadside assistance, so long as you service with its dealership network.
There’s a capped-price plan for five years/75,000km – shorter than the previous seven-year offering from the brand.
But the costs are, on average, relatively low for the first five visits, at $469 per service. There’s also a free three-month/3000km checkup as part of the ownership program.
To see how the Isuzu MU-X lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
CarExpert’s Take on the Isuzu MU-X
The newly updated Isuzu MU-X is improved in a number of ways, and the X-Terrain flagship certainly adds a bit of bling to this rugged family wagon.
Is it going to be the best version to build an off-road weekend warrior from? Arguably not. But at least if you choose to go down that route, you’ll have a nicer MU-X than your other muddy mates.
Interested in buying an Isuzu MU-X? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
The Finance Minister also directed insurance companies to ensure timely claim settlements and uninterrupted customer service.
Union Finance Minister Nirmala Sitharaman. (PTI file photo)
In light of the ongoing border tensions, FM Nirmala Sitharaman urged banks to prioritise seamless cash availability at ATMs, uninterrupted UPI and internet banking services, and continuous access to essential banking facilities. Regular audits of cybersecurity systems and data centres were mandated to ensure all digital and core banking infrastructure is firewalled and monitored round the clock to prevent breaches.
During the meeting, Sitharaman emphasized the crucial role of the banking and financial sector in maintaining economic stability during these challenging times. She directed all banks to remain fully alert and prepared to handle any crisis, ensuring uninterrupted banking and financial services, particularly in border areas. Both physical and digital banking services must function seamlessly, with emergency protocols updated and tested regularly.
The Finance Minister expressed deep concern for the safety of bank employees and their families working near the border and instructed banks to coordinate with security agencies to ensure their safety.
The Managing Directors and CEOs of banks and insurance companies have updated Sitharaman on the measures being taken to ensure stability and security.
Cybersecurity Enhancements Across Banking System
Bank MDs and CEOs reported significant reinforcement of cybersecurity measures across the banking system. Banks have implemented Anti-DDoS systems to defend against large-scale cyber-attacks. To ensure readiness, high-level mock drills covering cybersecurity and disaster recovery scenarios have been conducted. Banks are also actively monitoring phishing attempts and have issued multiple internal alerts to staff to enhance awareness.
Bank officials confirmed that their Security Operations Centre (SOC) and Network Operations Centres are fully operational and on high alert. These centres are closely coordinating with CERT-In and the National Critical Information Infrastructure Protection Centre (NCIIPC) for real-time data sharing and threat monitoring.
Senior Officials For Crisis Management
Banks were instructed to designate two senior officials at headquarters—one for reporting cyber-related matters and the other for operational issues, including the functioning of bank branches and ATM cash availability. These officers should report incidents to CERT-In and relevant agencies in real-time. Additionally, banks were asked to coordinate with the Reserve Bank of India, CERT-In, and government agencies for robust and agile information exchange and response.
Insurance Companies
The Finance Minister also directed insurance companies to ensure timely claim settlements and uninterrupted customer service.
Support for RRBs
Sitharaman stressed that Sponsor Banks should support Regional Rural Banks (RRBs) during these times, assisting them with any issues they face.
Stay updated with all the latest business news, including market trends, stock updates, tax, IPO, banking finance, real estate, savings and investments. Get in-depth analysis, expert opinions, and real-time updates—only on News18. Also Download the News18 App to stay updated!
Bitcoin’s price is holding strongly above the important $100,000 mark, as holders keep buying whenever the price drops. Its recent bounce back has led analysts and traders to predict different future price targets based on their research and opinions. Though Bitcoin risks a selloff ahead, some key on-chain metrics are rising, which supports this ongoing recovery.
Over 97% Holders Turned Profitable
Bitcoin’s surge past $100,000 has shifted market sentiment in a big way, helped by easing tensions in the U.S.-China trade situation. As the price broke this key level, many traders betting against Bitcoin took heavy losses. According to Coinglass, about $279 million in Bitcoin positions were liquidated in the past 24 hours. Of this, $243.3 million liquidation came from sellers and $35.7 million from buyers.
While open interest dropped 3.2% to $67.1 billion, trading volume continued to climb, showing ongoing market activity.
Also read: Too Late to Buy Bitcoin? Samson Mow Issues Bull Run Warning as Price Breaks $103K
Bitcoin’s $100K breakout also saw significant institutional interest. Spot Bitcoin ETFs saw $142.3 million in net inflows, showing strong institutional interest, according to Farside Investors. ARK’s ETF led with $54 million, followed by Fidelity with $39 million and BlackRock with $37 million. BlackRock also bought over 86 BTC worth $8.4 million in one transaction.
Data from IntoTheBlock shows that over 97% of Bitcoin holders are now in profit after BTC surged past the $100K mark. While this is a positive sign for long-term investors, it could also lead to selling pressure in the short term, as more holders may decide to cash in on their gains.
At the same time, whales are adding to the market’s volatility. The volume of large transactions has risen sharply, climbing from $68.45 billion to $72.67 billion, indicating increased activity among big players.
More notably, the large holder netflow to exchange ratio has jumped to 0.17%, meaning these big investors are moving more Bitcoin onto exchanges. This kind of behavior often signals that whales are preparing to sell as the BTC price surges, which can lead to short-term price drops or market swings if selling volume spikes.
What’s Next for BTC Price?
Bitcoin is aggressively maintaining its buying demand above EMA20 trend line, showing that traders are still confident and willing to buy when the price dips. However, sellers have put up a minor resistance at $104,360. As of writing, BTC price trades at $102,483, surging over 1.13% in the last 24 hours.
There’s some minor resistance around $104K, but if Bitcoin breaks through that, it could head toward the key $109,500 level. This is a big psychological barrier, and sellers will likely try hard to stop the price from going higher. If Bitcoin does manage to push past $110K, it could make a new ATH.
However, bears are running out of time. To regain control, they need to push the price below the 20-day moving average and keep it there. If that happens, Bitcoin could fall further to around $93,500, near the 50-day moving average.
Spring has arrived, which means you may have been spending the last few weeks tidying up your space with some spring cleaning. Along with your physical space, be sure to include your iPhone as you brush off the dust from winter.
Your iPhone might not look like it needs any decluttering, but that’s deceptive. Your browser collects data from every website you visit to ensure a quicker loading time the next time you visit it. However, that preloaded data can muck up the works over time, especially if a site moves around elements on their page or swaps out to new images.
Clearing your phone’s browser cache will slow down your next visit to any individual website because it no longer has that site’s data preloaded, but it also clears out the digital clutter. Just like physical cleaning, it means putting a little effort up front to make things neater going forward.
Whether you use Chrome, Safari or other browsers on your iPhone, it’s good to clear your iPhone’s browser caches every month or two. Yes, even if you’re rocking the new iPhone 16E and running iOS 18. (If you want to get your phone to run faster, try managing your iPhone’s storage.)
Clearing your cache usually involves clearing website cookies, too. Cookies work similarly to browser caches, except they store information about user data, rather than data on the website itself. Clearing your cookies gives you a chance to reset those preferences, which could improve your browsing experience. Note that clearing your cache and cookies will log you out of sites, which means you’ll have to log into them again and reset any preferences. The upfront investment of that time can lead to a smoother experience down the road, and it can be a useful fix if you’ve recently changed settings that aren’t being applied properly.
Here are step-by-step guides on how to clear your cache on your iPhone based on the browser you use.
How to clear your iPhone cache in Safari
Safari is the default browser on iPhones, and you can clear your Safari cache in a few short steps. Starting with iOS 11, following this process will affect all devices signed in to your iCloud account. As a result, all your devices’ caches will be cleared, and you’ll need to sign in to everything the next time you use them. Here’s what to do.
1. Open the Settings app on your iPhone.
2. Select Apps >Safari.
3. Scroll down to History and Website Data and choose Clear History and Website Data.
4. Choose Clear History and Data in the pop-up box — you can chose anywhere from the last hour to all history.
Then you’re set!
How to clear your iPhone cache in Chrome
It’s easy to clear your iPhone cache in Chrome.
James Martin/CNET
Chrome is another popular browser for iPhone users. Google has simplified the process for clearing your Chrome cache, making it much faster to clear your data.
1. Open the Chrome app.
2. Select the three dots in the bottom right to open more options.
3. Swipe over to Settings in the top menu bar.
4. Scroll down and tap Privacy and security.
5. Tap Delete browsing data to open up another menu. Select the intended time range at the top of the menu (anywhere from Last 15 minutes to All time). Make sure that Cookies and Site Data are checked, along with Cached Images and Files. Finally, hit Delete data at the bottom of the screen.
How to clear your iPhone cache in Firefox
If you’re a Firefox devotee, don’t worry. Clearing the cache on your iPhone is straightforward. Just follow these steps.
1. Press the hamburger menu in the bottom right corner to open up options.
2. Choose Settings at the bottom of the menu.
3. Select Data Management in the Privacy section.
4. To clear everything, choose Web Site Data at the top of the menu and then Clear All Web SiteData. Alternatively, you can choose to clear just your browsing history, cache, cookies, offline web data, tracking protection or offline files.
What happens when you clear the cache?
Clearing your cache removes the website data your phone stored locally to prevent having to download that data upon each new visit. The data in your cache builds over time and can end up being an issue if that data winds up out of date. (My phone had about 150MB of data stored in Chrome when I checked.) Clearing that data gives sites a fresh start, which may fix some loading errors. But clearing your cache also signs you out of pages, so be prepared to sign in to everything again.
How often do I need to clear my cache?
Most people only need to clear their caches once every month or two. That’s generally the point when your browser will build up a cache large enough to start slowing things down. If you frequent a large number of sites, you should err on the side of clearing your cache more often.
A young Maryland woman is “relieved and recovering” after doctors performed a novel surgery to remove her potentially deadly cancerous tumors.
A surgical team at the University of Maryland Medical Center (UMMC) extracted the tumors, which had wrapped around the spinal cord, through the patient’s eye socket.
This was the first time surgeons removed a spinal tumor using a “transorbital” approach, according to a UMMC press release.
MICHAEL BOLTON HAD STRANGE SYMPTOMS BEFORE BRAIN CANCER DIAGNOSIS: ‘SOMETHING’S WRONG’
Karla Flores was just 19 when she was diagnosed with a chordoma, which is a developmental bone tumor, in her spine.
At 18, Flores started experiencing double vision, ultimately leading to her diagnosis months later.
Karla Flores, taken in March 2025. Her face is absolutely scarless after all her surgeries.(Karla Flores)
Chordomas are very rare, with only about 300 cases occurring in the U.S. each year.
“The tumor was wrapped around the patient’s spine and spinal cord and had invaded the vertebrae in her neck, just below the base of the skull,” according to Mohamed Labib, M.D., neurosurgeon at the University of Maryland Medical Center and assistant professor of neurosurgery at the University of Maryland School of Medicine.
TERMINAL COLON CANCER PATIENT SAVED BY BREAKTHROUGH TREATMENT
“The primary risks were injuring the brainstem, spinal cord or major blood vessels with the drill or the fine instruments we used — any of these injuries could have resulted in paralysis or even death,” Labib told Fox News Digital.
“But without surgery, the chordoma could have continued to grow and put intense pressure on the spinal cord. This, too, would have paralyzed her arms and legs and eventually killed her. So, you can see how the stakes were very high with this procedure.”
From left to right, Dr. Kalpesh Vakharia, Dr. Mohamed Labib and Dr. Andrea Hebert of the University of Maryland Medical Center.(University of Maryland Medical Center)
The surgeons created a “huge surgical corridor” through the eye socket that enabled them to get in front of the spinal cord.
“It was a straight shot,” Labib said.
“By going through the bottom of the eye socket, we were able to remove a tumor that otherwise would have been very difficult and very risky to address.”
“Learning about the spinal and brain tumors was terrifying, but I am so grateful the doctors were able to remove them.”
During the procedure, Labib worked with a facial plastic and reconstructive surgeon, Kalpesh T. Vakharia, M.D., who “carefully cut through the conjunctiva, the transparent membrane protecting the eye, inside the lower eyelid without disturbing the eye.”
To create the pathway to the spine, Vakharia removed the bottom of Flores’ eye socket and a portion of her cheekbone, the release stated.
ANCIENT EGYPTIANS ATTEMPTED TO SURGICALLY REMOVE BRAIN CANCER FROM SKULL 4,000 YEARS AGO, STUDY FINDS
“We wanted to develop a surgical plan where there would be no external scars and it would be impossible to tell that the patient even had surgery,” said Vakharia.
After Labib removed the tumor, Vakharia rebuilt the bottom of the eye socket using a titanium plate and rebuilt the cheek with bone from the patient’s hip, the release detailed.
This is an illustration of the patient’s two spinal tumors. (University of Maryland Medical Center)
“It was amazing to have had the opportunity to be part of surgery that had never been done before,” Vakharia added.
This approach also prevented any damage to the eustachian tube, major blood vessels such as the jugular vein and internal carotid artery, and nerves that control swallowing and speech, Labib noted.
Prior to Flores’ surgery, Labib had the chance to practice the transorbital procedure on cadavers “many, many times.”
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“The fact that people are willing to donate their bodies to science enabled us to do this and saved the life of this young woman,” he said.
Flores also had a large tumor around her brain stem, which was removed through two separate procedures via her skull and nose, the release stated.
An illustration of the transorbital path to the patient’s tumors.(Tina Wang/University of Maryland Medical Center)
The spinal tumors could have been life-threatening if they had grown to the point where they caused significant brain stem compression, according to Andrea M. Hebert, MD, a UMCC head and neck surgeon who performed the endonasal procedure and took part in the transorbital surgery.
“Many of these tumors recur, and that’s why we favor a multidisciplinary approach to treatment,” said Hebert in the release.
Flores has also undergone radiation therapy to eliminate any remaining cancer cells.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“Karla is doing really well — she’s recovered from surgery and radiation and is ready to get back to work and school,” Labib shared with Fox News Digital.
“She’s an incredibly brave young woman who has faced more than most her age. I expect that same strength of spirit will carry her into a promising future.”
“Learning about the spinal and brain tumors was terrifying, but I am so grateful the doctors were able to remove them.”
Flores does have some nerve damage due to the tumor’s proximity to the brain stem, which has caused some issues with movement of her left eye.
“Learning about the spinal and brain tumors was terrifying, but I am so grateful the doctors were able to remove them,” said Flores, who plans to go to school to become a manicurist.
Karla Flores is pictured on the left, plus the team of doctors that handled the procedure. (Karla Flores; University of Maryland Medical Center)
“I’m slowly recovering and with any problem I have, they help me,” she continued.
“I keep reminding myself to take one day at a time and know that each step is an accomplishment.”
WOMAN SAYS DOG DETECTED HER BREAST CANCER BEFORE DOCTORS DID: ‘HE’S KNOWN THIS WHOLE TIME’
Flores now plans to go to school to become a manicurist.
Looking ahead, UMMC’s team plans to demonstrate the transorbital procedure this fall to neurosurgeons from around the world, at their annual Skull Base surgery course.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
“When you have such a broadened corridor to reach these tumors, you can completely remove them, which greatly reduces recurrence of the cancer,” Labib told Fox News Digital.
“We also have other patients who will be receiving similar surgeries in the near future.”
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
As we step into our 40s, our bodies start to undergo subtle but significant hormonal shifts. From erratic sleep patterns to unexplained weight gain, mood swings to heavier or irregular periods, our hormones can play havoc if not given the right nourishment. That’s why dietitian Manpreet Kalra (@dietitian_manpreet) suggests starting your day with a powerful, hormone-balancing smoothie designed especially for women in this transformative decade of life.
Meet the Anjeer & Sattu Hormonal Balance Smoothie- a deliciously earthy, nutty drink packed with ingredients that support glowing skin, a strong body, fat loss, better sleep, smoother digestion, and even healthy, pain-free periods.
Also Read:What To Eat To Beat Hormonal Acne? Experts Share Tips And Foods To Eat
Health Benefits Of Ajneer & Sattu Hormonal Smoothie
This smoothie is a carefully curated mix of ancient, nutrient-dense ingredients used in traditional Indian diets, all with hormone-nurturing benefits:
Anjeer (Fig): Rich in iron and fibre, this naturally sweet fruit helps regulate periods and supports digestive health.
Almonds: A great source of good fats and calcium, almonds strengthen bones, nourish your skin, and support steady hormone levels.
Walnuts: These brain-shaped beauties are high in omega-3s, helping to reduce inflammation and promote deeper, more restful sleep.
Munakka (Black Raisins): These sweet dried grapes are iron-rich and help boost haemoglobin, giving you natural energy throughout the day.
Sattu (Roasted Gram Flour): A desi superfood, sattu is high in protein and fibre, improves insulin sensitivity, and keeps you full longer.
Flaxseed Powder: A known plant-based source of phytoestrogens, flax helps balance estrogen levels and supports skin elasticity.
Kesar (Saffron): This golden spice lifts mood, reduces cramps, and adds a natural glow to your skin.
Elaichi (Cardamom): A digestive powerhouse, cardamom soothes bloating and calms the mind.
Basil Seeds (Sabja): These jelly-like seeds hydrate the skin and reduce internal inflammation.
How to Make Hormone Balancing Smoothie:
Method:
Soak overnight (or at least 2 hours): 1 fig, 5 almonds, 2 walnut halves, 3 munakkas
In the morning, blend the soaked ingredients with 1 cup of water until smooth.
Stir in 1 tsp of soaked basil seeds (soaked separately for 10-15 minutes in water).
Drink fresh on an empty stomach.
Why It Works:
Hormonal health in your 40s isn’t just about managing PMS or perimenopause, it’s about supporting your body’s entire endocrine system. This smoothie helps:
Stabilise blood sugar to prevent energy crashes and mood swings
Promote gut health, crucial for hormone detoxification
Support liver function, essential for metabolising and eliminating excess hormones
Improve skin and hair health naturally
Ease menstrual cramps and regulate cycles
Also Read: 5 Popular Snacks That Are Pleasing Your Taste Buds But Sabotaging Your Hormones
Avoid These 5 Habits That Disrupt Your Hormones
While nourishing your body is one side of the coin, avoiding harmful habits is the other. According to Dietician Kalra, these five everyday behaviours can wreak havoc on your hormonal balance:
Consuming Sugar After Meals – This causes insulin spikes and eventually insulin resistance- bad news for your metabolism and mood.
Using Phones Before Bed- The blue light suppresses melatonin, your sleep hormone, leading to disturbed sleep and tired mornings.
Caffeine After 4 PM – Late caffeine disrupts cortisol rhythms, increasing stress and impacting sleep.
Carbs on an Empty Stomach – Spikes blood sugar and can lead to insulin resistance. Instead, break your fast with protein, fibre, and healthy fats.
Low Vegetable Intake – Vegetables aid estrogen detox. Without them, hormonal build-up can lead to imbalances like bloating, acne, and irregular periods.
So, if you’re in your 40s and looking to support your hormones naturally, this anjeer and sattu smoothie might just be your new morning ritual.
About Neha GroverLove for reading roused her writing instincts. Neha is guilty of having a deep-set fixation with anything caffeinated. When she is not pouring out her nest of thoughts onto the screen, you can see her reading while sipping on coffee.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-05-08/Xi-Putin-sign-joint-statement-on-further-deepening-China-Russia-ties-1Dd9CjSlppS/img/cdfede42cc5f4c338e8ff8fe6c749c03/cdfede42cc5f4c338e8ff8fe6c749c03.png' alt='The national flags of China and Russia. /VCG'
Chinese President Xi Jinping and Russian President Vladimir Putin on Thursday signed a joint statement on further deepening the China-Russia comprehensive strategic partnership of coordination for a new era.
Shares of Larsen & Toubro (L&T) on Friday jumped nearly 5 per cent after the firm reported a 25 per cent increase in consolidated Profit After Tax (PAT) for the quarter ended on March 31, 2025.
The stock climbed 4.72 per cent to ₹3,477.55 on the BSE.
At the NSE, it rallied 4.60 per cent to ₹3,477.
Extending its previous day’s decline, the 30-share BSE benchmark gauge Sensex traded 746.10 points lower at 79,588.71 in the morning trade. The NSE Nifty quoted 217.45 points down at 24,073.75.
Larsen & Toubro on Thursday reported a 25 per cent increase in consolidated profit after tax to ₹5,497 crore for the quarter ended on March 31, 2025, supported by higher revenues and an exceptional gain.
The company had posted a PAT of ₹4,396 crore for the year-ago period, L&T said in a filing to BSE.
Revenue from operations increased to ₹74,392.28 crore over ₹67,078.68 crore in the year-ago period, the filing said.
L&T President, Whole-time Director and Chief Financial Officer R Shankar Raman told reporters that FY25 has been an outstanding year for the company and L&T exceeded most of the financial goals that it set for itself during the year.
The achievement, he said, is more considerable considering the tough environment that the company was operating in.
The company posted a consolidated PAT of ₹15,037 crore for the year-ended March 31, 2025, registering a growth of 15 per cent compared to the previous year.
The PAT includes an exceptional gain (net of tax) of ₹475 crore, attributable to the partial reversal of an earlier impairment provision for funded resources in the erstwhile L&T Special Steels and Heavy Forgings Private Limited (LTSSHF) joint venture.
DANAS donosimo pregled najatraktivnijih oglasa za prodaju nekretnina prema interesu kupaca. Na prvom mjestu na Index Oglasima nalazi se kuća u zagrebačkom Oporovcu, a slijede je zanimljive ponude diljem Hrvatske.
Ruševna vikendica s potencijalom na građevinskom zemljištu u Zagrebu
U zagrebačkom naselju Oporovec prodaje se ruševna vikendica na građevinskom zemljištu površine 696 m² u ulici Oporovečki dol. Objekt je legaliziran i sastoji se od stambenog objekta bruto površine 44 m² te pomoćnog objekta bruto površine 50 m².
Zemljište ima asfaltiran prilaz, a s dvije strane graniči sa šumom. Ima priključak struje i vodu iz bunara, dok su priključci kanalizacije, vode i plina dostupni na cesti. Cijelo zemljište je u nagibu prema cesti s pogledom na šumu i susjedne kuće. Parcela se nalazi u Z2 zoni, a moguća je rekonstrukcija postojećeg objekta dimenzija 8×11 metara. Cijena ove nekretnine iznosi 68.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Vikendica u Brezničkom Humu s prostranim zemljištem
Na prodaju je kuća za odmor ukupne površine 38.74 m² s pripadajućim zemljištem površine 3428 m² u mjestu Breznički Hum, na samo kilometar udaljenosti od izlaza s autoceste Zagreb-Varaždin.
Nekretnina se nalazi u mirnom okruženju s mnogo zelenila. Parcela je orijentirana sjever-jug, pogodna za sadnju vinograda, a kuća ima terasu s južnom orijentacijom. Objekt je građen opekom, dok je gornji dio sagrađen od stare hrastove građe. Dnevni boravak ima seljački pod i zidnu drvenu oblogu.
Grijanje je na štednjak na drva, a posljednja adaptacija (izmjena stolarije i bojanje) obavljena je 2018. Priključci električne energije i gradske vode nalaze se uz parcelu. Cijena ove vikendice iznosi 37.900 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Kompletno adaptiran mali stan na zagrebačkoj Trešnjevci
Na Trešnjevci, u Zagorskoj ulici, prodaje se jednosoban stan površine 16.80 m² u suterenu stambene zgrade. Stan je u završnoj fazi kompletne adaptacije, moderno i funkcionalno koncipiran.
Lokacija je vrlo povoljna s obzirom na blizinu trgovina, Doma sportova, plivališta Mladost, ugostiteljskih objekata i javnog prijevoza. U okolici se nalazi besplatno javno parkiralište. Stan je etažiran, a vlasništvo je 1/1. Cijena za ovaj kompaktni stan iznosi 84.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Kamena kućica u najslikovjtijem dijelu Istre
U srcu Istre, nedaleko od najmanjeg gradića na svijetu Huma, prodaje se kamena kućica na odličnoj mikrolokaciji. Ova kamena starina broji 22 m² tlocrtne površine te je građena na dvije etaže, što joj daje oko 44 m² stambene površine.
Okućnica kuće prostire se na 47 m², a na tom mjestu je ucrtana kuća što omogućuje nadogradnju i potencijalno dobivanje veće površine od oko 70 m² tlocrtno. Infrastruktura (struja i voda) se nalazi u neposrednoj blizini. Nekretnina predstavlja odličnu investiciju za turističko iznajmljivanje zbog iznimne lokacije. Cijena ove istarske kamene kućice iznosi 45.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Garsonjera na zagrebačkim Vrbanima s odličnom lokacijom
U naselju Vrbani na zagrebačkoj Trešnjevci prodaje se garsonjera površine 32.6 m² na četvrtom katu zgrade bez lifta. Stan se sastoji od ulaznog hodnika, kupaonice i jedne prostorije.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Stanu pripada i ostava u podrumu zgrade površine 2.17 m². Zahvaljujući južnoj orijentaciji i velikim prozorima, stan je prepun dnevnog svjetla. Lokacija je izuzetno povoljna: u blizini su dječji vrtići, osnovne škole, trgovački centri, ugostiteljski objekti i Jarun koji je udaljen samo 1 kilometar. U blizini su tramvajske i autobusne linije. Cijena garsonjere je 99.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Funkcionalan dvosobni stan u suterenu na Trešnjevci
U mirnom i ugodnom dijelu Trešnjevke prodaje se dvosobni stan površine 37.44 m² smješten u suterenu manje, uredne zgrade s ukupno sedam stanova. Lokacija je svega nekoliko minuta hoda od tramvajskog okretišta na Remizi.
Stan se sastoji od ulaznog prostora, kupaonice, spavaće sobe i dnevnog boravka s kuhinjom. Unatoč smještaju u suterenu, ima dosta prirodne svjetlosti, a raspored prostorija je vrlo dobar i funkcionalan. Pogodan je za život pojedinca, para ili kao investicija za dugoročni najam
U neposrednoj blizini nalaze se trgovine, škola, vrtić i javni prijevoz. Stan je odmah dostupan, vlasništvo je uredno, bez tereta. Cijena stana iznosi 124.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Stan s pogledom na more u okolici Marčane
Na prodaju je jednosobni stan s dnevnim boravkom, površine 45 m² u okolici Marčane u Istri. Stan se nalazi u kući s ukupno dva stana, na samo 1.500 metara od mora, što ga čini odličnim izborom za miran život ili odmor.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Nekretnina ima priključak vode te postavljen solarni sustav snage 10 kW. Kuća je izgrađena 2002. i ima nešto okućnice, pa će svaki stan imati vlastiti dio vrta na korištenje. Prodaja je moguća isključivo gotovinom, a cijena ovog stana iznosi 75.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Mobilna kućica u kampu Soline na odličnoj lokaciji
U Kampu Soline u Biogradu na Moru, prodaje se kompletno opremljena mobilna kućica. Nekretnina ima kapacitet do 6 osoba (4+2) i obuhvaća 32 m² unutarnjeg prostora te natkrivenu terasu od 24 m². Raspored se sastoji od dvije prostrane spavaće sobe, dvije moderno uređene kupaonice, natkrivene terase sa stolom za objedovanje i lounge namještajem te potpuno opremljene kuhinje.
Kućica je smještena 80 metara od plaže, okružena borovom šumom, a udaljena je samo 10 minuta hoda do centra Biograda. Opremljena je sustavom grijanja i klimatizacije za cjelogodišnji boravak te povezana na gradski vodovod i kanalizaciju. Godišnji paušal za kamp iznosi 6.400 eura (plaćen za cijelu 2025. godinu). Cijena mobilne kućice je 65.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Kuća u Karancu po iznimno povoljnoj cijeni
U mirnom dijelu Karanca prodaje se useljiva kuća iz obnove smještena na prostranoj parceli od 1.197 m². Nekretnina ima površinu od 80 m² i sastoji se od tri sobe, kuhinje s blagovaonicom, kupaonice, hodnika i ostave.
Kuća je useljiva, iako će novom vlasniku biti potrebno lagano osvježenje prostora. Ima brojila za struju i vodu, a odvodnja i plinska mreža dovedeni su do kuće. Grijanje je na kruto gorivo. Velika okućnica pruža dovoljno prostora za vrt, voćnjak ili hobi-prostor. Cijena ove kuće iznosi svega 33.000 eura.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Pogledaj oglas
Stan za obnovu u Biogradu na Moru
U Bračkoj ulici u Biogradu na Moru prodaje se stan površine 84.59 m² smješten u manjoj zgradi. Stanu je potrebna renovacija, a raspored se proteže na dvije etaže: prizemlje i prvi kat.
Nekretnina se sastoji od dvije sobe, kuhinje s blagovaonicom, kupaonice, hodnika, stubišta i garaže. Cijena stana iznosi 130.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Influencer Krista Jarman shares her magical experience of being the first to enter the Taj Mahal at sunrise, capturing a serene, crowd-free tour like no other.
The Taj Mahal, one of the Seven Wonders of the World, is one of India’s most visited landmarks, often bustling with large crowds and long entry lines. But imagine being the first person to step inside and experience its beauty in complete solitude. Travel influencer Krista Jarman, who is originally from UK, recently had that rare experience. She was the very first visitor to step inside the Taj Mahal early in the morning and took to Instagram to share her magical, crowd-free tour with her followers. (Also read: India’s first-ever tomato festival ‘Toma Terra’ draws criticism, internet says ‘insensitive to all starving people’ )
Travel influencer Krista Jarman described her magical experience as the first visitor to enter the Taj Mahal at 4:45 am. (Instagram/@kristaslittleadventure)
Influencer shares her dream visit as first to enter the Taj Mahal
In her May 7 post, Krista shared the video from her visit along with the caption, “When dreams really do come true. This has to be one of the most magical experiences of my life… running around the Taj Mahal at 5 am like a princess,” Krista described the moment as nothing short of surreal. “Just the sound of the birds waking to the rising sun… the Taj Mahal grounds completely empty of tourists… not a soul in sight… it was like a dream,” she added.
She recalled walking through the East Gate at 4:45 am, being the first in line. Accompanied by her guide Don, she was led through the grand archways and empty marble corridors just as the sky began to lighten. “It was so spectacular to walk through those opening gates… the tall archways leading to the mausoleum shrouded in darkness. As we entered, grand minarets towered high, surrounding an awe-inspiring marble tomb. Truly, truly spectacular,” she wrote.
‘Most magical thing I’ve ever seen’
Krista shared that she entered through the East Gate at 4:45 am and was the first in line. There, she met a guide named Don who ensured she had the grounds all to herself. “He took us to all of the best photo spots and captured the most incredible pictures for us … honestly, I cried when I realised how beautiful the images were—all taken on my iPhone, no fancy camera.”
In the video, she can be seen entering the Taj Mahal before sunrise, accompanied by the soft chirping of birds. Her voice echoes with emotion as she says, “This is the most magical thing I’ve ever seen in my life.” She also shared stunning, crowd-free pictures of herself at the iconic monument.
For those planning a visit, Krista offered a helpful tip: “Arrive at the East Gate by 4:45 am — the Taj Mahal gates open at 5:00 am.”
Catch every big hit, every wicket with Crick-it, a one stop destination for Live Scores, Match Stats, Quizzes, Polls & much more. Explore now!.
Catch your daily dose of Fashion, Taylor Swift, Health, Festivals, Travel, Relationship, Recipe and all the other Latest Lifestyle News on Hindustan Times Website and APPs.
Catch every big hit, every wicket with Crick-it, a one stop destination for Live Scores, Match Stats, Quizzes, Polls & much more. Explore now!.
Catch your daily dose of Fashion, Taylor Swift, Health, Festivals, Travel, Relationship, Recipe and all the other Latest Lifestyle News on Hindustan Times Website and APPs.
News / Lifestyle / Travel / UK woman shares what it’s like to be the only visitor at Taj Mahal: ‘Most magical thing I’ve ever seen’
If the world of finance has you mesmerised but you’re left baffled by the complexity and jargon, watching a movie set in the sector could be a good way to get to grips with it. Not only will you be entertained, the films can also help you understand complex financial jargon and concepts.
All you need is a curated list of the best finance-based movies you can watch for a crash course in the topic. Luckily, a new ranking supported by financial experts will do just that.
A list unveiling the top nine films one can watch to gain crucial entry-level insights into the world of finance has been revealed.
The list, backed by specialists at broker analysis site Investing in the Web, ranks films set in the finance sector based on fan and critic reviews from platforms such as Rotten Tomatoes, IMDb and Letterboxd. Each movie was scored out of 40 based on viewer feedback, with the final ranking reflecting both entertainment value and the quality of financial education provided.
Here are the top nine films set in the world of finance that should be on your list:
The Wolf of Wall Street
Topping the chart with critics, fans, and experts was 2013’s The Wolf of Wall Street. The film starring Leonardo DiCaprio scored an impressive 38.9 out of 40.
This Martin Scorsese masterpiece is based on the real-life story of Jordan Belfort, who started with an entry-level job at a Wall Street brokerage and climbed his way up the financial ladder. Ranking highest in both the IMDb and Rotten Tomatoes audience categories, The Wolf of Wall Street is filled with accessible industry jargon and valuable investment lessons, while also cautioning viewers against greed and corruption.
Boiler Room
Coming in second place, with a score of 38.3 out of 40, is Boiler Room. The 2000 film follows Seth Davis as he trades his illegal casino apartment for a stock broking role, offering a behind-the-scenes glimpse into the world of hard sales and high commissions. It ranks highest on review aggregator website Rotten Tomatoes.
The Big Short
The Big Short, which came out in 2015, featuring Steve Carell, Brad Pitt, Christian Bale, and Ryan Gosling, takes the third spot. With a score of 36.5 out of 40, this comedy-drama packed with A-listers tells the tale of a hedge fund manager, a bank executive, and two young investors during the 2008 financial crisis. Like many other finance films on this list, it exposes corruption and system flaws, offering valuable insights into market research and key financial terms.
American Psycho
In fourth place is 2000’s American Psycho – perhaps an unexpected entry. It’s easy to overlook that this violent and thought-provoking film is set against a finance backdrop, with Christian Bale portraying a wealthy investment banker. Scoring 35.8 out of 40, American Psycho offers a glimpse into the surreal world of the financial industry’s elite.
Wall Street
Wall Street rounds off the top five with a score of 35.4 out of 40. This 1987 classic crime drama follows an ambitious stockbroker who goes to extreme lengths to impress a dubious corporate raider. The film underscores the importance of caution, ethics, and rule-following in finance.
Margin Call
Margin Call ranks sixth, scoring 35 out of 40. This 2011 film, which focuses on the 2008 financial crisis, boasts a star-studded cast including Demi Moore, Stanley Tucci and Paul Bettany. Set mainly within an office environment, the movie is filled with industry-specific jargon and exposition, making it a fast-paced learning experience.
Glengarry Glen Ross
In seventh place is Glengarry Glen Ross, which came out in 1992. This film, based on a play by David Mamet, follows a group of sales representatives at a real estate firm, all vying to keep their jobs.
The film scored 33.5 out of 40 and provides an entertaining viewing experience. With valuable advice such as “always be closing”, the film balances best practices with the absolute worst, presenting a perfect example of what not to do through the character Shelley Levene.
Rogue Trader
Rogue Trader, released in 1999, takes eighth place, scoring 32.3 out of 40 from viewers and critics. The drama follows Nick Leeson (played by Ewan McGregor) and is based on the true story of the futures trader whose risky investments led to the downfall of Barings Bank. Another cautionary tale, Rogue Trader advises viewers never to double down on losing positions, to distinguish between luck and skill, and highlights the importance of a stop-loss.
Barbarians at the Gate
The last film on the list is 1993’s Barbarians at the Gate, scoring a modest 23.3 out of 40. Despite not being as popular with audiences and critics as other films on this list, it still provides valuable insights into leveraged buyouts and market research, following the bidding war that unfolds when F Ross Johnson, CEO of a major tobacco company, decides to buy his own business.
Pedro Braz, CEO of Investing in the Web, shared his thoughts on the lessons which can be learned from these ranked films. “While characters like Jordan Belfort and Patrick Bateman are certainly not financial role models, these iconic movies can serve as useful tools for gaining key insights into the finance industry,” he said.
“Beyond the obvious practices to avoid, several characters in the ranked films embody traits that make for successful investors – ambition, intelligence, risk management and patience are all crucial for thriving in the world of finance. There are also significant lessons to be learned about sensible, ethical investment practices, and the importance of well-researched investments.
“While these films may be dramatised for entertainment purposes, each carries a valuable warning about exercising caution. Films like The Big Short excel at introducing complex industry jargon to viewers without a finance background, making them both accessible and engaging to a wide range of viewers.
“They may not teach you everything you need to know about finance, but there is no harm in turning to the media for entertainment and entry-level information.”
Kia Australia says the new Tasman dual-cab ute’s success in the fleet market hinges on a five-star ANCAP safety rating which it expects to achieve, though the entire range isn’t expected to be rated by the safety authority.
Speaking with CarExpert at the prototype drive of the brand’s first dual-cab ute, general manager for product at Kia Australia – Roland Rivero – said the local range will offer two front bumper variations, with the off-road bumper on the X-Line and X-Pro models less effective in pedestrian detection.
“[The front bumper of lower grades] is safety related, in that the lower approach angle in effect assists with pedestrian safety, or vulnerable road user detection, and with the high approach angle the X-Line and X-Pro it’s not as friendly from a lower leg perspective – so we want to give the Tasman a chance of hitting the five-star mark,” Mr Rivero said.
“Particularly because it’s a non-negotiable for many fleets, we don’t want to lose that potential 50 per cent of business if we don’t achieve that five-star rating.”
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Tasman S
Tasman X-Pro
When asked if there will be a split rating for the Tasman similar to how the previous-generation Kia Cerato had a split rating depending on specification, Mr Rivero said the off-road-focused models will likely go unrated instead.
“At this point in time, the off-roaders will be unrated, in effect. But you can still take an S, SX or SX+ 4×4 off-road if you wanted to, and get a reasonable approach angle if you change the bar and put a bullbar in its place that will grant you a lot more clearance,” Mr Rivero continued
“We envisage some of the big fleets will do that – QFleet, Department of Agriculture, Department of Primary Industries – they do that, and they need a five-star rating from the get-go.
“[Those customers] do a lot of rural driving, and kangaroos can become a problem, so they’ll put the bull bars on. That’s how we see the market playing out in that regard, from a bumper perspective.”
While the top-selling Ford Ranger (excl. Raptor) and Toyota HiLux (excl. GR Sport) feature five-star ANCAP ratings across most of their ranges, they’re also subject to older test criteria, whereas the Kia is up against the latest standards.
X-Pro Prototype with accessories
Standard safety equipment includes:
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB)
Adaptive cruise control
Blind-spot monitoring
Integrated trailer brake controller
Lane-centring assist
Lane-keep assist
Parking sensors – front, rear
Reversing camera
Trailer sway control
Tasman SX adds:
Highway Driving Assist
Adaptive cruise + lane centring
Navigation-based cruise control
Tasman X-Line adds:
360-degree parking cameras
Blind Spot View Monitor
Parking Collision Avoidance Assist
Kia Australia has yet to confirm the Tasman’s airbag count.
The Kia Tasman is available for pre-order now, ahead of a first deliveries around July. Prices start from $42,990 before on-road costs for the entry-level S 4×2 dual-cab pickup, climbing to $74,990 for the loaded, off-road focused X-Pro.
PIB advised all ATM Credit/Debit cardholders to keep their transactions secure and conduct fund transfers in private.
The message falsely attributes the tip to RBI. (Representative Image)
ATM fraud remains a major concern in India, with scammers employing tactics like card skimming, social engineering, and software exploits to steal money and sensitive cardholder data. Recently, a viral message made rounds on social media claiming that pressing the “Cancel” button twice before every transaction can prevent PIN theft. But is there any truth to this widely circulated advice?
The message, falsely attributed to the Reserve Bank of India (RBI), urges users to adopt this habit as a safeguard against keypad tampering. It states: “A very useful tip while withdrawing money from an ATM. Press the ‘cancel’ button twice before inserting the card. If someone has set up the keypad to steal your PIN code, this will cancel the setup. Please make it a habit in every transaction you do. Share with your circle of people.”
However, the government later stepped in to debunk the claim, labelling the viral post as completely fake and urging users not to fall for such misinformation. The clarification came from the Press Information Bureau’s (PIB) Fact Check handle on X (formerly Twitter), which stated that the post, falsely attributed to the Reserve Bank of India, has no factual basis.
“A post falsely attributed to @RBI claims that pressing ‘cancel’ twice on an ATM before a transaction can prevent PIN theft,” the PIB Fact Check team wrote, confirming that the advice is misleading and should not be followed.
The PIB further advised all ATM Credit/Debit cardholders to keep their transactions secure and conduct fund transfers in private.
A post falsely attributed to @RBI claims that pressing ‘cancel’ twice on an ATM before a transaction can prevent PIN theft#PIBFactCheck ❌This statement is FAKE & has NOT been issued by RBI
If you receive such messages claiming to be from the Reserve Bank of India (RBI), it’s essential to verify their authenticity before believing or sharing them. To determine whether the information is real or fake, you can send a WhatsApp message to +91-8799711259 or email your query to [email protected]. Additionally, verified fact-check updates are available on the official Press Information Bureau (PIB) website at pib.gov.in. These channels help citizens stay protected from misinformation and ensure they rely only on credible sources.
However, this is not the first time the same claim has surfaced online. Similar messages circulated in 2022 and again last year, both of which were debunked by the Press Information Bureau’s (PIB) fact-checking team. To genuinely protect yourself from ATM PIN theft, experts recommend following practical safety measures: always cover the keypad while entering your PIN, use ATMs located in well-lit or secure areas, and inspect the machine for any suspicious devices or tampering. Additionally, enabling transaction alerts and regularly reviewing your bank statements can help you quickly detect and respond to any unauthorised activity.
Stay updated with all the latest business news, including market trends, stock updates, tax, IPO, banking finance, real estate, savings and investments. Get in-depth analysis, expert opinions, and real-time updates—only on News18. Also Download the News18 App to stay updated!
Location :
Delhi, India, India
First Published:
News business Can Pressing ‘Cancel’ Button Twice Help Prevent ATM PIN Theft?
In the last 24 hours, Pi Coin has jumped over 3%, riding the wave along with Bitcoin reclaiming the $102,000 mark and Ethereum leading with strong gains. Altcoins like Solana, Ethereum, and XRP are also surging, making it a big day for crypto traders.
Pi Coin Breaks Resistance, Eyes $1 Target
Pi Coin’s price has managed to break above a key resistance zone between $0.66 and $0.67. This breakout came with strong trading volume, a sign that buyers are stepping in.
The Relative Strength Index (RSI) is currently at 56.68, showing growing bullish momentum. If the price stays above this resistance, it could target between $0.85 and $1.00 in the short term.
Source: Coinpedia Markets
However, if the breakout fails, the price might consolidate in the current range before making another move.
Token Unlock Sparks Supply Concerns
According to analyst Dr Altcoin, Pi Coin’s circulating supply suddenly jumped by 5 billion tokens — from 7 billion to 12 billion — earlier today. However, the supply available on crypto exchanges didn’t change.
This sudden increase likely came from a 5 billion Pi liquidity pool, possibly to prepare for a major exchange listing. And when Dr Altcoin says major, he means Binance, BitMart, and HTX.
Interestingly, the extra supply appeared and disappeared within an hour, hinting at a successful stress test. This suggests that Pi Network is testing its liquidity before the tokens officially go live on exchanges.
Dr Altcoin said that the price could stay around $1 until May 14. If the announcement lives up to the hype, Pi might rise to $2 by the end of August. From there until the end of 2025, it could trade anywhere between $2 and $5, depending on how the ecosystem develops and how the market responds.
However, according to Pi Scan, 9.3 million Pi tokens are unlocking today, which could add pressure on the price.
Also Read :
Pi Network Set for Major Announcements at Consensus 2025
,
Big Announcement Scheduled for May 14
Adding to the excitement, the Pi Network team has confirmed a major ecosystem announcement for May 14, 2025. This date coincides with the Consensus Summit 2025 in Toronto, where Pi founder Dr. Nicolas Kokkalis will be a featured speaker.
Analysts believe this could bring updates about new apps, real-world use cases, and future plans for the Pi ecosystem.
Could Binance List Pi Soon?
There’s also speculation that Binance might list Pi Network soon. While there’s no official announcement yet, blockchain activity hints at behind-the-scenes tests.
A Binance-linked wallet recently processed over 294,000 test transactions with Pi tokens. This kind of activity usually signals preparations for a new token listing.
Interestingly, Pi Network’s blockchain is built similarly to Stellar (XLM) — a cryptocurrency already listed on Binance, making a listing technically easier.
Never Miss a Beat in the Crypto World!
Stay ahead with breaking news, expert analysis, and real-time updates on the latest trends in Bitcoin, altcoins, DeFi, NFTs, and more.
FAQs
Why is Pi Coin going up today?
Pi Coin surged 3% after breaking key resistance and speculation of a Binance listing and May 14 announcement boosted investor confidence.
How high can Pi Coin go in 2025?
Analysts suggest Pi Coin could hit $2–$5 by the end of 2025, depending on listings, user adoption, and ecosystem expansion.
Will Binance list Pi Coin?
While not confirmed, test transactions from a Binance-linked wallet hint at Pi Coin potentially being listed soon.
The upcoming FTO in Karnataka will focus on developing highly skilled aviation professionals by offering training on the latest-generation aircraft, immersive flight simulators, and globally benchmarked curriculum
| Photo Credit:
The Hindu
Melstarr Aviations Tech, a wholly owned subsidiary of Melstarr Information Technologies, has ventured into the aviation training sector with plans to establish a modern Flight Training Organization in Karnataka.
The company has committed an initial investment of ₹300 crore, marking one of the largest private sector initiatives in India’s pilot training industry.
Tarun Kashyap, Chief Operating Officer of MATPL, said the company has committed ₹100 crore in the first phase and investment scaling up over the next three years. He added that it is one of the most substantial investments by a private company in Indian aviation training.
The upcoming FTO in Karnataka will focus on developing highly skilled aviation professionals by offering training on the latest-generation aircraft, immersive flight simulators, and globally benchmarked curriculum. The facility is expected to generate 60–100 direct employment opportunities and will begin operations in a phased manner starting 2025.
The company signed a formal Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) with the Government of Karnataka in February, reinforcing a shared vision to enhance India’s aviation training ecosystem and reduce dependency on overseas training institutions.
MATPL’s FTOs are designed to serve aspiring individual pilots, airlines, corporate entities, and government agencies. The training programs will include Commercial Pilot License courses, recurrent training, and certification pathways aligned with DGCA and international standards.
Melstarr Aviations Tech aims to position India as a global hub for aviation education through strategic investments, technology integration and partnerships that drive innovation and operational excellence in flight training.
Looking for the most recent Mini Crossword answer? Click here for today’s Mini Crossword hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Wordle, Strands, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.
Today’s NYT Mini Crossword is one of those oddball ones where certain letters in certain answers get placed into circles, and they serve as a clue for 9-Across. I usually shudder at such game tricks, but this was an easy puzzle, so the circles didn’t bother me. Need some help with today’s Mini Crossword? Read on. And if you could use some hints and guidance for daily solving, check out our Mini Crossword tips.
The Mini Crossword is just one of many games in the Times’ games collection. If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.
Read more: Tips and Tricks for Solving The New York Times Mini Crossword
Let’s get at those Mini Crossword clues and answers.
The completed NYT Mini Crossword puzzle for May 8, 2025.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
Mini across clues and answers
1A clue: Humpty Dumpty, in many illustrations Answer: EGG
4A clue: Cartoon bear who wears a red shirt and no pants Answer: POOH
6A clue: Collection of world maps Answer: ATLAS
8A clue: Counterpart of “adios” Answer: HOLA
9A clue: [See circled letters] Answer: WOW
Mini down clues and answers
1D clue: Clean water org. Answer: EPA
2D clue: Subculture with black clothing Answer: GOTH
3D clue: “When they ___ …” (start of a memorable Michelle Obama line) Answer: GOLOW
5D clue: Angel topper Answer: HALO
7D clue: It has sharp teeth Answer: SAW
How to play more Mini Crosswords
The New York Times Games section offers a large number of online games, but only some of them are free for all to play. You can play the current day’s Mini Crossword for free, but you’ll need a subscription to the Times Games section to play older puzzles from the archives.
Some researchers are sounding the alarm about a potentially deadly fungus that could spread throughout parts of the U.S., Europe and Asia.
The study article, which was published in pre-print (not yet peer-reviewed) in Research Square, claims that “rising global temperatures” could lead to severe infections of Aspergillus, a fungal mold that thrives in warm, damp climates.
The resulting infection — called Aspergillosis — can impact humans, livestock and plants, the researchers wrote.
DANGEROUS FUNGUS SPREADING IN US HOSPITALS HAS ‘RAPIDLY INCREASED’
In the study, scientific models were used to predict where Aspergillus is expected to increase based on different climate scenarios.
Some researchers are sounding the alarm about a potentially deadly fungus that could spread throughout parts of the U.S., Europe and Asia.(iStock)
The researchers predict that the fungus’ prevalence could increase by 77% by the year 2100, potentially exposing millions of people in Europe to the infection.
Jacob Glanville, CEO of Centivax, a San Francisco biotechnology company, was not involved in the research but reviewed the findings.
“The study indicates that some global climate change scenarios will result in changes of habitat ranges for certain lung and systemic fungal infections,” he told Fox News Digital.
RINGWORM RESISTANT TO COMMON ANTIFUNGALS FOR FIRST TIME IN US: WHAT TO KNOW ABOUT THE SKIN INFECTION
Jatin M. Vyas, MD, PhD, a professor of medicine and infectious disease at Columbia University in New York, agreed that the study highlights concerns if Aspergillus becomes more prevalent in warmer climates.
“We do know that there are increased cases in regions of the world that are more temperate,” Vyas, who was not part of the study, told Fox News Digital.
“It is likely that levels of human exposure will continue to increase, as will diseases of plants, crops and animals.”
Cornelius Clancy, MD, associate chief of the VA Pittsburgh Health System and opportunistic pathogens at the University of Pittsburgh, said he has seen an increase in fungal infections in humans, as well as fungal diseases in agriculture, horticulture and veterinary medicine.
“Given that Aspergillus is prevalent in the environment and ongoing changes in climate favor growth of Aspergillus in the environment, it is likely that levels of human exposure will continue to increase, as will diseases of plants, crops and animals,” he predicted to Fox News Digital.
Potential risks of infection
For most healthy people, Aspergillus spores won’t cause any adverse effects, the experts noted.
“Most people will typically inhale some spores every day,” Clancy said. “If your immune system is intact, then these spores are usually removed by immune system cells in the airways and lungs and disease does not occur.”
“Rising global temperatures” could lead to severe infections of Aspergillus, a fungal mold that thrives in warm, damp climates, researchers said.(iStock)
But for people whose immune systems respond excessively to proteins in the spores, infection can cause reactions ranging from allergy-like symptoms to invasive disease.
“In persons who are immunosuppressed, such as those receiving cancer chemotherapy, there is a risk of spores invading the lungs and causing Aspergillus pneumonia or other lung infections, which can then spread in the blood to other organs,” Clancy cautioned.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“These are potentially very serious infections in immunosuppressed hosts.”
Allergic reactions and asthma exacerbations can also occur in people who are not known to be immunosuppressed, but who are predisposed to allergies and asthma, he added.
People who are elderly or have asthma are also at a higher risk of severe infection.(iStock)
“In patients whose immune system may be compromised — most commonly as a result of medications for cancer or other conditions — these organisms can invade the lung to cause significant pneumonia, and may even travel throughout the body to cause systemic disease,” Vyas cautioned.
“These patients are typically quite sick and require hospitalization.”
THE TRUTH ABOUT ‘ZOMBIE CICADAS’: ‘THE FUNGUS CAN DO SOME NEFARIOUS THINGS’
People who are elderly or have asthma are also at a higher risk, noted Glanville.
“Unfortunately, there is also a global trend toward increases in rates of asthma and general demographic shifts toward a more elderly population in many areas,” he added.
As Aspergillus is an environmental organism associated with soil, it is difficult to fully avoid, experts say.(iStock)
“As clinicians, we worry about this infection because it is both hard to diagnose and even harder to treat,” Vyas told Fox News Digital. “We don’t have great drugs to effect cures for invasive fungal infections, including Aspergillus infections.”
Another obstacle is that some fungi become resistant to drugs over time, the experts agreed.
Prevention and protection
As Aspergillus is an environmental organism associated with soil, it is difficult to fully avoid, according to Vyas.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
Those who are immunocompromised should avoid working with soil unless they have had a discussion with a doctor, he recommends.
“Research into how Aspergillus causes diseases, better ways to diagnose this disease and the development of better treatments is sorely needed,” Vyas added.
“These are potentially very serious infections in immunosuppressed hosts.”
Glanville reiterated that there are anti-fungal treatment options for Aspergillosis, although the infections are often missed during initial diagnosis.
“It would be a good idea to increase medical training to recognize these infections and to subsidize the development of new antifungals,” Glanville recommended.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
People who are known to be immunosuppressed or who are taking drugs that can cause immunosuppression should talk to their health providers about protective measures, Clancy advised.
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
Those going on a hiking trip have many fun things to look forward to. Some enjoy the time spent in nature away from the grind of daily life. Some enjoy the spectacular views they come across on the trail. Some enjoy it as a dynamic workout. Some simply enjoy being in the company of their fellow hikers. However, a particular trio of friends recently decided to elevate their hiking experience in a whole other way – by incorporating a cooking competition into it! They seem like a true bunch of foodies, don’t they? Hiking enthusiast Bec Cliffe took to Instagram to document a part of their experience.
Also Read: Artist Creates Bicycle-Inspired Latte Art, Internet Says “Too Pretty To Sip”
She posted a short clip giving a glimpse of the many delights prepared by the two friends who accompanied her on the trail. We also got a sneak peek at the surrounding view they enjoyed as they dug into their delicious feast. In the caption, it was revealed that they made numerous sweet and savoury treats, including garlic naan and dal, cheesecake, pancakes, mushroom risotto, rhubarb and apple crumble, and French toast croissants. Moreover, they also carried along a 4-kilo cast iron pan to cook some of the dishes. Bec also said they decided to undertake this cooking feat during “the hardest hike in Victoria.”
In another video, Bec humorously explained how she managed to relish “the most elite hiking food.” Her ‘recipe’ for success? She explained: “Step 1: Find friends who can actually cook; Step 2: Drag them hiking; Step 3: Announce a “friendly” cooking competition; Step 4: Document their creations while contributing absolutely nothing.”
Also Read: Vlogger Uses Smoothie To Explain Impact Of Being Hurt In The Past, Impresses Internet
The idea has received a lot of interest online. Many foodies loved the idea of making such a competition a part of a hiking trip. Several people were curious to know the recipes followed for making the dishes shown in the video. Read some of the comments from Instagram below:
“I need friends like that.”
“I love this idea so much, amazing.”
“4kg omg. This is epic though!”
“That sounds like a perfect camping trip!”
“Oh my goodness, this is a DREAM.”
“These vibes are immaculate.”
“Now that’s fun!!”
“We were used to do those kinds of cooking competitions in scouts!”
“What I would like to see are the recipes!”
Planning to go for a hike? Not everyone can cook on the trail! So here are some wholesome snacks you can carry along with you for the trip.
In September 1938, Soviet cameraman Roman Lazarevich Karmen was dispatched to China by the Soviet government to document the Chinese People’s War of Resistance Against Japanese Aggression. Karmen captured the courageous and determined efforts of Chinese soldiers and civilians, as well as the support provided by the Soviet volunteer air force during the war.
Eighty-seven years later, Karmen’s grandson took part in a cultural exchange event held on Wednesday to commemorate the 80th anniversary of the victory in both the Chinese People’s War of Resistance Against Japanese Aggression and the Soviet Union’s Great Patriotic War. During the event, he shared stories of his family’s deep-rooted connection with China.
Hosted by China Media Group (CMG) and the All-Russia State Television and Radio Broadcasting Company (VGTRK), the event also featured the producer and main creative team behind the China-Russia co-produced film “Red Silk,” which premiered in Russia on February 20 and is scheduled for release in Chinese theaters this September.
The 2025 China Film Festival in Russia was officially launched during the event. Additionally, CMG and VGTRK announced a peace-themed initiative aimed at collecting historical relics, documentary images, and other memorabilia from citizens of both countries to jointly portray a vision of peace and shared future.
On the same day, filming began on the China-Russia co-produced documentary, “The Great Victory – China’s War of Resistance Against Japanese Aggression Through the Lens of a Soviet Photographer,” which explores the experiences of Soviet photojournalist Roman Kalman in China and the powerful images he captured during the war.
Shen Haixiong, vice minister of the Publicity Department of the Communist Party of China (CPC) Central Committee and president of CMG, and Oleg Dobrodeev, CEO of the VGTRK, highlighted the fruitful achievements of past cooperation between the two media organizations.
They expressed a shared commitment to further strengthening collaboration in content exchange, technological innovation, and personnel development, thereby deepening public support for the China-Russia friendship and contributing to cultural understanding between the two nations.
Chinese President Xi Jinping sent a congratulatory message to the event, noting that 80 years ago, the peoples of China and Russia jointly made indelible historical contributions to the victory in the World Anti-Fascist War and forged an unbreakable, great friendship with blood, laying a solid foundation for the high-level development of bilateral relations.
He emphasized that strengthening people-to-people and cultural exchanges is of great and far-reaching significance for enhancing mutual understanding, promoting good-neighborliness and friendship, and consolidating the social and popular support for the development of bilateral ties.
On the same day, Russian President Vladimir Putin also sent a congratulatory message to the event.
As agreed by President Xi and President Putin in 2023, the years 2024 and 2025 have been designated the China-Russia Years of Culture. Since the beginning of 2024, both countries have actively engaged in a vibrant series of cultural initiatives as part of this shared celebration.
(Cover: A picture taken from a cultural exchange event held by China Media Group and the All-Russia State Television and Radio Broadcasting Company in Moscow, Russia, May 7, 2025. /CMG)
Brigade Group has acquired an 11-acre land parcel opposite ITPL in Whitefield, Bengaluru, to develop a premium commercial project with a gross leasable area of approximately 1.5 million square feet and a gross development value (GDV) of over ₹2,000 crore.
“This strategic acquisition is a significant step in our journey to create world-class commercial spaces inspired by sustainable and future-ready workspaces. Whitefield remains a prime destination for office demand due to metro connectivity and the vibrant corporate ecosystem that exists. This project will also bring us closer to achieving our net zero target,” said Nirupa Shankar, Joint Managing Director, Brigade Enterprises Limited.
This follows Brigade’s recent acquisition of a 20-acre plot in Malur East, Bengaluru, for ₹175 crore, intended for a plotted development project. Shares of the company closed at ₹994.30, down 2.18 per cent.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
VEJA je u srijedu objavila kako proširuje svoj asortiman novim modelom sandala naziva Etna. Francuska tvrtka s brazilskim korijenima dosad je bila poznata isključivo po udobnim tenisicama, proizvodima za njegu obuće i modnim dodacima, no sada su se odlučili za novi korak.
Sandale Etna opisane su kao “lagana i svestrana opcija za tople dane, koja se pokazala pouzdanom i u gradu i u prirodi”.
Bit će dostupne u više boja
“Na ovu smo ideju došli prije 15 godina jer smo radili u Brazilu, a to je zemlja sandala”, rekao je Sébastien Kopp, suosnivač brenda, za Vogue. “Sad je došlo vrijeme da ih lansiramo”.
Etna sandale na tržište će stići u raznim bojama, uključujući bež, crnu, ljubičasto-crnu, narančasto-bež i maslinasto-crnu.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Sandale se proizvode u Brazilu, a gornji dio izrađen je od antilopa koji dolazi iz brazilske savezne države Rio Grande do Sul. Impregnacija bez PFC-a osigurava zaštitu i pri laganoj kiši. Uložak je izrađen od 17% recikliranog etilen-vinil acetata (EVA), dok je potplat izrađen od gume, s udjelom od 40% prirodne gume iz Amazone i 10% recikliranih materijala.
Sandale će biti dostupne za prodaju od 14. svibnja putem službenog webshopa brenda, po cijeni od 120 eura.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
In a brutal bit of irony, in-custody deaths in Los Angeles were brought to the forefront by a 2023 case in which neither the County Sheriff’s Department or county hospitals would acknowledge that an inmate was in their custody when he died.
Stanley Wilson Jr., a Stanford graduate and former NFL defensive back with the Detroit Lions, died either before, during or after he was transported from the downtown Twin Towers Correctional Facility to the Metropolitan State Hospital in Norwalk on Feb. 1, 2023. It was 10 months after he had been arrested for entering a home in the Hollywood Hills during a psychotic break.
The Sheriff’s Department says Wilson died at the hospital. The hospital says he was already dead when he arrived. Nobody will take responsibility. What we do know is he was heavily medicated. Surveillance cameras weren’t operating. His body was bruised.
Frustrated with the lack of answers, Wilson’s parents filed a wrongful-death lawsuit against the Sheriff’s Department, the Department of State Hospitals and L.A. County in September, seeking $45 million. Last month they amended their complaint, refiling it in L.A. Superior Court after a federal judge ruled the case is a California state matter.
Trial is scheduled to begin Sept. 8. John Carpenter, the lawyer representing Wilson’s parents, Pulane Lucas and Stanley Wilson Sr., on Wednesday said, “in light of the slow rolling of discovery, that date probably won’t stick.”
What does a grieving parent do in the interim? Lucas organizes protests and other events to increase awareness of in-custody deaths. She writes legislators. She is, in Carpenter’s words, “the embodiment of a mother’s power. Mothers, boy oh boy, they are unstoppable.”
Lucas, who holds a PhD in public policy from Virginia Commonwealth University and three master’s degrees from Harvard, lives in Virginia, where she is president and CEO of Policy Pathways Inc., a firm that trains teens and young adults who desire to become leaders in public policy, public administration and international affairs.
But this Mother’s Day weekend she will be in L.A., camped on the lawn in front of the Men’s Central Jail along with other parents whose children died while in custody. The protest is called Stand With Mothers and will begin with a rally at 3 p.m. Saturday and conclude with a “spiritual event” at 10:30 a.m. Sunday after spending the night.
This is the second year in a row the event has taken place. About a dozen parents turned out and Lucas expects more this year.
“We write as mothers who carry the unimaginable pain of having lost our children while they were in custody,” the statement from the mothers says. “As we approach the Second Annual Mother’s Day Action Weekend — a time that holds both deep sorrow and a powerful sense of solidarity — we were looking forward to honoring our children’s memories together: with a rally, sleepover, and Mother’s Day Service all held on the premises outside the jail where our children’s lives were taken.
“The symbolism of sleeping on the ground — within eyesight of the same buildings where our children took their last breaths yet under the same sky our children were denied access to see — is not just a gesture without impact. It is an act of remembrance, resistance, and love that matters deeply to us.
“As mothers, this gathering is for our children. For our healing. And for the truth.”
Last year’s protest was peaceful despite the presence of sheriff’s deputies in riot gear who were anticipating pro-Palestinian protests across L.A. Lucas raised the mothers’ concerns, speaking with Assistant Deputy Sheriff Sergio Aloma.
“He was very kind and told us they would fall back,” Lucas said. “We slept overnight in tents and he said nobody would bother us. They checked on us and asked if we wanted food and water.
“It was a wonderful weekend, a beautiful time and we are so looking forward to it again.”
Among the mothers joining Lucas will be Terry Lovett, whose 27-year-old son, Jalani, died in 2021 while in solitary confinement at the Men’s Central Jail. The county coroner’s autopsy report said Lovett’s death was “accidental” and that he had fentanyl and heroin in his system, noting that he had a bruise on his neck and abrasions on his arms, but “no external trauma” or “life-threatening injuries.”
Terry Lovett has questions, the primary one being, how did her son access fentanyl while in solitary confinement with interaction only with guards? Civil rights lawyer Christian Contreras filed a claim against the county on behalf of the family in January 2022 — the first step toward a lawsuit — but Lovett said she hasn’t followed through because she would need an independent autopsy conducted and she can’t afford it.
“I’m looking forward to the vigil and spending time with the other mothers,” she said. “It’s comforting. We all share the frustrations and heartbreak of our children dying under suspicious circumstances, and we all need to keep seeking answers.”
Lucas can rattle off her unanswered questions about Stanley Wilson’s death. A judge found him unfit to stand trial because of his deteriorating mental health in November 2022, and ordered him to be treated at Metropolitan State Hospital. Yet he was not transferred until three months later, the day he died.
Sheriff’s Department records show Wilson was on three anti-psychotic medications. Lucas contends that two of them shouldn’t be administered together because they cause anxiety and can lead to a pulmonary embolism, which is what Wilson’s autopsy determined was his cause of death.
As her lawsuit inches toward a trial, she remains dedicated to making sure the voices of parents of inmates who died in custody are heard. Nineteen inmates have died in the custody of the L.A. County Sheriff’s Department so far in 2025.
“I have committed my life to initiatives related to Stanley’s life and death that can enlighten and support others and save lives,” Lucas said. “As mothers, we find strength in coming together and advocating for our children.
“We are more than friends. We love each other. We are like sister mothers in solidarity.”
As a travel enthusiast, there’s nothing more exciting than exploring new destinations. However, I can’t shake the paranoia that comes with worrying about my luggage. I once had a nightmare experience when my cloth suitcase was cut open during a trip, and ever since, I’ve been on the lookout for more secure luggage options. Enter the hard case suitcase; my ultimate travel armour.
Keep your belongings secure and travel worry-free with the ultimate hard case suitcase sets, perfect for every adventure.
These sturdy, durable cases not only protect my belongings but also provide a sense of relief that my valuables will be safe during transit. If you’re anything like me and want to enjoy your travels without the constant fear of damaged luggage, check out the top 8 hard-case suitcase sets that’ll keep your wanderlust undisturbed.
Top 8 picks for American Tourister luggage bags
The Skybags Trooper Set of 3 (Cabin, Medium, and Large) offers a durable and lightweight travel solution. Crafted from scratch-resistant polypropylene, this hard luggage set features 8 spinner wheels, a 3-digit combination lock, and ample storage space. It’s perfect for smooth travel with enhanced security and convenience.
What are buyers saying on Amazon? Customers appreciate the lightweight design and unique colour, but some find the lock and scratch resistance issues concerning. Perfect for solo travel.
The Safari Polypropylene Pentagon Hardside Luggage Set includes a small, medium, and large suitcase (55 cm, 66 cm, 75 cm). Made from durable, scratch-resistant polypropylene, these lightweight trolleys feature a fixed combination lock and 8 wheels for smooth manoeuvrability. Ideal for both cabin and check-in travel.
What are buyers saying on Amazon? Customers love the sturdy build and lightweight design, but many report issues with the lock system and scratch resistance. Perfect for short trips.
The Kamiliant by American Tourister Harrier 3-Piece Luggage Set features 56 cm, 68 cm, and 78 cm suitcases. Made from durable polypropylene, this hard-sided set includes a 3-digit fixed combination lock, smooth rolling 4 wheels, and ample packing space with cross ribbons and a U-shaped pocket. Ideal for organised travel.
What are buyers saying on Amazon? Customers appreciate the lightweight build and design but note issues with the lock, zipper, and scratch resistance. A good value for money.
The Aristocrat Airpro 3-Piece Luggage Set includes cabin (55 cm), medium (66 cm), and large (75 cm) hard case suitcases. With 8 smooth spinner wheels, a sturdy trolley handle, and secured zips, this lightweight luggage set offers practical travel features along with a 3-digit combination lock and generous space.
What are buyers saying on Amazon? Travellers love the design and space, but some report wheel and lock problems. Good fit for flights and short domestic travel.
The American Tourister Instavibe 3-Piece Hard Case Luggage Set (82 cm) in mint green brings together style and strength. With a polypropylene shell, mounted TSA lock, double 360° wheels, and flexi packing straps, it ensures secure and organised travel. Perfect for short breaks or long holidays alike.
What are buyers saying on Amazon? Buyers love the colour, wheel smoothness, and packing space. Some report scratches and minor damage with repeated use. Stylish and functional option.
The Nasher Miles Paris 3-Piece Luggage Set (55 cm, 65 cm, 75 cm) blends durability with a multicolour design. Crafted from lightweight polypropylene, it features 8 double spinner wheels, number locks on each bag, and a spacious interior with mesh pockets. A fun, practical choice for week-long travels.
What are buyers saying on Amazon? Great colours and is easy to use, though some find the material less sturdy than expected. Lightweight and easy to roll through airports.
The MOKOBARA Aisle Trunk Set includes cabin (40L), medium (70L), and large (105L) suitcases, crafted from a durable polycarbonate shell. With YKK zippers, TSA lock, silent ninja wheels, and well-structured interiors, this luggage set keeps things secure, sleek, and sorted for long getaways or extended work travel.
What are buyers saying on Amazon? Buyers love the build quality and detailing. The smooth wheels, great interiors, and accurate colour make this a favourite among regular travellers.
The VIP Corsa 3-Piece Hard Case Luggage Set in black includes cabin (55 cm), medium (66 cm), and large (76 cm) sizes. Built with strong polypropylene, this lightweight set features silent 8-wheel mobility, a three-point combination lock, and roomy interiors. Great choice for dependable, stylish travel organisation.
What are buyers saying on Amazon? Buyers call it reliable, well-built and perfect for holiday travel. Many like the colour and find it worth the money spent.
More picks for you
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Similar articles for you
Get vacation-ready! Up to 80% off on top picks for trolley bags
₹2500″>Travel smarter, not harder: Your guide to affordable trolley bags under ₹2500
Duffles and backpacks at up to 60% off on Amazon; Top picks to buy now!
Beyond basics: Fun and fashionable backpacks for girls; Top 8 picks
Best hard case suitcase: FAQs
Are hard case suitcases better than soft ones?
Hard case suitcases offer more protection for your belongings and are usually water resistant. They’re also less likely to get slashed or damaged, especially compared to fabric bags.
What size hard case trolley set should I buy?
If you travel occasionally, a hard case trolley set of 2 should work. For longer or family trips, go for a hard case trolley set of 3 that covers cabin, medium and large needs.
Do hard case suitcases crack easily?
High-quality hard case luggage made from materials like polypropylene or polycarbonate can handle impact well. They’re built to resist cracking and rough handling.
Are all hard-case suitcases accepted as cabin baggage?
Not all sizes qualify as cabin bags. Always check the airline’s cabin baggage rules before picking a suitcase, especially the 55 cm size.
Disclaimer: At Hindustan Times, we help you stay up-to-date with the latest trends and products. Hindustan Times has an affiliate partnership, so we may get a part of the revenue when you make a purchase. We shall not be liable for any claim under applicable laws, including but not limited to the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, concerning the products. The products listed in this article are in no particular order of priority.
As you can see from the video above, Mafia: The Old Country seemingly takes elements of Red Dead Redemption and GTA.
There’s horse riding and driving, not to mention stealth and lots of gunfights, just like the aforementioned games.
Unlike the more open-world experiences found in GTA and Red Dead Redemption, Mafia: The Old Country is described as a more linear adventure.
President of developer Hangar 13 Nick Baynes explains more: “Mafia: The Old Country is a focused, linear experience that combines quality storytelling, authentic era immersion and a refined take on the familiar Mafia gameplay.
“That focus allows us to deliver a story that’s gritty, grounded, brutal and emotional. Embracing early 1900s era Sicily, this is a mafia origin story that follows our protagonist, Enzo Favara, as he takes the oath and works his way up Don Torrisi’s crime family.”
Mafia: The Old Country pre-orders have also gone live alongside the newly announced release date.
Priced at £44.99, the Standard Edition contains the base game only, although pre-order customers will receive the “Soldato” Outfit, “Scannaturi Speciale” Knife, “Tesoro” Horse and Accessories and “Lupara” Charm.
The Deluxe Edition costs £54.99, and contains a selection of in-game items, as well as the soundtrack and artbook.
This includes the Padrino Pack, featuring the “Lupara Speciale” Shotgun, “Vendetti Speciale” Pistol, “Immortale” Charm, “Padrino” Outfit, “Stiletto Speciale” Knife, “Eckhart Speciale” Limousine and “Cosimo” Horse and Accessories.
In a world where electric and hybrid technology is reshaping the way we travel, bold claims are everywhere. And few are as ambitious as Jaecoo’s promise that its new 2025 J7 SHS Summit mid-size hybrid SUV can deliver up to 1200km of real-world driving range.
So, we decided to put the plug-in hybrid (PHEV) medium SUV to the ultimate test on an iconic Aussie road trip; from the tragically hip inner-city streets of Surry Hills in Sydney, starting with a coffee at the famous Bourke Street Bakery, all the way to the outback town of… well, Bourke.
That’s an easy 759km one-way drive through Sydney’s urban jungle and onto its congested freeways, before traversing across the Blue Mountains to Lithgow and then meandering through the fertile farming areas around Mudgee, Dubbo and Nyngan, and finally heading directly north-west to Bourke along one of the straightest, most remote stretches of road on the planet.
The Jaecoo should easily make it Bourke without stopping and, with a claimed electric-only range of 90km from its 18.3kWh battery, get us out of town before using a drop of fuel.
The challenge is, then, how far will it get us back from Bourke before needing to be refuelled or recharged.
How does the Jaecoo J7 compare?
View a detailed breakdown of the Jaecoo J7 against similarly sized vehicles.
Jaecoo
J7
How much does the Jaecoo J7 cost?
The J7 SHS Summit is Jaecoo’s flagship model, blending rugged off-road styling with modern electrification.
Model
Drive-away pricing
Jaecoo J7 Core 2WD
$34,990
Jaecoo J7 Track 2WD
$37,990
Jaecoo J7 Ridge AWD
$42,990
Jaecoo J7 SHS Summit
$47,990
If you’re curious about how the Jaecoo J7 compares to its rivals, check out our comparison tool
What is the Jaecoo J7 like on the inside?
Even before you open the doors, the J7 looks right at home on leafy inner-city Sydney streets.
Its chunky stance, bold grille and slimline LED headlights, complete with a chequered pattern, and floating roofline give off baby Range Rover vibes.
Inside, the cabin is classy, with a simple T-shaped relationship between the dashboard and centre console that is fused with good quality materials.
Such materials include chrome trim highlights and a twin digital screen configuration that incorporates a 10.25-inch instrument cluster with a portrait-style 14.8-inch infotainment display.
The heated and ventilated front seats are comfortable and offer plenty of adjustment, and there’s both reach and rake movement for the three-spoke steering wheel that makes it easy to find the optimum driving position.
Thankfully, there’s two cupholders in the centre console for the double-shot lattes from the bakery that I needed to kickstart this road trip, and dual phone pads at the front of the centre console – the left one offering wireless charging.
The final task before hitting the road is to connect my phone to the infotainment system, which is a simple task and provides access to wireless smartphone mirroring. Perfect.
What’s under the bonnet?
Under the bonnet sits a 1.5-litre turbocharged four-cylinder petrol engine that produces 105kW of power and 215Nm of torque, paired with a 150kW/310Nm electric motor and a 18.3kWh battery pack.
Specifications
Jaecoo J7 SHS Summit
Engine
1.5-litre four-cylinder turbo-petrol
Engine outputs
105kW 215Nm
Electric motor outputs
150kW 310Nm
System outputs
255kW 525Nm
Battery
18.3kWh LFP
Transmission
Single-speed hybrid transmission
Drive type
Front-wheel drive
Weight
1794kg
Fuel economy (claimed)
1.0L/100km
Electric driving range (PHEV)
90km
Fuel tank capacity
60L
Fuel requirement
95-octane premium unleaded
CO2 emissions
31g/km
Together, they deliver impressive combined maximum outputs of 255kW and 525Nm, driving the front wheels through an intelligent single-speed hybrid transmission that can shift seamlessly between pure electric, hybrid, or petrol-powered driving.
If you’re curious about how the Jaecoo J7 compares to its rivals, check out our comparison tool
How does the Jaecoo J7 drive?
Now, with a few less litres than a full tank and the battery charge that indicates we have 1116km of range, it’s time to hit the road and get out of Sydney on a cool autumn morning.
As I engage drive on the column-mounted gear shifter and then start rolling, I am immediately alarmed by an odd noise from outside the window that sounds like I’ve run over something. I stop and open the door to check but can’t see anything obvious.
It happens again the moment I move off, and then I realise it’s the sound of the motorised pop-out door handles retracting backwards into the body.
Let me tell you, it doesn’t sound right. And, even after driving the Jaecoo for a week, it was a shock each time.
Anyway, with the EV mode engaged, first impressions of how the J7 drives are extremely positive, as it effortlessly glides through the chaos of Sydney’s tangled inner-city streets on battery power alone. The electric motor feels punchy and responsive, and the single-speed transmission is seamless in delivering its power to the road.
It can induce a bit of tugging on the wheel under heavy acceleration, but I’m conscious of limiting my heavy right foot to maximise the battery’s range.
Another oddity is the distorted view through the central rear-view mirror. With a heavy convex on its glass, you see a lot more of the rear seats than you normally would and, subsequently, any traffic behind you appears much further away than it probably is.
It seems weird at first, but becomes more natural over time. And it’s undoubtedly a good thing for families that often carry small kids in the back, as the driver can easily see more of them without having to swing around and take their eyes off the road.
The J7 continues to draw on its battery as we hit the freeway and feels just as relaxed at highway speeds as it does around town.
The petrol engine only starts to chime in as we begin to ascend into the Blue Mountains. With the battery set to maintain a minimum 25km of range (you can adjust the percentage in the energy settings), we achieved more than 65km of mixed driving conditions in pure EV mode.
We could have got more – and closer to its claimed maximum of 90km – but I wanted to see how the remainder of the trip would pan out with a mixture of petrol and electric power, and not just rely on the internal combustion engine alone.
Considering that most Australians drive less than 40km on their daily commute, the Jaecoo J7 certainly offers the everyday benefits of an electric vehicle without the negatives of range anxiety.
It’s barely perceptible when the engine does kick into life. In fact, the Jaecoo J7 is remarkably quiet at highway speeds, even on coarse country roads.
And it’s pretty comfortable too. The suspension can get a little slappy on corrugations, and the steering is overly light and lacks feedback, but for the most part it rides nicely and feels surefooted through the bends.
The steep descent down Mount Victoria recouped a good portion of energy and refilled almost a quarter of battery’s capacity thanks to the regenerative braking capability, which – even in its highest setting – feels smoother than many other rivals.
The active lane keeping assistance, however, is a little overzealous, constantly tugging at the wheel at the sight of a white line.
The adaptive cruise control also doesn’t like bends and will slow the car a little too dramatically. And the driver monitoring system incessantly bings and bongs the moment you glance at the infotainment screen.
Thankfully, the former and latter can be deactivated through the driving menu on the main screen. But you have to do this each time you start the car.
The drive westward saw the J7 settle comfortably into highway mode. The plush seats, large panoramic sunroof and decent Sony audio system made the cabin a pleasant place to spend hours on the road.
We rolled into Dubbo – the halfway point – to refuel ourselves at the Pastoral Hotel on Talbragar Street (the steak sandwich was delicious, by the way), but the Jaecoo’s petrol gauge had barely moved and we still had more than three quarters of a tank. Impressive.
It wasn’t until we were deep into outback NSW, on the lonely road between Nyngan (with its Big Bogan statue proudly on display in the main street) and Bourke, with nothing but red dirt and herds of feral goats on the sides of the road for company, that we began watching the range more carefully.
Bourke came into sight well before the J7 showed any real signs of concern. Arriving at one of Australia’s most remote EV chargers (yes, Bourke has a charging station now — and it’s powered by a clever combination of solar and battery storage), we still had just over a quarter of tank of fuel and an estimated range of more than 300km until empty.
With a quick top-up of the battery, I figured we could easily match – if not beat – Jaecoo’s claimed 1200km range.
However, after spending the night at the quaint Darling River Motel and dinner at the Port of Bourke hotel, we woke up to a massive desert storm brewing on the horizon.
The black sky provided a dramatic backdrop against the scorched red earth, and it soon started to bucket down, which not only slowed our speed to below the posted limit but created a headwind and more drag on the drivetrain, which ultimately had a negative impact on our challenge.
The rain chased us all the way back to the outskirts of Dubbo before the fuel warning light came on, forcing us to stop there again to refuel – this time for both me and the car.
Still, we had covered a total of 1128km before the car needed a drink, which is impressively close to the promised 1200km — especially considering the sub-standard real-world conditions, including elevation changes, headwinds, and a car loaded with gear.
If you’re curious about how the Jaecoo J7 compares to its rivals, check out our comparison tool
What do you get?
There are a total of four Jaecoo J7 variants available.
2025 Jaecoo J7 Core 2WD equipment highlights:
18-inch alloy wheels
Temporary spare wheel
Roof rails
Power-retracting door handles
Gloss black side mirrors
Gloss black rear spoiler
Projector LED headlights
LED tail-lights
Rear fog light
10.25-inch digital instrument cluster
13.2-inch touchscreen infotainment system
Wired and wireless Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
6-speaker sound system
Intelligent voice assistant
Satellite navigation
AM/FM/DAB+ radio
Front and rear USB-A and USB-C ports
Manual air-conditioning
Electronic gear shifter
Premium steering wheel
Synthetic leather upholstery
6-way power driver’s seat
4-way power front passenger seat
J7 Track 2WD highlights:
Rain-sensing wipers
Acoustic glass windscreen
Power tailgate
50W wireless charger
8-speaker Sony sound system
Dual-zone climate control
Colour-selectable interior ambient lighting
Illuminated vanity mirrors
Heated front seats
Power child safety locks
Boot 12V power outlet
J7 Ridge AWD highlights:
19-inch alloy wheels
Full-sized spare wheel
Red brake calipers
Panoramic glass sunroof
Privacy glass
Puddle lights
14.8-inch touchscreen infotainment system
Head-up display
Alloy pedals
Auto-dimming rear-view mirror
Heated steering wheel
Perforated synthetic leather upholstery
Ventilated front seats
4-way power driver’s seat lumbar
Driver seat and mirror position memory
J7 SHS Summit adds:
Unique aero-design side mirrors
Dark grey roof rails
19-inch aero wheels
Tyre repair kit
J7 SHS-exclusive interior design
Steering column-mounted gear selector
*Removes heated steering wheel
If you’re curious about how the Jaecoo J7 compares to its rivals, check out our comparison tool
Is the Jaecoo J7 safe?
The Jaecoo J7 PHEV was recently awarded a five-star ANCAP safety rating based on 2025 testing.
Category
Jaecoo J7 SHS
Adult occupant protection
81 per cent
Child occupant protection
85 per cent
Vulnerable road user protection
80 per cent
Safety assist
84 per cent
Standard safety features include:
7 airbags incl. front-centre
Autonomous emergency braking
Pedestrian
Cyclist
Junction
Reverse pedestrian (backover)
Adaptive cruise control
Blind-spot monitoring
Driver monitoring system
Lane departure warning
Emergency Lane Keeping assist
Lane centring
Lane change assist
Rear cross-traffic alert
Reversing camera
Rear parking sensors
Traffic Jam Assist
Tyre pressure monitoring system
J7 Track 2WD adds:
8 airbags incl. driver’s knee
Surround-view camera
Front parking sensors
J7 Ridge AWD and SHS Summit add:
If you’re curious about how the Jaecoo J7 compares to its rivals, check out our comparison tool
How much does the Jaecoo J7 cost to run?
The Jaecoo J7 has a strong ownership promise from a new brand.
Servicing and Warranty
Jaecoo J7 SHS Summit
Warranty
8 years, unlimited kilometres
Roadside assistance
8 years – service activated
Service intervals
12 months or 15,000km
Capped-price servicing
8 years or 120,000km
Total capped-price service cost
$3368
If you’re curious about how the Jaecoo J7 compares to its rivals, check out our comparison tool
CarExpert’s Take on the Jaecoo J7
Given that most of our drive involved sitting at highway speeds — conditions where hybrids traditionally struggle compared to pure petrol engines — the result is nothing short of remarkable.
Beyond the numbers, the J7 SHS Summit impressed us with its refinement. The ride quality was excellent, the cabin was whisper-quiet even on rougher surfaces, and the real-world tech worked without fuss.
At $47,990 drive-away, the Jaecoo J7 SHS Summit is one of the most affordable plug-in hybrids available in Australia at the moment. And, unlike some its Chinese rivals, it delivers on more than just value for money.
For starters, it proves that plug-ins can offer the best of both worlds – being an everyday electric car and a long-distance, cross-country cruiser – and surprises with an impressive level of standard equipment, quality and overall refinement.
It definitely feels more at home in Bourke Street than it does in Bourke. But it will certainly get you there – and beyond – without stopping.
Interested in buying a Jaecoo J7? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
RBI move is aimed at streamlining and consolidating the regulatory framework for digital lending activities undertaken by Regulated Entities
RBI
The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) on Thursday issued a comprehensive set of guidelines titled RBI (Digital Lending) Directions, 2025, aimed at streamlining and consolidating the regulatory framework for digital lending activities undertaken by Regulated Entities (REs).
Over the years, the central bank has issued multiple circulars and directions related to digital lending. The new directions bring these various instructions under a single framework to ensure greater clarity, uniformity, and regulatory oversight in the rapidly evolving digital lending space.
The move is part of the RBI’s broader effort to enhance transparency, protect consumer interests, and mitigate risks associated with online credit delivery channels.
In a move to streamline and consolidate existing regulatory instructions on digital lending, the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) on Thursday issued the RBI (Digital Lending) Directions, 2025. The guidelines apply to all regulated entities (REs), including banks and non-banking financial companies engaged in digital lending.
As part of the new framework, REs will now be required to report details of their Digital Lending Apps (DLAs) through the Centralised Information Management System (CIMS) portal of the RBI. According to the circular, the portal will be operational for reporting from May 13, 2025, and entities will have until June 15, 2025, to upload their initial data.
The directions also include measures aimed at increasing transparency in digital lending practices, particularly in how loan products are aggregated and presented to potential borrowers.
Commenting on the development, Himanshu Malhotra, a fintech lawyer, noted, “The RBI has introduced instructions on the aggregation of loan products with the objective of fostering transparency while matching loan offers with borrowers. This is particularly relevant for digital lending platforms that collaborate with multiple regulated financial institutions.”
The comprehensive guidelines are expected to enhance regulatory oversight, reduce consumer risk, and ensure more responsible lending behavior across India’s rapidly growing digital credit ecosystem.
Stay updated with all the latest business news, including market trends, stock updates, tax, IPO, banking finance, real estate, savings and investments. Get in-depth analysis, expert opinions, and real-time updates—only on News18. Also Download the News18 App to stay updated!
The Federal Reserve decided not to change interest rates on May 7, keeping them at 4.25% to 4.50%. This made crypto assets more appealing to investors. As a result, the market is rising today, with Bitcoin hitting $100,000. Ethereum is also going up, but experts believe STHs might soon sell to take profits. This is backed by a decline in key on-chain activity, which could lead to a price reversal soon.
ETH’s MVRV Ratio to Trigger Reversal
In the past 24 hours, the crypto market has seen a strong surge. Bitcoin has climbed back to the $100,000 level, which it last reached in February. Ethereum also rose above $2,000, recovering from losses linked to earlier tensions between the U.S. and China.
According to Coinglass, more than $175 million worth of Ethereum positions were liquidated during this period. Of that, buyers closed $27 million in positions, while sellers saw $148 million in forced liquidations. The rise in Ethereum’s price also led to an 18% jump in open interest, now totaling $24.8 billion.
Also read: Altcoin Season is Here: XRP, ADA, SUI, ETH Rally
Ethereum’s recent gains are partly due to increased interest from large investors since April. CoinShares reported two straight weeks of money flowing into Ether-based ETFs. Some also believe the Pectra upgrade, launched on May 7, helped boost the price.
The current buying demand in the crypto market might not last long. Data from IntoTheBlock shows the MVRV ratio has dropped to 0.888, meaning many investors are selling at a loss even though prices are rising. This kind of panic selling could encourage more selling and lead to a downturn.
Still, some major players (“smart money”) are buying. Wintermute made large purchases in the last 24 hours, possibly to benefit from the surge and earn market-making fees. Similarly, Lookonchain reported that Abraxas Capital withdrew over 41,000 ETH (worth $75M) from Binance and Kraken. Despite the price rise, nearly half of all Ethereum wallets, about 65.5 million, are still holding at a loss.
What’s Next for ETH Price?
Sellers are having a hard time pushing Ether below its moving averages, which suggests there’s not much pressure to sell during the upward rally. Buyers are holding the price around immediate resistance line. As of writing, ETH price trades at $2,048, surging over 13% in the last 24 hours.
Buyers may use this as a chance to break through the resistance at $2,109. If they succeed, the ETH/USDT pair could gain momentum and head above the $2,500 level. There’s a smaller hurdle at the immediate 23.6% Fib level, but it’s expected to be overcome.
On the flip side, sellers will likely try to drag the price below the moving averages. If that happens, ETH could drop to $1,734. Buyers will probably step in there, but if they can’t hold that level, the price might fall further to key support at $1,542.
As the RSI trades within the overbought region at level 78, ETH price is poised for a short-term downward correction.
Indian Bank, in partnership with IIT-Madras, awarded the winners of Innovision Hackathon 2025 .
This event is part of a larger initiative driven by the Department of Financial Services, Ministry of Finance, Government of India, which encourages public sector banks to organise hackathons in collaboration with premier institutions such as IITs and other universities. The hackathon’s objective is to promote innovation, support entrepreneurship and develop practical solutions in FinTech and Cyber security for the banking sector.
A total of 33 teams from IIT Madras participated in the Innovision Hackathon. Out of these, 21 teams were shortlisted, 12 in the FinTech category and 9 in the Cyber security category — based on the originality, relevance, and potential impact of their ideas.
These shortlisted teams were then assigned expert mentors from both Indian Bank and IIT Madras, who guided them through the process of turning their ideas into working models or prototypes that solve real-world banking challenges. The top three winners have been awarded with prize and memento.
Binod Kumar, MD & CEO, Indian Bank, Prof Kamakoti V, Director, IIT Madras, Kirti, Joint Director, DFS, MoF, GOI, Suvendu Pati, CGM, RBI, Mahesh Kumar Bajaj, ED, Indian Bank; Srinivasa Rao, Sr Advisor, Indian Banks’ Association; Anuj Kumar, MD, CAMS and Benjamin Ambrose, Chief Information Security Officer, NPCI, were among the dignitaries present at the event.
Amazon’s new Vulcan fulfillment center robot doesn’t look humanoid but it has some very human characteristics, like the ability to “feel” the items it’s handling.
Amazon introduced Vulcan at its Delivering the Future event in Germany on May 7.
“Built on key advances in robotics, engineering, and physical AI, Vulcan is our first robot with a sense of touch,” the company said in a statement. The event is a showcase for Amazon’s technology innovations.
Vulcan can stow or pick items from the fabric-covered pods Amazon uses for inventory storage. It has a human–like finesse when handling objects. Force feedback sensors help the robot avoid damaging the merchandise.
Enlarge Image
Amazon’s Vulcan robot uses force feedback sensors to “feel” the objects its picking up or stowing.
Amazon
A suction cup and camera system come into play when Vulcan is pulling items out of bins.
“While the suction cup grabs it, the camera watches to make sure it took the right thing and only the right thing, avoiding what our engineers call the risk of ‘co-extracting non-target items,'” Amazon said.
Vulcan is in place at fulfillment centers in Spokane, Washington, and Hamburg, Germany. It’s primarily tasked with reaching items stored low that require a human to bend down or items stored up high that require an employee to use a stepladder.
The rise of robots in traditionally human-powered workplaces can be a sensitive subject. Amazon makes it clear it sees Vulcan as an assistant to its employees rather than a replacement for them.
Vulcan can handle 75% of the types of items stocked at the fulfillment centers. It’s designed to know which ones it can move and which ones it needs to seek human help — like a robot-human tag team.
Vulcan is part of an ongoing movement toward collaborative robots.
“This trend will continue as robots are often very good at some repeatable tasks while humans are better at others,” Gartner analyst Dwight Klappich told CNET. “I would not say that it is that warehouses are always more efficient when humans and robots work together — it is that together they are more effective.”
Enlarge Image
Amazon’s Vulcan robot can pull out from or stow items in the stacks at a fulfillment center.
While Vulcan may be sensitive to its particular tasks, it doesn’t reach the heights of human physical finesse.
“If you think of what it would take to physically play a Chopin piano concerto, we are still a long way away from this level of dexterity,” said Klappich.
Humans and robots can effectively coexist in distribution centers, said logistics and operations researchers Rene de Koster of Erasmus University in the Netherlands and Debjit Roy of the Indian Institute of Management Ahmedabad.
“Right now, at least, distribution center automation with people in the mix is often a more efficient, flexible and cost-effective bet than a completely automated center,” the team said last year in a summary of their research for the Harvard Business Review.
Vulcan and its ability to “feel” its work is an evolutionary stride for fulfillment center robots.
“Bottom line, this is a notable step forward but it is one step on a longer journey to get to where some of the hype is,” Klappich said.
Robots have long been part of Amazon’s operations with more than 750,000 robots deployed in its fulfillment centers, the company said.
Vulcan will roll out to more centers in Europe and the US over the next couple of years, increasing the chances of your future Amazon shipments having Vulcan’s unseen “fingerprints” on them.
Tossing in a load of wash at home sounds ordinary and harmless.
But healthcare professionals who wash their work uniforms at home may be unknowingly spreading superbugs, according to a new study.
Professor Katie Laird of De Montfort University Leicester, a public university in England, tested home washing machines in a study and found the machines failed to remove potentially harmful material, even after running a hot water setting at the equivalent of 140 degrees Fahrenheit.
SHAMPOO RECALLED FOR BACTERIA CONTAMINATION THAT COULD CAUSE INFECTION
“Our research highlights that domestic laundering of healthcare textiles may not consistently eliminate harmful bacteria, including antibiotic-resistant bacteria,” Laird told Fox News Digital.
The team tested six different models of washing machines to see how well they cleaned fabric contaminated with bacteria that can cause a variety of health conditions.
Healthcare professionals who wash their work uniforms at home may be unknowingly spreading superbugs, according to a new study. (iStock)
Half of the machines did not disinfect the clothing during a rapid cycle — while a third of them failed to clean sufficiently during the standard cycle.
Laird, a professor of microbiology in the School of Pharmacy and head of the university’s Infectious Disease Research Group, said the finding “highlights potential risks associated with laundering healthcare uniforms at home, particularly concerning the spread of antimicrobial resistance (AMR) within community and hospital settings.”
A COMMON KILLER BUG IS ENDANGERING AMERICANS: ‘PANDEMIC IN PLAIN SIGHT’
In addition, this could mean home washing machines are a hub for antibiotic-resistant bacteria.
Domestic detergents could even potentially create antibiotic-resistant strains of bacteria, according to Laird.
Even if healthcare workers followed all washing guidelines, half the machines in the study didn’t reach the correct temperature, the study found.
Healthcare professionals and their institutions should consider re-evaluating policies that allow workers to wash their work clothing at home, said a professor of microbiology who oversaw a new study. (iStock)
“What this means is that even if healthcare workers are following all the guidelines to domestically wash their uniforms, they will still not be reaching the disinfection level required to remove all pathogenic bacteria,” the professor said.
Potential limitations and fixes
The study was conducted with non-healthcare personnel, so the bacteria on that clothing may differ from the clothing of those who work in healthcare settings.
NEW CLASS OF ANTIBIOTICS DISCOVERED: ‘PROMISING ANSWER’
Potentially, however, the latter would see higher levels of “pathogenic and antibiotic resistant strains in healthcare workers’ domestic washing machines,” the professor said.
Laird recommended that healthcare professionals and their institutions re-evaluate policies that allow workers to wash their work clothing at home.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
“Implementing standardized in-house laundering within healthcare facilities or using external industrial laundries will enhance infection control measures,” she said.
Half of the machines did not disinfect the clothing during a rapid cycle, while one third failed to clean sufficiently during the standard cycle.(iStock)
Due to at-home machines not functioning as they should, per the study, the research team recommended using a disinfectant for those washing machines at least once a month.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
They also recommended doing an empty wash in the machine to disinfect it at a temperature of approximately 194 degrees Fahrenheit.
“For individuals laundering at home, it’s crucial to adhere strictly to guidelines, such as using appropriate temperatures and detergents, to minimize risks,” Laird told Fox News Digital.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
The team also said that effective laundering practices are a critical component, but that these should be part of a multifaceted approach.
They should “includ[e] prudent antibiotic use, robust infection control measures, and public education on hygiene practices and antimicrobial resistance,” she said.
Khloe Quill is a lifestyle production assistant with Fox News Digital. She and the lifestyle team cover a range of story topics including food and drink, travel, and health.
Cooking is an art, and let’s just admit that not everyone is an artist. Similar to painting, cooking demands patience and balance with a hint of creativity. It’s not just about mixing ingredients but having a keen understanding of how flavours and textures complement one another. For example, too much salt or too little chilli can have disappointing results. Also, there’s the pressure of maintaining the right temperature so that food does not get over- or under-cooked. Once you master the art of harmony in the kitchen, the feat is nothing short of a celebration. Also Read: Too Relatable! Viral Video Captures The Struggle Of Dieting In A Punjabi Household
Recently, a content creator shared a video on Instagram showcasing his culinary skills. His method of checking the flavour balance had kitchen newbies screaming “relatable”. The video shows him carefully scooping out a small portion of the simmering gravy into his palm with a spoon. Next, he gently tastes the flavour, making sure that the ingredient mix is just the perfect amount. Guess what? It is absolutely what he hoped for. Soon after, the vlogger breaks into an emphatic celebration, drumming the table with the spoon and displaying a triumphant hand gesture. The boy then drops the spoon into the boiling pan, resembling a mic-drop moment. The text layout read, “POV: me whenever I cook.” The caption said, “A1 husband material I am.”
Also Read: Parents’ Hilarious Reaction To Son Ordering Outside Food Is Oh-So-Relatable
Here’s how people reacted to the viral reel in the comments:
Cheering for the kid, one user wrote, “Yeahhhh!!”
An eagle-eyed critic pointed out, “Bro was just reheating the dish his mom cooked.”
Another called the feat a “Chammach (spoon) drop performance.”
A foodie had zero inhibitions in admitting, “This is me.”
“Loved how we said mic drop together,” read a remark.
“Professionalism at its peak,” commented one person.
An individual found the video relatable and wrote, “So trueeee and accurate.”
Someone else chimed in, “The last scene was personal.”
So far, the video has garnered more than 23.1 million views on Instagram. Have you ever faced an identical situation while cooking? Tell us in the comments below.
Chinese President Xi Jinping on Wednesday published a signed article titled “Learning from History to Build Together a Brighter Future” in the Russian Gazette newspaper ahead of his arrival in Russia for a state visit and attendance at the celebrations marking the 80th anniversary of the Victory in the Soviet Union’s Great Patriotic War.
The following is the full text of the article:
Learning from History to Build Together a Brighter Future
H.E. Xi Jinping
President of the People’s Republic of China
This year marks the 80th anniversary of the victory of the Chinese People’s War of Resistance Against Japanese Aggression, the Soviet Union’s Great Patriotic War, and the World Anti-Fascist War. It also marks the 80th anniversary of the founding of the United Nations (UN). In this season when “apple and pear trees are blossoming,” I will soon pay a state visit to Russia and attend the celebrations marking the 80th anniversary of the victory of the Soviet Union’s Great Patriotic War, joining the heroic Russian people in honoring the history and the fallen heroes.
Ten years ago around this time, I came to Russia to celebrate the 70th anniversary of the victory. During that visit, I made a special arrangement to meet with 18 representatives of Russian veterans who endured the blood and fire of battlefields during the Soviet Union’s Great Patriotic War and the Chinese People’s War of Resistance Against Japanese Aggression. Their unyielding resolve and indomitable bearing left an indelible impression on me. In the past few years, General M. Gareyev, Major General T. Shchudlo and other veterans passed away. I pay my deepest tribute to them and to all veterans – from generals to the rank and file – for their extraordinary service and heroic feats in securing the victory over fascists around the world. We will never forget them. Heroes never perish; their noble spirit lives forever.
During the World Anti-Fascist War, the Chinese and Russian peoples fought shoulder to shoulder and supported each other. In the darkest hours of the Chinese People’s War of Resistance Against Japanese Aggression, the Soviet Volunteer Group, which was part of the Soviet Air Force, came to Nanjing, Wuhan and Chongqing to fight alongside the Chinese people, bravely engaging Japanese invaders in aerial combat – many sacrificing their precious lives. At the critical juncture of the Soviet Union’s Great Patriotic War, Yan Baohang, a legendary intelligence agent of the Communist Party of China (CPC) who was hailed as the “Richard Sorge of the East,” provided the Soviet Union with primary-source intelligence. In the crucible of the war-torn years, the Soviet Union provided China with large quantities of weapons and equipment. China, for its part, shipped much-needed strategic supplies to the Soviet Union. The two countries jointly established a supply line spanning the treacherous Gobi Desert. It was an international lifeline, vital for our mutual support in fighting fascists. The strong camaraderie between our two nations, forged in blood and sacrifice, surges onward unceasingly, mighty as the Yellow River and the Volga. It is an eternal wellspring nourishing our everlasting friendship.
Eighty years ago, the forces of justice around the world, including China and the Soviet Union, united in courageous battles against their common foes and defeated the overbearing fascist powers. Eighty years later today, however, unilateralism, hegemonism, bullying, and coercive practices are severely undermining our world. Again humankind has come to a crossroads of unity or division, dialogue or confrontation, win-win cooperation or zero-sum games. In War and Peace, the great writer Leo Tolstoy observed, “History is the life of nations and of humanity.” Indeed, historical memory and truth will not fade with the passage of time. They serve as inspirations that mirror the present and illuminate the future. We must learn from history, especially the hard lessons of the Second World War. We must draw wisdom and strength from the great victory of the World Anti-Fascist War, and resolutely resist all forms of hegemonism and power politics. We must work together to build a brighter future for humanity.
— We must uphold a correct historical perspective on WWII. China and the Soviet Union were the principal theaters of that war in Asia and Europe respectively. The two countries served as the mainstay of resistance against Japanese militarism and German Nazism, making pivotal contribution to the victory of the World Anti-Fascist War. The Chinese People’s War of Resistance Against Japanese Aggression began the earliest and lasted the longest. United as one under the banner of the Chinese united front against Japanese aggression, which was advocated and established by the CPC, the Chinese people launched a relentless struggle against and defeated the brutal Japanese militarists. With immense sacrifice, they carved out an immortal epic of heroic resistance and ultimate victory against Japanese aggression. In the European theater, the Soviet Red Army advanced like an iron tide with unwavering fortitude and valor, crushed Nazi Germany’s ambitions and liberated millions from its brutal occupation, writing an epic of victory in the Soviet Union’s Great Patriotic War.
History teaches us that light will always overcome darkness, and that justice will ultimately prevail over evil. The International Military Tribunal at Nuremberg and the International Military Tribunal for the Far East condemned the convicted war criminals to perpetual infamy. The justice and integrity of the two landmark trials, their historic significance, and their contemporary relevance stand beyond challenge. Any attempt to distort the historical truth of WWII, deny its victorious outcome, or defame the historic contribution of China and the Soviet Union is doomed to fail. Neither of our two nations will tolerate any act to reverse the course of history-nor will the people of the whole world.
— We must resolutely uphold the postwar international order. The most significant decision by the international community around the end of WWII was to establish the UN. China and the Soviet Union were among the first to sign the UN Charter. Our permanent membership in the UN Security Council is a product of history, earned through blood and sacrifice. The more turbulent and complex the international situation becomes, the more we must uphold and defend the authority of the UN, firmly uphold the UN-centered international system, the international order underpinned by international law, and the basic norms of international relations based on the purposes and principles of the UN Charter, and steadily promote an equal and orderly multipolar world and a universally beneficial and inclusive economic globalization.
This year also marks the 80th anniversary of the restoration of Taiwan. Taiwan’s restoration to China is a victorious outcome of WWII and an integral part of the postwar international order. A series of instruments with legal effect under international law, including the Cairo Declaration and the Potsdam Proclamation, have all affirmed China’s sovereignty over Taiwan. The historical and legal fact therein brooks no challenge. And the authority of UN General Assembly Resolution 2758 brooks no challenge. No matter how the situation on the Taiwan island evolves or what troubles external forces may make, the historical trend toward China’s ultimate and inevitable reunification is unstoppable.
China and Russia have all along firmly supported each other on issues bearing on our respective core interests or major concerns. Russia has reiterated on many occasions that it strictly adheres to the one-China principle, Taiwan is an inalienable part of China’s territory, it opposes any form of “Taiwan independence,” and it firmly supports all measures of the Chinese government and the Chinese people to achieve national reunification. China highly commends Russia’s consistent position.
— We must firmly defend international fairness and justice. Now, the global deficits in peace, development, security and governance continue to widen unabated. To address these deficits, I have proposed to build a community with a shared future for mankind and put forward the Global Development Initiative, the Global Security Initiative, and the Global Civilization Initiative as a way forward to steer the reform of the global governance system toward greater fairness and justice.
The world needs justice, not hegemonism. History and reality have proven that to meet global challenges, it is important to uphold the vision of global governance featuring extensive consultation and joint contribution for shared benefit. It is also important to choose dialogue over confrontation, build partnerships over alliances, and pursue win-win cooperation over zero-sum games. It is equally important to practice true multilateralism, accommodate the legitimate concerns of all parties, and safeguard international norms and order. We firmly believe that people around the world will choose to stand on the right side of history and the side of fairness and justice.
China and Russia are both major countries with significant influence in the world. The two nations are constructive forces for maintaining global strategic stability and for improving global governance. Our bilateral relationship is founded upon a clear historical logic, sustained by strong internal drive, and rooted in profound cultural heritage. Our relationship is neither directed against nor swayed by any third party. Together we must foil all schemes to disrupt or undermine our bonds of amity and trust, and we must not be baffled by transient matters or unsettled by formidable challenges. We must leverage the certainty and resilience of our partnership of strategic coordination to jointly accelerate the shift toward a multipolar world and build a community with a shared future for mankind.
China and Russia are both great nations with splendid civilizations. The Chinese and Russian peoples are both great peoples defined by heroic legacies. Eighty years ago, our peoples won the anti-fascist war through heroic struggles. Eight decades later today, we must take all necessary measures to resolutely safeguard our sovereignty, security, and development interests. We should be guardians of historical memory, partners in national development and rejuvenation, and champions of global fairness and justice, and work together to forge a brighter future for humanity.
The Brookfield India REIT portfolio consists of 29 million square feet of total leasable area, comprising 24.5 million square feet of operating area, 0.6 million square feet of under-construction area, and 3.9 million square feet of future development potential.
| Photo Credit:
iStockphoto
The shares of Brookfield India Real Estate Trust (BIRET) Limited were trading flat at ₹290.94 on the NSE today at 10.20 am.
Brookfield India Real Estate Trust (BIRET) announced robust financial results for the fourth quarter and fiscal year ended March 31, 2025, with significant growth across key metrics.
The company reported a 37 per cent year-over-year increase in Net Operating Income to ₹1,854 crore for FY2025, while Income from Operating Lease Rentals grew by 36 per cent to ₹1,748.9 crore compared to the previous fiscal year.
BIRET achieved approximately 3.0 million square feet of gross leasing during FY2025, including 2.2 million square feet of new leasing and 0.8 million square feet of renewals. The committed occupancy increased by 6 per cent year-over-year, reflecting strong demand for their properties.
For Q4 FY2025, the company recorded 651,000 square feet of gross leasing with an average re-leasing spread of 28 per cent. Net Operating Income for the quarter grew by 16 per cent year-over-year to ₹488.5 crore.
The REIT announced a distribution of ₹319.1 crore (₹5.25 per unit) for Q4, which is 10.5 per cent higher than the same period last year. Total distributions for FY2025 reached ₹1,053.7 crore (₹19.25 per unit), an 8.5 per cent increase over FY2024.
BIRET completed the acquisition of a 50 per cent stake in a 33 lakh square feet commercial portfolio in Delhi-NCR from Bharti Enterprises for ₹1,228 crore in Q1FY2025 and raised ₹3,500 crore via QIP in Q3FY2025, creating headroom for future growth.
NA TRŽIŠTU nekretnina trenutno se najviše pažnje posvećuje prodaji kuće na Pelješcu, koja na privlači brojne kupce svojim luksuznim ambijentom i jedinstvenom lokacijom uz more. Osim ove ekskluzivne nekretnine, među najtraženijima na Index Oglasima su i objekti u mirnim predjelima kontinentalne Hrvatske, kao i stanovi u Zagrebu.
Predivna kuća s bazenom na Pelješcu
U naselju Broce na poluotoku Pelješcu prodaje se luksuzna kuća za odmor smještena na južnoj strani Stonskog zaljeva. Ova nekretnina ističe se izvanrednom lokacijom i potpunom privatnošću.
Kuća se proteže na dvije etaže s balkonima okrenutima prema moru. U prizemlju se nalazi ulazni prostor, kuhinja, dnevni boravak s blagovaonicom, kupaonica, WC, praonica, ostava i dječja igraonica. Prvi kat ima pet spavaćih soba i kupaonicu s mogućnošću izgradnje još dvije.
Vanjski prostor uključuje veliku okućnicu s terasom, uređenim vrtom, bazenom, dvije garaže i vanjskim parkiralištem. Cijena nekretnine je 480.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Obiteljska kuća na jezerima Sekuline
Na jezerima Sekuline, nedaleko od mjesta Molve, nalazi se kuća za odmor okružena vodom i prirodnim ambijentom. Smještena između dva jezerca, ova nekretnina pruža savršen bijeg od svakodnevnog stresa.
Ukupna površina kuće iznosi 153.58 m² i uključuje prizemlje, garažu, potkrovlje i podrum. Objekt nudi prekrasan pogled na jezera i prirodu. Od dodatnih sadržaja tu su bazen dimenzija 4×8 metara s mogućnošću grijanja vode, natkrivena drvena sjenica s ventilatorom, ležaljke za sunčanje, igralište, terasa sa zidanim roštiljem i garaža.
Kuća ima centralno grijanje na plin, potpuno je klimatizirana i pokrivena videonadzorom. S kategorizacijom od 3 zvjezdice, ova nekretnina je idealan izbor za turističku djelatnost. Cijena iznosi 197.500 eura.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Pogledaj oglas
Garsonijera u Zagrebu u zoni tramvaja
U zagrebačkom naselju Dubec prodaje se stan na dvije etaže – prizemlje i suteren. Nekretnina nudi jedinstven raspored prostorija za ugodno stanovanje u mirnom dijelu grada.
Na donjoj razini nalaze se kuhinja, kupaonica i blagovaonski stol, dok je na gornjoj smješten dnevno-spavaći prostor s galerijom koja može služiti kao spremište. Stan ima niske režije, zapadnu orijentaciju, a smješten je u blizini javnog prijevoza i trgovina. Idealan je za mlade osobe ili kao prilika za najam. Moguća je kupnja kreditom banke, a cijena iznosi 65.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Kuća na osami s velikim zemljištem u Škrljevu
U Škrljevu kraj Bakra prodaje se kućica od 32 m² s više od 6000 m² poljoprivrednog terena. Ova jedinstvena nekretnina pruža mir i osamu, a istovremeno je udaljena samo 20 minuta od plaža i grada.
Objekt ima građevinsku dozvolu za izgradnju dodatnih 140 m², što pruža izvanredne mogućnosti za proširenje. Smještena na osami, ova nekretnina predstavlja odličnu priliku za ljubitelje mira i prirode koji žele imati vlastiti prostor izvan gradske vreve. Cijena iznosi 79.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Samostojeća obiteljska kuća u Gornjem Prnjarovcu
Na prodaju je samostojeća kuća sa sređenim potkrovljem površine 95 m² smještena u mirnom naselju Križ, Gornji Prnjarovec. Ova nekretnina nudi funkcionalan prostor raspoređen kroz tri spavaće sobe, što je čini pogodnom za obiteljski život.
Kuća se nalazi na uređenoj okućnici, a dodatnu vrijednost daju balkon, dvorište, garaža te prostorije za odlaganje. Opremljena je optičkim priključkom, centralnim grijanjem, a posebno se ističe sunčana pozicija s lijepim pogledom i blizina prirode. Izgrađena 1996., kuća je opremljena svim potrebnim priključcima – kanalizacijom, plinom, strujom i gradskom vodom.
Dvorište je površine 313 m², a uz kuću dolazi i oranica od 2507 m². Cijena iznosi 145.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Kuća za odmor s potencijalom na Varaždin Bregu
Na prodaju je kuća na mirnoj lokaciji Varaždin Breg koja nudi mnoštvo mogućnosti. Gornji dio kuće uređen je kao mali, praktični stan s kuhinjom i dnevnim boravkom, kupaonicom i spavaćom sobom.
U dnevnom boravku nalazi se kamin na drva koji učinkovito grije cijeli prostor, stvarajući topao i ugodan ambijent. Donji dio kuće sastoji se od tri prostorije koje se mogu preurediti prema vlastitim potrebama. Uz kuću se nalazi i alatnica s dodatnim WC-om.
Dvorište je prostrano i ograđeno, idealno za kućne ljubimce ili vlastite projekte. Smještena na kraju ulice, ova kuća osigurava privatnost i mir, a pristup je osiguran asfaltiranim putem tijekom cijele godine. Cijena je 28.000 eura.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Pogledaj oglas
Dvosoban stan na Borongaju
U zagrebačkom naselju Borongaj prodaje se dvosoban stan površine 51 m² na petom katu zgrade bez lifta. Stan je renoviran i spreman za useljenje. Sastoji se od dnevnog boravka, spavaće sobe, kuhinje, kupaonice i ostave. Renoviran je gotovo u cijelosti s novim podom i pločicama, PVC stolarijom, novom kuhinjom i novim instalacijama.
Stan je vrlo svijetao, praktičnog rasporeda, s orijentacijom istok-zapad. Grijanje je na plinske peći. Prodaje se u potpunosti namješten i opremljen svim uređajima. Nekretnina je smještena u blizini svih sadržaja i idealna je za studente. Cijena iznosi 120.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Moderna drvena kuća u Gornjem Stenjevcu
U sjeverozapadnom dijelu Zagreba prodaje se zanimljivo koncipirana kuća izgrađena 2000. Nekretnina je izgrađena uz korištenje visokokvalitetnih materijala i obložena drvenom oblogom koja je savršeno uklopljena u okolnu prirodu.
Kuća je toplinski dobro izolirana i spada u energetski razred B. Drvo prevladava i u unutrašnjosti, pružajući topli dojam, a velike staklene stijene omogućuju dovoljno svjetla. Tlocrtna površina kuće je 61 m², a sastoji se od prizemlja i potkrovlja.
U prizemlju se nalazi kuhinja s blagovaonicom, kupaonica i veliki dnevni boravak s kaminom za grijanje. U potkrovlju je spavaća soba od 25 m² s izlazom na mali balkon. Ukupna površina sa svim dodatnim prostorima iznosi 90.90 m². Cijena je 145.000 eura.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Pogledaj oglas
Renoviran dvosoban stan u Puli
Na prodaju je lijepo uređen i potpuno namješten stan površine 59.69 m², smješten na 4. katu stambene zgrade s liftom u Puli. Stan se sastoji od dvije spavaće sobe, prostranog dnevnog boravka, hodnika, kuhinje s blagovaonicom, kupaonice s tuš kabinom i lođe.
Uz stan dolazi i pripadajuća šupa u podrumu zgrade, zajednička prostorija na katu te prostor za bicikle. Nekretnina se nalazi u mirnom kvartu u neposrednoj blizini svih važnih sadržaja. Grijanje je putem klima uređaja i norveških radijatora. Cijena je 190.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Kamena kuća u nizu na Čiovu
U starom centru Okruga Gornjeg na otoku Čiovu prodaje se kamena kuća u nizu na dvije etaže, ukupne površine 50 m². Kuća se sastoji od prizemlja i kata. U prizemlju se nalaze pretprostor, jedna veća soba, kuhinja i kupaonica te mali hodnik.
Na katu su dvije spavaće sobe i hodnik, sve povezano vanjskim stepeništem. Nekretnina zahtijeva uređenje, ali je odmah useljiva. Cijena je 60.000 eura.
Less than a week after the launch of the new Star Wars-themed season, Fortnite developer Epic Games is back with the first big content update of Galactic Battle.
Titled Pull of the Force, the new Fortnite content update has a May 8 release date on PS5, PlayStation 4, Xbox Series X|S, Xbox One, PC, Android and Nintendo Switch.
As part of the event, Luke, Leia and Han Solo will arrive on the island, alongside new Force Powers and other gameplay features.
Unforunately, however, the Dark Side of the Force will also make an appearance in the form of a hologram of Darth Maul.
Darth Maul will give players the chance to unlock Red Lightsabers and learn Force Throw, while Mace Windu will provide purple Lightsabers and Force Pull.
Force Pull gives users the ability to pull in items and opponents from nearby, while Force Push lets you pick up items and throw them at enemies.
Epic Games explains more: “Sensing a disturbance in the Force, Leia and Luke will arrive on the Island May 8 alongside renowned smuggler Han Solo to offer you strategic services.
“Speaking of the Force, hologram Mace Windu will appear on May 8 — train with him to earn a Purple Lightsaber and learn Force Pull, which pulls in just about anything and anyone nearby.
“Rumour has it the Sith Lord Darth Maul will be around as a hologram as well, offering Red Lightsabers and teaching Force Throw. Pick up objects around you and throw them as projectiles!”
In addition to appearing in the island, Mace Windu will also be available to purchase from the Item Shop.
The Mace Windu skin will be available for 1,500 V-Bucks, his Pickaxe bundle costs 800 V-Bucks and the Emote/Back Bling is available for 300 V-Bucks.
The entire Mace Windu bundle is available for the reduced price of 2,000 V-Bucks.
The Mace Windu bundle has a May 9 release date for fans living in the US, and a May 10 release date and 1am BST launch time for fans in the UK.
The eighth-generation Volkswagen Golf has been an interesting chapter in the iconic German nameplate’s storied history. It’s been regarded more as a ‘par’ than a ‘birdie’ or ‘hole in one’ – forgive the pun.
After a stunning run with the Mk5, Mk6 and Mk7 generations, the Golf Mk8 was a pretty big departure from its predecessors in that it was almost a revolution of the formula rather than a subtle evolution, as is more customary.
Sure, the exterior design didn’t really rewrite history, but the approach to interior minimalism and the sheer amount of tech on offer was meant to really bring the Golf into a new echelon.
Instead it’s been more of a learning exercise, with news headlines including software issues, quality concerns and higher pricing – the latter especially so in Australia – and so the modern ‘people’s car’ is no longer the common sight on local roads it once was.
There’s no question that its refined on-road manners and turbocharged performance are still strong points, courtesy of that revised MQB evo platform, but the Mk8 never quite resonated with buyers Down Under or around the world like the Mk7 did – in fact, it lost its top spot on the European sales charts for the first time in 17 years.
Enter the upgraded 2025 Volkswagen Golf 8.5, a mid-life refresh of the eighth-gen hatchback (and wagon abroad) that aims to address complaints about the Mk8 – more user-friendly tech, improved ergonomics, and more tech headline the changes, as well as a greater focus on value for the Australian lineup.
Key to the revised Golf range is the new Style variant we have on test here, pitched as something of an affordable luxury hatch that succeeds the plusher Highline variants offered previously. Is it the new pick of the range?
How does the Volkswagen Golf compare?
View a detailed breakdown of the Volkswagen Golf against similarly sized vehicles.
Volkswagen
Golf
How much does the Volkswagen Golf cost?
The 2025 Volkswagen Golf Style sits between the entry-level Life and mid-range R-Line, priced from $43,690 before on-road costs.
Model
Price before on-road costs
2025 Volkswagen Golf Life
$38,690 (-$500)
2025 Volkswagen Golf Style
$43,690 (NEW)
2025 Volkswagen Golf R-Line
$47,990 (+$5500)
2025 Volkswagen Golf GTI
$58,990 (+$2900)
2025 Volkswagen Golf R
$70,990 (+$400)
2025 Volkswagen Golf R Black Edition
$72,490 (NEW)
To see how the Volkswagen Golf lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
What is the Volkswagen Golf like on the inside?
Subtle, but meaningful changes have been made inside the cabin of the Golf.
The new Style variant brings swish ArtVelours microfleece-lined ‘Comfort sport’ seats, which offer a massaging function and electric adjustment for the driver – as well as an extendable under-thigh cushion!
While they may not look as extravagant as the R-Line’s sportier front buckets with integrated head restraints, the supple suede upholstery and wonderfully supportive cushions make for a very, very comfortable driver’s perch.
Both front seats are heated also, though they miss out on the ventilation function of the R-Line’s perforated leather-clad sports buckets. The Style also adds gloss black trim on the centre console, which while fingerprint- and scratch-prone, is a lot dressier than the austere matte grey plastic trim seen in the base car.
VW has brought back hard buttons as the norm on the Golf’s steering wheel, for all but the flagship R performance hero, and it’s all the better for it. While we still miss the chunky action of VW’s switchgear on the dashboard, the multifunction steering wheel controls are clear and easy to use, with a satisfyingly solid action when pressed.
The option to add a beefy eight-speaker, 12-channel Harman Kardon premium sound system is worthwhile, which is bundled with a handy projector-type head-up display and surround cameras – which could have better resolution, in my view. At least the optional sound system slaps, as the kids say.
While some of the subbed-in trimmings go a good way to making the Style less Trendline and more Highline, there haven’t been any wholesale changes like in the related Cupra Leon, for example, which will receive new padded and leather-lined surfaces along its centre console for a more premium ambience.
Still, the Golf’s clean and screen-heavy ambience feels more contemporary and upmarket than a lot of rival vehicles in this class – think Toyota Corolla and Hyundai i30 – though it doesn’t have the outright tactility and class of, say, a Mazda 3.
The 10.25-inch Digital Cockpit Pro driver’s instrument cluster has seen some minor revisions, yet maintains a crisp readout with good configurability that’s only really bettered by the Volkswagen Group’s premium Audi brand. My only gripe was the inability to have the gear and speed magnified within the dials like with displays past – but this could be a user issue, rather than the tools.
Similarly, the 12.9-inch central touchscreen gets the latest interface in line with the brand’s ID electric models, and the IDA voice assistant is integrated, if without the full net-connected and AI-powered functionality of overseas models. It’s a wonderfully clear and snappy display, bringing the look and feel of the flagship Touareg to the compact class.
The wireless Apple CarPlay generally worked without fault when paired with my iPhone 16 Pro Max, save for the odd dropout when passing under one of Victoria’s toll booths.
Previous gripes around the touch sliders for temperature and volume have been somewhat addressed with illumination, which helps with useability in low-light situations while also looking more sophisticated, while the hard toolbar at the base of the screen makes it easier to toggle HVAC functions as well as the heated front seats.
The second row remains one of the strongest in the class, with more than enough room for two adults to sit behind two adults. Head, knee and leg room are all good for the segment, even behind a taller driver like 6’1″ me.
I am a fan of the ArtVelours microfleece trim and leather-look accents, and there are niceties like a third zone of climate control with directional vents at the rear of the centre console. Further, the flock-line door bins continue in the rear to stop bottles rattling around, and there’s a fold-down centre armrest with cupholders.
You also get the requisite ISOFIX child seat anchor points on the outboard seats, and top-tethers across all three. Additionally, there’s a handy ski port – quite European – in case you’re needing to stow longer items through from the boot.
Speaking of, there’s 374 litres of cargo capacity with the rear seats in play, expanding to 1230 litres with them folded. There’s an adjustable boot floor to make a load area flat if needed, and there’s a space-saver spare wheel under the boot floor of all models.
GTI
Dimensions
Volkswagen Golf 110TSI Style
Length
4282mm
Width
1789mm
Height
1480mm
Wheelbase
2631mm
Cargo capacity
374-1230 litres
To see how the Volkswagen Golf lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
What’s under the bonnet?
The core Golf Mk8.5 range in Australia carries over the 1.4-litre TSI four-cylinder turbo-petrol engine from the Mk8, teamed with an eight-speed automatic transmission supplied by Japan’s Aisin.
Specifications
Volkswagen Golf 110TSI Style
Engine
1.4L 4cyl turbo-petrol
Power
110kW at 6000rpm
Torque
250Nm at 1500-4000rpm
Transmission
8-speed auto
Drive type
Front-wheel drive
Weight
1345kg – tare
Fuel economy (claimed)
6.3L/100km
Fuel economy (as tested)
7.3L/100km
Fuel tank capacity
50 litres
Fuel requirement
95-octane premium unleaded
CO2 emissions
143g/km
Emissions standard
Euro 6
While there are a number of newer, more efficient powertrains available in the Golf overseas, Australia is lumped with other markets that haven’t yet fully moved to the Euro 6 emissions standard and aren’t given priority access to electrified models.
The equivalent powertrain in the European and UK lineups is the 1.5 eTSI, which is effectively the newer version of the 1.4 under the bonnet of local models. Equipped with a 48V mild-hybrid and cylinder-on-demand technologies, the Golf eTSI can run as a two-cylinder under low engine loads and shut off the engine while coasting or coming to a stop.
Even under the more stringent WLTP test regime in Europe, the equivalent Golf 1.5 eTSI with 110kW quotes the equivalent of 5.1L/100km on the combined cycle, which is more than 1.0L/100km less than the engine used locally – mind you, Australian fuel figures are also determined by the more lenient and outdated NEDC test cycle.
Beyond that, you also have the Golf eHybrid, which is VW-speak for PHEV. Using the aforementioned 1.5 TSI as its base, the standard eHybrid makes 150kW, while the GTE version makes 200kW. Both can drive over 130km on electric power alone.
To see how the Volkswagen Golf lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
How does the Volkswagen Golf drive?
Our local launch drive of the updated Golf took in a return trip from Marysville in Victoria’s far east, back to Melbourne. We spent most of our time in the Style, but also piloted the R-Line with the same driveline.
Having spent day one of the Australian media launch in the excellent new GTI, the Style’s character is quite distinct from the Golf hot hatch, even there are a number of similarities.
The 1.4 TSI has been in service in the Golf for a decade or so in Australia, where it was offered in various states of tune in the Mk7 and Mk7.5 generations, though the Mk8 reverted from VW’s usual dual-clutch Direct-Shift Gearbox (DSG) auto to an eight-speed torque converter automatic supplied by Aisin.
Primarily, this driveline is supplied to Australia due to our nation’s hitherto lax emissions legislation. Despite the upcoming New Vehicle Efficiency Standard mandating fleet-average emissions targets to encourage the import of more efficient and electrified vehicles, Australia’s baseline emissions standard remains Euro 5 – which was succeeded by Euro 6 in Europe way back in 2014.
It means if you’re a Mk6 or Mk7 owner and have become accustomed to the traits of Volkswagen’s DSG, irrespective of their quirks, the Mk8 and 8.5 have a distinctly different character behind the wheel.
Off the line response is naturally much sharper and more natural compared to a dual-clutch transmission, but really other than that the Mk8.5’s driveline feels like something of a sideways or even backwards step.
Despite their low-speed niggles, Volkswagen DSGs – even the dry-clutch ones in normal Golfs – offer incredibly sharp and snappy performance on the move, and have a distinct feeling of rolling athleticism and a different personality to torque converter ‘boxes offered by largely Asian rivals.
That sort of disappears with this latest Golf. Yes the 1.4 TSI is super torquey and punches above its weight in terms of shifting the Golf’s 1.3-tonne mass, but it’s not a particularly engaging or pleasurable drivetrain to live with.
Shifts from first into second can feel a little elastic, and at times the auto really slurs through ratios to the point it almost makes the engine sound like it’s attached to a continuously variable transmission (or CVT). The steps between ratios aren’t super sharp or distinct, and at times it can feel like it has one or two too many ratios to play with.
In normal driving it’s less of an issue, but when you want to dial things up a little – which you may be tempted to do in an R-Line, for example, it starts to feel a little out of its depth.
Even after flicking the transmission into ‘S’, the eight-speed auto struggles to accurately gauge when you want it to downshift. Often there’s a one- or two-second pause before it flicks down a cog or two to put you in the torque band. As someone who is used to the sharp response from my Mk7.5 GTI DSG, it grates on me quite a bit personally.
R-Line
It’s really quite a shame given the rest of the Golf’s on-road traits are, put simply, excellent. The Style rides beautifully on its standard 18-inch alloys, striking a near-perfect balance between comfort and dynamism.
Steering is on the lighter side but offers good feel and feedback to communicate what’s happening beneath you, while the keen chassis means even the standard Golf corners with verve and precision.
Piloting the Style through Victoria’s famous Black Spur was a surprising revelation that showcased the car’s cornering abilities, though it also exacerbated my gripes with the drivetrain.
The R-Line adds sports suspension and a ‘Progressive’ variable steering rack, making it feel something like a ‘GTI-Lite’, but seems even more let down by an uninspiring driveline.
The R-Line feels that little more hunkered down and purposeful, and the addition of selectable drive modes allows you to sharpen things up in one hit via the ‘Sport’ mode. It’s a shame a higher-performance engine and transmission combination wasn’t applied here, because it feels like it’s missing something to go with the sportier look.
R-Line
The R-Line also rides a little more firmly than the Style, as you’d expect, making it less comfortable and refined overall, and therefore less suitable as a daily than the Style.
Really, the Style feels more like what a standard Golf should feel like, in that it’s a little posh and luxurious without overtly presenting so. I’d also argue the Style is a little quieter in the cabin, and the softer controls make it nicer to pilot in everyday scenarios.
We didn’t get to try the base Golf Life on its smaller wheels, but it shouldn’t be all that different to the Style, apart from its more economy-class interior trimmings.
Otherwise, the suite of IQ Drive assistance and safety functions do a great job of keeping you out of trouble on the road, with VW’s intuitive Travel Assist semi-autonomous cruise control system remaining one of the best in the business.
The way it so deftly keeps you centred in your lane without feeling too intrusive, while also keeping a safe gap from the vehicle in front, makes this tech a benchmark for systems of its type.
LIfe
Also standard are helpful features like blind-spot monitoring and rear cross-traffic assist, which supplement the Golf’s already very good outward visibility. The former also brakes to avoid collisions in reverse.
Speaking of parking manoeuvres, the regular Golf range comes as standard with a semi-autonomous Park Assist function, which will control steering to help guide you into both parallel and perpendicular parking bays. Sadly, Park Assist Plus, which adds automated assistance for the accelerator, brake and gear selection, is reserved for the GTI hot hatch.
To see how the Volkswagen Golf lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
What do you get?
The Style sits above the entry-level Life but below the R-Line, which tops the core Golf range.
2025 Volkswagen Golf Life equipment equipment highlights:
17-inch Nottingham alloy wheels
LED headlights – reflector type
Light Assist – auto high-beam
Power-folding exterior mirrors
Keyless access incl. alarm
10.25-inch Digital Cockpit Pro
10.3-inch touchscreen infotainment
6-speaker audio
DAB+ radio
Wireless App-Connect
Apple CarPlay
Android Auto
5yr GoConnect subscription
Climate control
Leather multifunction steering wheel
Wireless phone charger
10-colour ambient lighting
Golf Style adds:
18-inch Catania alloy wheels
LED Plus headlights – projector type
Rear privacy glass
12.9-inch navigation system
IDA voice assistant
7-speaker audio – incl. centre
Tri-zone climate control
ArtVelours microfleece upholstery
ErgoActive 14-way electric driver’s seat
Driver memory function – 2-position
Driver massage function
30-colour ambient lighting
Golf R-Line adds:
18-inch Leeds alloy wheels
R-line exterior, interior styling
Driving profile selection
Front sports seats
Driver memory function – 3-position
Vienna leather upholstery
Heated, ventilated front seats
Heated steering wheel
Progressive steering – variable ratio
To see how the Volkswagen Golf lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
Options
A handful of options and packages are available across the lineup.
Sound and Vision Package: $2000 (Style, R-Line, GTI)
12-channel Harman Kardon premium audio
Area View surround cameras
Head-up display
Vienna Leather Package: $3900 (GTI)
Vienna leather upholstery
Power-adjustable driver’s seat
Heated, ventilated front seats
12-channel Harman Kardon premium audio
Head-up display
Standalone options:
Panoramic sunroof: $1900
Metallic paint: $800 (Life, Style, R-Line)
Premium metallic paint: $300 (GTI)
To see how the Volkswagen Golf lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
Is the Volkswagen Golf safe?
The Volkswagen Golf has a five-star ANCAP safety rating based on 2019 Euro NCAP testing.
Category
Score
Adult occupant protection
95 per cent
Child occupant protection
89 per cent
Vulnerable road user protection
76 per cent
Safety assist
80 per cent
Standard safety equipment includes:
9 airbags incl. front-centre airbag
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB)
Pedestrian detection
Cyclist detection
Adaptive cruise control with stop/go
Blind-spot monitoring
Cross-traffic alert – front, rear
Driver fatigue monitoring
Emergency Assist
Multi-collision brake
Lane Assist
Lane departure warning
Lane-keep assist
Park Assist
Parking sensors – front, rear
Reversing camera
Safe exit warning
Travel Assist
Adaptive cruise control
Adaptive lane guidance – centring
Golf GTI adds:
Park Assist Plus
Steering assistance
Gear selection assistance
Accelerator, brake assistance
Golf R adds:
Area View surround cameras
To see how the Volkswagen Golf lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
How much does the Volkswagen Golf cost to run?
As with the wider range, the Golf is covered by Volkswagen Australia’s five-year, unlimited-kilometre warranty.
Servicing and Warranty
Volkswagen Golf 110TSI Style
Warranty
5 years, unlimited kilometres
Roadside assistance
12 months – standard 12 months – service activated
Service intervals
12 months or 15,000 kilometres
Capped-price servicing
5-year Care Plan
Total capped-price service cost
$2950 – Golf Mk8
To see how the Volkswagen Golf lines up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
CarExpert’s Take on the Volkswagen Golf
The introduction of the Style grade sees the non-performance Golf return to form.
Standard versions of the Golf were meant to feel quite plush and upmarket, even with their most basic trimmings, and while the initial Mk8 range arguably failed to deliver on some fronts, this revised lineup does a much more convincing job of being a premi-ish ‘People’s Car’.
Fans of the old Golf Highline in particular finally have a worthy successor, and it sits in a price band that remains attainable and competitive with its rivals, even if you have to spend up for the Sound and Vision Package to get a head-up display and premium audio.
The Style also drives like a Golf should, drawing upon capable underpinnings shared with premium-badged products to provide a drive experience that is generally more comfortable and refined than key rivals from the likes of Toyota, Hyundai and Mazda. It’s also nice to see improvements that are direct responses to customer feedback.
But… that’s not to say there aren’t still things that can be improved upon to really make the Golf a winner. It’s missing engine options and tech features available in other markets, and despite a more conventional transmission it’s not really any cheaper to service than it has been previously.
For me, the drivetrain is a sticking point – Australians simply aren’t getting the best of what the Golf has to offer. While the venerable 1.4 TSI is a great little engine, it’s hamstrung by a dopey and uninspiring eight-speed automatic that lacks the crispness and decisiveness of VW’s signature DSG shifters, even if it’s a little quicker off the line.
No mild-hybrid or plug-in hybrid options for Australia also seems to be a misstep given increasing demand for more efficient and electrified drivetrains in Australia. Tangible efficiency gains from the MHEV tech as well as 100km-plus of EV range in the PHEVs would give the Golf a real point of difference in the market, and their absence seems even more of a shame when other brands under the VW Group umbrella have access locally.
We’d also like to see the more premium features and tech that’s available overseas offered locally, like Matrix LED headlights (given you can get them on a Polo), an extended range of paint options (including two-tone), the lighter Mistral Grey interior for the Style, as well as Park Assist Plus. All of these could turn the Golf into a properly premium compact, even if they were only available as options.
Regardless, the Volkswagen Golf remains a strong contender in the small car segment. If you’re not rushing to get a hybrid or EV, there’s still plenty to like about this understated German hatchback.
Interested in buying a Volkswagen Golf? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
JioStar said user trust is its top priority and it maintains high cybersecurity standards, while continuing to monitor and prevent future cyber threats
JioStar denied reports of a cyber attack on its IT systems. (Image: News18/File)
JioStar on Wednesday denied reports of a cyber attack, assuring users that their data and streaming services remain secure and uncompromised.
The Reliance-owned OTT platform said news reports in certain regional publications about a “cyber intrusion” of its IT systems are “false and utterly baseless”, and that their core servers remain protected.
“We wish to clarify that news reports in certain regional publications regarding an attempted cyber intrusion of JioStar’s IT systems are false and utterly baseless,” read a media statement released by Reliance Industries Limited on its official social media handle on X.
MEDIA STATEMENT We wish to clarify that news reports in certain regional publications regarding an attempted cyber intrusion of JioStar’s IT systems are false and utterly baseless. We would like to reassure all our users, partners, and stakeholders that our core servers remain…
— Reliance Industries Limited (@RIL_Updates) May 7, 2025
“We would like to reassure all our users, partners, and stakeholders that our core servers remain secure and uncompromised. All user data and streaming services are fully protected. There has been no disruption to our platform operations, and all sports and entertainment streaming on JioStar continues uninterrupted,” it read.
JioStar further said user trust is its top priority and it maintains high cybersecurity standards, while continuing to monitor and prevent any future cyber threat.
“At JioStar, safeguarding user trust is our highest priority. We remain committed to maintaining the highest standards of cybersecurity and continue to monitor our systems proactively to prevent any future threats,” it added.
Stay updated with all the latest business news, including market trends, stock updates, tax, IPO, banking finance, real estate, savings and investments. Get in-depth analysis, expert opinions, and real-time updates—only on News18. Also Download the News18 App to stay updated!
First Published:
News business ‘False And Baseless’: JioStar Denies Reports Of ‘Cyber Intrusion’, Says User Data Secure
While much of crypto Twitter has gone silent on hyped-up meme coins and trendy Layer-2 tokens, big utility projects like XRP and HBAR have quietly kept building, forming deals, partnerships, and preparing for something much bigger behind the scenes.
Crypto analyst Vincent Van Code says that XRP could play a major role in fixing one of the biggest problems in global finance: liquidity. He compares the XRP Ledger (XRPL) to a surgeon’s scalpel — a powerful tool that’s only valuable in the right hands. And right now, it seems like the right players are getting into position.
Looking at the current market, he points out that by 2025, the hype around meme coins and Layer 2/ERC-20 tokens has mostly faded. Meanwhile, bigger projects like XRP and HBAR have quietly been building real utility, securing partnerships, and setting themselves up for long-term success.
“These big companies don’t rely on retail, all tokens that exchange hands in substantial volumes are done via dark pools/OTC,” he wrote.
When Could XRP Hit $1,000?
Vincent says the real question isn’t if XRP can hit $1,000, but when. For that to happen, Ripple would need to secure a major share of the cross-border payments market and position XRP as a global reserve currency.
It seems like a far-fetched goal, but one that could help solve two of the financial world’s biggest issues: liquidity shortages and the risks of endless money printing. Instead of constantly creating new dollars, networks like XRP could inject liquidity into the system in a smarter, more sustainable way. That’s where assets like RLUSD and XRP could shine.
Recent data shows the XRP Ledger is growing, with over 1 million payments between accounts recorded in early May 2025. That’s a clear sign that big players are starting to use XRPL despite market volatility.
What About XRP’s Price? (Short-Term)
Analyst Steph Is Crypto said that XRP is currently retesting a major upward trend line. If it holds this level, it could be the start of a significant price move. If it slips below $2, there might be a quick dip before a bounce back. Interestingly, the RSI (Relative Strength Index) recently broke above a key trend line, similar to what happened before a 600% rally in 2024.
Analyst XForceGlobal remains bullish, saying that as long as XRP stays above $1.60, the uptrend is intact and a new all-time high could be on the horizon. At the time of writing, XRP is trading around $2.18, up 1.4% in the past 24 hours.
The Chennai-based Veranda Learning Solutions, an end-to-end solutions in the education sector, has inducted next generation into the company with Abinaya Kalpathi, younger daughter of the firm’s Executive Director and Chairman Suresh Kalpathi, appointed as AGM (Marketing).
She holds a bachelor’s degree from Imperial College London and a master’s degree from Queen’s University Belfast. In her new role, she will be playing a key role in driving brand strategy, digital outreach, and student engagement efforts across the company’s diverse portfolio, the release said.
The company also announced Saurani Pathan Mohasin Khan as its new Chief Financial Officer. He takes over from Saradha Govindarajan, who steps down to pursue personal interests and commitments. A Chartered Accountant and Company Secretary, Khan joined Veranda in 2022 and has since served as Deputy General Manager – Finance, the release said.
At 11.57 am, the company’s share price on the NSE was trading at ₹213.84, down by ₹7.09 (3.21 per cent).
Looking for the most recent Mini Crossword answer? Click here for today’s Mini Crossword hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Wordle, Strands, Connections and Connections: Sports Edition puzzles.
Today’s NYT Mini Crossword could be tricky. 1-Across tripped me up for a while, but I was able to solve the other clues and then figure it out. Need some help with today’s Mini Crossword? Read on. And if you could use some hints and guidance for daily solving, check out our Mini Crossword tips.
The Mini Crossword is just one of many games in the Times’ games collection. If you’re looking for today’s Wordle, Connections, Connections: Sports Edition and Strands answers, you can visit CNET’s NYT puzzle hints page.
Read more: Tips and Tricks for Solving The New York Times Mini Crossword
Let’s get at those Mini Crossword clues and answers.
The completed NYT Mini Crossword for May 8, 2025.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
Mini across clues and answers
1A clue: Adjective that rhymes with “sheesh” or “pitch,” depending on who you ask Answer: NICHE
6A clue: Colossal ___, marine animal filmed in its natural habitat for the first time in 2025 Answer: SQUID
7A clue: Like some caterpillars Answer: FURRY
8A clue: Some spouses Answer: WIVES
9A clue: Bill’s time-traveling partner of film Answer: TED
Mini down clues and answers
1D clue: Letters meaning “Don’t click this in public!” Answer: NSFW
2D clue: “You can take this job and shove it!” Answer: IQUIT
3D clue: Feature of a winding road Answer: CURVE
4D clue: Added to the payroll Answer: HIRED
5D clue: Dreyer’s ice cream, on the East Coast Answer: EDYS
How to play more Mini Crosswords
The New York Times Games section offers a large number of online games, but only some of them are free for all to play. You can play the current day’s Mini Crossword for free, but you’ll need a subscription to the Times Games section to play older puzzles from the archives.
Researchers have developed a new “body clock” tool that calculates people’s biological age — and could even predict the risk of disability or death.
The tool, which comes from the University of Washington (UW) School of Medicine, uses eight different metrics from a patient’s physical exam and bloodwork to determine the results, according to a press release from UW.
The tool’s method — officially named the Health Octo Tool — is detailed in the journal Nature Communication in a May 5 publication.
SECRETS OF LONGEVITY FROM THE WORLD’S ‘BLUE ZONES’
The researchers see this method as more comprehensive than current health assessments, which typically focus on individual diseases rather than overall wellness, according to the report’s first author, Dr. Shabnam Salimi, a physician-scientist and acting instructor in the Department of Anesthesiology & Pain Medicine at UW.
Researchers have developed a new “body clock” tool that calculates people’s biological age — and could even predict the risk of disability or death.(iStock)
Using data from large longevity studies, the Health Octo Tool was found to predict disability, geriatric syndrome (a group of common health conditions in older adults), Short Physical Performance Battery (a clinical tool that assesses lower extremity function in older adults) and mortality with 90% accuracy or greater, the study reported.
“An aging-based framework offers a new path to discover biomarkers and therapeutics that target organ-specific or whole-body aging, rather than individual diseases,” Salimi said in the release.
HEALTHY EATING IN MIDDLE AGE HAS THIS KEY LONGEVITY BENEFIT
The tool focuses on “health entropy,” which encompasses the amount of molecular and cellular damage the body has sustained over time.
That has a direct impact on the function of a person’s organs and overall body systems, which can be used to determine how fast they are aging, the researchers noted.
“Aging is a truly analog and non-digital process.”
The tool starts by assigning a “body organ disease number,” ranging from 1 to 14, based on whether the patient has experienced any diseases affecting the heart, lungs, brain or other specific organ systems.
“Our findings demonstrated that organ systems age at different rates, prompting us to develop a Bodily System-Specific Age metric to reflect the aging rate of each organ system and the Bodily-Specific Clock to represent each organ system’s intrinsic biological age,” Salimi said.
LIFE EXPECTANCY IN HUMANS NOT LIKELY TO INCREASE MUCH MORE, STUDY SUGGESTS
“Extending this concept to the whole body, we define the Body Clock as a composite measure of overall intrinsic age and body age as the corresponding rate of aging.”
Two of the components of the tool, Speed-Body Clock and Speed-Body Age, measure how biological age affects walking speed.
“An aging-based framework offers a new path to discover biomarkers and therapeutics that target organ-specific or whole-body aging, rather than individual diseases,” said the lead researcher.(iStock)
The Disability-Body Clock and Disability-Body Age components measure aging’s impact on cognitive function and physical disability, the release stated.
One takeaway from the research was that some seemingly minor conditions, such as untreated hypertension early in life, could have a significant impact on aging in later years, according to Salimi. This indicates that treating these conditions sooner could slow down biological aging.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
Looking ahead, the researchers plan to develop a digital app that people can use to track their own biological age, track how fast they are aging, and measure the impact of lifestyle changes.
“Whether someone is adopting a new diet, exercise routine or taking longevity-targeting drugs, they will be able to visualize how their body — and each organ system — is responding,” said Salimi.
“Aging is not a linear or wholly quantifiable process — it is influenced by myriad known and unknown genetic, molecular, environmental and psychosocial factors,” one doctor said.(iStock)
Dr. Brett Osborn, a Florida neurosurgeon who also runs a longevity practice, was not involved in the tool’s development, but commented on its potential benefits and limitations.
“This tool distinguishes itself by basing its model on readily accessible physical exam findings and standard lab tests, offering a potentially practical framework for clinical application,” he told Fox News Digital.
“An app is also being developed to empower patients and potentially encourage the development of health habits that will positively impact their healthspan — or how long they will remain functional and disease-free.”
RETIREMENT COULD BE BAD FOR YOUR HEALTH, SAYS WELLNESS EXPERT: ‘POWERED BY PURPOSE’
The doctor also praised the Octo Tool’s focus on system-based aging metrics rather than disease-specific assessments.
Osborn noted, however, that there are limitations to these types of proposed biological aging clocks — primarily that they can’t counter the “inherent complexity of aging.”
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“Aging is not a linear or wholly quantifiable process — it is influenced by myriad known and unknown genetic, molecular, environmental and psychosocial factors,” the doctor said.
“It is a truly ‘analog’ and ‘non–digital’ process. Therefore, it should be no surprise that no model has captured its entire landscape.”
The most important thing, according to one expert, is to use comprehensive testing and tracking as a springboard to the formation of lifelong health habits. (iStock)
UW’s tool doesn’t take into account certain genetic and DNA processes that influence biological aging, Osborn noted.
“Aging clocks have also often fallen short when applied across diverse populations or when predicting individual outcomes (lifespan),” he added.
“If it saves one person’s life by bringing their ailing health to their attention, that’s a win.”
Rather than determining absolute biological age, Osborn suggests using these tools to track trends over time.
“For example, tools like the Health Octo can help evaluate an individual’s response to interventions — be it a new exercise regimen, medication or lifestyle change.”
The most important thing, according to Osborn, is to use comprehensive testing and tracking as a springboard to the formation of lifelong health habits.
For more Health articles, visit foxnews.com/health
“If it saves one person’s life by bringing their ailing health (manifested as a downward trend) to their attention, that’s a win,” he said.
The research was supported by a National Institutes of Health grant from the U.S. National Institute on Aging.
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
Who knew that the humble bhindi, often overlooked for its slimy texture, held such surprising secrets? When soaked in water overnight, this everyday vegetable transforms into a nourishing wellness drink that may support everything from digestive health to glowing skin. Okra water is not just another fleeting health fad. It is, in fact, a time-tested remedy, backed by both traditional wisdom and growing scientific research. Consultant nutritionist Rupali Datta explains, “Today, okra water is assuming the status of a super drink. It has been in use for centuries. But with recent scientific studies supporting its health benefits, it is fast becoming popular.”
So, if you are looking to elevate your morning ritual with something simple, natural, and deeply nourishing, okra water might just be the wellness boost your existing regimen needs.
What Is Okra Water?
Okra water is pretty much what it sounds like. You need to slice up a few okra pods, soak them in water overnight and drink the slimy and tasteless liquid the next morning. Although the drink may not appear glamorous, it compensates with its rich nutrients and potential health benefits.
Also Read: 5 Health Benefits Of Drinking Jeera Saunf Water In Morning
Okra Water Health Benefits: 6 Reasons To Add It To Your Morning Ritual
Okra is a powerhouse of nutrients, offering a pool of health benefits. According to the book ‘Healing Foods’ by DK Publishing House, it is “a rich source of many nutrients, including fibre, vitamin B6, and folate”. All these factors make the humble drink a true gem for your good health.
1. Okra water for hydration:
Okra is rich in minerals like magnesium and potassium, which are essential for balancing electrolytes in the body. Adding okra water to your morning routine can provide a refreshing hydration boost, setting a healthy tone for the day.
2. Okra water for weight loss:
The fibre in okra helps curb appetite, while vitamin C works to flush out toxins. Together, these factors boost metabolism, accelerating the fat-burning process. Additionally, okra is incredibly low in calories, with less than 33 calories per 100 grams, according to USDA data.
3. Okra water for women’s health:
Okra is an excellent source of folate, which plays a crucial role in hormonal regulation, particularly for women. For those who may not know, folate is vital in preventing neural tube defects during the early stages of pregnancy.
4. Okra for blood sugar regulation:
One of the remarkable qualities of okra is its very low glycaemic index (GI). This helps maintain stable blood sugar levels by releasing sugar gradually into the bloodstream. The American Diabetes Association also recognises non-starchy vegetables like okra as safe and beneficial for individuals with diabetes.
5. Okra water for reducing inflammation:
Okra is packed with flavonoids and antioxidants, which are great for reducing inflammation and oxidative stress in the body. This powerful combination not only strengthens your immune system but also improves blood and oxygen flow to skin cells, resulting in healthier, more radiant skin.
6. Okra water for heart health:
Okra is a nutritional powerhouse, boasting soluble fibre, antioxidants like polyphenols, and vitamins A and C. These components work together to lower cholesterol, prevent blood clots, and shield against oxidative damage, all of which contribute to better heart health.
Also Read: How To Cut Bhindi Without Slime
Photo Credit: iStock
How To Make Okra Water?
Consultant nutritionist Rupali Datta shares a quick recipe to prepare okra water the right way.
Step 1. Slit 5 okra pods and soak in 2 glasses of water. Step 2. Keep it overnight. Step 3. The next morning, squeeze these soaked pods and mix the slime in water. Step 4. Drink the water.
Also Read: Why You Should Start Your Day With Lemon Water
Can You Drink Okra Water Every Day?
Rupali Datta states that okra water can easily be a part of your daily morning ritual. To get the best result, the expert suggests having it empty stomach. “It is found to be the most effective and safe when had like this,” she adds.
The Takeaway:
Okra water totally lives up to the hype, courtesy of the amazing benefits of this nutrient-packed vegetable. Adding it to your daily diet can give your mornings a healthy boost. However, it is wise to consult an expert if you are allergic to okra or have irritable bowel syndrome (IBS), as the fructan in okra might worsen your symptoms. Choose your diet mindfully to fully enjoy the benefits of okra water.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-05-07/What-messages-are-the-upcoming-first-China-U-S-trade-talks-sending–1DboqH9JsOI/img/1cb90b1bd75e4e2188f31a63a27eab1c/1cb90b1bd75e4e2188f31a63a27eab1c.png' alt='A file photo of national flags of China and the United States. /VCG'
Almost one month after the so-called “reciprocal tariffs” imposed on Chinese imports by the U.S. took effect on April 9, China and the United States said that they will hold the first high-level economic and trade meeting in Switzerland.
During his visit to Switzerland from May 9 to 12, Chinese Vice Premier He Lifeng, also the Chinese lead person for China-U.S. economic and trade affairs, will have a meeting with U.S. Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent, announced the Chinese Foreign Ministry on Wednesday.
The United States has repeatedly expressed its desire to hold negotiations with China in recent days, and the upcoming meeting in Switzerland will take place at the request of the U.S. side, said Lin Jian, a spokesperson for the Chinese Foreign Ministry.
Sun Chenghao, an assistant researcher at the Center for International Security and Strategy (CISS) at Tsinghua University, said the choice of Switzerland as the meeting location demonstrates China’s willingness to have equal dialogue with the U.S. in a relatively neutral environment, free from excessive geopolitical pressure.
As a renowned neutral state and a symbolic hub for multilateral diplomacy – hosting numerous agencies of the United Nations – this venue selection of Switzerland underscores China’s commitment to multilateralism and respect for international rules, Sun told CGTN.
In comments on the meeting between the Chinese and U.S. senior officials, a spokesperson for the Chinese Commerce Ministry said that after taking into account global expectations, national interests, and calls from the American industry and consumers, China has decided to engage with the U.S. side.
Sun said China’s agreement on engagement demonstrates Beijing’s recognition of the international community’s expectations for a stable China-U.S. relation, as well as their concerns over the ongoing trade and tariff disputes between the world’s two largest economies.
It also reflects Beijing’s awareness of growing unease among U.S. businesses and consumers regarding the negative impacts of the high tariffs, he said.
By holding the talks, China aims to push the U.S. government to return to a rational approach, thereby mitigating disruptions to the global economy, he added.
The International Monetary Fund (IMF) on April 22 downgraded global growth forecast in 2025 to 2.8 percent, a hefty 0.5 percentage point decrease from its January projection, citing “near-universal” U.S. reciprocal tariffs “not seen in a century” announced on April 2.
News of the meeting between China and the U.S. sent U.S. equity index futures higher, and Asian stock markets, including those of the Chinese mainland and Hong Kong, also rose.
China’s cards
The spokesperson for the Chinese Foreign Ministry on Wednesday also rejected recent U.S. claims that China cannot withstand the “pressure” of additional high tariffs.
No external shocks can alter the fundamental strengths of China’s economy – its stability, multiple advantages, strong resilience and vast potential, Lin said. “Nor can they disrupt the steady momentum of China’s high-quality development.”
Sun also analyzed China’s negotiating leverage and strategic advantages over the U.S.
First, China has implemented well-calibrated countermeasures, including reciprocal tariffs on U.S. goods and export controls on critical materials like rare earths and rare metals, he said. These measures have exerted tangible pressure on U.S. industries like the high-tech sector, he added.
Second, China’s vast domestic market and strong purchasing power serve as compelling leverage to incentivize U.S. concessions on tariff issues, Sun continued.
Moreover, at the global level, China’s extensive multilateral cooperation network – reinforced by recent diplomatic outreach with the European Union, Association of Southeast Asian Nations, and other partners – effectively hedges against U.S. tariff impacts through diversified economic partnerships, he said.
Commenting on ongoing negotiations between the U.S. and other economies, the spokesperson for the Chinese Commerce Ministry said appeasement will not bring peace, nor will compromise earn respect.
“This sends a message to other economies: When negotiating with the U.S., you can’t count on securing temporary peace by sacrificing your own interests. And we are also reminding them of not undermining China’s legitimate interests in their bilateral talks with the U.S.,” said Sun.
This also exerts pressure on the U.S. to return to fair negotiations within a multilateral framework, he said.
In their new book, Glennon Doyle, Abby Wambach and Amanda Doyle admit they don’t have the key to happiness. And their podcast audience loves them for it.
During FY25, the company expanded its footprint by opening 38 branches and increased its network to 300 locations.
Aptus Value Housing Finance, on Tuesday, posted a 26 per cent year-on-year increase in the net profit for quarter ended March 2025 on the back of strong growth in disbursements. The net profit for the March quarter stood at ₹207 crore compared to ₹164 crore in the same quarter last fiscal.
Disbursements during the quarter rose 10 per cent y-o-y to ₹1,064 crore. Total assets under management (AUM) stood at ₹10,865 crore as of March 31, representing a 25 per cent increase compared to the year-ago period.
P Balaji, Managing Director, Aptus Value Housing Finance said that during FY25, the company expanded its footprint by opening 38 branches and increased its network to 300 locations. “In FY25, we disbursed ₹3,604 crore, achieving a 15 per cent year-on-year growth. This reflects the strength of our operational execution and strategic focus, which also enabled us to grow our AUM by 25 per cent year-on-year,” he said in a statement.
Aptus posted a 23 per cent y-o-y growth in net profit, reaching ₹751 crore in FY25, supported by business expansion and stable asset quality. The company said that it has reached a 92 per cent adoption rate for digital agreements, their digital collections remained strong at 96 per cent, and the penetration of account aggregators increased to 57 per cent.
However, gross non-performing assets (GNPA) rose marginally to 1.19 per cent in quarter ended March 2025 compared to 1.07 per cent in Q4FY24. Net NPA was at 0.89 per cent in March 2025 compared to 0.80 per cent in the same quarter last year.
“As on March 31, 2025, we maintained sufficient liquidity of around ₹1,155 crore including undrawn sanctions of ₹678 crore. The company is well capitalised with a net worth of over ₹4,317 crore and the capital adequacy as on March 31, 2025 was 70 per cent,” Balaji said.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
KLASIČNI Salomon XT-6 model, poznat po svojem robusnom dizajnu i detaljima koji nalikuju na tragove blata s planinskih staza, sada je dobio mekšu verziju zahvaljujući suradnji s brendom NAKED Copenhagen.
Inspirirane zlatnim sjajem danskog ljeta, ove redizajnirane tenisice spajaju funkcionalnost s izraženim ženstvenim dodirom.
Za planine i za gradske ulice
Iako je XT-6 originalno stvoren za planinarenje, ovaj model jednako dobro funkcionira na popločanim ulicama grada. Uz udobnost koja ne žrtvuje stil, ne čudi što je ova silueta postala ključni komad u uličnoj modi Kopenhagena jer su udobnost i stil lako spojivi.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Tenisice na gornjem dijelu imaju nježnoružičastu mrežicu i detalje u kremastoj boji. Jezik krase tamnocrveni naglasci, a smeđi tonovi nalaze se oko pete, dajući dubinu i toplinu cjelokupnom izgledu.
Novi model NAKED Copenhagen x Salomon XT-6 ekskluzivno je dostupan za kupnju na službenoj web stranici brenda NAKED.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Former Lakers player and head coach Byron Scott is accused in a lawsuit obtained by The Times of sexually assaulting a 15-year-old student at Studio City Campbell Hall High School in 1987.
The former student alleges that Scott escorted her into a janitor’s closet and that according to the lawsuit he “began kissing her on the mouth as she repeatedly asked ‘what are you doing?’
“Then, despite her clear protests, Scott pushed [her] to her knees, and, against her will, pulled off her top. Scott then pulled down his shorts, exposed his erect penis, and tried to force [her] to perform oral sex on him.”
The lawsuit originally was filed in Los Angeles Superior Court on Dec. 30, 2022, but Scott was referred to as “John Doe,” the Lakers as “one of the most popular NBA franchise teams” and Campbell Hall as “Private School Doe.” An amended complaint filed May 1 named Scott, the Lakers and Campbell Hall after a judge denied objections by Scott that he shouldn’t be identified because he is a public figure and that there wasn’t evidence to corroborate the woman’s claims.
The plaintiff is named in her lawsuit but The Times doesn’t publish the names of alleged sexual assault victims. She came forward after the California Child Victim’s Act took effect in 2020, extending the statute of limitations for survivors of childhood sexual abuse to file civil claims against their abusers.
“Like many victims of childhood sexual assault, [she] was resigned to deal with the trauma privately, with only few close to her and a handful of mental professionals knowing what occurred on that summer day,” the lawsuit states.
“Then, Governor Newsom passed the California Child Victim’s Act, which revived [her] claims against the former professional athlete and the elite Los Angeles private school, and perhaps others. And while still a difficult decision to come forward now and relive the trauma, [she] is bravely doing so to shine a light and to seek some amount of justice and hopefully closure for the significant psychological trauma and emotional distress that she has experienced every day since the sexual assault.”
Scott’s attorney, Linda Bauermeister, issued a statement to The Times: “Our client is devastated by this complaint, a basketball event that took place in 1987. Our client believed the plaintiff to be over 18 and had no idea she would claim otherwise until 35 years later. He respects girls and women, and the claims have blindsided him and his family.”
Scott was 26 when a handful of Lakers players and officials filmed an instructional training video in the Campbell Hall gym. According to the complaint, the alleged victim was left alone with adults during a break and struck up a conversation with Scott. They ate lunch together and she gave him a tour of school facilities.
They soon were alone and, according to the complaint, Scott “forcefully grabbed [her] by the arm and pulled her inside the room.” The complaint says she had “never kissed a boy.”
The complaint blames the school for creating the circumstances for the sexual assault, saying, “Campbell Hall faculty and staff failed to take any steps or implement any safeguards to supervise or otherwise protect Plaintiff from anything that could, and eventually would, happen to her.”
“… she continues to suffer, severe psychological and emotional distress, as well as feelings of embarrassment, loss of self-esteem, shame, and humiliation,” the lawsuit states.
Scott, who grew up in Los Angeles and attended Inglewood Morningside High, began his fifth season with the Lakers, with whom he spent 11 of his 14 NBA seasons and won three championships, in 1987. He went on to coach five NBA teams over 15 seasons, including the Lakers from 2014 to 2016.
Google has introduced a new feature called Simplify in its iOS app, designed to help users better understand complex text online. This feature uses Google’s Gemini AI model to generate simpler versions of highlighted text without leaving the current web page, as per The Verge.
The Simplify feature can be accessed by highlighting any text on a website and tapping the Simplify icon from the menu options.
This feature is particularly useful for breaking down technical jargon, such as medical terms, into more digestible language.
For example, Simplify can explain terms like “emphysema” and “fibrosis” in a way that’s easy to understand.
Google’s testing showed that people found the simplified versions to be “significantly more helpful than the original complex text.”
However, the company acknowledges that the study has limitations and emphasises the need for ongoing vigilance to monitor errors.
While the Simplify feature is currently available on the iOS Google app, the company hasn’t announced plans for Android or desktop Chrome users.
According to Google spokesperson Jennifer Kutz, “We don’t have anything to announce yet, but we’re always looking to bring useful features to more of our products,” as quoted by the Verge.
Last year, John Lithgow starred as Roald Dahl in Mark Rosenblatt’s debut play to critical acclaim.
Alongside Elliot Levey’s Best Supporting Actor gong, both won Olivier awards for the production that has since transferred to the West End’s Harold Pinter Theatre, where it’s running for the next three months.
The new Dumbledore plays the author amid backlash to an antisemitic piece he wrote on the 1982 Lebanon War.
Living with his fiancée Liccy (Rachael Stirling) in a house under renovation, Dahl undergoes his own as his Jewish publisher Tom Maschler (Elliot Levy) supports his friend through the PR crisis.
Meanwhile, visiting American Jewish sales executive Jessie Stone goes from starstruck fan to furious Israel apologist in a fantastic performance.
The title Giant questions the towering, charming Dahl as a BFG and asks whether he’s actually a Goliath in need of taking down. Lithgow is sensational in this complex lead role, which is especially impressive for a man turning 80 this year.
The witty, engaging (and at times offensive) dialogue causes the audience to belly laugh and gasp as the text inevitably dives into the ever-relevant debate around Israel-Palestine, even though it was written prior to the ongoing conflict. Additionally, cancel culture comes to mind as the script asks how one relates to the beloved work of an author if one deems their character to be beyond the pale.
The nuance of ideas across this beautifully acted production will have you internally wrestling long after the show ends. It may go on a tad too long, but this is a rich and challenging piece of new theatre to be sought out before Lithgow takes up his wizard beard.
Giant is playing at the Harold Pinter Theatre until August 2 and tickets can be purchased here.
The Volvo XC70 is back, but this time around it’s a not jacked high-riding wagon, but a plug-in hybrid crossover.
The XC70 is the first product from Volvo to ride on the new Scalable Modular Architecture (SMA) designed primarily for “extended range plug-in hybrid” drivetrains.
Newly reinstalled CEO Hakan Samuelsson says the new XC70 offers a “highly attractive alternative to customers who are not yet ready for fully electric cars”.
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Drivetrain and battery details have yet to be released, but the company claims the XC70 has an EV range of 200km when using China’s generous CLTC standard.
Similarly Volvo is keeping its powder dry regarding the XC70’s dimensions, with the company simply stating it is “slightly larger and more spacious” than the 4.7m-long XC60.
The XC70 will be available to order later this year in China, and Volvo says it will explore “potential additional markets at a later stage”. Presumably more details about the car will be released closer to its full launch.
Like the all-electric ES90 sedan and EX90 crossover, the XC70 has a grille-less front end featuring the latest interpretation of the Thor’s hammer headlight graphic.
Along the side, the XC70 has flush-fitting door handles and frameless windows. While at the rear, the brand’s signature hockey stick tail-lights reach all the way up to the roof.
Back in 2021 Volvo was one of the first “legacy” automakers to commit to an electric-only range, promising to sell its last vehicle with an internal combustion engine by 2030. In Australia the brand was even more ambitious, claiming it would go EV-only by 2026.
While the market share for electric vehicles continues to grow, especially in Europe and China, their uptake hasn’t been quite as fast as many automakers had originally envisioned. Volvo has now revised its target, hoping to have electrified vehicles — plug-in hybrid and full electric — account for 90 per cent of global sales by 2030.
Clearly the launch of an all-new plug-in hybrid model in 2025 wasn’t part of Volvo’s planning at the beginning of the decade. With the XC70, not only is Volvo reacting to drivetrain preferences, but according to Mr Samuelsson, it is also “example of regionalisation, where we adapt to the local market needs”.
Following on from the EM90 people mover, the XC70 is second Volvo model designed primarily with China in mind.
The XC70 name has been dormant since the mid-2010s. Originally launched in 1997 as a high-riding, all-wheel drive variant of the V70 wagon patterned after the highly popular Subaru Outback based on Liberty wagon.
Early 2000s XC70
Branding differed from market to market, with some calling the lifted the Volvo wagon the V70 Cross Country, and others the V70 XC. It wasn’t until after the launch and success of the XC90 crossover the company finally settled on the XC70 name.
Starting in 2016, Volvo simplified its model naming structure around the 40-, 60- and 90-series, eliminating the likes of the V70 and S80. It also reserved the XC prefix for its SUV-like crossovers, with lifted wagons reverting to the Cross Country moniker.
Ajit Jain’s rise from modest beginnings to becoming Vice Chairman of Berkshire Hathaway’s reinsurance business is a story of intellect, grit, and an uncanny grasp of risk.
Warren Buffett has never hidden his regard for Ajit Jain.
In the corridors of Berkshire Hathaway, one name resonates with quiet power and immense influence – Ajit Jain. Though he may not be a household name in India, this soft-spoken executive from a small town in Odisha has won the admiration of none other than Warren Buffett himself.
Born in Sundargarh, a remote district in Odisha, Jain’s journey is the stuff of legend. His rise from modest beginnings to becoming Vice Chairman of Berkshire Hathaway’s reinsurance business is a story of intellect, grit, and an uncanny grasp of risk.
After completing his schooling in Odisha, Jain secured a place at the prestigious Indian Institute of Technology (IIT), Kharagpur. Not stopping there, he pursued an MBA from Harvard, arming himself with the tools to take on the financial world. His career began at IBM, followed by a stint at McKinsey & Company. But the real turning point came in 1986 when he joined Berkshire Hathaway – a company that would become the canvas for his extraordinary vision.
At that time, Berkshire’s reinsurance division was a little-known arm of the sprawling conglomerate. With a skeletal team of just 14 and no personal assistant, Jain began building something remarkable. Over the next four decades, he transformed that humble operation into a profit-generating behemoth worth $780 million. Known in global circles as an “Insurance Guru”, Jain developed a reputation for embracing complex, high-risk policies that other insurers wouldn’t dare touch, and turning them into lucrative wins.
Jain’s deep understanding of the business helped Berkshire tighten its grip on traditional markets while expanding smartly into emerging ones. His risk appetite and strategic clarity earned him accolades and admiration across continents.
Warren Buffett, famously frugal with praise, has never hidden his regard for Jain. In his 2025 annual letter to shareholders, Buffett wrote that bringing Ajit Jain into the company was his most “winning decision”. He placed Jain in the same sentence as Charlie Munger and GEICO, two of the most influential pillars in Berkshire’s history.
“But I’ve also had many pleasant surprises in both the potential of the business as well as the ability and fidelity of the manager. And our experience is that a single winning decision can make a breathtaking difference over time. (Think GEICO as a business decision, Ajit Jain as a managerial decision and my luck in finding Charlie Munger as a one-of-a-kind partner, personal advisor and steadfast friend.) Mistakes fade away; winners can forever blossom.”
Despite his massive influence and wealth, Jain’s net worth is estimated at over Rs 1.66 lakh crore (approximately $2 billion), he remains really private. He shuns public appearances and avoids the limelight, preferring instead to focus on ideas and strategy behind closed doors. Buffett has described him as an “ideas factory” and a “rare gem” yet to be fully discovered by the world.
Stay updated with all the latest business news, including market trends, stock updates, tax, IPO, banking finance, real estate, savings and investments. Get in-depth analysis, expert opinions, and real-time updates—only on News18. Also Download the News18 App to stay updated!
First Published:
News business Who Is Ajit Jain? Meet The Genius Warren Buffett Calls His ‘Winning Decision’
The sentiments around the SUI price are growing and becoming more bullish day by day. After the massive rise from the bearish captivity, the investor’s attention has been over the tokens that are closely monitoring the token’s price movements. The bulls defending the dynamic support at $3.03 indicate their strong pressures as they appear to be poised to elevate the levels towards new highs. The SUI price is trying to secure the levels above $3.5, but the bears are working hard to restrict the rally below $3.4. Despite this, the token is flashing a major bullish signal, suggesting a new ATH could be on the horizon.
The volume of SUI has been on the rise since the September 2024 rebound, which surged and marked highs above $3.5 billion. This was when the price marked a new ATH. After a notable volume squeeze, the volume has begun to rise again as it surges above $1.5 billion. On the other hand, the SOL transaction count has also soared and marked levels above 10 billion for the first time in history.
The consistent rise in the transaction count suggests the network’s traffic is constantly on the rise, as the investors have been extremely vigilant over the SOL price action. Moreover, they continue to remain bullish on the token as the volume has again begun to rise, with a massive increase in the transaction count. This makes SUI one of the most monitored tokens and hence hints towards a potential upswing in the coming days.
SUI price is closely following the Elliott wave theory and has accomplished the bullish and bearish waves. Moreover, the rise from the local bottoms and the consolidation that followed raises the possibility of yet another Elliott wave in the making. Meanwhile, the Gaussian Channel has turned bullish, which suggests the beginning of a bullish trend. However, RSI displays a bearish divergence, so should this be a matter of concern?
Well, during the previous upswing, when the price marked a bullish wave, the RSI surged to the overbought levels, followed by a pullback. However, after a small consolidation, the levels triggered a rebound and entered the overbought range. It has to be noted that the RSI has sustained above the average range, within the upper bands during the bullish Elliot wave, and hence, until this pattern is maintained, the SUI price will remain under bullish influence.
Therefore, considering the Sui price will continue with the fresh Elliot wave, it could form a new ATH somewhere around $9 to $9.2 in the second half of 2025.
The Union Cabinet has approved two major initiatives aimed at enhancing India’s higher education and vocational training infrastructure.
| Photo Credit:
NAGARA GOPAL/THE HINDU
The Union Cabinet on Wednesday approved two initiatives to boost infrastructure facilities at five new Indian Institutes of Technology (IITs) and to augment the capacity of Industrial Training Institutes (ITIs).
IITs
According to a government statement, the cost for expansion of the academic and infrastructure capacity of five new IITs has been pegged at ₹11,828.79 crore over a period of four years from 2025-26 to 2028-29. These five IITs are located in Tirupati (Andhra Pradesh), Palakkad (Kerala), Bhilai (Chhattisgarh), Jammu (UT of Jammu and Kashmir) and, Dharwad (Karnataka). The Cabinet also approved creation of 130 faculty posts at the level of professor in these IlTs.
Five new state-of-the-art research parks are also coming up to strengthen industry-academia linkage, the statement said.
“Student strength in these IITs will be increased by more than 6,500 in the next four years with enhancement of 1,364 students in first year, 1,738 students in second year, 1,767 students in third year and 1,707 students in fourth year across Under Graduate (UG), Post Graduate (PG) and PhD programmes put together,” the statement said.
Further, upon completion of construction, these five IITs shall be able to cater to 13,687 students, which is against the current student strength of 7,111, i.e., an increase of 6,576 students. “With this increase in the total number of seats, additional more than 6,500 students will now be able to fulfil their aspirations of studying in the most prestigious and sought-after educational institutions in the country,” it added.
With this increase in the total number of seats, more than 6,500 students will now be able to fulfil their aspirations of studying in the most prestigious and sought-after educational institutions in the country. The announcement for their expansion was made in the Union Budget for 2025-26 by Finance Minister Nirmala Sitharaman. The academic session of IlTs at Palakkad and Tirupati started in 2015-16 and the remaining three in 2016-17 from their temporary campuses. These IITs are now functioning from their permanent campuses.
ITIs
In another decision, the government gave the nod to the National Scheme for Industrial Training Institute Upgradation and setting up of five National Centres of Excellence for Skilling with a total outlay of ₹60,000 crore. “The scheme will focus on upgradation of 1,000 government ITIs in hub and spoke arrangement with industry-aligned revamped trades (courses) and Capacity Augmentation of five National Skill Training Institutes (NSTIs), including setting up of five National Centres of Excellence for Skilling in these institutes,” an official statement said.
It will be implemented as a centrally sponsored scheme as per the announcement made in Budget 2024-25 and Budget 2025-26 with an outlay of ₹60,000 crore. This includes a central share of ₹30,000 crore, a state share of ₹20,000 crore, and an industry share of ₹10,000 crore, with co-financing to the extent of 50 per cent of the central share by the Asian Development Bank and the World Bank, equally.
“As our seventh theme park destination, it will rise from this land in spectacular fashion, blending contemporary architecture with cutting-edge technology to offer guests deeply immersive entertainment experiences in unique and modern ways,” said Disney’s CEO Bob Iger,
Disney and Miral posted a video with concept art and clips of Disney properties including Moana, Frozen and Tron. It touted Yas Island’s waterfront location as an opportunity to create interactive experience unique to this park. A spokesperson for Disney told CNN it’s been discussing this project for a decade and it’s interested in incorporating technologies such as Unreal Engine to fuse characters and stories into its attractions.
“This groundbreaking resort destination represents a new frontier in theme park development,” said Josh D’Amaro, chairman of Disney Experiences in a statement. “Our resort in Abu Dhabi will be the most advanced and interactive destination in our portfolio.
The company is celebrating its 70th birthday this month and through the rest of the year with events across its existing parks.
As Parkinson’s cases continue to rise, the race is on for therapies to combat the effects of the disease — and researchers have pinpointed an unlikely source of relief.
Psilocybin, a psychedelic compound found in some mushrooms, has been found to improve mood, cognition and motor symptoms in Parkinson’s patients, according to a new study from the University of California San Francisco (UCSF).
The substance, often referred to as “magic mushrooms,” has previously been shown to alleviate depression and anxiety, which prompted the researchers to explore its potential for Parkinson’s.
PSYCHEDELIC RETREAT REPORTS 183% SPIKE IN BOOKINGS AS HEALTH EXPERTS CITE ‘DOWNSIDE’ OF UNREGULATED USE
People with the neurological movement disorder often suffer from “debilitating mood dysfunction” and don’t tend to respond well to traditional antidepressants, according to a UCSF press release.
Psilocybin, a psychedelic compound found in some mushrooms, has been found to improve mood, cognition and motor symptoms in Parkinson’s patients.(iStock)
“Many people don’t realize this, but mood symptoms in Parkinson’s are linked to a faster physical decline,” said lead study author Ellen Bradley, M.D., assistant professor and associate director of UCSF’s Translational Psychedelic Research Program, in the release.
“And they are actually a stronger predictor of patients’ quality of life with Parkinson’s than their motor symptoms.”
The small study included 12 people with mild to moderate Parkinson’s disease. They ranged in age from 40 to 75. All had depression and/or anxiety.
FDA REJECTS MDMA AS PSYCHEDELIC-BASED TREATMENT FOR MENTAL HEALTH, PTSD
They all received a 10 mg-dose of psilocybin, then a 25 mg-dose two weeks later. To measure the effects, the participants met with a licensed therapist before and after receiving the medication.
At the one-week and one-month follow-ups, the patients reported “clinically significant improvements” not only in mood and cognition, but also motor function.
“Many people don’t realize this, but mood symptoms in Parkinson’s are linked to a faster physical decline.”
“These results are really encouraging,” Bradley told Fox News Digital. “Depression and anxiety, which debilitate so many people with Parkinson’s, improved significantly — and those improvements lasted for at least three months after patients took the drug.”
Amir Inamdar, a pharmaceutical physician in the U.K. and chief medical officer at Cybin, noted that the improvement in motor symptoms was somewhat surprising.
“As the authors note, this could be because of the modulation of dopamine via psilocybin’s effect on several serotonin receptor types.” (Inamdar was not involved in the study.)
The most common side effects of psilocybin were anxiety, nausea, headache and elevated blood pressure, but none were serious enough to require medical care, according to the researchers.
People with the neurological movement disorder often suffer from “debilitating mood dysfunction” and don’t tend to respond well to traditional antidepressants.(iStock)
“Despite the reports of challenging experiences in a couple of participants, psilocybin seemed to be well-tolerated,” Inamdar noted. “The side effects were consistent with what has been seen in other studies, with no precipitation/ exacerbation of psychotic symptoms.”
The study, which was published in Neuropsychopharmacology, a Nature publication, was funded by an anonymous donor.
Limitations and further research
This was the first study to measure the effects of a psychedelic substance on patients with a neurodegenerative disease, according to USCF.
While this study was an “important first step,” Bradley noted that the researchers can’t draw conclusions from it, as it was a small pilot without a control group.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“We’ve now started a much larger trial designed to rigorously test if psilocybin is effective in Parkison’s,” she told Fox News Digital.
“We’re also collecting multimodal biological data to understand how psilocybin works. That’s critical not just for optimizing psilocybin treatments, but also for guiding development of next-generation psychedelics that are in the pipeline now and could be promising for people with Parkinson’s.”
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
Bradley still recommends that Parkinson’s patients approach psilocybin and other psychedelics with “a lot of caution.”
“I wouldn’t recommend to my patients with Parkinson’s that they start using psilocybin,” she clarified. “We’re very, very early in this research, and we don’t think these drugs will be safe for everyone with the illness.”
This was the first study to measure the effects of a psychedelic substance on patients with a neurodegenerative disease, according to USCF.(iStock)
“I hope that people continue to advocate for research so we can speed this process of identifying the right psychedelic treatment for the right patient at the right time.”
Inamadar agreed that while the results are encouraging, the study was based on a small and limited sample.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
“The study was also open-label, which lends itself to higher expectancy effects, though the improvements in mood and anxiety symptoms were still seen at three months,” he added.
“Overall, [the] quite encouraging results warrant further investigation, certainly in trying to understand the mechanism behind improvement in motor symptoms.”
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
We have all heard about the Met Gala. The biggest event in the world of fashion took place on May 5 at the Metropolitan Museum of Art in New York. Celebrities brought their A-game to the blue carpet. Oh, and to forget the many firsts. From Shah Rukh ‘King’ Khan to Diljit Dosanjh, the icons added stardust with their debut. While a section was floored by SRK’s Rs 21 crore watch, some fans, including us, couldn’t take their eyes off Diljit’s majestic royal look. Don’t know about you, but Chef Ranveer Brar shares a similar sentiment.
Celebrity chef Ranveer Brar has manifested his Met Gala moment – but with a spicy desi twist. In an AI-generated image, Ranveer is seen rocking a green blazer paired with matching flared pants. But the real star? Dhaniya (coriander)!
A butterfly-shaped cape made of coriander leaves steals the show, while a quirky dhaniya-themed bag hangs as the main accessory. To top it all off, he is holding a kitchen utensil like a true chef on the red carpet. It’s kitchen couture meets high fashion – and Ranveer pulls it off like a pro.
For those wondering about the coriander obsession, it is no joke. Ranveer Brar is a dhaniya lover, and his cooking videos are full of this herb.
In his caption, Ranveer Brar wrote, “Manifesting my Met Gala walk with my priya mitra dhaniya.”
Also Read:From “Dosa Drape” To “Khaman Core”- Swiggy’s Foodie Take On Met Gala Outfits Wins Hearts
The comments section of the post was flooded with LOL reactions.
A user wrote, “Haha nailed it.”
Another one added, “It seems something different & unique.”
“METhi Gala,” read a quirky comment.
Many called the chef “Dhanveer Brar.”
“Dhaniya king,” echoed a few.
An Instagrammer posted, “The best look.”
A LOL comment read, “Hara bhara Ranveera.”
What do you think about Ranveer Brar’s look? Tell us in the comments.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-05-06/Australia-vows-to-fight-against-U-S-film-tariffs-after-Labor-wins-1D9GJkmVFNC/img/258e1ee66dca463eb405e9901d218f77/258e1ee66dca463eb405e9901d218f77.png' alt='Australian Prime Minister Anthony Albanese speaks during a press conference at Parliament House in Canberra, Australia, May 5, 2025. /VCG'
Australia’s re-elected Labor Party government will make the case that U.S. tariffs on foreign-made films are “unjustified,” a senior minister has said.
Amanda Rishworth, the minister for social services, said on Tuesday that the government’s “whole team,” including Prime Minister Anthony Albanese, would present a “very strong case” to the United States against the new tariffs following Labor’s landslide victory in Saturday’s election for the 48th parliament.
“These are just unjustified tariffs,” said Rishworth, who was a member of Albanese’s cabinet in the 47th parliament but whose role in the 48th has not yet been announced, in an interview with Nine Network television.
U.S. President Donald Trump announced a 100 percent tariff on films produced outside the United States on Monday.
Addressing reporters in Canberra on Monday, Albanese said he had spoken to Trump following the election and that they had discussed tariffs.
Minister for Foreign Affairs Penny Wong said on Tuesday that the U.S. administration would be made aware of the re-elected government’s opposition to the film tariffs.
“We obviously will be pressing views about this to the U.S. administration,” said Wong, who is set to continue in the foreign affairs portfolio, in an interview with Nine.
In a separate interview on Tuesday morning, Wong told Australian Broadcasting Corporation radio that restarting talks with the European Union on a free trade deal would be an “important part” of Australia’s trade diversification.
“If we’re a trading nation, we don’t want to be part of trade barriers, because it’s not good for us. It’s an act of economic self-harm, so of course, we’ll engage with the EU and others,” she said.
Negotiations on the trade agreement with the EU collapsed in 2023 when both sides failed to reach an agreement on Australian agricultural exporters’ access to the European market.
Labor said in April that it would reopen talks with the EU if victorious at the election.
News Corp Australia newspapers reported on Tuesday that Albanese is prepared to abolish Australia’s tax on luxury car imports from the EU in return for better access for agricultural exports.
The capital, comprising both primary and secondary investments, will be used to fuel the company’s growth across India, the U.S., and the UAE, enhance its tech-driven platform, and explore acquisitions in new markets.
Commercial interior design and contracting venture Flipspaces has raised $35 million in a mix of primary and secondary capital, led by Iron Pillar. The funds will be used to accelerate growth across India, the U.S., and the UAE, strengthen the company’s technology and brand leadership, and explore inorganic growth opportunities in new geographies and adjacent categories.
The round also saw early-stage investor Carpediem exit, while existing investor Prudent Investment Managers and new participant Synergy Capital joined the round.
Commenting on the investment, Ashok Ananthakrishnan, Partner at Iron Pillar, said, “Flipspaces has scaled to $40 million in revenue in a capital-efficient manner. With their tech-first platform spanning design, supply chain, and project management, we believe they are well positioned to build a leading franchise across India, the GCC, the USA, and other global markets, and to establish a large, enduring company.”
Kunal Sharma, Founder and CEO of Flipspaces, added, “We’re deeply grateful to our incoming and existing investors for their belief in our vision, and we’re excited about what lies ahead.”
Flipspaces offers a fully integrated, tech-first design-and-build solution focused on small and medium businesses (SMBs), which account for nearly 60% of the commercial interior design-and-build market. The U.S. currently contributes 20% of the company’s overall revenue. According to the company, both India and the U.S. operations are profitable.
The company claims to have grown at a 65 per cent CAGR over the last four years, delivering over 8 million square feet of commercial space for more than 1,000 brands across India and the U.S. It is now expanding into the UAE, a growing global hub for commercial real estate. Additionally, Flipspaces has launched a dedicated vertical to handle design and build mandates for large enterprises.
According to Tracxn, the Mumbai-based company is currently valued at approximately ₹221 crore. This latest fundraise follows its $4 million Series A round in September 2023.
U NAJNOVIJOJ analizi tržišta nekretnina možemo vidjeti koje su ponude privukle najveću pozornost kupaca na Index Oglasima. Nekretnine s najvećim brojem pregleda uključuju raznolike objekte – od kuća za adaptaciju do luksuznih stanova u gradskim središtima.
Prilika u Dubravi – kuća za adaptaciju ili novu gradnju
Najtraženija nekretnina je kuća u općini Dubrava koja se prodaje za 35.000 eura. Smještena je u mirnom ruralnom okruženju, a istovremeno odlično prometno povezana s većim gradovima.
Kuća ukupne površine 96 m² dolazi uz dvije gospodarske zgrade (82 m² i 35 m²) na zemljištu od 5760 m². Infrastruktura uključuje struju na parceli, vodu iz bunara (uz mogućnost priključka na javni vodovod) te septičku jamu. Idealna je za obiteljski život, vikendicu, OPG ili investiciju u ruralni turizam.
Pogledaj oglas
Moderna montažna kuća u srcu Zagorja
Među najtraženijim nekretninama nalazi se i samostojeća montažna kuća ukupne stambene površine 51 m² na parceli površine 771 m² u Pregradi, Krapinsko-zagorskoj županiji, izgrađena 2024. godine.
Kuća je smještena u tihoj ulici, okružena prekrasnim zelenilom koje omogućuje mir i privatnost. Na zemljištu se trenutno nalaze priključci za struju i vodu, a ispred kuće su predviđena dva parkirna mjesta. Cijena ove nekretnine iznosi 95.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Prostrana obiteljska kuća s velikim zemljištem u Marinkovcu
Velika obiteljska kuća katnica smještena u Gornjem Marinkovcu, nedaleko Dubrave, privukla je značajan interes kupaca. Ukupna površina kuće iznosi 294 m², a sastoji se od podruma, prizemlja i kata.
Kuća dolazi uz okućnicu od 2871 m², a za 59.900 eura dobit ćete objekt koji ima podrum od 70 m² s tri prostorije, prizemlje od 112 m² s dvije spavaće sobe, dnevnim boravkom, kuhinjom s blagovaonicom, ostavom i kupaonicom, te kat iste površine koji zahtijeva završne radove. Potkrovlje nudi mogućnost uređenja dodatnih prostorija.
Pogledaj oglas
Istarska kamena kuća s tradicijom i modernim komforom
Šarmantna, pažljivo renovirana istarska kamena kuća s dvorištem i dodatnim objektom za obnovu privukla je pažnju brojnih potencijalnih kupaca. Smještena je u mirnoj ulici, na pješačkoj udaljenosti od škole, vrtića, trgovina i autobusne stanice.
Kuća se sastoji od prizemlja s elegantno uređenim dnevnim prostorom (kuhinja, blagovaonica i boravak), kata sa spavaćom sobom i modernom kupaonicom, te potkrovlja koje se može prilagoditi prema željama. Posebnu vrijednost daje dodatna manja kuća – nekadašnja prva pekara u mjestu. Cijena ove nekretnine iznosi 275.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Obiteljska kuća nadomak centra Đurđevca
U mirnom dijelu Đurđevca prodaje se obiteljska kuća udaljena svega 900 metara od centra grada. Prostrana nekretnina na lijepoj okućnici sadrži tri sobe, od kojih su dvije spavaće, a treća dnevni boravak koji se može urediti i kao radna soba.
Predsoblje je uređeno kao blagovaonica, dok je kuhinja odvojena i nudi dodatni dnevni boravak. Kuća također sadrži sanitarni čvor, podrum od 17 m² te gospodarske zgrade i lijepo održavan voćnjak. Prednost ove nekretnine je nova vanjska stolarija, postavljena 2020. godine. Cijena iznosi 99.800 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Građevinsko zemljište s objektima u Roču
Na atraktivnoj lokaciji u Istri prodaje se građevinsko zemljište s ucrtanim objektima i uporabnim dozvolama. Zemljište površine 575 m² smješteno je na blagoj uzvisini te pruža predivan panoramski pogled na okolnu prirodu i krajolik.
Na zemljištu su ucrtani kuća i staja ukupne površine 172 m², oboje s važećim uporabnim dozvolama, što znatno olakšava buduće projekte obnove ili prenamjene. Sva potrebna infrastruktura nalazi se neposredno uz parcelu. Cijena ovog imanja je 36.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Kamena kuća u Istri s projektom i građevinskom dozvolom
U okolici Labina prodaje se šarmantna kamena kuća s projektom i građevinskom dozvolom za rekonstrukciju. Ova nekretnina obuhvaća kuću tlocrtne površine 169 m², raspoređenu na dvije etaže: prizemlje i kat, te dodatni objekt površine 12 m².
Planirana rekonstrukcija spaja tradicionalnu istarsku arhitekturu s modernim elementima, stvarajući dom s mediteranskim ugođajem. U sklopu ograđene okućnice predviđen je bazen sa sunčalištem i ljetna kuhinja. Cijena ove nekretnine iznosi 110.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Kuća s velikom okućnicom u Pisarovini
Na mirnoj lokaciji u Jamnici Pisarovinskoj prodaje se kuća, visoka prizemnica, stambene površine 173.5 m² s okućnicom od 1258.5 m² na samo 27 km od Zagreba.
Kuća je u završnoj fazi uređenja s postavljenim instalacijama za struju i kanalizaciju. Prizemlje sadrži dnevni boravak s kuhinjom, sobu, terasu, kupaonicu i prostoriju za veš ukupne površine 71.5 m². Na katu se nalaze 3 sobe, kupaonica, terasa i mala izba, ukupne površine 102 m². Cijena iznosi 85.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Roh-bau kuća u Jadranovu blizu mora
U Jadranovu, na mirnoj lokaciji samo 450 metara od mora i plaže, prodaje se roh-bau kuća površine 98 m². Nekretnina se sastoji od prizemlja i kata, koji se mogu povezati unutarnjim ili vanjskim stubištem.
Ispred kuće nalazi se okućnica, a priključci struje i vode već su dovedeni u objekt. Ova nekretnina predstavlja odličnu priliku za uređenje doma po vlastitim željama na atraktivnoj lokaciji blizu mora. Cijena iznosi 155.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Trosoban stan u centru Slavonskog Broda
U samom centru Slavonskog Broda, u ulici Nikole Zrinskog, na prodaju je kompletno opremljen trosoban stan na 5. katu stambeno-poslovne zgrade, površine 73 m².
Stan se sastoji od ulaznog hodnika, dnevnog boravka, kuhinje/blagovaonice s izlazom na natkriveni balkon, ostave, dvije spavaće sobe i kupaonice. Ima centralno grijanje s uvedenim kalorimetrima, klimu i funkcionalan raspored. Cijena stana iznosi 119.000 eura.
Pogledaj oglas
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Pool A #1 Mira Costa d. #8 San Clemente, 25-12, 25-19, 25-13 #4 Corona del Mar d. #5 Beckman, 26-24, 25-17, 25-27, 25-17
Pool B #2 Huntington Beach d. #7 Redondo Union, 25-23, 25-23, 25-19 #6 Newport Harbor at #3 Loyola, Wednesday at 6 p.m.
WEDNESDAY’S SCHEDULE (Matches at 6 p.m. unless noted)
QUARTERFINALS DIVISION 2 Mater Dei at Edison El Segundo at St. Francis Burbank Burroughs at St. Margaret’s Santa Margarita at Peninsula
DIVISION 3 Los Alamitos at Tesoro North Torrance at San Marino Warren at Santa Monica Orange Lutheran at Mission Viejo
DIVISION 4 Westlake at Corona Santiago Sherman Oaks Notre Dame at Santa Barbara Dos Pueblos at Crean Lutheran Sage Hill at Royal
DIVISION 5 Oak Park at Newbury Park Esperanza at Wiseburn Da Vinci Kennedy at California Rancho Alamitos at Vista Murrieta
DIVISION 6 Rio Hondo Prep at Quartz Hill, 7 p.m. Oxford Academy at Village Christian OC Pacifica Christian at Laguna Blanca El Toro at Yucaipa
DIVISION 7 Brea Olinda at Lakewood La Serna at San Jacinto San Gabriel Academy at Jurupa Valley Brentwood vs. Hawthorne MSA at Bud Carson Middle School
DIVISION 8 Carpinteria at Lancaster Desert Christian, 4 p.m. Katella at Southlands Christian Channel Islands vs. Wildwood at Crossroads Alta Loma at Avalon
DIVISION 9 Heritage vs. CAMS at McBride School, Long Beach San Jacinto Valley at Firebaugh Whittier Christian at Downey Calvary Chapel, 5 p.m. Beverly Hills at Yeshiva, 6:30 p.m.
Note: Open Division pool play (third round), semifinals in Divisions 2-9 May 10; Finals in all divisions May 16 or 17.
Global artificial intelligence (AI) spending is projected to rise significantly in the coming years, with UBS estimating a 60 per cent year-on-year increase in 2025, to USD 360 billion.
The momentum is expected to continue in 2026, with a further 33 per cent rise to USD 480 billion.
However, the share of spending attributed to the Big 4 tech giants — Microsoft, Amazon, Alphabet, and Meta — is anticipated to decline, falling from 58 per cent in 2025 to 52 per cent in 2026.
The report said “we expect global AI spend to increase by 60 per cent y/y in 2025 to reach USD 360bn and 33 per cent in 2026 to reach USD 480bn…We expect the combined share of these companies as a percentage of AI spend to rise from less than 20 per cent in 2023 to more than 40 per cent in 2025”.
It also highlighted that this broadening of AI spending across a more diverse set of players is a healthy development for the overall AI theme. A reduced concentration of investment among a few companies could eventually lead to less volatility in the market, the report said.
Spending outside the Big 4 is expected to reach a robust USD 150 billion in 2025. A significant portion of this is projected to come from China, which is likely to account for 35 per cent of the total spend outside the Big 4.
According to UBS, the rise in China’s AI investments is being driven by the success of low-cost models such as DeepSeek, strong government support, and the growing use of AI in consumer-facing applications like e-commerce, social media, and advertising.
The report mentioned that the Neocloud providers–companies offering specialized AI-integrated cloud services–are also emerging as a key segment, expected to capture around 25 per cent of the non-Big 4 AI spending in 2025.
The remaining spend is likely to come from other hyperscalers and enterprise or sovereign cloud providers, including players such as Oracle and Softbank.
While UBS advises investors to continue monitoring guidance from the Big 4, the report emphasizes that other AI-focused companies are now accelerating their investments and are crucial to the ongoing resilience of the sector.
Iconic Xbox release Gears of War has been announced for a PlayStation 5 release this summer.
Gears of War Reloaded is a premium remaster of the original Gears of War, featuring enhanced visuals and improved performance.
The game has been given an August 26 release date on PS5, Xbox Series X|S and PC. Needless to say, it will be a day-one release on Xbox Game Pass.
In addition to the title coming to Xbox Game Pass on day-one, Gears of War Reloaded will be available as a free upgrade for owners of Gears of War: Ultimate Edition.
In order to take advantage of the deal, you’ll need to have purchased Gears of War Ultimate Edition before 4pm BST UK time on May 5.
As for the new features, Gears of War Reloaded features 4K resolution, 60 frames-per-second in campaign and 120 frames-per-second in multiplayer.
That’s on top of high dynamic range (HDR) support, as well as Dolby Vision and 7.1.4 Dolby Atmos, not to mention 3D Spatial Audio.
It also supports Variable Refresh Rate (VRR), contains newly remastered 4K textures, enhanced post-processing visual effects, improved shadows and reflections, and super resolution with improved anti-aliasing.
Taking advantage of the SSD drives in the Xbox Series X and PS5, fans will be pleased to hear that there will be zero loading screens throughout the campaign.
Needless to say, Gears of War Reloaded also comes with all of the post-release DLC from the Ultimate Edition, making this the definitive version of the game.
With Gears of War Reloaded coming to PS5, Xbox Series X|S and PC, the game will also support cross-platform multiplayer between devices.
Fans playing on the PS5 won’t need a Microsoft account for cross-platform multiplayer, but will need to sign in for cross-platform progression.
Cross-platform progression means you can start playing on one system, and continue the game from where you left off on another.
Tesla’s Australian division says its main focus right now is to get people behind the wheel of its cars, including the facelifted Tesla Model Y, amid persistent US reports about the electric vehicle (EV) company’s controversial CEO Elon Musk and his involvement with the Trump administration.
While it’s impossible to draw direct correlations between Mr Musk’s political endeavours and the carmaker’s sales performance, Tesla’s local sales have undoubtedly been on a significant downward spiral over the past 12 months.
In April 2025, Tesla managed just 500 deliveries for the entire month, almost 76 per cent fewer EVs than it sold in the same month last year, placing it 23rd on the sales chart just ahead of Porsche, but behind other luxury brands like Land Rover and Audi.
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Meantime, key rival BYD sold more than six times the number of vehicles last month (3207), over 127 per cent up on April 2024 and placing it 10th overall for the month.
Year to date, Australian Tesla sales are now almost 62 per cent down.
Asked about the potential impact of Mr Musk’s high-profile activities in the US on local sales and perceptions of his company, Tesla Australia country director Thom Drew said he preferred to focus on Tesla’s vehicles rather than its CEO’s politics.
“Externally, looking at any of these political factors, is going to have some kind of influence, depending on what people see in the media, so that would likely be having an impact on people engaging with us,” he told CarExpert at this week’s Australian launch of the facelifted 2025 Tesla Model Y.
“We’re trying to take this as an opportunity to remind the Australian public of our products and how great they are.”
The Model Y’s midlife ‘Juniper’ facelift brings a raft of updates including revised suspension, tweaked interior equipment, increased range, and Cybertruck-inspired styling.
The Model Y was unavailable for several months in the lead up to first deliveries of the facelifted mid-size electric SUV, heavily impacting the American brand’s local sales given the model’s status as its best-selling vehicle and Australia’s favourite EV in 2024.
“Obviously [with] a new Model Y coming up, we’re focusing on that, and then also our local business,” said Mr Drew.
“So far, the response has been amazing. We’ve only just started test drives of [the Model Y] within the past few weeks in Australia, and we’ve had record test drive numbers than we’ve had in our entire time in the country.
“[That’s] partly why we’ve been trying to make sure people can see into Tesla Australia, and who we are as an established brand here, [to] help solidify why we still remain the number one EV brand in the country.”
MORE: Tesla revenue plunges as global sales slump MORE: No love for Elon Musk? Tesla owners are ditching their cars at record rates MORE: Tesla vandalism and fake ads highlight anti-Elon Musk sentiment
Ajay Devgn has given the office unit on rent to Bombay Design Centre Private Limited, and the office is located in Signature by Lotus and has a carpet area of 2,545 sqft.
Ajay Devgn acquired three adjacent office units, each measuring nearly 2,545 sqft, for a total value of Rs 30.35 crore in April 2023 — amounting to Rs 10.12 crore per unit. (Photo Credit: Instagram)
Bollywood actor Ajay Devgn have given on rent an office unit located in Mumbai’s Andheri West locality for a monthly rent starting at Rs 5.47 lakh, according to property registration documents. The deal was officially registered in May 2025.
According to property registration documents from the the Inspector General of Registration (IGR) reviewed by Square Yards, Ajay Devgn has given the office unit on rent to Bombay Design Centre Private Limited. The office unit is located in Signature by Lotus and has a carpet area of 2,545 sqft (nearly 236 square metre). The deal incurred a stamp duty payment of Rs 85,500 and registration charges of Rs 1,000. The transaction includes a security deposit of Rs 16.42 lakh.
According to Square Yards’ analysis, the rental agreement spans five years from May 2025 to April 2030, inclusive of an initial fit-out period. The monthly rent is set at Rs 5.47 lakh for the first three years and escalates to Rs 6.29 lakh for the final two years of the term.
Devgn acquired three adjacent office units, each measuring nearly 2,545 sqft, for a total value of Rs 30.35 crore in April 2023 — amounting to Rs 10.12 crore per unit. The current rental agreement pertains to one of these units. Based on the agreed rental terms and estimated acquisition cost of a single unit, the rental yield stands at about 6.5 per cent for the first three years, rising to around 7.5 per cent during the final two years of the lease.
Andheri West is a key real estate market in Mumbai, serving both commercial and residential demand. It offers strong connectivity via road, rail, and metro, and is located near the Chhatrapati Shivaji Maharaj International Airport. The locality is strategically positioned close to major business districts including Bandra Kurla Complex (BKC), SEEPZ, and Lower Parel. This proximity fuels demand for both commercial and residential properties, as professionals seek homes close to work and businesses benefit from access to key commercial hubs
Ajay Devgn is among India’s most accomplished actors, with a career spanning over three decades. He has received two National Film Awards and was honoured with the Padma Shri for his contributions to Indian cinema. Known for critically and commercially successful films such as Singham, Drishyam, and Tanhaji, he continues to remain active with recent releases like Bhuj and Maidaan. His latest film Raid 2 has been released, with Son of Sardaar 2 currently in development.
Stay updated with all the latest business news, including market trends, stock updates, tax, IPO, banking finance, real estate, savings and investments. Get in-depth analysis, expert opinions, and real-time updates—only on News18. Also Download the News18 App to stay updated!
Arizona’s second Bitcoin reserve bill, SB 1373, has cleared its final reading with Senate approval. The bill now moves to Governor Hobbs, who recently vetoed the first Bitcoin Reserve Bill, SB 1025. This represents a key step in the state’s ongoing efforts to establish a Bitcoin reserve, despite the previous rejection. The final decision now rests with the governor, and the outcome will determine Arizona’s next move in its Bitcoin reserve strategy.
Indian Institute of Spices Research will host a national symposium on ‘Recent Trends in Omics in Plant Biology’ from May 20 to 22 in Kozhikode. The event is being organised by the institute’s Bioinformatics and Integrative Genomics Facility, with financial assistance from the Department of Biotechnology, Ministry of Science and Technology.
The symposium will bring together scientists, academicians, research scholars and industry representatives from across the country to deliberate on the rapidly evolving field of Omics technologies and their applications in plant science and agriculture.
It will feature plenary lectures by leading experts, technical paper presentations and panel discussions covering a spectrum of themes. These include genomics, transcriptomics, proteomics, metabolomics and bioinformatics. Sessions will also explore genome editing technologies, horti-informatics and the role of artificial intelligence and computational tools in advancing plant research and sustainable agriculture.
The event is open to scientists, faculty members, postgraduate and doctoral scholars and professionals from the agri-biotech and bioinformatics industry.
The institute is also organising a pre-symposium workshop on May 20 to provide hands on training in omics tools and data analysis techniques in transcriptomics, computational metagenomics, Genome wide association studies and machine learning.
Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.
The minute I saw “Mr. Met” in today’s Connections: Sports Edition, I knew mascot names had to be a category. Although you never know–it could’ve been an anagram for something, the way these puzzle-makers challenge players. Read on for hints and the answers.
Connections: Sports Edition is out of beta now, making its debut on Super Bowl Sunday, Feb. 9. That’s a sign that the game has earned enough loyal players that The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by the Times, will continue to publish it. It doesn’t show up in the NYT Games app but now appears in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can continue to play it free online.
Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta
Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups
Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.
Yellow group hint: No scoring for you!
Green group hint: Think Walter Payton.
Blue group hint: Team symbols.
Purple group hint: Same sound as football names.
Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups
Yellow group: Prevent a goal.
Green group: Stats for a running back.
Blue group: MLB mascots.
Purple group: Homophones of NFL head coaches.
Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words
What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?
The completed NYT Connections: Sports Edition puzzle for May 7, 2025, #226.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
The yellow words in today’s Connections
The theme is prevent a goal. The four answers are block, parry, save and stop.
The green words in today’s Connections
The theme is stats for a running back. The four answers are attempts, fumbles, touchdowns and yards.
The blue words in today’s Connections
The theme is MLB mascots. The four answers are Blooper, Mr. Met, Orbit and Wally.
The purple words in today’s Connections
The theme is homophones of NFL head coaches. The four answers are bowls, carol, read and tailor, for Todd Bowles, Pete Carroll, Andy Reid and Zac Taylor.
Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis signed SB 700 into law Tuesday, eliminating the ability of local governments to add fluoride or other medical additives to the state’s public water supply, a move cheered by supporters of medical freedom and health transparency.
“Jamming fluoride in the water supply … is essentially a forced medication,” DeSantis said during a news conference in Tallahassee. “At the end of the day, we should all agree that people deserve informed consent.”
The new law, part of the broader Florida Farm Bill, does not ban fluoride entirely.
Floridians will still be able to purchase fluoridated water from private suppliers. But it draws a firm line against the government deciding what goes in your glass without your say.
UTAH BANS FLUORIDE FROM PUBLIC DRINKING WATER, ALIGNING WITH MAHA MOVEMENT
Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis speaks during a news conference April 10, 2025, in Miami, Fla.(Joe Raedle/Getty Images)
“When it gets hot in the Sunshine State, no one clamors for a cold glass of fluoride,” state Sen. Keith Truenow told Fox News Digital. “We will protect our natural resources and give Floridians the ability to make the best choices without government forcing unnecessary additives.”
Florida Agriculture Commissioner Wilton Simpson, who joined DeSantis at the signing, emphasized that this isn’t about denying people fluoride, but ensuring they aren’t medicated without consent.
FLUORIDE EXPOSURE LINKED TO ‘DETRIMENTAL EFFECTS’ ON HEALTH OF PREGNANT WOMEN, INFANTS
“Today, Florida took a bold step and declared that drinking water will hydrate, not medicate,” Simpson said in a statement to Fox News Digital.
“No Floridian should be medicated without their consent, plain and simple. Through our Florida Farm Bill, we’re saying loud and clear: Florida’s water will be clean, it will be safe and it will be medication-free. That’s what freedom looks like in the Free State of Florida.”
The effort aligns with the national “Make America Healthy Again” movement led by Health and Human Services Secretary Robert F. Kennedy Jr. His initiative emphasizes consumer choice, reduced reliance on centralized health mandates and a renewed skepticism of top-down medical policies.
Florida Gov. Ron DeSantis speaks during a news conference April 10, 2025, in Miami, Fla.(Joe Raedle/Getty Images)
“Today’s efforts to prohibit local governments from unilaterally adding fluoride to public drinking water is the logical next iteration of our commitment to being the Free State of Florida,” said Bryan Griffin, communications director for DeSantis. “And Ron DeSantis has delivered yet again.”
DeSantis also tied the move to a growing public distrust of medical institutions, citing the fallout from COVID-era policies.
“People are just much more skeptical when these elites are trying to jam anything down our throats,” he said. “The burden is on them to prove why this should be forced on people. And it really shouldn’t be.”
The legislation also includes broad support for Florida’s agriculture sector, new consumer transparency laws and restrictions on environmental, social and governance (ESG) practices that target farmers and ranchers.
DeSantis has also promised action on geoengineering.
Robert F. Kennedy Jr. and President Donald Trump(Anna Moneymaker/Getty Images)
“Florida is not a testing ground for geoengineering,” DeSantis wrote on X Tuesday. “The Free State of Florida means freedom from governments or private actors unilaterally applying chemicals or geoengineering to people or public spaces.”
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
Critics of SB 700 argue fluoridation has long been used to fight tooth decay, particularly in children.
But DeSantis pointed to updated guidance from State Surgeon General Joseph Ladapo, who raised concerns about fluoride’s effects on pregnant women and children.
“You don’t even have to agree with that analysis,” the governor said, “but people should still have the right to opt out.”
Kennedy did not immediately respond to Fox News Digital’s request for comment.
Jasmine is a writer at Fox News Digital and a military spouse based in New Orleans. Stories can be sent to [email protected]
Does your skin look dull without makeup? Does your face often appear puffy or bloated? If the answer is yes, it’s not completely normal for skin to look tired looking without makeup. While makeup can enhance our features and beauty, even without makeup, you can get naturally healthy and plump skin. How? Increasing hydration can boost skin health. Wellness influencer Zareefa Ahmed-Arije recently shared a simple but powerful “beautifying” water recipe, which has since gone viral on Instagram.
This easy-to-make drink is loaded with antioxidants and skin-loving nutrients. It helps hydrate your body deeply, flush out toxins, reduce signs of ageing, and boost collagen production. For the unversed, collagen is a key structural protein that maintains skin elasticity and hydration. It also supports hair, nails, and skin by forming proteins like keratin.
How To Make “Beautifying” Water At Home | Simple “Beautifying” Water Recipe For Glowing Skin
Take a glass bottle and add 700 ml of warm water to it. Now mix in 1 tbsp chia seeds and juice of one lemon. Add 1 tbsp goji berries. Stir everything well and your “beautifying” water is ready.
How Each Ingredient Enhances Your Skin Health:
1. Warm Water
Our skin is made up of around 30 per cent water. Drinking warm water keeps our skin hydrated, improves elasticity and reduces dryness and flakiness. It acts as a natural internal moisturizer.
2. Chia Seeds
Chia seeds have a natural cooling effect and are rich in omega-3 fatty acids, which help reduce skin inflammation and irritation. The antioxidants present in chia seeds help fight free radical damage, potentially preventing premature ageing, wrinkles, and fine lines.
Also Read: A Simple Pineapple Drink For Glowing Summer Skin
3. Lemon
Lemon offers a boost of vitamin C, which supports collagen production. According to the National Institutes of Health (NIH), lemons also contain citric acid that helps exfoliate dead skin cells, leading to a clearer, brighter complexion.
4. Goji Berries
In her video, Zareefa explains that goji berries are packed with vitamin C and antioxidants. They help stimulate collagen production, protect skin from UV damage, and their vitamin A content promotes a youthful, plump look while minimising signs of ageing.
Also Read:7 Foods To Eat First Thing In The Morning For Healthy Skin
How To Drink It For Best Results
For a detoxifying flush, Zareefa recommends drinking this water on an empty stomach. If you’re aiming for steady skin-enhancing benefits, sip it gradually throughout the day.
Of course, no single drink is a miracle cure. Combine this hydrating recipe with a balanced diet and a healthy lifestyle to support long-term skin health and radiance.
Americans traditionally gift flowers to loved ones on special occasions such as Mother’s Day and the upcoming graduation and wedding seasons. However, florists are now struggling with increasing prices due to soaring tariffs.
Flowers in the U.S. are mostly imported from Colombia, Ecuador, Canada, the Netherlands and Mexico, while most of the packages used are from China, according to the United States Census Bureau and the White House.
Shop owners now face a dilemma. If they maintain current prices, they will make very low profits. If they raise prices, they could lose loyal customers who have been buying their flowers for years.
Mangaluru-based Rohan Corporation announces Shah Rukh Khan as its official brand ambassador for Karnataka.
Rohan Corporation, a real estate development company based in Mangaluru, has announced Bollywood star Shah Rukh Khan as its official brand ambassador for Karnataka.
Rohan Monteiro, Founder and Chairman of Rohan Corporation, said: “Having Shah Rukh Khan represent Rohan Corporation is more than a partnership — it’s a meeting of dreams and determination. Just as Shah Rukh Khan has inspired millions through his journey of hard work and passion, Rohan Corporation aspires to inspire through spaces that transform lives. With him on board, we are reaffirming our promise to redefine urban living in Karnataka and beyond.”
A media statement said that this collaboration with Shah Rukh Khan reflects a shared passion for excellence, innovation, and community-building. Founded and headquartered in Mangaluru, Rohan Corporation has projects such as Hill Crest, High Crest, Rohan City and Rohan Square in the city.
Quoting Shah Rukh Khan, the statement said: “It is an absolute pleasure to collaborate with Rohan Corporation — a brand that mirrors my own values of perseverance, innovation, and heart. Their commitment to creating sustainable, community-driven spaces resonates deeply with me. I look forward to being part of their incredible journey of shaping tomorrow’s cities with soul and vision.”
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
NIKE nastavlja s odavanjem počasti legendarnom Kobeju Bryantu kroz novu generaciju njegovih kultnih modela, a najnoviji dodatak liniji Protro tenisica stiže u obliku Nike Kobe 4 Protro CHBL.
Ove tenisice nadahnute su kineskom srednjoškolskom košarkaškom ligom (China High School Basketball League), a dolaze s upečatljivom kombinacijom boja i pažljivo osmišljenim detaljima koji pričaju priču o predanosti, disciplini i ljubavi prema igri.
Lansiranje se očekuje tijekom ljeta
Model CHBL ističe se svijetložutom bazom, koju nadopunjuju detalji u crnoj, sivoj i zagasitoj tirkiznoj boji u unutrašnjosti tenisica. Takva paleta boja ne samo da osvježava klasični dizajn, već i odaje počast energiji i strasti mladih košarkaša u Kini.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Prepoznatljiva silueta Kobe 4 modela zadržava svoj nizak profil, dok Protro verzija donosi unaprijeđenu tehnologiju prilagođenu suvremenim sportašima, uključujući poboljšanu potporu i udobnost.
Premda točan datum izlaska još uvijek nije službeno potvrđen, očekuje se da će Nike Kobe 4 Protro CHBL biti pušten u prodaju tijekom ljeta 2025. putem Nike SNKRS aplikacije i odabranih trgovina, po cijeni od 190 USD, što je oko 168 eura.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
MIAMI — The Dodgers put outfielder Teoscar Hernández on the injured list Tuesday with a left groin strain, a day after Hernández injured himself chasing down a fly ball in right field and left the game early.
James Outman was called up from triple-A Oklahoma City to replace Hernández on the roster.
In the third inning of Monday’s win over the Miami Marlins, Hernández broke hard for a line drive in the gap and stretched at full sprint to make the catch.
After returning to the dugout between innings, Hernández was removed from the game, reporting tightness in both his hamstring and adductor to the team’s training staff. He was sent for an MRI exam on Tuesday.
“He’s a guy that just doesn’t come out of games by way of injury,” manager Dave Roberts said afterward. “That’s a little concerning given the person.”
Back with the Dodgers this season after re-signing with the club on a three-year, $66 million contract as a free agent this winter, Hernández had been one of the lineup’s most consistent run producers early this year.
He was batting .315, well above his career .264 average. He had nine home runs, tied with Shohei Ohtani for most on the team. He’d collected 34 RBIs in just 33 games, most in the majors.
Now the Dodgers, who were already playing without Tommy Edman this trip due to an ankle injury, will have another lineup hole to fill.
Outman, who finished third in National League Rookie of the Year voting in 2023 but has struggled in brief stints in the majors since, was one of three triple-A players who arrived in Miami on Tuesday.
Reliever JP Feyereisen was called up, with fellow right-hander Yoendrys Gómez getting designated for assignment.
Starting pitcher Landon Knack also joined the big-league club, and is likely to pitch in the series finale against the Marlins on Wednesday.
Amazon Sale 2025: Amazon Great Summer Sale 2025 is currently live, with the e-commerce giant offering some great deals on mobile phones, laptops, and audio accessories. Sales, which started from May 1, may be a great opportunity for you to grab your favorite smartphone on a wonderful value and offer. Here is a list of some phones like iPhone 16, iPhone 15, OnePlus Nord 4, Xiaomi 14 Civi which are currently available at a discounted price.
Amazon Great Summer Sale 2025: iPhone 16 Deal
Original Price: Rs 79,900
Deal Price: Rs 72,490
You Save: Rs 7,410 (Up to 9% off)
This offer is for the variant with 128GB storage. EMI options come with savings of up to Rs 3,266 when using select credit cards. Additional discounts and cashback offers are also available. The phone has five colour options – Ultramarine, Teal, Pink, White and Black.
Amazon Great Summer Sale 2025: iPhone 16 Pro Deal
Original Price: Rs 1,19,900
Deal Price: Rs 1,12,900
You Save: Rs 7,000 (Up to 6% off)
This deal is applicable to the variant with 128GB storage. EMI purchases can bring further savings of up to Rs 7,172, with additional offers available from banks and cashback partners on Amazon.
Amazon Great Summer Sale 2025: iPhone 15 Deal
Original Price: Rs 69,900
Deal Price: Rs 58,999
You Save: Rs 10,901 (Up to 16% off)
The offer is available in the Black and Pink color options with 128GB storage. The iPhone 15 is also eligible for EMI purchases. You can save up to Rs 4,630 more with certain credit cards, along with bank discounts and cashback offers on Amazon.
Amazon Great Summer Sale 2025: OnePlus Nord 4 5G Deal
Original Price: Rs 32,999
Deal Price: Rs 29,498
You Save: Rs 3,501 (Up to 11% off)
This offer is for variant with 8GB RAM and 256GB storage. The EMI option comes with a savings of up to Rs 3,250 when using select credit cards. Additional discounts and cashback offers are also available. The phone has three color options – Oasis Green, Mercury Silver and Obsidian Midnight.
Amazon Great Summer Sale 2025: Realme Narzo 80x 5G Deal
Original Price: Rs 15,999
Deal Price: Rs 13,298
You Save: Rs 2,701 (Up to 17% off)
The deal is applied to sunlight gold variant with 6GB RAM and 128GB storage. EMI procurement can bring more savings of up to Rs 598, with additional offers available from banks and cashback partners on Amazon.
Amazon Great Summer Sale 2025: Xiaomi 14 CIVI Deal
Original Price: Rs 54,999
Deal Price: Rs 31,999
You Save: Rs 23,000 (Up to 42% off)
This offer is available on variants with 8GB RAM and 256GB storage in all three color options – shadow black, matcha green and cruise blue. EMI options provide savings of up to Rs 1,441 on eligible credit cards. Bank offers and cashback deals are also part of promotion.
After one of the best months of releases in the history of Xbox Game Pass, Microsoft is back with another stellar line-up for May 2025.
The headline new release is Doom: The Dark Ages, which joins Xbox Game Pass as a day-one title on May 15.
Doom: The Dark Ages takes place in what is described as a “techno medieval” setting, featuring weapons such as a gun that fires skull fragments, as well as a flail and mace.
The game is a prequel to the 2016 Doom and Doom Eternal, showing how the Doom Slayer became a powerful demon killer.
Prior to the release of Doom: The Dark Ages, Microsoft will kick things off with Dragon Ball Xenoverse 2, Dungeons of Hinterberg, Flintlock: The Siege of Dawn and the excellent Metal Slug Tactics on May 7.
This will be followed by another brand new release, as Revenge of the Savage Planet joins the line-up on day-one.
Revenge of the Savage Planet is a colourful 3D Metroidvania, featuring interesting new weapons, items and puzzles, as players explore a gorgeous planet.
“In a future knocked off its axis by corporate greed and stupidity, you have been made redundant and abandoned on the far edge of space with little gear and no safety net,” reads the official description.
“You must explore every nook and cranny, collect dozens of upgrades, and turn over every mysterious alien rock if you want to get revenge on your former employer and return to Earth.”
If you have no interest in Revenge of the Savage Planet, then Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles: Mutants Unleashed also releases on May 8.
The game is a mixture of RPG and beat-em-up, tasking the heroes with battling enemies on the streets.
Warhammer: Vermintide 2 joins Xbox Game Pass on May 13, followed by Kulebra and the Souls of Limbo as a day-one release on May 16.
Finally, Firefighting Simulator: The Squad and Police Simulator: Patrol Officers join Xbox Game Pass on May 20.
Expect a handful of additional games to join the service towards the end of May.
While the Holden Captiva left the new car scene in 2018, the nameplate has soldiered on overseas, and is now entering its third generation.
Whereas the original Captiva was developed by GM Korea, and sold by a variety of brands, including Daewoo, Chevrolet, Opel, and Holden, subsequent generations were engineered by SAIC-GM-Wuling, a joint venture between the General and MG’s parent company, which makes and markets vehicles under the Baojun and Wuling marques.
The second-generation Chevrolet Captiva is sold primarily in Latin America, the Middle East, and south-east Asia, and is a rebadged version of the Baojun 530. As an interesting aside, the 530 is also sold as the MG Hector in India.
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Wuling Starlight S
For the third iteration of the Captiva, which was announced a week or so ago by GM Brazil, the company is affixing bow tie badges to the Wuling Starlight S.
Chevrolet Brazil has been pretty quiet regarding the new Captiva EV’s specifications and overall design, only releasing a video and a few photos of the car coming off a cargo ship.
Compared to the Starlight S, the new Captiva EV has a unique front bumper with a fake grille linking together the driving light eyebrows, as well as a larger lower air intake surround. At the rear, the Chevrolet’s only points of difference seem to be its badges.
Inside the cabin there’s a 8.8-inch instrumentation display, as well as a 15.6-inch touchscreen infotainment unit in the centre of the dashboard.
The Wuling Starlight S has a 150kW electric motor driving the front wheels, and is fed by a 60kWh lithium iron phosphate battery. Driving range, as estimated by the generous CLTC standard, is said to be 510km.
In China the Starlight S is also offered as a 1.5-litre plug-in hybrid with either 9.5kWh or 20.5kWh battery packs, which allow for between 60 and 130km of emissions-free driving.
Measuring 4745mm long, 1890mm wide, 1685mm tall, and riding on a 2800mm wheelbase, the Captiva EV is around 100mm longer, 40mm wider, and 35mm lower than the Captiva that still graces Australian roads.
While the Holden Captiva was available in both five- and seven-seat variants, the Captiva EV seats a maximum of five people.
The Captiva EV is built in China, and has so far been confirmed for Latin America. The more affordable petrol-powered second-generation Captiva will continue to be alongside its electric cousin.
Unlike many other brands, which have revived old names, or created sub-brands and unique naming schemes for their EVs, Chevrolet applies the same names for both its internal combustion (ICE) and electric cars, even if the ICE and EV models are completely distinct in terms of styling and underpinnings.
It has so far employed this parallel naming structure to the Blazer, Equinox, Silverado, and, now, the Captiva too.
The office of UK PM released a video that showed both Prime Ministers – Starmer and Narendra Modi – complimenting each other’s leadership over taking the FTA over the finish line.
UK Prime Minister Keir Starmer in a conversation with Prime Minister Narendra Modi (not pictured). (IMAGE: Keir Starmer/X)
UK Prime Minister Keir Starmer on Tuesday shared a video where he and Prime Minister Narendra Modi were seen engaging in a conversation and congratulating one another on the finalisation of the UK-India Free Trade Agreement (FTA).
“The trade deal with India will raise living standards, put more money in the pockets of British working people, and deepen the unique ties between our two nations,” the UK PM wrote while sharing the video on social media.
“Hello Mr Prime Minister, we have achieved something truly historic today. This is the biggest deal the UK has done since we left the EU. I think I am right in saying that this is the most ambitious that India has ever done,” Starmer is seen complimenting his Indian counterpart.
The trade deal with India will raise living standards, put more money in the pockets of British working people, and deepen the unique ties between our two nations. pic.twitter.com/TAXsPPN9Pv— Keir Starmer (@Keir_Starmer) May 6, 2025
Prime Minister Narendra Modi also compliments Starmer by saying: “The credit goes to your vision and your decisive leadership. This is a milestone in the India-UK comprehensive strategic partnership”.
Starmer said that the deal will raise living standards and put more money in the pockets of the British working class people and deepen London-New Delhi ties.
“Thank you for your leadership, Prime Minister. This is a historic occasion between our two countries,” Starmer said as he concluded the telephone conversation.
The UK has sought to bolster trade ties across the world since it left the EU at the start of the decade under Brexit, a need that became more pressing after the United States unleashed tariffs that risk causing weaker economic growth.
“Today we have agreed a landmark deal with India — one of the fastest-growing economies in the world, which will grow the economy and deliver for British people and business,” UK Prime Minister Keir Starmer said in a statement.
His Labour government said it is “the biggest and most economically significant bilateral trade deal the UK has done since leaving the EU”.
The accord will slash tariffs on imports of UK goods into India, including whisky, cosmetics and medical devices.
Whisky and gin tariffs will be halved to 75 percent, while automotive tariffs will be slashed from more than 100 percent to 10 percent.
In exchange, the UK will cut tariffs on imports of clothes, footwear and food products, including frozen prawns, from India.
The deal comes after US President Donald Trump hiked tariffs on trading partners and launched sector-specific levies on steel, aluminium and cars.
The UK and India are the sixth and fifth largest global economies respectively, with a trade relationship worth around £41 billion ($54.8 billion) and investment supporting more than 600,000 jobs across both countries.
The sides hope the free-trade agreement will increase trade between the two countries by £25.5 billion, as well as boosting the British economy and wages.
(with additional inputs from AFP)
Location :
London, United Kingdom (UK)
First Published:
News world Keir Starmer Shares Video Of Phone Call With PM Modi Before Finalizing Trade Pact: ‘Historic Achievement’
Lately, the XRP price has refrained from displaying massive moves with a potential to march towards the higher targets. Meanwhile, the drop in the strength of the bulls could raise some concerns for the upcoming price action. The price has been moving quietly, down by 5.34% since the start of the week after losing a similar margin during the weekend. However, the bears have held a tight grip over the rally, which suggests the support at $2 could be broken in the coming days.
The XRP price is in the state of confirming a bearish pattern in the short term as it heads towards the critical support zone around $2.04. A drop below the range is expected to initiate a further decrease. However, breaking the range could present some challenge, as the bulls have captivated the range and have prevented it from draining below the range. However, the volatility of the token has slashed hard, which suggests the price may remain consolidated for a while before initiating the next price action.
The daily chart of XRP price suggests the token is trading on a crucial support at the 200-day MA at $2.07. Although the token has triggered a rebound, the bullish divergence is yet to be validated, which could occur once the price rises above the average bands of the Bollinger. These bands are going almost parallel to each other, hinting towards a drop in the volatility as the bulls and bears are failing to exert pressure.
Meanwhile, the RSI and MACD hint towards a bearish continuation, which could raise some concerns.
The MACD, which has just risen into the positive range, triggered a bearish crossover and is heading back into the negative range. Besides, the RSI has been maintaining a steep descending trend and plunged below the average range. This suggests a significant drop in the strength of the rally that may compel the price to remain within a consolidated range. Hence, the XRP price is believed to drop below the descending trend line for a while, which could attract buying volume, but a rebound to $2.5 remains highly dependent on the volume induced.
Therefore, the buy zone for the XRP price could be around $1.85, which is a strong support and a potential reversal area, triggering an entry. A confirmed bounce from the range between $1.85 and $1.90, the targets could be $2.95 after surpassing $2.5 and later at $3.39 and $3.87.
The Union Ministry of Education has approved the establishment of an off-campus centre of the Indian Institute of Foreign Trade (IIFT), New Delhi at GIFT City in Gujarat . The centre will be established as per the UGC (Institutions Deemed to be Universities) Regulations, 2023 and will pave the way for training talents in the field of international business, as well as the institution’s flagship programme MBA (International Business).
The approval has been granted under Section 3 of the UGC Act, 1956, after IIFT successfully complied with the conditions set out in the Letter of Intent (LoI) issued in January 2025. This includes submitting a development roadmap for setting up a multidisciplinary institution with over 1,000 students, availability of qualified faculty, detailed academic programmes, planning for a permanent campus and construction of a state-of-the-art library, stated an official release.
The upcoming GIFT City complex will be located on the 16th and 17th floors of GIFT Tower 2 located in the domestic tariff area of the GIFT campus. It will offer IIFT’s flagship MBA (International Business) programme as well as specialised short-term training courses and research in international business and related fields. This initiative is in line with the goals of the National Education Policy (NEP) 2020, which aims to promote multidisciplinary education and expand access to high-quality education, the release added.
The highly-anticipated Nintendo Switch 2 is set to release on June 5. Thanks to tariff related delays, preorders in the US didn’t start until late April, and the stock quickly sold out. With the official release date still a month off, we’re monitoring retailers in the US, Canada and the UK just in case there’s a second wave of preorders for both consoles and accessories. We’ve been updating this article daily to keep you in the loop.
You should note that while some stores say items are coming soon or out of stock, that all translates to no current availability. We have found some accessories are popping up for preorder. Be sure to check back often, as anything that does become available for preorder is likely to go just as fast.
This story is part of Nintendo Switch 2, a collection of all things related to Nintendo’s next-gen game console.
Nintendo Switch 2 preorders at GameStop
As with other US retailers, both the standalone console and Mario Kart World bundle are currently sold out at GameStop. Most of the accessories are available either for preorder or you can sign up to be notified when they are in stock again.
GameStop preorders started a little later than other retailers, but like elsewhere, it’s completely sold out at the moment.
The Switch 2 console is also sold out at GameStop Canada. Though if we do see some restocks here, it’s important to note that these preorders are limited to one Switch 2 per household.
Nintendo Switch 2 preorders at Walmart
The standalone console and Mario Kart World bundle are now sold out at both US and Canadian Walmarts. The US site has also removed product pages for both versions of the console, so we’re not expecting restocks there any time soon. Similarly, the accessories are either not in stores yet or out of stock, however you can sign up to be notified when they are available.
Walmart preorders sold out almost immediately, and at the moment, it no longer has product pages for the standalone console or the Mario Kart World bundle, so we’re not expecting restocks any time soon. That being said, we’ll be keeping an eye on this retailer for any availability.
Preorders for the Switch 2 console and accessories began at midnight on April 24 at Walmart, but are currently sold out.
Nintendo Switch 2 preorders at Target
Both versions of the console are currently sold out at Target, but you can sign up for notifications about any future restocks. Target has a number of accesories available for preorder now.
As with other retailers, both versions of the Switch 2 console are currently sold out at Target, but we’ll be keeping an eye out for any restocks in the coming days.
Samsung 256GB microSD Express
Even with the Switch 2’s boosted storage, you may be looking to boost its memory with a microSD card. This Samsung Express microSD is designed specifically for Nintendo’s new console, and even features a unique Mario-inspired design.
Nintendo Switch 2 preorders at Newegg
Newegg is also sold out of both versions of the console. While Switch 2 preorders will be competitive just about anywhere they’re being offered, Newegg is slightly less popular than other retailers like Walmart or Target, which could give you a better chance of securing an order during any future restocks. At present, the accessories are out of stock, so your best bet is to be notified automatically when they become available.
Newegg is also offering preorders for both the standalone console and Mario Kart World bundle, though they’re currently sold out. However, this online retailer is less popular than competitors, so you may have better luck here than elsewhere during potential restocks.
This compact camera lists for $55 and plugs directly into the Switch 2 console or dock’s USB-C port so you can chat with friends or access in-game features for select titles. It has a wide-angle lens and you can adjust the angle to easily keep yourself in frame. Plus, it will automatically adjust its brightness so your face is always visible.
Nintendo Switch 2 preorders at Nintendo
Nintendo preorders require an invitation, and to help combat scalpers, priority is being given to Nintendo Switch Online members who’ve had a paid membership for at least 12 months and have a minimum of 50 total gameplay hours as of April 2. These invitations are first come, first served and will be valid for 72 hours. You can still register now if you haven’t already.
Preordering directly from Nintendo is the obvious choice if you’re looking to grab the Switch 2 on release day. You can order just the console for $450 or bundle it with Mario Kart World for $500. You can still register for preorders, with priority being given to Nintendo Switch Online members who’ve had a paid membership for at least 12 months and have a minimum of 50 total gameplay hours as of April 2.
As with the US, you’ll need to get an invitation to preorder the Switch 2 from Nintendo directly. You can still register, with priority being given to Nintendo Switch Online members who’ve had a paid membership for at least 12 months and have a minimum of 50 total gameplay hours as of April 2.
Nintendo Switch 2 Pro Controller
As with the Switch 2 console, accessories like the $85 Pro Controller will require you to register for an invitation if you’re hoping to preorder directly from Nintendo.
Nintendo Switch 2 preorders at Best Buy
Best Buy preorders are currently sold out, and an account is required if you’re hoping to take advantage of any restocks. You’ll have to confirm your pickup or shipping location to add it to your cart, after which you’ll have 10 minutes to complete the checkout process. As for the accessories, some are available for preorder but most are out of stock and you’ll have to sign up to be notified when they are back on the shelves.
As with the other big retailers, Best Buy’s preorders are currently sold out. If you’re hoping to take advantage of any future restocks, note that an account is required for the order, so make sure you have one before you try and start the checkout process.
Best Buy preorders also sold out in Canada. Like the US, you’ll need to set up an account if you’ve not done so already, as it’s required for the purchase.
Samsung 256GB microSD Express
Even with the Switch 2’s boosted storage, you may be looking to boost its memory with a microSD card. This Samsung Express microSD is designed specifically for Nintendo’s new console, and even features a unique Mario-inspired design. It lists for $60 and an account is required for preorders.
Nintendo Switch 2 preorders at Amazon
Amazon has not given us any information about if and when US customers will be able to preorder the Switch 2, but Canadian buyers can request an invite now.
Amazon doesn’t have official preorder pages for the console or Mario Kart World bundle yet, and unlike other retailers, it has yet to announce if or when its preorders will begin.
Amazon is now offering invitations for Switch 2 preorders in Canada for both the standalone console and the Mario Kart World bundle.
UK Nintendo Switch 2 preorders
Unsurprisingly, it’s been tough to preorder the Switch 2 since availability first opened on April 8, and all UK retailers are currently sold out. However, keep an eye on John Lewis, as we’ve been seeing both the standalone console and Mario Kart World bundle dip in and out of stock there. We’re hopeful about more restocks in the coming days and will be checking availability regularly, so check back often for the latest info.
Note: We have no confirmation that the digital download code for Mario Kart World in the UK Switch 2 bundle will work with non-UK Nintendo accounts. The power cables are also different for each region. If you plan to buy a UK Switch 2 from outside the country, please know there’s no guarantee it’ll work as expected.
Nintendo Switch 2 preorders are currently sold out at Amazon, both for the console alone and the Mario Kart World bundle. We’ll update this page if we see a restock.
Nintendo preorders are officially open in the UK, but you’ll need to have received an invite to take advantage of them. Games and accessories are also available for preorder and don’t require a special invitation.
John Lewis is one of the only places in the UK that has had sporadic availability of the Switch 2. It’s currently out of stock, but it’s worth keeping an eye on this retailer if you’re hoping to get your preorder in.
Both the Mario Kart World bundle and the console alone are sold out at Argos right now. We’ll continue checking to see if more stock is added. Games and accessories are still available to preorder.
ShopTo has sold out of Nintendo Switch 2 consoles at this early preorder stage, but we’ll keep checking back there in case of a restock.
Very’s Switch 2 preorders are currently sold out, with the retailer suggesting would-be buyers “keep checking back” for further updates. We will, of course, be doing just that. When it did have Switch 2 models in stock, there were also a number of different bundles on offer that paired the console with controllers, cases, microSD cards and games.
Smyths Toys is currently sold out for both home delivery and pickup.
EE is listing the Mario Kart World bundle as out of stock right now, though it could be a good, slightly more under-the-radar place to check for restocks.
Currys is taking a unique approach to Nintendo Switch 2 supply-and-demand issues by requiring that preorders be placed in-store. You can head to your nearest location to do so, though you should probably call ahead before making the journey to avoid potential disappointment. There’s no sign of an online preorder yet, but the link below is where you’ll need to be when the device is eventually listed online.
GAME is a go-to spot for those wanting the latest hardware, but it has already sold out of its initial Switch 2 preorder stock. Plenty of games and accessories are available to preorder.
There’s no joy for Nintendo fans at The Game Collection right now, with both listings for the Switch 2 console and the Mario Kart World bundle showing as out of stock. There’s a chance more stock will be added, so we’ll keep you posted.
When can I preorder the Nintendo Switch 2?
Preorders began on April 8 for UK customers, and while they’re currently sold out everywhere online, we could see restocks in the coming days. American and Canadian preorders were originally supposed to begin shortly after on April 9, but were delayed due to the new tariffs implemented by the US. After weeks of uncertainty, Nintendo finally confirmed that both countries would begin offering preorders on April 24. But as predicted, all retailers sold out almost instantly. We’re hopeful that there will be some restocks in the coming hours and days, and will be keeping an eye on the retailers above.
Read more: How Nintendo Is Combating Switch 2 Scalpers
How much will the Nintendo Switch 2 cost?
There was some concern that the new US tariffs were going to lead to some significant price hikes on both the standalone console and the Mario Kart World bundle. Fortunately, Nintendo has confirmed that the original pricing still stands. The console will be available for $450, with the Mario Kart World bundle priced at $500. However, there has been a change to the price of some accessories, with some increasing by $5.
When will the Nintendo Switch 2 be released?
The Switch 2 is scheduled to begin shipping on June 5. Nintendo has confirmed that the preorder delay in the US and Canada won’t affect this release date. Nintendo recently updated its preorder page stating that a June 5 delivery is not guaranteed if you’re preordering from the manufacturer directly. Other retailers are still promising delivery on release day.
When can I preorder Nintendo Switch 2 accessories?
Preorders for Switch 2 controllers, cases and other accessories will begin at the same time as console preorders. For UK customers, that means you can start ordering them now. Additionally, some third-party Switch 2 accessories are already available. Just note that prices for some accessories have been increased.
When can I preorder Nintendo Switch 2 games?
As with accessories, Switch 2 game preorders will be available when console preorders go live. Fortunately, the cost of the two biggest launch titles will not be affected by the recent price increase of accessories. You’ll be able to order the digital copy of Mario Kart World for $80 and Donkey Kong Bananza for $70.
Will the Nintendo Switch 2 come in other colors?
For the new Switch 2, Nintendo has ditched the colored Joy-Cons for a more sleek, monochrome look — though there are still pops of red and blue around the analog sticks. As of now, Nintendo hasn’t said anything about additional colors.
Is the Nintendo Switch 2 Mario Kart World Bundle worth it?
The Mario Kart series has been a long-standing tentpole for Nintendo, and fans were thrilled to hear that a new title is on the way. But the excitement was dampened by the announcement that the new game will come with an increased price tag: $80 for the digital edition, or $90 if you want a physical copy. You can bundle a digital copy with the console on release day for $500 total, which saves you $30 compared with buying them separately. It’s an excellent value if it’s a game you’re certain you want in your library, and likely the only “discount” we’ll see on this title for quite some time. Plus, Nintendo recently announced that this bundle will be available only “through fall 2025,” which means you’ll have a limited chance to take advantage of these savings.
Nintendo Switch 2 preorders: What are people saying?
There are still some mixed feelings about Nintendo’s newest console. While some are happy to see that Nintendo hasn’t altered much about the wildly popular original Switch, others feel not enough has changed to justify the $150 price hike — with CNET gaming expert Scott Stein calling it a console that “feels a lot like an updated version of a system many people already own.” The recent confirmation that the US tariffs won’t be leading to any further price increases has helped stifle gamers’ exasperation a bit, but many are still unhappy with the fact that select games will be selling for up to $20 more than the standard $60. Only time will tell whether most people consider the new console and games are worth the higher costs once they officially become available on June 5.
Two years ago, Emma Dimery was told her stage 4 colon cancer was incurable. Today, she is healthy and cancer-free — and she says a last-resort clinical trial saved her life.
Dimery, who lives in Minnesota, was just 23 when she was diagnosed with colon cancer, which has been rising sharply among teens and young adults in recent years.
After experiencing abdominal pain and having abnormal blood work, Dimery underwent a colonoscopy, which revealed a “softball-sized” tumor and another “golf ball-sized” one, she told Fox News Digital.
ALTERNATIVE CANCER TREATMENT COULD REPLACE CHEMO AND SURGERY, STUDY SUGGESTS
Despite multiple surgeries, chemotherapy, radiation and some combination therapies, Dimery’s treatment-resistant cancer spread throughout her body over the years, leading to what she described as a “low point.”
Emma Dimery is shown during the first phase of the clinical trial.(Emma Dimery)
“I was basically treading water, doing immunotherapy every other week for probably four years or so,” she told Fox News Digital during an on-camera interview, adding that she was “out of options.” (See the video at the top of the article.)
“I had been waiting for a clinical trial,” recalled Dimery, now 35. “I had exhausted every other standard of treatment, and even some not-so-standard ones.”
A glimmer of hope
When Dimery heard about a new trial at the University of Minnesota, she said it “wasn’t a tough decision.”
“I was on board pretty much from day one,” she said.
The trial, led by Dr. Emil Lou, tested an experimental genetic therapy that the researcher described as the “next frontier of immunotherapy.”
WOMAN SAYS DOG DETECTED HER BREAST CANCER BEFORE DOCTORS DID: ‘HE’S KNOWN THIS WHOLE TIME’
While most immunotherapies have targets that are on the outside of cells, this one targeted the insides of cells.
“Some of the targets inside the cell are preventing the immune system from activating against the cancer,” Lou, a medical oncologist and scientist who had previously treated Dimery, told Fox News Digital in an on-camera interview. “It’s kind of like a shield that protects the cancer cell from the body’s immune system.”
In 2023, Emma Dimery is pictured in the hospital with her care exam during the clinical trial with her care team.(Emma Dimery)
In the trial, cancer cells were retrieved from the participants, then were altered in a lab using CRISPR-Cas9 gene editing technology, which Lou described as “genetic scissors.” The process programmed the cells to have a more effective anti-tumor response.
The altered cells were then reintroduced into the patients’ bodies via infusion.
“They trained the cells to be able to fight my cancer specifically when they were reintroduced into my body,” Dimery noted.
“What we saw … was a magnificent and unprecedented level of response.”
It was a long process that was grueling at times, she shared, with some challenging side effects.
“You just get through it and try to focus on the good,” Dimery said. “And I had a lot of good around me. I had really amazing support team.”
A total of 12 patients participated in the study — but Dimery had by far the best results.
‘Unprecedented response’
The vast majority of advanced colorectal cancers are not considered to be curable, Lou confirmed to Fox News Digital.
“The chemotherapies or whatever other treatments we have available, while there are a number of them, are palliative — meaning they don’t have the capability to induce a cure in patients with metastatic stage 4 colorectal cancers,” he said.
“Emma was in that category until she came onto our trial.”
Emma Dimery and her husband Andrew celebrate after buying a home right after she was released from the hospital after the trial in 2023.(Emma Dimery)
Lou described Dimery’s response to the experimental immunotherapy as “remarkable.” After just one infusion of the engineered cells, she was pronounced cancer-free — an outcome that is “almost unheard-of” with advanced colorectal cancer.
“We term this in oncology as a ‘clinical complete response,’ which is something that you see in 10% or less of all patients,” Lou said. “And it’s less than 10% for stage 4 colorectal cancers.”
WOMAN SAYS CHATGPT SAVED HER LIFE BY HELPING DETECT CANCER, WHICH DOCTORS MISSED
“What we saw in Emma was a magnificent and unprecedented level of response, going from a metastatic stage for an otherwise incurable cancer … where now we don’t see any cancer.”
Two years after the trial, Dimery said she’s doing “really well.”
Emma Dimery is pictured with her sister, Anne Johnson, during a 2017 hospital stay.(Emma Dimery)
“The trial worked almost immediately — and I’ve had no evidence of disease since,” she told Fox News Digital.
While she’s hesitant to use “the C-word,” or “cure,” she said the trial has changed the way she thinks of cancer.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“Until now, the best I could hope for was remission to the point of no evidence of disease … and had to accept that it could rear its head again at any point, even if they can’t detect it on a scan,” Dimery said.
“All of my scans have just been coming back better and better.”
“You just get through it and try to focus on the good,” Dimery said in an on-camera interview with Fox News Digital. “And I had a lot of good around me. I had really amazing support team.”(Fox News)
Dimery’s story was unveiled last week at the American Association for Cancer Research (AACR) Annual Meeting in Chicago.
“Emma is exceptional in many ways, but what we learned from her case, we hope to replicate and decipher how we can achieve this on a more consistent basis across the board for more patients like her,” Lou added.
Importance of screening
Studies have shown that in 2023, one in 10 colorectal cancer diagnoses were considered early-onset, or affecting patients under 50 years of age.
The American College of Surgeons predicts that early-onset cases will double by 2030.
Emma Dimery is pictured in 2013, at just 23 years, after receiving her initial cancer diagnosis.(Emma Dimery)
“Colorectal cancer remains one of the few cancers for which we have validated screening tools,” Lou noted.
Those include blood-based tests, stool-based tests and colonoscopies.
In 2018, the American Cancer Society changed its colorectal screening recommendation from age 50 to age 45. Other medical organizations followed suit in ensuing years.
“The trial worked almost immediately — and I’ve had no evidence of disease since.”
Even so, Lou said he is seeing patients diagnosed well ahead of the age 45 benchmark.
“I’m seeing something in the last five or six years that I really did not see earlier in my career — teenagers, people in their 20s, 30s and 40s,” he shared.
“Just last week, I saw someone in their early 40s with widely metastatic stage 4 colorectal cancer.”
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
What’s “striking and alarming,” Lou said, is that about half of the cases of colorectal cancer are diagnosed at stage 4.
“A lot of times, they don’t even have symptoms, or they have symptoms that were construed as something else.”
The more people who are aware, the better. I think it’s really important to not panic, but to stay informed and connected to the community,” said Emma Dimery, pictured in 2021 during an Immunotherapy treatment.(Emma Dimery)
Dimery said she is encouraged by early-onset colon cancer coming to the “forefront of public consciousness.”
The more people who are aware, the better. I think it’s really important to not panic, but to stay informed and connected to the community.”
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
Genetic testing is also important to gauge the availability of clinical trials, she noted.
“That can tell you a lot about your individual type of cancer,” Dimery said. “Luckily for me, I had just the right kind of cancer for this treatment.”
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
Selena Gomez and Benny Blanco are the “It” couple of Hollywood. The singer, actress confirmed her relationship with the record producer in December 2023. Since then, they have been leaving fans gushing with their adorable posts on social media. Besides their undeniable chemistry, Selena and Benny’s shared love for food has become a charming highlight of their relationship. Now, the pair has spilled the beans on their “last meal” preferences, and unsurprisingly, it includes their partner’s signature dishes, reported People Magazine.
On April 30, Selena Gomez and Benny Blanco appeared on an episode of the Table Manners with Jessie and Lennie Ware podcast. During the conversation, Benny revealed that his “last supper” meal would be corn casserole, a type of sweet cornbread, made by his ladylove. “We’re big on casserole,” Gomez said. “It’s delicious and doesn’t have the same density [as corn bread], it’s much looser,” admitted Benny.
When Benny Blanco shared that he grew up eating a lot of corn in his childhood, Selena Gomez echoed a similar sentiment. She said, “I love [it] because you can make it a Mexican street with all of [the corn]. [That’s] how I grew up.”
When Benny Blanco was asked to name his fiancée’s last meal, he selected one of his home-cooked dishes – steak. Explaining the preparation process, Benny said, “She wants my steak, specifically. I do like a ribeye, and then I usually smoke it low for a long time, and then I sear it at the end. I smoke it in a smoker for like, an hour.” The outcome is an appetising “medium smoke” and an “almost barbecue like” steak.
The other items that Selena Gomez would want on her final meal menu were her grandmother’s rice and tamale and her Nana’s chicken and dumplings, including salmon sushi topped with sesame seeds and dipped in soy, Mexican Pizza from Taco Bell, Coke slushie and nachos served with pickled jalapenos.
After Benny Blanco finished reciting Selena Gomez’s favourite bites, the Only Murders in the Building actress chimed in, “The only thing he missed is maybe Benihana’s fried rice.”
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-05-05/Canton-Fair-shows-how-Chinese-firms-are-breaking-U-S-tariff-barriers-1D7T3HCehOg/img/877225dd97a447ff805fbb8e2e9fd9c6/877225dd97a447ff805fbb8e2e9fd9c6.png' alt='Visitors gather at the service robots display zone at the 137th China Import and Export Fair in Guangzhou City, south China's Guangdong Province, April 19, 2025. /VCG'
As the U.S. escalates its global tariff offensive, the 137th China Import and Export Fair – also known as the Canton Fair – demonstrates how Chinese companies are responding to protectionist trends through resilience and innovation.
Held in three phases from April 15 to May 5, the fair drew over 224,000 overseas buyers from 219 countries and regions by the end of the second phase, marking a record high for the same period.
Diversifying markets to weather U.S. tariffs
Facing mounting tariffs, many Chinese firms are shifting away from overreliance on the American market. Yongjia Garments Co., which exports primarily to the U.S., admitted that while export volume to the U.S. has increased this year, prices have fallen due to tariff pressures. The company is now capping single-market exposure at 30 percent, cutting costs with suppliers and building its own brand to boost value.
Industry veterans are similarly recalibrating. Liang Yu, a senior trader in the lighting sector, said his firm has expanded along Belt and Road markets in South America, the Middle East and Southeast Asia. “Tariffs may cause short-term disruption, but the long-term impact is limited,” he noted.
Since 2018, larger firms in China have been setting up overseas factories to offset trade-war risks, and some companies began to gradually scale down U.S. exports in favor of domestic sales and markets in Southeast Asia, Canada and the Europe. Li Wei, a foreign trade practitioner told CMG that Chinese products have strong competitiveness globally and the ongoing tariff battles are likely to accelerate the development of overseas Chinese industrial chains. He called for faster government approvals for outbound investment and clearer guidance on overseas processing applications.
Official data shows that the U.S. share of China’s total exports has declined significantly – from 19.2 percent in 2018 to 14.7 percent in 2024. By contrast, since 2018, the share of China’s exports going to ASEAN has risen from 12.8 percent to 16.4 percent, while exports to Belt and Road countries have jumped from 38.7 percent to 47.8 percent. These markets continue to see strong growth.
This year’s fair also showcased the growing tech edge of Chinese manufacturing. Innovation and intelligent design were everywhere – from AI-powered plush toys and robot baristas to delivery bots and 3D printers.
One robotic coffee kiosk, which brews a cup in just 50 seconds, drew long lines and racked up over 10 million yuan ($1.39 million) in orders within just two days. It’s now sold in more than 40 countries. “When your technology is essential to the world, tariffs don’t matter,” said the company’s founder.
A delivery robot firm also secured nearly $1 million in orders on day one, including from American buyers. To spotlight such advancements, the Canton Fair debuted a dedicated service robot zone featuring 46 companies across 4,200 square meters.
In the first phase of the event, more than 3,700 firms showcased innovations in smart manufacturing, AI and new-energy technologies. Notable highlights included an AI lawn mower capable of autonomously trimming 2,000 square meters daily, and a 3D ceramic printer that can produce intricate vases in under an hour – eliminating the need for molds and significantly shortening production cycles.
These breakthroughs reflect broader momentum. In 2024, China ranked 11th in the Global Innovation Index, with R&D spending second only to the U.S. and over 460,000 high-tech firms nationwide. As more high-value Chinese products gain global traction, “Made in China” is no longer just cost-effective – it also represents cutting-edge innovation.
Beyond innovation, the fair highlighted China’s deep industrial strength and dependable supply chains. These advantages continue to attract global buyers and underpin China’s export resilience.
At the fair, a Guangzhou-based luggage exporter unveiled more than 200 models, with fresh designs making up over half the lineup. The company secured deals exceeding 4.5 million yuan, up 12 percent from the last session. Many exhibitors hailed from Shiling Town, a major leather goods hub that produces 700 million bags annually for 140 countries.
China’s industrial clusters allow for rapid customization and efficient procurement. Buyers often visit nearby factories after spotting products at the fair, enabling faster decision-making and deeper collaboration. For example, one Greek buyer, captivated by glittering, diamond-like embroidery artwork at the fair, visited a Yiwu factory, hoping to bring the product to Europe.
An American buyer told China Media Group that China’s manufacturing reliability remains its biggest draw. “If we need a capacitor, we can get it the same day. We’ve built long-term partnerships here. You can’t just replace that overnight,” he said, adding, “I hope the Trump administration rethinks its tariff policy so we can collaborate more freely.”
China has been the world’s largest manufacturing nation for 15 consecutive years, with the most complete industrial system globally. In the first quarter of 2024, China’s trade volume hit 10.3 trillion yuan – up 1.3 percent year-on-year and marking the eighth straight quarter above the 10 trillion mark.
Developers target India’s growing senior population with specialised housing projects, anticipating a $12-15 billion market by 2030
| Photo Credit:
Dimple Bhati
With India’s silver population projected to double to 346 million by 2030, according to a JLL report, a growing number of developers are beelining to address the housing needs of senior citizens. Projects such as Antara by Max Group, Riva by Tata Housing, Parkside by Brigade in Bengaluru’s Devanahalli, and Saral Satya by DS Group in Noida are being designed specifically for this demographic.
Rajit Mehta, MD and CEO of Antara Senior Care, describes the trend as the next big wave in real estate, comparable to how co-working and co-living disrupted urban housing models. “This is not just a demand-driven segment; it’s also a compelling new business story,” he said.
Shifting preferences
Multiple factors are influencing the evolution of senior living in India: rising life expectancy, the growing prevalence of age-related health conditions, the breakdown of joint families, and rapid urbanisation. Increasingly, elderly individuals, especially those from well-travelled or NRI families, are seeking communities that offer a mix of independence, healthcare access, and social connection.
Presently, India has an estimated 18,000 units in the organised senior living and care segment. The southern region leads the supply with a 62 per cent share, driven by cities like Chennai, Bengaluru, and Coimbatore that offer favourable weather, robust healthcare systems, and a high base of NRI households. The north — including Haryana, Rajasthan, Uttarakhand, and parts of Uttar Pradesh — accounts for 25 per cent, while Maharashtra and Gujarat contribute the remaining 13 per cent, according to CBRE Chairman Anshuman Magazine.
Developers eye the market
Brigade Group, for instance, has announced a luxury residential and senior living project in Mysuru, where 25 per cent of the units will be reserved for senior-friendly spaces. “We see this as a strategic growth area and are actively exploring more such projects in Bengaluru, Chennai, and Hyderabad,” said Viswa Prathap Desu, COO (Residential), Brigade Group. The company has already tied up with healthcare partners like St. John’s Medical College and Ramaiah Memorial Hospital to strengthen its offerings.
Tata Housing’s Riva project on Tumkur Road in Bengaluru has sold out, according to its official website. DS Group’s Saral Satya project in Greater Noida has completed its first phase and offers luxury facilities tailored to senior citizens.
Antara started its senior living with Dehradun with 197 units, all sold out. While its Noida project, comprising 564 units, has seen 340 sold in the first phase. The next phase of 220 units is expected to launch soon. The company’s third project, managed by Antara, is an intergenerational model located along the Dwarka Expressway in Gurgaon.
A market with gaps
“The demand is immense, but the supply is still catching up,” said Mehta. According to JLL estimates, there is a requirement of 18 lakh senior living units by 2030, but current supply is just 50,000–60,000 units. That’s a $3–4 billion market today, with potential to reach $12–15 billion.
The target audience is also evolving. In Noida, many buyers are aged 55–65, planning ahead for a comfortable retirement, while in Dehradun, most residents are in their late 60s or early 70s. In Gurgaon, professionals many still working are opting in early, anticipating a lifestyle transition over the next five to six years, Mehta said.
However, the segment is not without challenges. “Only a miniscule percentage of the elderly have pension schemes or long-term savings. Many rely on their children or limited retirement corpus,” added Mehta. He added that there are also no robust insurance products that cover assisted living or monthly care expenses post 65–70 years of age. “Another issue is the absence of well-defined regulatory frameworks and standards for senior care in India.”
Beyond the metros
While big players are focused on metro cities, others like Axon Developers are expanding into semi-urban and tourist locations. “The market is largely unorganised with little presence beyond metros,” said Ankit Kansal of Axon. The company is developing retirement homes in Sindhudurg, North Goa, Tilari, Chamba, Rishikesh, and Ayodhya, and is planning future projects along the Delhi–Jaipur Expressway, Coorg, and Alwar.
U NAJNOVIJOJ ponudi Index Oglasa, među najpopularnijim nekretninama ističe se kuća s bazenom u Krapinskim Toplicama, koja privlači veliki interes kupaca. Donosimo pregled najtraženijih nekretnina koje su obilježile ovotjednu ponudu.
Moderna kuća s bazenom u Krapinskim Toplicama
U mirnom okruženju Krapinskih Toplica prodaje se moderna kuća stambene površine 83 m² na parceli od 901 m². Izgrađena 2023. godine, kuća se sastoji od dnevnog boravka s blagovaonicom, dvije spavaće sobe, kupaonice i prostrane terase.
Posebnu vrijednost nekretnini daje uređena okućnica s bazenom, roštiljem i vanjskim tušem. Kuća je kategorizirana s 4 zvjezdice, ima uporabnu dozvolu, a nalazi se u neposrednoj blizini supermarketa i toplica. Očekivani povrat na investiciju u slučaju turističkog iznajmljivanja je 10% godišnje. Cijena ove atraktivne nekretnine iznosi 250.000 €.
Pogledaj oglas
Dvojna kuća s dva stana na Trešnjevci
Na Trešnjevci se prodaje dvojna kuća ukupne površine 135 m² smještena na parceli od 90 m². Nekretnina se sastoji od podruma, prizemlja, kata i tavana, a posebno je zanimljiva jer nudi dva zasebna stana s odvojenim ulazima.
U prizemlju se nalazi stan od 48 m², dok je na katu stan od 55 m². Kuća je temeljito adaptirana 2017. godine kada je promijenjena stolarija, fasada i krov, te dodatno uređena 2024. godine. U neposrednoj blizini nalazi se javni prijevoz, trgovine, sportski centri, vrtić i park. Cijena kuće je 240.000 €.
Pogledaj oglas
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Prostran stan kod Kvaternikovog trga
Na prestižnoj lokaciji kod Kvaternikovog trga prodaje se troipolsobni stan površine 65 m² u prizemlju stambene zgrade. Zgrada je izgrađena 1940-ih godina i ima ukupno tri kata.
Stan se sastoji od dnevnog boravka s blagovaonicom, kuhinje, dvije spavaće sobe, radne sobe i kupaonice. Dodatnu vrijednost pruža mogućnost korištenja prostrane terase u dvorištu zgrade neto korisne površine 11 m². Mikrolokacija je idealna za obiteljski život, a cijena iznosi 199.000 €.
Pogledaj oglas
Svijetao stan s potencijalom u Vrbanima
U naselju Vrbani prodaje se prostran i svijetao stan od 77.36 m², smješten na drugom katu zgrade. Posebno je zanimljivo da je u tijeku ugradnja dizala u zgradu, što predstavlja dodatnu vrijednost.
Stan ima izvrsnu sjever-jug orijentaciju, a sastoji se od dvije spavaće sobe, dodatne radne sobe, dnevnog boravka s izlazom na balkon, kuhinje s ostavom, kupaonice s WC-om te još jednog odvojenog toaleta. Uz stan dolazi i pravo korištenja dijela tavanskog prostora. Cijena stana iznosi 300.000 €.
Pogledaj oglas
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Šarmantna kamena kuća u centru Jelse
U samom centru Jelse na otoku Hvaru prodaje se šarmantna stara kamena kuća za potpunu obnovu. Nekretnina ima lijepo zajedničko kameno dvorište od približno 10 m², koje pruža autentičan mediteranski karakter.
Kuća se sastoji od prizemlja od 30 m², prvog kata iste veličine i prostranog potkrovlja s rustikalnim starim kaminom. Vanjsko stubište u dvorištu vodi na gornje etaže. Cijena iznosi 150.000 €.
Pogledaj oglas
Drvena kuća s velikom okućnicom u Vilancima
U naselju Vilanci prodaje se drvena kuća površine 55 m², stara 100 godina, smještena na zemljištu od 561 m². Dodatna vrijednost je zemljište s druge strane puta, površine 514 m², koje je uključeno u cijenu.
Kuća ima priključenu struju i vodu, a plin se nalazi na putu ispred parcele. Bazeni Tuhelj udaljeni su samo 3 kilometra, što čini lokaciju posebno atraktivnom. Vlasnički list je bez tereta, a cijena iznosi svega 34.000 €.
Pogledaj oglas
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Prostrano seosko imanje u Bedekovčini
Na prodaju je imanje u mjestu Vojnić Breg, Bedekovčina, koje uključuje kuću s prizemljem i potkrovljem iz 1968. godine, dvorište, spremište i pomoćnu zgradu. Ukupna površina okućnice iznosi 3.723 m².
Uz kuću se nalazi dodatna livada površine 4.776 m², idealna za seoski turizam ili vinograd. Ovo je savršeno mjesto za obiteljski život u miru i tišini, a cijena iznosi 30.000 €.
Pogledaj oglas
Samostojeća kuća na Savici Šanci
Na Savici Šanci prodaje se samostojeća kuća stambene površine 95 m² na parceli od 296 m². Kuća se sastoji od dvije stambene jedinice sa zasebnim ulazima: jedna od 55 m² izgrađena 1950. godine te druga od 36 m² izgrađena 2010. godine.
Uz kuću se nalaze natkrivena terasa, manji vrt, a na ulaznom dijelu parcele može se parkirati jedno vozilo. Kući iz 1950-ih godina zbog potresa potrebna je rekonstrukcijska obnova. Cijena nekretnine je 135.000 €.
Pogledaj oglas
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Trosobni stan s balkonom i parkirnim mjestom u Jakuševcu
U Jakuševcu kod Zapruđa prodaje se lijep trosobni stan u zgradi izgrađenoj 2016. godine. Stan se nalazi na prvom katu stambene zgrade s dva dizala i ima neto površinu 71.5 m².
Sastoji se od ulaznog hodnika, odvojenog toaleta, kupaonice s WC-om, dvije spavaće sobe, dnevnog boravka, blagovaonice i kuhinje otvorenog tipa te balkona. Stanu pripada spremište u podrumu površine 2.68 m² i parkirno mjesto s rampom. Cijena iznosi 250.000 €.
Pogledaj oglas
Mobilna kućica u Istri
U Valbandonu kod Fažane hitno se prodaje mobilna kućica dimenzija 3×8 m, s terasom 4×2.5 m. Kućica je potpuno opremljena, čista i uredna, s kupaonicom s toplom vodom i štednjakom na plin.
Ova jedinstvena ponuda po cijeni od samo 11.800 € idealna je za one koji traže povoljnu nekretninu u blizini mora i turističkih sadržaja.
Pogledaj oglas
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Sam Altman-run OpenAI will continue to be overseen and controlled by the nonprofit and its ‘for profit LLC’ will transition to a public benefit corporation (PBC), giving the nonprofit better resources to support several benefits, the company has announced.
OpenAI was founded as a nonprofit, and is today overseen and controlled by that nonprofit.
“Going forward, it will continue to be overseen and controlled by that nonprofit. Our for-profit LLC, which has been under the nonprofit since 2019, will transition to a Public Benefit Corporation (PBC)–a purpose-driven company structure that has to consider the interests of both shareholders and the mission,” the ChatGPT maker said in a statement.
The nonprofit will control and also be a large shareholder of the PBC.
“Our mission remains the same, and the PBC will have the same mission. We made the decision for the nonprofit to retain control of OpenAI after hearing from civic leaders and engaging in constructive dialogue with the offices of the Attorney General of Delaware and the Attorney General of California,” said OpenAI Board chair Bret Taylor.
Altman said as the PBC grows, the nonprofit’s resources will grow, so it can do even more.
“We’re excited to soon get recommendations from our nonprofit commission on how we can help make sure AI benefits everyone—not just a few. Their ideas will focus on how our nonprofit work can support a more democratic AI future, and have real impact in areas like health, education, public services, and scientific discovery,” he wrote in a letter to employees.
“We want our nonprofit to be the largest and most effective nonprofit in history that will be focused on using AI to enable the highest-leverage outcomes for people,” he added.
He said this sets them up to continue to make rapid, safe progress and to put great AI in the hands of everyone. “Creating AGI is our brick in the path of human progress; we can’t wait to see what bricks you will add next,” said Altman.
With a resounding 92 per cent score on Rotten Tomatoes, 2018 Indonesian action thriller The Night Comes for Us is a masterclass in raw storytelling and visceral intensity.
Written and directed by Timo Tjahjanto, the project was originally conceived as a script, then adapted into a graphic novel, before eventually culminating in its release as a film.
Reuniting Joe Taslim and Iko Uwais, who iconically appeared together in The Raid: Redemption, The Night Comes for Us also stars Julie Estelle, Sunny Pang, Zack Lee, and Shareefa Daanish.
Packed with intensely brutal fight sequences that are immeasurably high on gore, The Night Comes for Us is centred around a former triad enforcer, Ito (Joe Taslim), who betrays his gang to protect a young girl from the crime syndicate, resulting in him becoming the target of the triads and the legions of deadly assassins sent his way, including his childhood best friend, Arain, portrayed by the indomitable poster boy of Pencak Silat — Iko Uwais.
Addressing his preparation for the film, Joe Taslim said in an interview with Film School Rejects: “All the credits for choreography, I think, goes to Iko Uwais and his team. They design all the fights, the structures. He would jump in to give his ideas to shape the fights, to freshen up the tone of the movie and stuff. This movie was supposed to happen actually in 2014 and something happened so it has to be in a coma.
“So we trained actually three, four years ago for the movie. We refreshed the training but we changed a little bit of the choreography.”
In 2022, director Timo Tjahjanto shared that while a sequel to the film “is still not official”, he is hopeful. Tjahjanto had publicly confirmed previously that he had developed a story for the sequel that focused on Julie Estelle’s character, The Operator.
Deadpool and Cable co-creator Robert Liefeld showered high praise on the film and its director as he took to X (formerly Twitter) to commend the movie.
Although criticised for the violence and gore depicted on screen, the actioner floored critics across the board, with one saying: “This is incredibly violent to the point of disturbing. Nonetheless, the fight scenes are some of the best I’ve ever seen. But this is a very dark and depressing story.”
Another critical review of the film added: “The Night Comes For Us is a dynamite two hours and for those of us missing the action films of old, it’s a breath of fresh air.”
Conjecture regarding the film evolving into a franchise ran abound, with one critic saying: “Action fans could hardly wish for anything more than what’s served up in The Night Comes for Us. The film’s hardcore constituency will be wanting more of this from [Timo] Tjahjanto, and a sequel, prequel, or even franchise would not surprise from here.”
Another review said: “An utterly thrilling ride from the first second to the last, The Night Comes For Us is one of the best action movies of recent years.”
Audiences were left equally thrilled after watching the film, with one viewer commenting: “As a die-hard action fan, I went into this movie with high expectations—and it still managed to blow me away. The action sequences are intense, brutal, and beautifully choreographed. It’s a full-on adrenaline rush from start to finish. This one’s a must-watch for any action junkie.”
Another audience review said: “I still come back and watch this film from time to time. I love the fight choreography. Even after watching it a few times, I still cringe on a few moments when I see blades go in places they shouldn’t. This is right up there with The Raid films for me.”
One viewer felt that Hollywood has a lot to learn from Indonesian action films, as they wrote: “Quick, gruesome, stylish which personifies Indonesian movies. Iko Uwais and Joe Taslim were awesome as usual and Hollywood should learn from them.”
And one audience member couldn’t stop gushing about the movie’s brilliance: “Absolutely fantastic movie. Some of the best action directing and some of the best action choreography I’ve ever seen. The relationship between Iko and Arian is incredibly tragic and compelling. Exceeded my expectations in every way.”
The Ford Mustang GTD has beaten its previous Nürburgring lap time, cementing its position as the fastest US-made car and the fifth fastest production car around the legendary German track.
The Mustang GTD – a road-registrable, track-focussed version of the legendary Pony car – lopped a significant 5.5 seconds off its previous best, posting a 6:52.071 time over the 20.8km Nordschleife layout.
In terms of production cars, only the Mercedes-AMG One (6:29.090), Porsche 911 GT2 RS with Manthey Performance Kit (6:43.300), Mercedes-AMG Black Series (6:29.090) and Porsche 911 GT3 RS (6:49.328) have gone faster.
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
The faster lap time saw the Ford jump the Porsche 911 GT3 with Manthey Performance Kit to officially become the fourth-fastest production car around the ‘Ring.
The carmaker said the faster lap came courtesy of a recalibrated powertrain, stiffer chassis, retuned ABS and traction control settings, as well as minor body changes to refine the GTD’s aero package.
There was also time left on the table for Mustang GTD’s second run, given efforts at its 2024 visit to the circuit were hampered by changing weather conditions limiting Ford factory driver Dirk Muller.
The Nürburgring Nordschleife, located in the Eifel Mountains, is used by carmakers globally to develop vehicles, its impressive length more than triple the distance around Mount Panorama, Bathurst, in Australia.
The German circuit’s wide array of different corner types across its undulating layout serves up a true test for vehicle dynamics, punishing vehicle brakes, steering, suspension and tyres.
Revealed in early 2024, the GT3-inspired Mustang GTD made its racing debut at last year’s 24 Hours of Le Mans and took its first victory at the Rolex 24 at Daytona endurance race in January 2025.
Road-car production of the Mustang GTD is set to kick off by the middle of 2025 as it hits US showrooms at around $US300,000 ($A465,000).
Ford has confirmed the GTD will only be made in left-hand drive and therefore won’t be sold in Australia.
The Ford Mustang was Australia’s most popular sports car from 2016 to 2022, overtaken by the Subaru BRZ in 2023 and relegated to third after the BMW 2 Series toppled the BRZ in 2024.
Unlisted shares of Srigee DLM Ltd are currently trading at Rs 129 apiece in the grey market, which is a 30.30 per cent premium over the upper IPO price of Rs 99.
The Srigee DLM IPO has received a strong response from investors.
Srigee DLM IPO Day 2: The initial public offering of Srigee DLM Ltd received a strong response on its first day of bidding on Monday, May 5. The three-day IPO will be closed on Wednesday, May 7. Now, till 10:34 am on the second day of bidding on May 6, the Rs 16.98-crore BSE SME IPO received a strong 21.67 times subscription garnering bids for 2,47,78,800 shares as against 11,43,600 shares on offer.
The retail and NII participation stood at 24.49 times and 41.82 times, respectively. The qualified institutional buyers (QIB) category has received a 1.45 times subscription on the Day 2 so far.
The IPO was fully subscribed in less than an hour of its opening on Monday. On the first day of bidding, it was subscribed by 13.77 times.
The price band of the Srigee DLM IPO has been fixed in the range of Rs 94 to Rs 99 apiece.
For investors, the minimum lot size for an application is 1,200. The minimum amount of investment required by retail investors Rs 1,18,800 on an upper price band. The minimum lot size investment for HNI is 2 lots (2,400 shares) amounting to Rs 2,37,600.
Srigee DLM IPO GMP Today
According to market observers, unlisted shares of Srigee DLM Ltd are currently trading at Rs 129 apiece in the grey market, which is a 30.30 per cent premium over the upper IPO price of Rs 99. It indicates a decent listing gains for investors on May 12, the tentative listing date.
The IPO will be listed on the BSE SME platform.
After the IPO closes on May 7, the Srigee DLM IPO allotment will likely be finalised on May 8.
The GMP is based on market sentiments and keeps changing. ‘Grey market premium’ indicates investors’ readiness to pay more than the issue price.
Srigee DLM IPO: More Details
The Srigee DLM IPO is entirely a fresh issue of 17.15 lakh shares. Its price band has been fixed at Rs 94 to Rs 99 per share.
As of December 31, 2024, Srigee DLM Limited reported revenue of Rs 54.34 crore and a profit after tax (PAT) of Rs 3.77 crore. The market capitalisation for the Srigee DLM IPO stands at Rs 59.14 crore.
As per the red herring prospectus (RHP),the company’s listed peers are Amber Enterprises India Ltd (with a P/E of 169.65), and Cyient DLM Ltd (with a P/E of 55.46).
GYR Capital Advisors Private Limited is the book-running lead manager of the Srigee DLM IPO, while Bigshare Services Pvt Ltd is the registrar for the issue.The market maker for Srigee DLM IPO is Globalworth Securities Limited.
Stay updated with all the latest business news, including market trends, stock updates, tax, IPO, banking finance, real estate, savings and investments. Get in-depth analysis, expert opinions, and real-time updates—only on News18. Also Download the News18 App to stay updated!
First Published:
News business » ipo Srigee DLM IPO Day 2: Check Subscription Status, GMP Today
The SEC’s Crypto Task Force is all set for its next roundtable conference on tokenization and DeFi. It has announced the agenda and panelists for the event, where top Wall Street leaders will join to discuss the future of finance.
The event titled “Tokenization — Moving Assets Onchain: Where TradFi and DeFi Meet” is scheduled for May 12 at the agency’s headquarters in Washington, D.C., where the event will explore how TradFi and DeFi meet through blockchain-based asset movement. The event will be open to the public and webcast live on the SEC’s website.
SEC’s Peirce Calls Tokenization Game-Changer
SEC Chair Paul Atkins will deliver the keynote address at the event. Commissioner Hester M. Peirce opened up about the importance of the event, calling Tokenization a technological development that could change many aspects of the financial markets. “I look forward to hearing ideas from our panelists on how the SEC should approach this area,” she said.
The event has two key sessions scheduled: “Capital Markets 2.0,” led by Jeff Dinwoodie from the law firm Cravath, and “The Future of Tokenization,” headed by Tiffany Smith from WilmerHale. The session will focus on the long-term implications, use cases, and how regulators may react to tokenized assets in capital markets.
BlackRock, Fidelity, Robinhood Join In
The roundtable will feature panelists from Wall Street Giants like BlackRock, Fidelity, Nasdaq, and Robinhood. Participants include Robert Mitchnick (BlackRock), Cynthia Lo Bessette (Fidelity), Eun Ah Choi (Nasdaq), Will Geyer (Invesco), Sandy Kaul (Franklin Templeton), Christine Moy (Apollo Management), among others.
Representatives from Robinhood, Maple Finance, Securitize, and Blockchain Capital will also share their views at the event.
SEC Reschedules ‘DeFi and the American Spirit’ Roundtable
Also, the fourth roundtable conference, “Defi and the American Spirit,” has been moved to June 9 from June 6.
The Crypto Task Force started a series of roundtables in March. The first roundtable discussed how crypto assets are classified, the second focused on crypto trading, and the third addressed custody issues. These sessions show how the agency is moving towards a more open and collaborative approach.
Self-driving cars are slowly becoming less sci-fi and more real-world as companies like Waymo, the driverless arm of Google’s parent company, Alphabet, expand into more cities — and countries.
Waymo currently operates fully autonomous rides for the general public in Phoenix, San Francisco, Los Angeles and Austin, Texas, which take place aboard the all-electric Jaguar I-Pace. It’s expanding its partnership with Uber by launching in Atlanta via the ride share app later this year, and plans to begin offering rides in Washington, DC, and Miami starting in 2026. In April, Waymo said it’ll begin driving its vehicles on Tokyo’s streets, making this the company’s first international location.
Along with those launches, Waymo in January announced it would also begin testing with manually driven vehicles in 10 new cities this year, starting with Las Vegas and San Diego. And last week, Waymo said it reached a preliminary agreement with Toyota to “explore a collaboration” geared toward developing autonomous driving tech, which could someday be factored into personally owned vehicles, too.
Waymo’s expansion extends to its manufacturing facilities, too. The company on Monday said it’s opening a new, 239,000-square-foot autonomous vehicle factory in the Phoenix area. The plan is to add 2,000 more fully autonomous Jaguar I-Pace vehicles to its existing 1,500-vehicle fleet. Notably, Waymo indicated it received its “final delivery from Jaguar” earlier this year, as it plans for future iterations of its driverless rides. Waymo added that the “facility’s flexible design” will allow it to integrate its upcoming sixth-generation self-driving technology into new vehicles, starting with the all-electric Zeekr RT.
In October, Waymo also announced it’s partnering with Hyundai to bring the next generation of its technology into Ioniq 5 SUVs. In the years to come, riders will be able to summon those all-electric, autonomous vehicles using the Waymo One app.
Waymo says it provides more than 250,000 paid trips each week. I’ve hailed several rides myself in San Francisco and, as off-putting as it can seem at first (especially to see a steering wheel turn by itself), I quickly adjusted and it soon felt like an ordinary ride.
That’s not to say there hasn’t been pushback as Waymo rolls out to more cities. The company’s vehicles have been involved in a handful of high-profile collisions, including one with a bicyclist in San Francisco and another with a towed pickup truck in Phoenix. (It recalled and updated its software to address the issue.)
In a research paper published in May, Waymo says that compared to human drivers over 56.7 million miles, its autonomous Waymo Driver technology had “85% fewer crashes with suspected serious or worse injuries.” It also indicated significantly fewer crashes with injuries to pedestrians (92%), cyclists (82%) and motorcyclists (82%). The company also released a data hub last year, detailing efforts to improve road safety using its technology.
As Waymo continues to expand and develop its self-driving tech, here’s how and where to summon the robotaxi if you happen to be in one of the few cities where the company currently operates its fleet.
Watch this: Testing Waymo’s Safe Exit Feature in a Self-Driving Taxi
Hailing a ride in Phoenix
Phoenix was the first city to open up fully autonomous Waymo rides to the public, in 2020. To hail a ride, download the Waymo One app on iOS or Android. The service operates 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
You can also use the Uber app to summon one of Waymo’s vehicles in Phoenix. When you request an UberX, Uber Green, Uber Comfort or Uber Comfort Electric ride, you’ll have the choice to confirm a Waymo ride, if you’re matched.
In addition to hailing a ride, you may also have your Uber Eats meal delivered by an autonomous car. When placing an order in the Phoenix area, you might get a note that “autonomous vehicles may deliver your order.” When the Waymo car arrives, take your phone with you to pop open the trunk and grab your delivery. You can opt out of this during checkout if you’d rather have a human deliver your food.
Hailing a ride in San Francisco
San Francisco followed suit after Phoenix, rolling out fully autonomous rides in late 2022. It scrapped the waiting list in June so now anyone can download the Waymo One app to ride anytime. The service also operates 24 hours a day, seven days a week. There’s currently no Uber partnership in San Francisco.
In August, Waymo expanded its ride-hailing service into the San Francisco Peninsula, adding 10 square miles and venturing into Daly City, Broadmoor and Colma. And in March, it expanded again so that select Waymo One riders who live in Mountain View, Los Altos, Palo Alto and parts of Sunnyvale have the option to hail a robotaxi there, too. The company says it plans to expand to more riders there over time.
Hailing a ride in Los Angeles
In November, Waymo scrapped its waitlist for Los Angeles and began welcoming all public riders via the Waymo One app. Now any interested passengers can hop in the robotaxis 24/7 and ride across nearly 90 square miles of LA county, including Santa Monica, Beverly Hills, Inglewood and Downtown LA — with plans to expand into more areas soon.
Hailing a ride in Austin
In Austin, the only way to hail a Waymo ride is through Uber — no Waymo One app here. By requesting an UberX, Uber Green, Uber Comfort or Uber Comfort Electric, you could be matched with a Waymo vehicle — and you won’t be upcharged. If you’d rather not take a driverless ride, you’ll have the option to switch to a standard one. On the other hand, if you want to boost your chances of being matched to a self-driving car, you can go to Account > Settings > Autonomous vehicles, then hit the toggle next to Get more Waymo rides.
Unlock the door, pop open the trunk and start the ride from the Uber app. You’ll still be asked to rate your ride at the end — but you won’t be asked to tip.
If there are any issues, riders can access human support 24/7 via the Uber app and from inside the Waymo vehicle (there are screens in the front and back that let you quickly summon customer support).
As part of the Uber partnership, Uber will manage tasks like vehicle cleaning and repair, while “Waymo will continue to be responsible for the testing and operation of the Waymo Driver, including roadside assistance and certain rider support functions,” the companies said. The collaboration should make autonomous rides accessible to more people, who now won’t have to download a separate app to hitch a ride in a robotaxi.
Waymo currently operates across 37 square miles of the city, with plans for future expansions.
Hailing a ride in Atlanta
Like in Austin, Uber will soon allow riders in Atlanta to hail a Waymo robotaxi. The service is scheduled to launch in the summer but interested riders can join a waitlist to increase their chances of being matched with a Waymo vehicle once that option becomes available.
To join the Atlanta interest list, make sure your Uber app is up to date, then go to Account > Settings and find Autonomous vehicles under the RidePreferences menu. Then click Join interest list.
Riders who join the interest list could have the chance to ride with Waymo before the public launch. They’ll be notified in-app and via email if chosen.
The service will launch across 65 square miles of Atlanta, with plans for future expansions, according to Uber. You won’t have to pay more for a Waymo ride than you would for a standard UberX, Uber Green, Uber Comfort or Uber Comfort Electric ride, and you’ll see upfront pricing in the app. You can unlock the vehicle and start the trip all from the Uber app, and will be able to access human support 24/7 via the Uber app and from inside the vehicle.
Coming soon: Washington, DC, Miami and Tokyo
Waymo plans to start offering rides through its Waymo One app in Washington, DC, in 2026. The company returned to the nation’s capital in January to test its autonomous driving tech. In late March, it said it was bringing more vehicles to the city and working to scale its service throughout the year. In a blog post, Waymo said it’ll “continue to work closely with policymakers to formalize the regulations needed to operate without a human behind the wheel in the District.”
You’ll also have to wait until 2026 to ride a Waymo in Miami. The company has been conducting weather testing in the lead-up to that eventual rollout, noting in a blog post, “Our previous road trips to the Sunshine State’s challenging rainy conditions have been invaluable in advancing our autonomous driving capabilities.”
Waymo will collaborate with Moove, a fintech company that offers vehicle financing, first in Phoenix, where Moove will manage the robotaxi’s fleet operations, facilities and charging infrastructure. In Phoenix and then Miami, “Waymo will continue to offer our service through the Waymo One app, and remain responsible for validation and operation of the Waymo Driver,” the company said in a blog post.
Waymo’s expansion into Tokyo, which was announced in December, is happening in partnership with Japanese taxi service Nihon Kotsu and taxi app Go. In April, the self-driving company shared that it’s finally ready to hit the road abroad.
Waymo says trained Nihon Kotsu drivers will manually drive its vehicles across seven Tokyo wards, including Minato, Shinjuku, Shibuya, Chiyoda, Chūō, Shinagawa and Kōtō. This will allow engineers to test and adapt Waymo’s autonomous driving tech to local road features and traffic.
“In Tokyo, we are abiding by the same steadfast principles that guide us in the US — commitment to safety, dedication to earning trust in communities where we operate, and collaboration with local officials and community groups here in Tokyo,” Nicole Gavel, Waymo’s head of business development and strategic partnerships, said in a statement.
It’s not clear when riders will be able to hitch a self-driving ride with Waymo in Tokyo.
The road ahead: Future vehicles
In August, Waymo unveiled the sixth generation of its self-driving technology, which strives to expand the capabilities of its driverless fleet. Smarter sensors are meant to help the cars better navigate in extreme weather, Waymo said. The sixth-gen Driver will come aboard the all-electric Zeekr vehicle, which features a flat floor, more head- and legroom, adjustable seats and a removable steering wheel and pedals. The updated tech is still being tested but the company says it’ll be available to riders soon.
In October, Waymo also announced a partnership with Hyundai to integrate its sixth-generation Driver into the all-electric Ioniq 5 SUV, which, according to a blog post, “will be added to the Waymo One fleet over time.” The companies added that they “plan to produce a fleet of Ioniq 5s equipped with Waymo’s technology in significant volume over multiple years to support Waymo One’s growing scale.” Testing with these vehicles will start by late 2025 and become available “in the years to follow.”
Currently, everyday riders can’t take a Waymo vehicle on highways and freeways but that may soon change. The company is testing fully autonomous rides on freeways in Phoenix, as seen in an exclusive video shared with CNET in May. It’s also now making fully autonomous freeway rides available to Waymo employees in Los Angeles.
Waymo is working to expand its autonomous driving tech into trucking as well but it said last year that it’s scaling back those efforts for the time being, to focus on ride-hailing with Waymo One. It noted, “Our ongoing investment in advancing Waymo Driver capabilities, especially on freeways, will directly translate to trucking and benefit its development efforts.”
Breanna Bortner’s dog, Mochi, began fixating on her breast before she was diagnosed with stage 2B triple-negative breast cancer, showing unusual and intuitive behavior throughout her journey.
People who pay more in taxes could be less likely to die from cancer.
The link was revealed in a new study published in JAMA Network Open, which aimed to explore how state-level tax revenue impacts cancer screenings and mortality in the U.S.
Researchers from The Ohio State University, Emory University in Georgia and the University of Verona in Italy analyzed 1,150 state-years of tax data over a 23-year period, between 1997 and 2019. (A state-year refers to one year of data from one state.)
NEW PROSTATE CANCER TEST PINPOINTS DISEASE BETTER THAN PSA OPTION, STUDY FINDS
They also reviewed population-level cancer screening rates and cancer-related deaths from Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) databases.
People who pay more in taxes could be less likely to die from cancer, according to a new study published in JAMA Network Open.(iStock)
The states with higher tax income were found to have increased cancer screening rates and decreased cancer mortality rates, the researchers found.
For each $1,000 increase in tax revenue per capita, the population had a 1.61% increase in colorectal cancer screening, a 2.17% increase in breast cancer screening and a 0.72% increase in cervical cancer screening rate, the research showed.
ALTERNATIVE CANCER TREATMENT COULD REPLACE CHEMO AND SURGERY, STUDY SUGGESTS
Among those who had cancerous tumors, each $1,000 increase in tax revenue per capita was linked to up to 4% decreased death rates among White patients. The same reduced risk was not found for racial and ethnic minority populations, according to the study.
“State-level tax policy is an underappreciated social determinant of health that may improve cancer screening and mortality rates,” the researchers wrote.
The researchers reviewed population-level cancer screening rates and cancer-related deaths from CDC databases.(iStock)
“These findings suggest that state-level tax revenue may serve as one aspect of a multifaceted approach to improve cancer-related outcomes in the U.S. and help bridge cancer care gaps, particularly in more progressive tax policy settings.”
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
Prior studies have identified tax policy as a predictor of public health, particularly for infant mortality risk and overall healthcare outcomes.
“One possible association could be that the higher your taxes, the more money you would have to buy healthier food and more luxury for relaxation and exercise.”
“Tax revenue may serve as funding that promotes the common good by ensuring access to safe, healthy environments and quality healthcare, while progressive taxes can substantially increase the disposable income of working-class households, thus enhancing their living standards and improving their health and cancer outcomes,” the study stated.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
Dr. Marc Siegel, clinical professor of medicine at NYU Langone Health and Fox News senior medical analyst,shared his external reaction to the study.
“One possible association could be that the higher your taxes, the more money you would have to buy healthier food and more luxury for relaxation and exercise,” he told Fox News Digital.
“Having more money to pay for extra treatment, earlier diagnosis and better care can also help prevent cancer death.”(iStock)
“Having more money to pay for extra treatment, earlier diagnosis and better care can also help prevent cancer death.”
The study did have some limitations, the researchers acknowledged — chiefly that the results show an association but do not prove that the high tax rates caused the decreased mortality.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
Cancer screening rates were also based on patient questionnaires, which could have some level of bias.
There is also the possibility of measurement errors in the data, the researchers cautioned.
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
Watermelon and summer go hand in hand. It is one of those fruits we all look forward to when the heat becomes unbearable. It is juicy, cooling and naturally sweet. But while we happily eat the red flesh and sip on watermelon juice through the season, most of us toss the rest of the fruit. But you will be surprised to know that most of it is edible – the flesh, the rind and even the seeds. Are you running a zero-waste kitchen? If yes, then this article is for you! Here is how you can use every part of a watermelon and enjoy this summer fruit fully.
Also Read:How To Cut Watermelon In Different Ways – Try These Simple Tricks
Photo: Pexels
Here Is How To Use Every Part Of A Watermelon Deliciously
How To Use Watermelon Flesh:
We all know and love the bright red part of a watermelon. It is what most people enjoy the most. Watermelon flesh is hydrating, sweet, and extremely versatile. But aside from just slicing it and serving it chilled, here are some easy ways to enjoy the flesh.
1. Watermelon Juice
In a blender, add chopped watermelon along with black salt, some lemon juice and a few mint leaves. Strain and serve with ice for a refreshing drink in summer.
2. Fruit Chaat
Cut up some watermelon flesh and mix it with papaya, banana, apples, and a pinch of chaat masala and lemon juice. Eat it as a refreshing snack between meals.
3. Grilled Watermelon
Yes, you must have heard of grilled pineapples, but did you know about grilled watermelons? All you have to do is lightly grill thick slices of watermelon and sprinkle with red chilli powder and lemon for a smoky and delicious twist.
4. Watermelon Popsicles
Make kid-friendly popsicles at home using watermelon flesh, sugar or honey. Pour it into the moulds and freeze. It is the perfect afternoon snack for kids.
5. Watermelon Salad
Instead of having heavy meals, make yourself a delicious, Instagram-worthy watermelon salad with crushed feta or paneer, olives, and cucumber for a fancy feel. Drizzle some honey on top of it, and you are good to go.
Photo: Pexels.
How To Use Watermelon Rind:
The pale greenish-white part between the red flesh and hard skin is often seen as waste. But that is the watermelon rind, and it is totally edible! With a crunchy texture and neutral flavour, this rind soaks up spices beautifully. Here is how you can use it:
1. Watermelon Rind Sabzi
Just peel the hard outer green skin and chop the white part. Saute it with mustard seeds, curry leaves, green chillies, and haldi. Finish with grated coconut for a delicious twist.
2. Pickle It
Make a quick pickle by marinating the peeled rind in mustard oil, salt, chilli powder and a dash of vinegar. Let it sit for a day or two and enjoy it with hot parathas!
Photo: Pexels
Watermelon Rind Chutney:
To make a delicious chutney from this, blend the peeled rind with coriander, green chillies, garlic, and lemon juice. It makes for a tangy, unique chutney that you can pair with snacks or your daily meals.
1. How To Use Watermelon Seeds
Watermelon seeds are often thrown away, but you will be surprised to know that these are little powerhouses of nutrition. These seeds are rich in protein, iron, magnesium, and healthy fats. Once cleaned and roasted, they can be used in a variety of ways:
2. Roasted Seeds
Rinse and dry seeds. Roast the seeds on a tawa with a little bit of salt and chilli powder. Store them in an airtight jar and munch away whenever you get hungry.
3. Trail Mix
Mix roasted watermelon seeds in your homemade trail mix with almonds, raisins, and makhanas. This is the perfect in-between-meal snack whenever you feel like eating junk.
4. Topping For Breakfast
Want to make your overnight oats crunchier? Add roasted watermelon seeds on top of them! You can also add them on top of dahi, fruit bowls or your smoothies to make them wholesome.
Also Read:How Watermelon Can Help Weight Loss, Improve Skin Health And More
Now that you know how to use watermelon at home, click here to know how this summer fruit affects your health.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-05-05/EU-accelerates-strategic-pivot-pursues-autonomy-amid-Trump-tariffs-1D80FBDJmZW/img/df3e6d9e05a84620b8c80bacf2a1cf7f/df3e6d9e05a84620b8c80bacf2a1cf7f.png' alt='A view of the headquarters of the European Union in Brussels. /VCG'
The European Union has begun to reshape its global strategy, deepening ties with Asia and other regions while asserting greater strategic autonomy in response to sweeping U.S. tariffs imposed under President Donald Trump.
The Trump administration’s imposition of broad tariffs on European exports has prompted Brussels to accelerate its pivot to Asia, with European Commission President Ursula von der Leyen announcing plans to deepen political and trade ties with key Asian economies to offset U.S. market barriers. At the same time, the EU is engaging with China on a mechanism to set minimum sale prices for imported electric vehicles, in exchange for suspending its duties, which were increased to as much as 45.3 percent.
Talks began in early April after EU member states approved the tariffs last October, disrupting the expansion strategies of Chinese manufacturers like BYD and Nio. Both companies have seen their market shares in Europe decline this year amid the new duties. To stay competitive, they have adopted differentiated pricing models, with BYD also planning to launch local production in Hungary to bypass levies.
Europe’s carmakers and auto-industry associations, notably Germany’s VDA, have voiced support for the price-commitment talks as a means to preserve market access and consumer choice. “Regardless of current global developments, it must also be discussed here how to reduce obstacles and distortions in international trade, rather than building new hurdles,” VDA said in a statement.
Apart from the willingness to negotiate a deal acceptable to China, the EU has also signaled that it will not decouple from the Chinese economy as a precondition for reaching a trade agreement with the United States, stressing that its trade talks with Washington and its relations with Beijing remain separate policy tracks. This came after reports suggesting that Trump might force other countries to choose between Washington and Beijing in trade negotiations.
The U.S. and the EU “are discussing what are the elements where a win-win outcome can be reached,” said Arianna Podesta, the European Commission’s deputy chief spokesperson.
“This is distinct from our relations with China,” she said.
Amid these trade realignments, a broader awakening to strategic autonomy has taken hold among EU capitals. Germany’s incoming Chancellor Friedrich Merz has publicly declared that his “absolute priority” is to strengthen European defense capabilities and gradually achieve independence from the United States in security matters, citing Trump’s unpredictable policies as a catalyst for rethinking Europe’s reliance on Washington. His coalition deal includes a €500 billion special fund exempting defense spending from debt limits, demonstrating a decisive pivot to European-led security.
In conjunction with defense and trade shifts, France is positioning itself as a refuge for U.S. researchers affected by Washington’s cuts to federal science budgets. President Emmanuel Macron has launched the “Choose France for Science” initiative, offering co-funding and visa facilitation to scientists facing funding uncertainty in the United States. European Commission President von der Leyen joined the overture, hosting events to underline Europe’s commitment to academic freedom and innovation in contrast to U.S. policy turbulence.
Reflecting on these developments, EU High Representative Josep Borrell has argued that if there is any upside to Trump’s disruptive tariffs and isolationist stance, it is the impetus they provide for Europe to expand its global footprint from Asia through Africa and into Latin America. The EU has already earmarked a €4.7 billion investment package for South Africa, framing it as a strategic opportunity to solidify ties in regions feeling neglected by the United States. Likewise, talks to conclude a long-stalled Mercosur trade accord with Latin America have gained fresh momentum as Brussels seeks to diversify beyond U.S. markets.
The party, which is masterminded by Anna Wintour and will inaugurate the Costume Institute’s “Superfine” exhibition, has already raised a record $31 million for the museum’s fashion wing.
On the sales front, Bengaluru logged 15,340 units sold accounting for 24 per cent of the nationwide demand
| Photo Credit:
K BHAGYA PRAKASH
Bengaluru has emerged as the top contributor to real estate supply and demand in India, with a 25 per cent share nationwide. In Q1 2025, the city recorded its highest-ever quarterly launches with 20,434 residential units, marking a 62 per cent y-o-y increase, according to a report by real estate and investment management firm JLL.
The city’s thriving IT and start-up ecosystem, expanding employment base, and major infrastructure upgrades like the Namma Metro expansion continue to drive both supply and demand. Strong sales numbers in previous quarters have also boosted investor and developer confidence about the city’s residential market.
On the sales front, Bengaluru logged 15,340 units sold accounting for 24 per cent of the nationwide demand. Nearly 30 per cent of sales in Q1 2025 came from projects launched in the same quarter indicating buyer confidence even in early stages of construction. Bellary Road led in new project launches, while Whitefield emerged as the top-performing submarket in terms of sales.
“Sustained quarterly sales in Bengaluru have been largely driven by healthy buyer interest in projects launched during the same quarter. Interestingly, in Q1 2025, around 30 per cent of Bengaluru’s sales were contributed by projects launched during the first quarter of the year, signalling strong buyer confidence in such projects in early stages of construction” Siva Krishnan, Senior Managing Director (Chennai & Coimbatore), Head – Residential Services, India, JLL.
Premium Housing fuels growth
Apartments priced ₹1 crore and above held a dominant share of around 61 per cent in the city’s Q1 housing sales and recorded a growth of ~31 per cent y-o-y. The premium bracket (₹3–5 crore) saw a 119 per cent surge in sales, reflecting a growing appetite for luxury living.
“The consistent rise in demand for more expensive homes reflects growing wealth among property seekers, evolving lifestyle aspirations, and a shift towards prioritising spacious and high-end residences,” said Samantak Das, Chief Economist and Head of Research and REIS, India, JLL.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
PRAVNICA i supruga nogometaša Duje Ćalete-Cara, Adriana Ćaleta-Car često privlači pozornost svojim stilom jer uvijek zna spojiti eleganciju, udobnost i moderni šik. Nedavno je na Instagramu podijelila niz fotografija u kojima je pokazala zašto je mnogi smatraju pravom modnom ikonom.
Poigrala se teksturama
Prvo što privlači pozornost je klasični sako u boji devine dlake brenda Source Unknown, koji svojom strukturom unosi dozu bezvremenske elegancije. Ispod kaputa nazire se prozirna čipkasta suknja koja unosi dašak romantike.
Od modnih detalja, Adriana je odabrala svilenu Louis Vuitton maramu s bež i crnim detaljima, a prepoznatljiva Chanel torba od prošivene kože zaokružuje cijeli look notom luksuza. Zanimljiv je i njezin izbor obuće. Umjesto elegantnih cipela ili čizama, odlučila se za udobne smeđe Miu Miu x New Balance tenisice.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Sunčane naočale i raspuštena kosa s ležernim valovima dodatno naglašavaju dojam nenametljive, ali promišljene elegancije. Pronašli smo neke iste, a neke slične komade kako biste i sami mogli rekreirati njezino jednostavno, a tako upečatljivo izdanje.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Gary Hall Jr. won 10 Olympic medals with the U.S. swimming team from 1996-2004, then lost them all in January when the house he was renting in the Pacific Palisades went up in flames.
He now has all five golds, all three silvers and both bronzes back in his possession again, after the International Olympic Committee President Thomas Bach presented him with replicas Monday during a ceremony at the Olympic House in Lausanne, Switzerland.
In a phone interview with The Times, Hall admitted he got “emotional” at the ceremony over what he considers to be a tremendous gesture by one of the largest governing bodies in sports.
“Just the appreciation — ‘one of our own’ was kind of the sense that I was embraced with,” Hall said. “When tough times happen, you find out who your friends are. And to see this response from the highest level of sport, it makes you feel special. It makes you feel supported, which is so needed at this time. And with the rebuilding process and dealing with incredible loss, that value is tremendous.
”… The measurement of our value is how much do we help others, and to be on the receiving end of help and support is both humbling and inspiring.”
Hall kept the medals in a fireproof safe — “I’ve got to check the warranty on that because it definitely was not fireproof,” he joked — in his bedroom closet, bringing them out to help inspire children and aspiring athletes during appearances and speaking engagements.
When massive wildfires struck the area Jan. 7, Hall was unable to retrieve the medals before fleeing to safety at his sister’s house in Encinitas. Weeks later, he returned to the site where his house had stood and found the safe amid the rubble. Hall was able to open it but was “disappointed” at what he found inside.
“It was basically a pool of melted metal — you know, some combination of watches and jewelry and cuff links and Olympic medals inside that safe,” Hall said. “It was all kind of pooled together in one big blob. I was able to pry out, like, these half-medals that kind of melted together. I offered it to President Thomas Bach, and he politely declined and told me that I should keep that one. It’s a unique Olympic medal, got a little character.”
Gary Hall Jr. holds up a blob of melted metal that used to be one or more of his Olympic medals, next to one of the replacement medals he received from the IOC on Monday in Lausanne, Switzerland.
(Denis Balibouse / pool / AFP via Getty Images)
He added: “There was another medal, a silver, that was kind of discernible, you could tell it was an Olympic medal. I may donate that one to the Olympic Museum” in Lausanne.
In addition to all of his possessions, the fire also cost Hall his swim-lessons business, Sea Monkeys Swimming, which he ran out of the pool at his home. He is working to get a sports-betting platform for swimming up and running and plans to use those funds to relaunch his business — first either in Florida, where he’s been staying for the last couple of months, or San Diego County and then eventually back in the Palisades.
“I think everybody who lived in that area loved that area. It just isn’t there anymore,” Hall said. “So this is the recovery process and it’s going to take time. This business that I had is dependent on families and kids being in the area. Those that I know and have spoken too, even those whose houses didn’t burn down, a lot of them are moving out because it’s just such a toxic environment. I love L.A. and it’s dire circumstance that’s forced me out, so it’s not goodbye.”
One “silver lining” to the situation, Hall said, is that his 17-year-old son Charlie got to be with him when he received his new medals “because he didn’t get to see the first ones being won.”
“Being able to share this experience with him means the world to me,” Hall said.
CMF Phone 2 Pro Sale Begins: Nothing’s sub-brand CMF has opened sales for CMF Phone 2 Pro across Flipkart, Flipkart Minutes, Vijay Sales, Croma, and all leading retail stores in India. As a special introductory offer on day 1, Phone 2 Pro is available for as low as Rs 16,999 (including all offers).
CMF by Nothing launched the Phone 2 Pro globally on April 28, 2025, with a three-camera system, a bright display, and a premium design. The company claimed that this is the “slimmest and lightest smartphone Nothing has ever designed.” At 7.8 mm, weighing just 185 g, CMF Phone 2 Pro is nearly weightless – 5 per cent thinner than CMF Phone 1. It comes with an aluminium camera surround and also has enhanced water durability with IP54 – the CMF Phone 1 was IP52.
The CMF Phone 2 Pro has a triple-camera system, consisting of a 50 MP main camera, a 50 MP telephoto lens, and an 8 MP ultra-wide camera. The front camera is 16 MP.
Now in its 6th generation, the newly upgraded MediaTek Dimensity 7300 Pro 5G processor packs an 8-core CPU that clocks in speeds of up to 2.5 GHz – ready to live up to the demands of heavy multi-taskers. For cutting-edge performance, with 10% quicker processing and a 5% improvement in graphics when compared to CMF Phone 1.
Availability, Pricing, and Offers:
CMF Phone 2 Pro is available in White, Black, Orange, and Light Green colours.
8+128 GB – Rs 17,999 (Including bank or exchange offers)
8+256 GB – Rs 19,999 (Including bank or exchange offers)
● As a special introductory offer on 5th May, CMF Phone 2 Pro is available for as low as Rs 16,999 for the 8+128 GB variant and INR 18,999 for the 8+256 GB Variant (including all offers)
● Day 1 exchange offer: Rs 1,000 exchange bonus and Rs 1,000 bank offer (applicable on all leading banks) is available together on CMF Phone 2 Pro.
Availability:
● The CMF Phone 2 Pro is available for sale via Flipkart, Flipkart Minutes, Vijay Sales, Croma, and all leading retail stores starting from May 5, 2025.
As the vacation time is approaching, are you ready to turn every trip into a smooth adventure? Be it jet-setting across continents or heading out for a weekend escape, your journey begins with the right trolley bag. And Amazon Sale is the perfect time to upgrade your travelling experience. With up to 60% off on a wide range of trolley bags, travelling is made easy.
Get up to 60% off on best trolley bags during Amazon Sale
From sleek hard-shell spinners to roomy soft-sided companions, find your perfect travel partner, because great travels deserve great luggage. Check out our top 8 picks of trolley bags just for you.
Large sized trolley bags at Amazon Sale:
Ideal for extended trips, large-sized trolley bags (typically 75–80 cm) are an ideal pick for all kind of trips. Be it a short trip or a weekend getaway with friends, large sized trolley bags are perfect to keep your valuables safe and sound. Available at up to 60% off during the Amazon Summer Sale, large-sized trolley bags come from brands like Safari, American Tourister, Skybags, Aristocrat, and many more.
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Medium-sized trolley bags during Amazon Summer Sale:
Pick a medium-sized trolley bags for your one-day trips or a weekend halt at a friend’s place. Medium-sized trolley bags (around 65–69 cm) are perfect for to keep your clothes and other valuables safe. During the Amazon Summer sale, you can choose a medium-sized trolley bag at prices slashed up to 55%. Choose from brands like Aristocrat, Safari, American Tourister, and many more.
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Trolley bag set of 3 at Amazon Sale 2025:
Planning a family trip this summer holiday? Trolley bag set of 3 are your best bet. The trolley bag sets of three contains trolley bags of all sizes, (cabin, medium, and large sizes) for the entire family needs. During the Amazon Summer sale, you can get these 3 set of trolley bags at up to 60% off. Perfect for your week-long trips, you can pick from brands like Skybags, Mokobara, Nasher Miles, and many more.
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Cabin luggage at Amazon Sale:
A business trip or just a casual stay at hills, cabin luggages are the best bet. Being compact and easy to carry, these are easily transportable. During the Amazon Summer Sale 2025, you can expect the cabin luggages at a discount of up to 55%. What’s more, you can also choose from brands like Safari Thorium, Fur Jaden, Swiss Military, Tommy Hilfiger, and a lot more.
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Loading Suggestions…
Similar articles for you:
Best mattresses for a peaceful and comfortable sleep; Here are our top 8 picks for you
₹2500″>Travel smarter, not harder: Your guide to affordable trolley bags under ₹2500
Backpacks for men: Top picks where durability meets design
FAQ for trolley bags at Amazon Sale
What discounts are available on trolley bags?
Amazon India is currently offering significant discounts on trolley bags, with many products available at 50% off or more. You can explore the full range of discounted luggage items here:
What sizes are available for trolley bags?
rolley bags typically come in: Cabin size (20″ or less) – suitable for carry-on. Medium size (21″–26″) – ideal for short trips. Large size (27″ and above) – best for long vacations or family travel.
What materials are trolley bags made of?
Trolley bags are commonly made from: Hard-shell materials like polycarbonate or ABS plastic. Soft-shell materials like polyester or nylon.
Are trolley bags waterproof?
Not all trolley bags are waterproof. Hard-shell bags often offer better water resistance, while soft-shell bags may be water-repellent but not fully waterproof.
How do I clean my trolley bag?
Soft-shell bags: Use mild soap and a damp cloth. Hard-shell bags: Wipe with a cloth and a mild cleaner. Avoid abrasive materials.
Disclaimer: At Hindustan Times, we help you stay up-to-date with the latest trends and products. Hindustan Times has an affiliate partnership, so we may get a part of the revenue when you make a purchase. We shall not be liable for any claim under applicable laws, including but not limited to the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, with respect to the products. The products listed in this article are in no particular order of priority.
The Hollywood hunk turns 42 today, as many fans continue to cross their fingers that Amazon will cast him as the next James Bond. The blockbuster actor is best known for playing Superman, but only two of his DC movies made his Top 10 movies on IMDb. Meanwhile, fans blocked the sensational Mission: Impossible – Fallout from No 1 with another Henry Cavill cult classic.
If a Type 992 is a little too common and sanitised, and you’ve got megabucks burning a hole in your trust fund, the Porsche 911 Carrera Coupe Reimagined by Singer might be your cup of single origin tea.
Although it is inspired by the rare wide-body variant of the 911 from 1980s, this restomod is based on the later Type 964 chassis.
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Red Bull Advanced Technologies — a consultancy spun off from the British Formula One racing team — has added composite and steel reinforcement in strategic locations throughout the car’s chassis to improve torsional rigidity.
While the body is mimics the look of the 1980s-era Super Sport Equipment wide-body 911, it is actually a modern recreation fashioned out of lightweight, but expensive, carbon-fibre.
Buyers can choose between a fixed whale tail, or a speed-activated rear wing. Also on the options list are auxiliary lights that rise out of the bonnet.
Hanging out the back is the 964’s six-cylinder boxer engine that’s been reworked by Cosworth. Changes include an increase in capacity from 3.6 to 4.0 litres, new water-cooled four-valve cylinder heads, variable valve timing, reworked intakes, and a titanium exhaust.
Singer claims the changes result in a power output of 313kW, as well as a flatter torque curve. The Cosworth-fettled engine is hooked up to a six-speed manual transmission with an exposed shift mechanism.
The restomod rides on 18-inch centre-lock wheels with Michelin Pilot Sport tyres, and four-way adjustable dampers with electronic control that can be adjust from inside the car. Traction control and stability control are standard, while carbon ceramic brakes are an optional extra.
Both vehicles displayed at the car’s launch have been tailored differently by their respective owners. The blue car has a Mars Pink interior with sports seats featuring velvet corduroy centre sections.
The louder, yellow vehicle has lightweight racing seats finished in leather and cloth, and the rear seats have been replaced by a cross brace.
Both vehicles have air conditioning, and a subtle infotainment system with navigation and Apple CarPlay connectivity.
No price is listed as “Singer’s restoration services are dependent on the specification requested by each car’s owner”. The Porsche 911 Carrera Coupe Reimagined by Singer is limited to 100 commissions.
Sitharaman emphasised that India offers opportunities for ADB to pilot new, innovative financing products and models.
Finance Minister Nirmala Sitharaman. (File Photo: PTI)
Finance Minister Nirmala Sitharaman on Monday met ADB President Masato Kanda and Italian Finance Minister Giancarlo Giorgetti, and discussed a host of economic issues, but there was no mention of the ongoing tension between India and Pakistan during the bilateral meetings.
Sitharaman is in Milan to attend the 58th annual meeting of the Asian Development Bank (ADB).
On the sidelines of the ADB meet, Sitharaman met Kanda and Giorgetti to discuss various economic issues facing the world and the Asian region.
The finance ministry said there was no discussion “on issues related to Pakistan with ADB President and the Italian Finance Minister” in Milan.
During the bilateral meeting with ADB president, Sitharaman reiterated that India focuses on private sector-led economic growth and has been consistently creating a conducive policy and regulatory ecosystem through bold initiatives such as the Insolvency and Bankruptcy Code, and GST implementation, Production-Linked Incentives, among others, for greater Ease of Doing Business, the finance ministry later said in a post on X.
Sitharaman emphasised that India offers opportunities for ADB to pilot new, innovative financing products and models, it said.
Kanda expressed ADB’s full support to India’s development priorities, guided by Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s vision of Viksit Bharat 2047, it said.
Later, Sitharaman met Giancarlo Giorgetti, Minister of Economy and Finance of Italy, and both the leaders explored ways to strengthen India-Italy economic ties, and enhance cooperation in global and multilateral platforms on issues of mutual interest.
“The meeting highlighted implementation of the Joint Strategic Action Plan 2025-2029 announced by Prime Minister Modi and Italian Prime Minister Giorgia Meloni in November 2024, which will add depth and momentum to our cooperation in priority domains,” the finance ministry said in a separate post on X.
“With bilateral trade between the two countries reaching USD 14.56 bn in FY2023- 24, FM Smt. @nsitharaman emphasised the huge potential in #RenewableEnergy, digital technologies, agri-food processing, and high-end manufacturing and invited Italian companies to ‘Make in India’ through the Government of India’s PLI schemes,” it said.
Both leaders discussed the importance of reforming Multilateral Development Banks (MDBs) to make them more responsive to developing countries’ needs and better aligned with Sustainable Development Goals, the ministry said.
Sitharaman underlined the need for co-financing models and collaboration in green hydrogen, carbon capture, energy efficiency, and circular economy and stated that both nations can leverage their strengths to co-develop solutions for global markets, advancing climate commitments.
Stay updated with all the latest business news, including market trends, stock updates, tax, IPO, banking finance, real estate, savings and investments. Get in-depth analysis, expert opinions, and real-time updates—only on News18. Also Download the News18 App to stay updated!
First Published:
News business » economy Sitharaman Meets ADB Chief and Italian FM, Discusses Economic Issues; No Mention of Pakistan
Dogecoin (DOGE), the beloved meme coin, is currently trading at $0.169 and showing a significant increase in the past week. With recent breakout movements from descending price channels and a resurgence in trading volumes, DOGE appears positioned for an upward trend. But as Dogecoin clings to its meme status, forward-thinking investors are asking a bigger question: What’s next?
The answer could very well be Ruvi, an AI-powered blockchain platform with real-world utility and the potential for explosive growth. While Dogecoin relies heavily on its cult-like community and social buzz, Ruvi offers something far more substantial to its investors.
Dogecoin’s Current Momentum and Limitations
Dogecoin has been making headlines for breaking out of its price channel, with trading volumes across major exchanges spiking by 42% in the past 24 hours. Analysts predict it could soon test the $0.20 resistance level, but DOGE has a long way to go before reaching its much-hyped $1 target.
While Dogecoin enjoys strong community support, it lacks the decisive utility and innovation that forward-thinking investors crave. Ruvi, on the other hand, incorporates cutting-edge artificial intelligence to tackle large-scale global challenges, providing both a solid foundation and massive growth potential.
What Sets Ruvi Apart as the Smart Choice?
Ruvi is not just a cryptocurrency project; it’s an ambitious technological ecosystem that integrates blockchain and artificial intelligence to solve problems across industries ranging from supply chains to cybersecurity.
Key highlights of Ruvi’s unique value proposition include:
AI-Powered Real-World Utility Ruvi uses predictive analytics and machine learning to optimize logistics, detect fraud, and streamline operations across industries. This gives it a broad scope of applications beyond simple token trading.
Deflationary Tokenomics Ruvi’s supply is capped at 1.5 billion tokens, ensuring scarcity as demand grows. Early investors benefit from this built-in value boost.
Exclusive Presale Bonuses The Ruvi presale offers bonuses of up to 100%, making it highly rewarding for those who act quickly.
Ruvi’s Presale Examples That Could Change Your Future
Here’s how real people are climbing the wealth ladder by participating in Ruvi’s presale.
Entry-Level Investment ($400)
Investing $400 earns you 40,000 tokens at $0.01 each. A 40% bonus adds 16,000 more tokens for a total of 56,000 tokens. If Ruvi reaches a future valuation of $1.50, your portfolio would total $84,000—a 21,000% return!
Mid-Level Commitment ($5,000)
For $5,000, you get 500,000 tokens. A 100% bonus (500,000 tokens) brings your total to 1,000,000 tokens. If Ruvi later hits $2.00, your investment balloons to $2 million.
High-Stakes Investor ($10,000)
A $10,000 investment gets you 1 million tokens, with a 100% VIP bonus granting an additional 1 million tokens, for a total of 2 million tokens. Should Ruvi achieve a valuation of $3.50, you’d be looking at a staggering $7 million portfolio.
Timing Is Everything
Investors who were early to Dogecoin’s rise made handsome profits. But those opportunities are largely behind us. Ruvi offers the same chance to invest early but with far more innovation and utility driving its value. Every phase of Ruvi’s presale reduces bonus percentages and increases token prices, so acting now ensures you get in at the most advantageous level.
Can Ruvi Outshine Dogecoin?
The simple answer is yes. While Dogecoin thrives on community hype and celebrity endorsements, Ruvi thrives on innovation and real-world functionality. It’s not just a meme coin. It’s a solution to problems across industries, making it more than just a speculative asset.
Don’t Miss Your Chance to Be a Crypto Pioneer
Opportunities like Ruvi don’t come around often. This project is not just about profits; it’s about becoming part of a revolution in blockchain and AI technology. Visit the official Ruvi presale site today to secure your tokens and lock in the exclusive bonuses before they vanish.
A higher secondary school in Okhalkanda block of Nainital district has recorded zero pass percentage in the class 10 state board examination, prompting authorities to launch a probe.
The Government Higher Secondary School in Bhadrakot had just one class 10 student who appeared in the board examination and failed in all the subjects.
It has earned the unwanted distinction of being the only government school in the state with a zero pass percentage in the class 10 board exams, the results of which were declared on April 19.
When contacted, Nainital Chief Education Officer Govind Jaiswal said he will investigate the matter, and action will be taken accordingly.
The school had seven teachers teaching arts, mathematics, science, Hindi, English and social sciences. However, the arts teacher was transferred to another school recently.
Last year, a total of seven students were enrolled in the school from classes six to 10. Of these, there were two students each in classes six and seven and one student each in classes eight, nine and 10.
Apple has consistently released a new iPhone each fall since the launch of the iPhone 4S a decade and a half ago. But it appears the company may be shifting its release strategy in the coming years.
According to notable Apple analyst Ming-Chi Kuo, along with a report from The Information, Apple plans to launch its lower-cost iPhones in the first half of the year and reserve its higher-end Pro models for later in the year.
Kuo stated that the upcoming iPhone 17 lineup will launch as expected this fall, but future iterations, including the iPhone 18 and iPhone 19, will debut in two waves through 2027.
Apple will launch its more affordable iPhones in the early months of the year, likely in March or April, with Pro models arriving in the fall. This means you’ll see different versions of the iPhone 18 and iPhone 19 released in both halves of the same year, Kuo said.
For example, the base-level iPhone 18 and iPhone 18E will likely hit in the spring, while the iPhone 18 Pro, Pro Max, iPhone 18 “Air” (or “Slim”) and Apple’s first foldable model would launch in the fall.
Apple didn’t immediately respond to a request for comment.
The iPhone maker has announced new phones outside its typical September window. The lower-end iPhone 16E, for instance, debuted in February. But it was following on from the main iPhone 16 launch five months earlier with the higher-end models. The change that Kuo describes would rejigger that order, putting all of a new lineups releases in the same calendar year.
The speculation is that this change in strategy would allow Apple to optimize manufacturing and marketing efforts, particularly in China, a key market for the company. Also, leading rival Samsung announces its new Galaxy phones in January.
“Competitors typically release new models in [the first half of the year],” Kuo wrote. “By launching new iPhones in [the first half, Apple could close the marketing gap.”
He added: “Due to intense competition, Apple needs to offer more iPhone models. Launching them all in [the second half] risks diluting marketing efforts.”
Kuo also said the growing shipment ratio of the Pro series is overshadowing budget models.
In the near term, Apple is expected to launch a much thinner iPhone this year, potentially named the iPhone 17 Air or iPhone 17 Slim. The 6.6-inch device is rumored to be just 5.5mm thin and priced between $900 and $1,000. At the same time, Kuo noted that Apple is also developing a next-generation version with a larger screen, expected to arrive in the latter half of 2027.
A California yoga studio combined its love for yoga and pythons to create a “unique experience” called “snake yoga” — ball pythons will slither on the participants during their “flow.”
Scientists have developed what they believe is the most widely effective antivenom ever — and the secret ingredient came from one man’s blood.
In the course of their research, the team found a man, Tim Friede, who had been bitten hundreds of times by 16 species of deadly snakes — the poison lethal enough to kill a horse, according to the scientists — over an 18-year period.
Friede had received the bites intentionally as part of a self-immunization process using escalating doses. As a result, he had become “hyper-immune” to the effects of snake neurotoxins, the researchers stated.
POISON FRUIT IN ‘WHITE LOTUS’ COMES FROM ‘SUICIDE TREE’
“After being introduced to Tim Friede and his incredible journey and immune history, we decided there was a once-in-a-lifetime opportunity to study his blood and isolate the basis of a universal antivenom,” lead study author Jacob Glanville, CEO of Centivax, a San Francisco biotechnology company, told Fox News Digital.
The research team found a man, Tim Friede (pictured), who had been bitten hundreds of times by 16 species of deadly snakes over an 18-year period.(Centivax)
Friede agreed to participate in a study in which he donated two blood samples.
The researchers isolated target antibodies from Friede’s blood that reacted with neurotoxins found within 19 of the world’s deadliest snakes.
EXPOSURE TO TOXIN INCREASES COLORECTAL CANCER RISK AMONG YOUNGER ADULTS, STUDY FINDS
They combined two of the antibodies with another molecule to create a new antivenom. In mouse trials, the antidote was found to be protective against venom from the black mamba, king cobra, coral snakes and tiger snakes, among others.
The results were published on May 2 in the journal Cell Press.
Friede said that by participating in the study, he is “helping humanity.”
The researchers isolated target antibodies from Friede’s blood that reacted with neurotoxins found within 19 of the world’s deadliest snakes.(Centivax)
“I know I am helping someone possibly 8,000 miles away, and that makes me feel really good,” he said in a statement to Fox News Digital.
“I realize what I’ve been doing over the years hasn’t been in vain with this research.”
“I know I am helping someone possibly 8,000 miles away, and that makes me feel really good.”
“The reason I have been bitten so many times is to get more comfortable with it,” he added. “It became a lifestyle for me, almost like an addiction.”
The hope is that Friede’s “once-in-a-lifetime, unique immune history” could result in a “broad-spectrum” or universal antivenom, according to Glanville.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“If formulated for intramuscular delivery in a ‘venom EpiPen’ form, which is our preference, it could then be deployed more broadly without any IV requirement, including very rural settings or hiker’s backpacks,” he told Fox News Digital.
The researchers now plan to expand the trials to treat dogs that have been brought to veterinary clinics after receiving snake bites, according to the release.
Scientists combined two of the antibodies with another molecule to create a new antivenom that was found to be protective against poison from the black mamba, king cobra, coral snakes and tiger snakes, among others.(Centivax)
They will also work to create another antivenom to protect against viper bites.
Prior to this research, the process for making antivenom has been more or less the same over the past century, according to the researchers.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“Typically, it involves immunizing horses or sheep with venom from single snake species and collecting the antibodies produced,” they wrote. “While effective, this process could result in adverse reactions to the non-human antibodies, and treatments tend to be species and region-specific.”
Approximately 5.4 million people are bitten by snakes each year globally, according to the World Health Organization. Among those, 2.7 million are poisoned by venom, which can cause death or permanent disability.(iStock)
Approximately 5.4 million people are bitten by snakes each year globally, according to the World Health Organization. Among those, 2.7 million are poisoned by venom, which can cause death or permanent disability.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
The research was supported by the National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases of the National Institutes of Health, the National Institutes of Health Small Business Innovation Research program, and the U.S. Department of Energy.
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
Picture this – you skipped the takeout and had home-cooked dal-chawal expecting to feel great. But what happens instead? You end up feeling heavy and bloated. We have all been there. Consultant nutritionist Rupali Datta states, “Even homemade meals can sometimes cause discomfort due to specific ingredients, portion sizes, and eating habits.” Hence, consider adding antidotes to your everyday foods to avoid those post-meal discomforts. The best part is that you can find these solutions in the kitchen pantry without spending a fortune. Let’s take you through the simple kitchen items you can find in an Indian household.
Also Read: How To Eat Your Way Through Summer The Ayurvedic Way
Why Do We Feel Bloated Even After Having Home-Cooked Food?
1. Excess Use Of Spices:
Indian food is all about a melange of spices. They add taste, texture and aroma to your meal. While some spices are considered good for health, a few lead to gas, bloating and acid reflux – red chilli being a popular (read: infamous) example.
2. Excess Use Of Salt:
Adding extra salt to your meal not only ruins the taste but also leads to water retention and puffiness. Experts state that excess sodium draws water into the tissues, causing bloating and uneasiness.
3. Legumes Often Produce Gas:
Lentils and legumes are great for your health. But did you know, they can sometimes produce excess gas in the body? Rupali Datta explains,” Beans, lentils, and chickpeas are rich in oligosaccharides, another fermentable sugar that can cause bloating”.
4. The Eating Speed:
A WebMD report states, eating fast can cause you to swallow air (along with food), which gets trapped in your digestive system, further leading to gas formation and bloating.
5. Portion Size Matters:
How much you eat is as important as what you eat in a day. Nutritionist Simrun Chopra explains that even healthy foods can cause bloating if eaten in large quantities.
Also Read: These Dietary Changes May Help Ease Heartburn And Acidity – Experts Reveal; 5 Easy Home Remedies
Photo Credit: iStock
How To Fix Bloating With Simple Kitchen Ingredients:
Nutritionist Sweta Shah recommends adding the right kind of spices and ingredients to your everyday recipes to avoid post-meal uneasiness in the gut. In one of her Instagram posts, the expert also shared some food pairings that can help you digest food better and avoid acid reflux. Check them out.
1. Add Pumpkin To Sambhar:
Sambhar contains a good amount of fibre, and according to WebMD, too much of it can cause bloating, especially if your body isn’t used to it. Sweta Shah explains that pumpkin is cool and alkaline in nature, which helps calm the gut and accelerate the digestion process.
2. Temper Chole/Chana With Hing And Jeera:
Chana or chole contains resistant starch and fibre, particularly raffinose and stachyose, which makes it difficult to digest. Adding hing and jeera, which have antioxidants and anti-inflammatory properties, to the dish helps break down proteins and accelerate the digestion process.
3. Soak Moong Dal With Cardamom, Coriander And Pepper:
Have you ever felt bloated after eating a healthy portion of moong dal cheela? It happens because moong dal contains oligosaccharides, which make it difficult to digest. Nutritionist Shweta Shah suggests adding spices like elaichi, coriander seeds and black peppercorn to the dal while cooking and soaking to avoid acid reflux. For the unversed, all these spices are known to stimulate the digestive process, further promoting gut health.
Photo Credit: iStock
4. Cook Rajma With Bay Leaf:
Rajma too has complex carbs, which makes it difficult to digest. Bay leaf, on the other hand, is rich in tannins, flavonoids, linalool, eugenol, methyl chavicol and anthocyanins – all of which have anti-inflammatory effects on our body, reducing the risks of bloating.
The Takeaway:
Home-cooked foods are great for your health, only when they are made with the right kind of ingredients. So, include a few tweaks to your recipes, portion size and eating habits and enjoy all your meals without feeling heavy or bloated.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-05-04/Post-war-institutions-in-a-new-era-Resilience-and-rebalancing-1D6pbBM99Ek/img/e72d90bf836740f5beeb59ef14615bc0/e72d90bf836740f5beeb59ef14615bc0.png' alt='A view of the United Nations building on March 14, 2025 in New York City. /VCG'
Post-World War II international institutions, forged through unprecedented collaboration, continue to shape global governance amid evolving challenges to peace and multilateralism.
The United Nations, established in 1945, marked a watershed in global cooperation by embedding collective security and development into international relations. Emerging from the ashes of war, its Charter enshrined principles of sovereign equality, peaceful dispute resolution and multilateral action—values tested yet upheld through crises spanning the Cold War to the fight against COVID-19.
The UN’s specialized agencies further institutionalized transnational collaboration. The World Health Organization (WHO), for instance, built on the groundwork of its predecessor—the League of Nations Health Organization (LNHO)—which standardized disease surveillance, coordinated epidemic responses and directed aid to vulnerable regions during the interwar years.
Key initiatives, such as the Far-Eastern Epidemiological Intelligence Bureau in Singapore—tasked with monitoring outbreaks across Asia and Africa—were later integrated into the WHO’s global health architecture, cementing a legacy of resilience.
Trials of Adaptation
Decades later, this system faces fresh pressures. The World Trade Organization (WTO), a pillar of the post-war economic order, grapples with existential challenges as geopolitical rivalries and unilateral trade measures erode its dispute-resolution mechanisms. China, now a vocal advocate for WTO reform, has addressed modern issues like agricultural subsidies and digital trade rules while pushing to preserve special treatment for developing economies. In 2018, China partnered with the EU to salvage the WTO’s Appellate Body, countering U.S. obstruction of judge appointments.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-05-04/Post-war-institutions-in-a-new-era-Resilience-and-rebalancing-1D6pbBM99Ek/img/69e97757474642cdb9183f5eedfe4a4a/69e97757474642cdb9183f5eedfe4a4a.png' alt='The entrance of the World Trade Organization (WTO) headquarters in Geneva, Switzerland, April 3, 2025. /VCG'
Meanwhile, the China-proposed Belt and Road Initiative (BRI) has strategically aligned with existing multilateral frameworks. In Africa, BRI projects such as the Addis Ababa-Djibouti Railway and Mombasa-Nairobi Standard Gauge Railway dovetail with the African Union’s Agenda 2063, which prioritizes continental infrastructure integration. Similarly, the China-Laos Railway exemplifies BRI’s alignment with ASEAN’s Master Plan on Connectivity 2025, illustrating how new initiatives complement, rather than replace, post-war institutional goals.
A System in Flux: Interdependence and Innovation
The interdependence enshrined in these institutions has been starkly highlighted by recent crises. During COVID-19, China accelerated aid to Africa, deploying personal protective equipment (PPE) donations, debt suspensions and hybrid medical missions—a response blending historical ties with pragmatic adaptation.
By October 2020, over 46 percent of China’s pandemic-related aid targeted African nations, where pre-existing Chinese-built hospitals became critical treatment hubs. This effort built on decades of malaria-focused cooperation, particularly in high-incidence countries like Tanzania and Zambia.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-05-04/Post-war-institutions-in-a-new-era-Resilience-and-rebalancing-1D6pbBM99Ek/img/081b30a20b23417c8380c67728df6a74/081b30a20b23417c8380c67728df6a74.jpeg' alt='A parent walks his child to school on day one of re-opening following an almost two-year closure of learning institutions as part of government measures to curb the spread of COVID-19 in Kampala, Uganda on January 10, 2022. /VCG'
Meanwhile, innovations in security governance reveal how post-war frameworks evolve without abandoning their core ethos. The UN Security Council’s collective security model, for instance, has found renewed relevance through influential trans-regional mechanisms like the Shanghai Cooperation Organization (SCO), which merges counterterrorism drills with public health coordination. China’s Global Security Initiative, advocating the concept of indivisible security, mirrors the UN Charter’s principles, pledging to address disputes through dialogue rather than confrontation.
These adaptations underscore a broader rebalancing within the global order. While critics warn of fragmentation due to power shifts and institutional inertia, the surge in South-South cooperation and mechanisms like BRICS reflects not a rupture but a recalibration.
“Over the past 80 years, the United Nations has grown from 51 member states to 193, yet it, too, must adapt to the changing world,” Wang Yiwei, director of the Institute of International Affairs at Renmin University of China, noted in a CGTN op-ed.
Residents of an upscale enclave outside Austin, Texas, learned the hard way what it’s like when a multibillionaire moves into the mansion next door. Some of them have started a ruckus over it.
Mr. Vikas Oberoi, Chairman and Managing Director of Oberoi Realty
| Photo Credit:
PAUL NORONHA
Oberoi Realty has sold luxury apartments worth ₹970 crore in its integrated township project at Goregaon in Mumbai amid strong housing demand.
In a regulatory filing late on Sunday, the company said it has launched ‘Elysian Tower D’ at its township project ‘Oberoi Garden City’ in Goregaon, on April 30.
The company said it has “registered gross booking value of around ₹970 crore for 2.1 lakh square feet (RERA carpet area) and a saleable area of 3.25 lakh sq ft.” The size of the apartments ranges from 2,009 to 3,430 sq ft (carpet area).
The township is Oberoi Realty’s flagship integrated development, spread across 80 acres.
Vikas Oberoi, Chairman and Managing Director of Oberoi Realty, said the company has got good response from customers for this project.
“This success not only reflects the enduring strength of the Oberoi Realty brand but also validates our long-term vision of creating integrated urban developments that redefine luxury living,” he added.
U HRVATSKOJ se tržište nekretnina ističe raznolikošću ponude i širokim rasponom cijena. Među najtraženijima na Index Oglasima ističe se kvalitetna kuća u Gorskom kotaru, nadomak Nacionalnog parka Risnjak, koja privlači brojne potencijalne kupce svojom lokacijom i uređenjem.
Idilični dom u Gorskom kotaru
U mjestu Razloge, smještenom nadomak Nacionalnog parka Risnjak, prodaje se kvalitetno građena kuća na okućnici od 1540 m². Nekretnina ima ukupno 184 m² stambene površine i rasprostranjena je na tri etaže.
Prizemlje se sastoji od velike garaže, konobe i natkrivene terase. Na prvom katu smještena je nova kuhinja s blagovaonicom, kupaonica, prostrani dnevni boravak te velika terasa s pogledom na Julijske Alpe. Na drugom katu se nalaze dvije spavaće sobe, balkon, garderoba i toalet, dok je u potkrovlju dodatni prostor koji treba urediti. Posebnost ove kuće je privatnost koju pružaju visoki borovi, a blizina izvora rijeke Kupe omogućuje različite aktivnosti poput raftinga i bicikliranja.
Pogledaj oglas
Rustikalna novogradnja u srcu Istre
U okolici Svetvinčenta prodaje se novosagrađena rustikalna kuća ukupne površine 193 m² smještena u mirnom selu. Kuća je koncipirana na dva kata s uređenim dvorištem od 512 m² na kojem se nalazi bazen.
Prizemlje kuće ima hodnik, WC, dnevni boravak i kuhinju, spremište, sobu s kupaonicom te dvije natkrivene terase od kojih jedna ima izlaz na bazen. Na prvom katu smještene su dvije sobe s kupaonicom. Kuća se prodaje u roh-bau fazi, a moguće je dogovoriti i izgradnju do faze useljenja. Okruženje je idealno za rekreaciju, a atraktivna lokacija na samo 15 kilometara od brojnih plaža pruža dodatnu vrijednost.
Pogledaj oglas
Šarmantna kamena kuća u blizini Poreča
Na svega 4 kilometra od turističkog središta Poreča prodaje se renovirana kamena kuća u nizu ukupne površine 105 m². Kuća je smještena na rubu građevinske zone što osigurava mir i lijep pogled na prirodu.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Nekretnina se sastoji od tri etaže. U prizemlju se nalazi dnevni boravak s kuhinjom i blagovaonicom te kupaonica. Na prvom katu smještene su dvije spavaće sobe i toalet, dok je u potkrovlju još jedna spavaća soba. Kući pripada i dvorište od 20 m². U potpunosti je renovirana 2004. i ima svu urednu dokumentaciju.
Pogledaj oglas
Kuća na Viru s panoramskim pogledom
Na južnoj strani otoka Vira prodaje se samostojeći objekt u mirnom dijelu s panoramskim pogledom na more.
Nekretnina se sastoji od donje etaže površine 73 m² plus terase te gornje etaže koja ima dva stana od 56 m² plus terase. Smještena je na parceli veličine 520 m² i posjeduje svu potrebnu dokumentaciju, što je čini sigurnom investicijom za kupce koji traže dom na jadranskoj obali ili objekt za turistički najam u jednom od najposjećenijih dijelova sjeverne Dalmacije.
Pogledaj oglas
Prostran četverosobni stan na Trešnjevci
U zagrebačkom kvartu Trešnjevka prodaje se četverosoban stan neto površine 71 m² smješten na prvom katu zgrade bez dizala izgrađene 1933. Stan se nalazi na odličnoj lokaciji u mirnom okruženju.
Nekretnina se sastoji od dnevnog boravka s blagovaonicom, kuhinje, tri sobe, hodnika i kupaonice. Stanu pripadaju spremište u dvorištu zgrade i parkirno mjesto. Orijentacija stana je zapad-istok-jug, a grijanje je etažno plinsko centralno. Lokacija u neposrednoj blizini škole, trgovina i javnog prijevoza čini ga idealnim za obiteljski život u širem centru grada.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Pogledaj oglas
Kompaktan dvosoban stan na Trešnjevci
Na Trešnjevci se prodaje dvosoban stan površine 35 m² koji predstavlja odličan izbor za mlade parove ili investitore. Stan je renoviran i spreman za useljenje.
Nekretnina se sastoji od hodnika, dnevnog boravka, spavaće sobe i kupaonice. Grijanje je etažno plinsko, a zgrada je izgrađena 1968. Stan je renoviran s novim instalacijama i PVC stolarijom. Odlična lokacija u blizini javnog prijevoza, parkova, kafića i trgovina osigurava visoku kvalitetu svakodnevnog života. Vlasnički list je uredan 1/1, bez tereta.
Pogledaj oglas
Luksuzna vila s bazenom u Puli
U Puli se prodaje ekskluzivna luksuzna vila ukupne površine 260 m² smještena na parceli od 650 m², udaljena samo 650 metara od mora. Ova impresivna nekretnina sastoji se od četiri odvojena apartmana i nudi brojne luksuzne sadržaje.
Vila ima šest spavaćih soba, šest kupaonica i jedan WC, opremljena je s osam klima-uređaja uz centralno plinsko grijanje i kamin. Posebnu vrijednost predstavljaju bazen od 32 m², wellness zona s jacuzzijem i saunom, videonadzor i alarmni sustav.
Svaki apartman ima privatni ulaz, a cjelokupna nekretnina je namještena i klimatizirana. Vila ima veliku natkrivenu terasu i prostor za roštilj, a smještena je u mirnoj stambenoj zoni, idealna za obiteljski život ili turistički najam.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Pogledaj oglas
Dvosoban stan u mirnom dijelu Dubrave
U Trnočvici, mirnom dijelu zagrebačke Dubrave, prodaje se dvosoban stan površine 56.40 m² smješten na drugom katu kuće s četiri stana. Nekretnina se sastoji od ulaznog hodnika, kuhinje, kupaonice, posebnog WC-a, dnevnog boravka, spavaće sobe i dva balkona.
Stan je namješten i opremljen osnovnom tehnikom, a u slučaju da kupcu nije potreban namještaj, prodavatelj će ga ukloniti. Grijanje je centralno plinsko, a energetski certifikat je C/C. Vlasnički list je uredan, a nekretnina se ne može kupiti putem kredita.
Pogledaj oglas
Poljoprivredno gospodarstvo kraj Popovače
U mjestu Donja Vlahinićka kraj Popovače prodaje se obiteljsko poljoprivredno gospodarstvo koje uključuje kuću, farmu pilića i veliku okućnicu. Nekretnina predstavlja zanimljivu priliku za kupce zainteresirane za poljoprivrednu djelatnost.
Gospodarstvo se sastoji od obiteljske kuće površine oko 90 m², pilićnjaka površine oko 750 m² s dozvolom te oranice i vrta površine 8700 m². Kuća ima suteren s dvije spavaće sobe, kuhinjom i spremištem, visoko prizemlje s tri spavaće sobe, kuhinjom, WC-om i kupaonicom, dok potkrovlje nije uređeno. Dokumentacija je uredna, a objekt je potrebno adaptirati. Kupac ne plaća proviziju.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Pogledaj oglas
Novi stan u Rijeci
U Rijeci se prodaju stanovi u sklopu projekta RIO KANTRIDA, faze B1 i B2, na jednoj od najatraktivnijih lokacija zapadnog dijela grada. Projekt nudi različite tipove stanova prilagođene različitim potrebama.
Projekt obuhvaća izgradnju dviju suvremenih višestambenih zgrada s ukupno 156 stambenih jedinica, garažnim parkirnim mjestima i dodatnim spremištima. Lokacija pruža ravnotežu urbanog života i blizine prirode, s izvrsnom prometnom povezanošću i svim potrebnim sadržajima u neposrednoj blizini. Stanovi su opremljeni multi-split sustavom grijanja i hlađenja, podnim grijanjem, kvalitetnim materijalima i energetski učinkovitim rješenjima. Završetak radova planiran je za drugi kvartal 2027.
On the Dignity Health Sports Park concourse, a group of men sat with drinks in hand, laughing and soaking in the final day of the Rugby Sevens World Championship. Their trip from Cornwall, in southwest England, to Carson spanned 5,408 miles, all for the sole purpose of cheering on Britain.
Donning custom button-up shirts with matching shorts, they proudly pointed out the emblems pressed onto their kits — symbols of home. Their outfits featured a Union Jack, a classic Cornish mining engine house and scones topped with jam first, then cream — the only proper way, they insisted, while chastising anyone who did it differently, much like their intolerable cousins from the neighboring county of Devon.
The getaway to L.A. wasn’t so much a planned excursion as it was a series of phone calls between seven childhood friends, all contingent on getting approval from their wives. Unfortunately, the group was greeted with back-to-back dreary, overcast afternoons instead of the trademark California sunshine. Still, the weather didn’t dampen the fun.
“That’s what we like about sevens — it goes all day,” said Jason Penprase, referring to the raucous atmosphere and rapid pace. “It’s good that we actually get to see nations that you wouldn’t necessarily associate with rugby. … You get to see other nations come forward and play. … It’s got to be good [for the games]. You’re trying to make it a worldwide sport.”
At its core, rugby sevens combines the vibe of a European music festival and Halloween, with the high-impact, frenzied energy of an NFL Sunday. As matches ran concurrently, fans from places as far away as New Zealand flocked to the 27,000-seat stadium in Carson. The result was a vibrant melting pot of cultures, with the two-day tournament providing a preview of what to expect when rugby takes the spotlight at the 2028 Summer Olympics.
This year’s tournament, which featured New Zealand winning the women’s title and South Africa the men’s crown, marked the first time the championship was held on American soil. The event served not only as an Olympic preview for fans, but also as an experience for the players.
Samantha Sullivan of the United States shakes hands with fans after a loss to Canada in the third-place playoff at the rugby sevens world championships at Dignity Health Sports Park on Sunday.
(Jack Megaw / AEG Rugby)
For U.S. women’s national player Nia Toliver, who grew up just miles from Carson in South Central L.A., the opportunity to compete for a bronze medal near her hometown allowed her mother, siblings and friends to witness her journey up close.
“I played rugby in Japan for a couple of years, and they weren’t able to come in and see me play out there, so to have them finally come to a game, and the world championship at that, just means so much,” Toliver said.
Toliver and her teammates are at the forefront of rugby sevens’ growing national exposure in the U.S., building on the momentum from the national team’s captivating bronze-medal run at the Olympic Games in Paris. Having witnessed the sport’s growth since beginning in high school over a decade ago, Toliver was excited by the weekend turnout and the potential for even larger crowds in 2028.
“I’m imagining you’ll be like this for, like, 100 fold,” Toliver said with a smile. “Because when people showed up in Paris, it was ridiculous. So I’m imagining L.A. just spilling out. … It’s so easy to fall in love with, it’s like there’s no reason for you not to watch.”
Fighting for a bronze against Canada, the U.S. fell short in a 27-7 loss, leaving Toliver deflated. She remains determined, however, to compete for a medal in the Olympics. She was named rookie of the year after the season-ending tournament, and she could be in line to lead the national team in three years.
“Once in a lifetime, it’ll be full circle for me,” Toliver said of the prospect of playing in the Olympics.
Much like the Olympic Games, simply being present meant everything for some countries, and nowhere was that more apparent than with Kenya and its fans. Hundreds of supporters, equipped with African drums and miniature flags adorned in black, red and green, claimed a section of the lower bowl, becoming the tournament’s most boisterous group. Their chants of “Let’s go Kenya!” and “Kenya, aye!” in Kiswahili filled the stadium with vibrant energy.
“It’s not about winning or losing, it’s just about that happiness,” said Ng’ang’a Njenga, who traveled from Seattle. “We come straight from third-world countries, and when we come and gather like this, have fun, enjoy.”
Armed with a drum by his side, Njenga was dressed in a leopard-print Kenyan garb, with a mohawk painted half white and half black, in honor of Lwanda Magere, a Kenyan folk hero whose powers lay in the shadows.
Aaron Cummings of the U.S., top, competes for a line-out against George Ooro Angeyoof of Kenya during the Rugby Sevens World Championships on May 4, 2025.
(Jack Megaw / AEG Rugby)
Njenga was among the many who led the drum section, spilling out from the stands, joined by men’s national players Denis Abukuse and Vincent Onyala. Together, they led the charge, dancing in circles to the rhythm of the drums.
“We love this,” Njenga added. “That emotion, like life, can be good. Let’s be happy. It’s not about winning or losing in life.”
Players mingling along the walkway, enjoying the festivities, were a common sight. Fans asked Kenya women’s captain Grace Adhiambo Okulu for selfies and autographs as she cheered on the men’s national team.
“We really work hard to come into L.A. and the experience you’re getting from everyone. It’s a blessing,” Okulu said. “Rugby would be fine if the Kenyans were not here. It’s an amazing thing that the Kenyans are here, and definitely they’re not only supporting Kenya, but any team that is playing.”
The event was not without criticism from fans like Penprase, who stayed in Long Beach with his mates. He pointed out the difficulty of getting around L.A., with constant Uber rides required due to the city’s limited public transit options.
Additionally, some U.S. fans took issue with the setup, which featured two pitches — one inside the stadium and another on its outskirts. Fans noted that they missed a men’s matchup on the second pitch because of the setup. Multiple pitches are expected to be used during the Olympics, in contrast to the single-stadium setup at Stade de France last year.
Despite a few kinks that might need ironing out, just over 27,000 fans visited over the weekend, according to officials. With growing excitement among attendees, many are already looking ahead to the 2028 Games.
After attending the Paris Games, the Cornishmen are potentially eyeing a return flight to LAX in three years, pending the approval of their better halves, of course.
“Never say never — you never know,” Penprase said, hopeful that the next trip would bring more sunshine.
Throughout his career, George Michael was known for more than just his chart-topping hits. He was a passionate listener, someone who spoke often and thoughtfully about the songs and artists that moved him.
His musical tastes were wide-ranging – covering everything from glam rock to hip-hop, indie pop to political ballads, and, during his appearance on BBC Radio 4’s Desert Island Discs in 2007, Michael listed eight tracks that he could not live without.
Out of those, he chose one as his ultimate favourite: a recent release at the time, by a young British artist whose work had left a strong impression on him.
“This is the best female vocalist I’ve heard in my entire career,” he told host Kirsty Young. “And one of the best writers. So all I can say is please, please understand how brilliant you are. And I wish her every, every success in the future. And I know she can get past the media. I don’t know if she can get past other things, but she’s a fantastic talent and we should support her.”
The song was ‘Love Is a Losing Game’ by Amy Winehouse. Part of her critically acclaimed 2006 Back to Black album, the track os a slow-burning ballad of heartbreak, widely praised since its release.
But George Michael’s favourite songs list didn’t contain itself to strong ballads. Near the top of his list was Roxy Music’s glam-era bop ‘Do the Strand’. He credited the band’s frontman Bryan Ferry with pushing the boundaries of sex and style in music: “At both ends of the spectrum, Bryan Ferry’s made some of the sexiest music of the last 30 years”, Michael said. “It’s so original and it’s so sexy and it’s so insistent”.
Another modern classic that made the cut was Gnarls Barkley’s 2006 chart-topping hit ‘Crazy’, and Michael explained: “An amazing song is an amazing song. Occasionally something left afield comes through and people see it for what it is – one of those old classics, you know, the kind of records we used to hear quite often. And it stands head and shoulders above everything else”.
Next up, he chose Nirvana’s groundbreaking ‘Smells Like Teen Spirit’: “This record is the best produced rock record in the history of rock, I think. It’s not necessarily the greatest song… but it’s a phenomenal record. Obviously it was a music industry-changing record”.
One of his more emotionally personal picks was the Pet Shop Boys’ ‘Being Boring’. Released in 1990, the song dealt with themes of loss, memory, and the AIDS crisis. “No one wants to hear frightening, terrifying songs about AIDS”, Michael reflected, “but they do, if they’re gay and they’ve lost friends, they do want to hear those people referred to and remembered and honoured. And I think some of Neil’s work did that beautifully”.
He also chose Goldfrapp’s ‘Paper Bag’ for its hypnotic sound and Alison Goldfrapp’s distinctive vocals, calling himself “a real admirer of her voice.”
Perhaps more surprising was his inclusion of Kanye West’s ‘Gold Digger’ – a track he openly admitted was “completely brutal, completely sexist”, but one that he couldn’t help but dance to: “There are certain records that literally I just can’t not move to. And this is one of them. The lyric makes me laugh”.
Finally, he pointed to Rufus Wainwright’s politically-charged ‘Going to a Town’ as one of the heaviest lyrical statements on his list. The song, released in 2007 during George W. Bush’s presidency, is a mournful and poetic critique of American politics. “Actually, this is the heaviest lyrical record on this list”, Michael said. “Really laying into the Bush administration, talking about America, you know, soaking the body of Jesus Christ in blood. You know, fantastic lyrics all over this record”.
The Toyota HiLux was Australia’s best-selling vehicle for the month of April 2025, knocking off the Ford Ranger and reclaiming the top spot for the first time since September 2023.
The HiLux chalked up 4121 sales in April to head off the Ranger – the second-best selling vehicle – by a mere 90 units as it claimed bragging rights for the month.
It wasn’t the closest fight between the two brands in April, with the Ford Everest – the Ranger’s SUV spinoff – outselling the Toyota Prado by a single unit.
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
The Ranger still holds a healthy 2137 sales lead over HiLux year-to-date with 17,257 deliveries against 15,120 ahead of the arrival of the Ranger PHEV (plug-in hybrid) next month.
Ford also unveiled its Ranger Super Duty – with the promise of a 4500kg braked towing rating – at its 100th anniversary event last month, though the muscled-up Ranger isn’t due in local showrooms until early 2026.
A new-generation HiLux is set to go hybrid when a new generation hits showrooms, also expected to be sometime in 2026.
For now, the HiLux is offered with V-Active 48V mild-hybrid technology introduced in 2024, which Toyota Australia has avoided calling ‘hybrid’ given its fuel economy advantage didn’t match the gain typical of its hot-selling hybrid models.
The two utes have been the pin-ups for Australia’s dual-cab obsession, with HiLux becoming Australia’s best seller in 2016 and staying at the top for the next eight years.
The perennial bridesmaid Ranger first knocked off the HiLux for a full calendar year in 2023 and repeated the performance in 2024, almost quadrupling its advantage to 9004 sales last year as the HiLux slipped to third behind the Toyota RAV4.
April’s win by HiLux is its first month back at the top – and its first ahead of Ranger – since September 2023.
It was a record month where the HiLux notched 5766 deliveries to the Ranger’s 5429, but the Ranger had what proved to be an unassailable lead to top sales for the year by 2245 units.
The Ranger went on to become the first Ford to top Australia’s annual sales charts since the Ford Falcon in 1995.
Behind the HiLux and Ranger in April 2025, the Isuzu D-Max was the third-best selling ute with 2107 sales, making it sixth overall and the only other ute in the top ten.
The BYD Shark 6 was the fourth-most popular ute claiming 16th overall to outsell the Mazda BT-50, Mitsubishi Triton and Nissan Navara.
The Toyota brand topped April 2025 sales ahead of Ford and Mazda, delivering more vehicles during the month than those two brands combined.
MORE: Everything Ford Ranger MORE: Everything Toyota HiLux
Gold and Silver Price Today In India: Latest prices of yellow metal in Delhi, Chennai, Kolkata, Mumbai.
Check latest prices of gold and silver in different metro cities.
Gold Rates Today In India: Gold price in India rebounded on Monday, May 05, after witnessing a constant fall. In Mumbai, the price of gold stood at Rs 87,750 per 10 gram for 22-carat and Rs 95,730 per 10 gram for 24-carat.
Also Read: Gold Prices Fall Over Rs 7,000 From Peak: Is It Good Time To Buy?
Recently, gold prices hit the Rs 1 lakh mark after increasing for the past few weeks amid global economic uncertainties and US recession fears.
Known for its unmatched purity, 24-carat gold continues to attract buyers seeking premium quality. Meanwhile, 22-carat gold, prized for its durability and timeless charm, remains a favourite among jewellery enthusiasts and investors alike, striking a balance between elegance and practicality.
Here’s a detailed breakdown of gold prices across key cities (May 05, 2025):
City
22K Gold (per 10gm)
24K Gold (per 10gm)
Delhi
Rs 87,900
Rs 95,880
Jaipur
Rs 87,900
Rs 95,880
Ahmedabad
Rs 87,800
Rs 95,780
Patna
Rs 87,800
Rs 95,780
Mumbai
Rs 87,750
Rs 95,730
Hyderabad
Rs 87,750
Rs 95,730
Chennai
Rs 87,750
Rs 95,730
Bengaluru
Rs 87,750
Rs 95,730
Kolkata
Rs 87,750
Rs 95,730
Silver Price In India Today (May 05, 2025)
The price of silver, however, experienced a fall of Rs 1000 to trade at Rs 97,000 per kg in Mumbai, according to goodreturns.in.
What Factors Affect Gold Prices In India?
International market rates, import duties, taxes, and fluctuations in exchange rates primarily influence gold prices in India. Together, these factors determine the daily gold rates across the country.
In India, gold is deeply cultural and financial. It is a preferred investment option and is key to celebrations, particularly weddings and festivals.
With constantly changing market conditions, investors and traders monitor fluctuations closely. Staying updated is crucial for effectively navigating dynamic trends.
Stay updated with all the latest business news, including market trends, stock updates, tax, IPO, banking finance, real estate, savings and investments. Get in-depth analysis, expert opinions, and real-time updates—only on News18. Also Download the News18 App to stay updated!
Ripple (XRP) has weathered regulatory storms, bounced back from multi-year lows, and remains a heavyweight in the altcoin arena. But as it inches its way toward the long-anticipated $5 mark, a new performer, Mutuum Finance (MUTM), is emerging from the shadows. Still priced at just $0.025, this low-cap DeFi challenger is drawing serious attention for its blazing momentum and real-world utility. With faster adoption, leaner tokenomics, and growing investor hype, MUTM isn’t just trying to catch XRP, it may outpace it entirely.
The presale has surpassed $7.5 million and attracted more than 9400 holders. Investors are currently buying MUTM tokens at $0.025 knowing well that the price will be at $0.03 when phase 5 begins. The current investors are set to get a 140% return on investment when the project launches at $0.06. If history loves an underdog, 2025 might just crown a new champion before XRP even gets its shot.
Mutuum Finance Presale Rises as Investor Demand Increases
Mutuum Finance is emerging as a quick favorite among the decentralized lending community because of its innovative dual-lending model. Its successful presale is currently in phase 4 with more than 9400 holders onboard and more than $7.5 million raised. As the presale continues, investors will see an increase in Mutuum Finance token price from $0.025 to $0.03 in Phase 5. Industry experts have labeled Mutuum Finance as one of the most undervalued DeFi startups that could breach an over a $5 worth after public launch.
In a recent announcement, Mutuum Finance introduced a new dashboard with a real-time leaderboard featuring the top 50 token holders. Not only will the top investors be identified, but they will also receive bonus tokens for maintaining their position.
Revolutionizing DeFi with a Hybrid Lending Approach
The innovative hybrid lending solution at Mutuum Finance integrates Peer-to-Contract and Peer-to-Peer protocols to provide its users with dual powerful investing models. The P2C model enables users to put money in pools for passive USDT smart contract lending income while the P2P model lets users connect directly for borrowing and lending without an intermediary. The innovative combination of Peer-to-Contract and Peer-to-Peer lending models enables Mutuum Finance to grant investors secure high-yield services through an efficient and decentralized platform.
Creating a Stable and Secure DeFi Environment
To ensure long-term stability, Mutuum Finance is launching a completely collateralized, USD-backed stablecoin on the Ethereum blockchain. In contrast to algorithmic stablecoins that have frequently failed, the stablecoin will be over-collateralized, with reduced risk and utmost trust. The platform also features open-source code and audited smart contracts to address flaws that have crippled other DeFi projects.
Rewarding Early Adopters and Expanding the Community
Mutuum Finance also focuses on increasing its user base through incentivizing schemes. The project’s ongoing $100,000 giveaway will give out 10 rewards of $10,000 in MUTM tokens while the referral scheme will give rewards for referrals made at an individual and organizational level.
Mutuum Finance is stepping into the spotlight as a serious XRP rival raising over $7.5 million from more than 9,400 investors and offering up to 140% ROI before even hitting public launch. Now in Phase 4 of its presale the price is still just $0.025 but with Phase 5 approaching fast and the price set to rise to $0.03 time is running out. Combining real-world utility, a powerful hybrid DeFi model, and a fully collateralized stablecoin, Mutuum Finance is built for longevity, not hype. Opportunities like this don’t stay under the radar for long. Get in now, before the price climbs and the window closes, by the time the crowd catches on, the biggest gains will already be gone.
For more information about Mutuum Finance (MUTM) visit the links below:
S Krishnan, Secretary, Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology (MeitY), launches the silicon photonics products at IIT Madras, Chennai
Two silicon photonics products designed and developed indigenously at CoE-CPPICS at Indian Institute of Technology Madras (IIT Madras) were launched on Saturday by S Krishnan, Secretary, Ministry of Electronics and Information Technology (MeitY).
The centre built capacity in all verticals of silicon photonics product manufacturing eco-system through focused R&D and nurture Indian photonics industry for immediate needs in domestic and international markets, says a release.
CoE-CPPICS has developed a fibre array attachment tool in consultation with Izmo Microsystems to be seamlessly integrated with Izmo’s packaging facility for nextgen photonics chip packaging. The packaging facility at Izmo is now commercially available for miniaturised silicon photonics product development, says the release.
The centre also launched a high-speed silicon photonics QRNG (Quantum Random Number Generator). This module will be available commercially for potential customers through the CPPICS spin-off start-up LightOnChip Pvt Ltd. The key applications of QRNG are in IT security for military and defence, cryptographic algorithms, quantum key distribution (QKD), scientific modelling and simulations, financial transactions/ blockchain/ OTP and gaming applications, the release said.
Krishnan said the indigenously developed field-deployable silicon photonic-based QRNG module is a proud achievement for India. The product has been delivered to DRDO to help in advanced quantum cryptography.
Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.
Connections: Sports Edition always stumps me when there’s a category of last names. I end up grouping them together without even knowing which sport the athletes play — sometimes it works out, sometimes I’m tripped up. Read on for hints and the answers.
Connections: Sports Edition is out of beta now, making its debut on Super Bowl Sunday, Feb. 9. That’s a sign that the game has earned enough loyal players that The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by the Times, will continue to publish it. It doesn’t show up in the NYT Games app but now appears in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can continue to play it free online.
Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta
Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups
Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.
Yellow group hint: Also Cubbies, or Twinkies.
Green group hint: You gotta be strong.
Blue group hint: Names of players.
Purple group hint: Keep ____.
Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups
Yellow group: MLB teams, familiarly.
Green group: Weightlifting terms.
Blue group: US women’s soccer players.
Purple group: Score ____
Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words
What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?
The completed NYT Connections Sports Edition puzzle for May 5, 2025, #224.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
The yellow words in today’s Connections
The theme is MLB teams, familiarly. The four answers are D-Backs, Jays, Sox and Yanks.
The green words in today’s Connections
The theme is weightlifting terms. The four answers are barbell, clean, jerk and snatch.
The blue words in today’s Connections
The theme is US women’s soccer players. The four answers are Coffey, Fox, Rodman and Sonnett.
The purple words in today’s Connections
The theme is score ____. The four answers are board, bug, card and keeper.
Chemicals found in plastics have been linked to a multitude of health risks — and now heart disease mortality has been added to the list.
In an analysis of population surveys, researchers at NYU Langone Health discovered that daily exposure to chemicals in common household items could have been a factor in more than 356,000 heart disease deaths in 2018 alone.
That number equates to more than 13% of heart disease-related deaths worldwide for people between 55 and 64 years of age.
STUDY FINDS EVIDENCE OF MICROPLASTICS IN BRAINS AND OTHER ORGANS
The study, which was published in the journal Lancet eBioMedicine on April 29, explored the risks of chemicals called phthalates, which are found in cosmetics, detergents, solvents, plastic pipes, bug repellents and other products, according to an NYU press release.
Chemicals found in plastics have been linked to a multitude of health risks — and now heart disease mortality has been added to the list.(iStock)
In this research, the focus was a specific type of phthalate called di-2-ethylhexyl phthalate (DEHP), which is used to make softer, more flexible plastics like food containers and medical equipment, the release stated.
DEHP has been linked to inflammation in the arteries of the heart, making people more susceptible to heart attack or stroke.
CHEWING GUM MAY RELEASE THOUSANDS OF MICROPLASTICS INTO THE SALIVA, STUDY SAYS
To determine levels of DEHP exposure, the researchers analyzed dozens of population surveys spanning 200 countries and territories.
Mortality data was obtained from the Institute for Health Metrics and Evaluation, a research group in the U.S. that collects medical information worldwide to identify trends in public health.
“Our results underscore the urgent need for global regulations to reduce exposure to these toxins.”
“By highlighting the connection between phthalates and a leading cause of death across the world, our findings add to the vast body of evidence that these chemicals present a tremendous danger to human health,” said study lead author Sara Hyman, BS, an associate research scientist at NYU Grossman School of Medicine, in the release.
The regions with the highest heart disease death tolls linked to phthalates include the Middle East, South Asia, East Asia and the Pacific.
Daily exposure to chemicals in common household items could have been a factor in more than 356,000 heart disease deaths in 2018 alone.(iStock)
“Our results underscore the urgent need for global regulations to reduce exposure to these toxins, especially in areas most affected by rapid industrialization and plastic consumption,” said senior study author Dr. Trasande, the Jim G. Hendrick, MD, professor of pediatrics at NYU Grossman School of Medicine, in the release.
Inflammation is a known cause of coronary artery disease, according to Dr. Jasdeep Dalawari, an Illinois-based interventional cardiologist and regional chief medical officer at VitalSolution, an Ingenovis Health company.
BLOOD PRESSURE AND DEMENTIA RISK SHARE SURPRISING LINK, STUDY SUGGESTS
“Our bodies release chemicals and hormones that give directions to the artery to open, close or change diameter,” Dalawari, who was not involved in the study, told Fox News Digital.
“This study suggests that microplastics may interfere with those internal signals, so the artery doesn’t perform the way it should.”
The study explored the risks of chemicals called phthalates, which are found in cosmetics, detergents, solvents, plastic pipes, bug repellents and other products.(iStock)
“Microplastics are widely present in a variety of products we use every day, and it’s crucial to understand their long-term effects on human health,” he added.
Renato Apolito, M.D., medical director of cardiac catheterization at Hackensack Meridian Jersey Shore University Medical Center, agreed that manmade plastic products have long been known and suspected to be health risks.
THIS ODD DENTAL HABIT COULD SPARK HEART HEALTH RISKS, EXPERTS WARN
“These often use highly engineered chemicals where the goal is not quality and safety, but instead cost-effectiveness and convenience,” Apolito, who was not involved in the study, told Fox News Digital.
The doctor shared that he stopped using non-stick pans long ago, and mostly uses glass storage and avoids eating and drinking from plastic containers.
Limitations and future research
Apolito noted, however, that the “longitudinal and observational” nature of the study comes with limitations.
“It is generally used to see if there’s any correlation between exposure and health risk, which is then used to study the topic further in a more controlled fashion,” Apolito, who was not involved in the study, told Fox News Digital.
“It cannot control for unidentified variations in lifestyles among the people followed.”
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
Senior author Trasande also pointed out the potential limitations.
The analysis does not establish that DEHP caused heart disease and that higher death risks did not take into account other types of phthalates, he stated.
The study also did not include death rates in other age groups, the doctor pointed out, which means the overall death toll is “likely much higher.”
Looking ahead, the researchers plan to investigate how reducing phthalate exposure affects mortality rates.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
They will also measure the chemical’s potential role in other health concerns.
“These studies are typically what are used to study the next step of elucidating cause and effect,” Apolito said. “This can lead to the FDA and other policymakers banning or outlawing the use of such products.”
“Microplastics are widely present in a variety of products we use every day, and it’s crucial to understand their long-term effects on human health.”
The study was funded by the National Institutes of Health.
Dalawari suggested that the researchers may want to look at other contributing factors, including air pollution, which has proven to be a “novel non-traditional risk factor” for coronary disease.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
“The intersection of pollution, regulation and genetic predisposition provides a complex landscape, and further research is necessary to unravel these connections, paving the way for more informed public health policies and preventive measures,” he added.
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
Greater Kailash 2 (GK2) in the upscale corners of South Delhi is a vibrant hub for food lovers and cafe explorers. Known for its leafy streets, stylish boutiques, and buzzing M Block Market, GK2 is home to a thriving cafe culture. Whether you’re looking for strong coffee, delicious brunches, or a quiet place to work or catch up with friends, this neighbourhood offers plenty of standout spots. Here’s a curated list of the best cafes in GK2:
Here Are The Best Cafes To Explore In GK-2, Delhi
Third Wave Coffee
This cafe is a sanctuary for coffee purists. Located in M Block Market, Third Wave Coffee serves meticulously brewed coffees using beans sourced from across India. With its clean, contemporary decor and ample sunlight, it’s a top choice for remote workers and caffeine lovers.
Melt House
Melt House is a compact but characterful cafe known for hearty comfort food. Their sandwiches, nachos and pizzas are rich, cheesy, and soul-satisfying. It’s the kind of place you go to when you want to indulge and feel right at home. Their casual vibe makes it great for quick lunches or lazy evenings.
Laidback Cafe
Perched above the busy M Block Market, Laidback Cafe offers a panoramic view of the bustling street below and a serene, breezy ambience above. As the name suggests, it’s the perfect place to take it easy- whether over a long brunch, cocktails with friends, or a solo coffee with a book. Their Mediterranean and Asian-inspired menu includes hummus platters, grilled fish, and some excellent coffee-based drinks. It also transitions beautifully into a romantic evening spot with ambient lighting and music.
Savorworks Coffee and Chocolate
For coffee and chocolate connoisseurs, Savorworks is nothing short of paradise. This small-batch roastery and bean-to-bar cafe takes both crafts seriously. Expect handcrafted espresso drinks, manual brews, and indulgent chocolate-based beverages served in a sleek, minimalist space. Their single-origin chocolate tasting platter is a must-try, and the staff are always happy to guide you through their selections.
From minimalistic coffee havens to lively lounges and chic brunch spots, GK2 offers a cafe experience for every mood.
Chinese Premier Li Qiang on Saturday sent a congratulatory message to Kamla Persad-Bissessar on her assuming office as prime minister of Trinidad and Tobago.
Trinidad and Tobago is an important partner of China in the Caribbean region, said Li in the message, adding that since the establishment of diplomatic ties 51 years ago, the two countries have enjoyed a sound and steady development of bilateral relations, with their cooperation yielding fruitful results across various fields and traditional friendship deepening between the two peoples.
Li spoke highly of Persad-Bissessar’s role as a key participant in and promoter of the development of China-Trinidad and Tobago ties.
China places great importance on the development of bilateral relations, Li said, adding that he is ready to work with Persad-Bissessar to seize the opportunity presented by high-quality Belt and Road cooperation to elevate the comprehensive cooperative partnership between China and Trinidad and Tobago to new heights and bring more benefits to the two peoples.
Ms. London, the former co-host of “What Not to Wear,” goes shopping, of course. But she also has a latte with friends and spends time with her dog, Dora.
Realty firm Macrotech Developers Ltd plans to launch housing projects worth ₹19,000 crore across Mumbai Metropolitan Region, Pune and Bengaluru during this fiscal as it seeks to expand business amid strong demand for residential properties.
Mumbai-based Macrotech Developers, which sells properties under ‘Lodha brand’, is one of the leading real estate firms in the country.
In an interview with PTI, Macrotech Developers Executive Director- Finance Sushil Kumar Modi said the company remains bullish about the growth prospects in Indian real estate sector and will keep investing to expand business.
“In the last fiscal, we launched around 10 million square feet area with a Gross Development Value (GDV) of around ₹14,000 crore spread across 24 projects,” he said.
Modi said the company would launch 17 housing projects in the current fiscal covering 13 million square feet area and an estimated sales booking potential of ₹19,000 crore.
These projects will be launched across MMR, Pune and Bengaluru.
Modi said the company is targeting exponential growth in sale bookings in Bengaluru and Pune markets.
He said the company clocked ₹2,500 crore worth of pre-sales in Pune in 2024-25 as against ₹1,800 crore in the preceding year.
In Bengaluru, Modi said the company sold properties of about ₹800 crore last fiscal and is targeting to double it in 2025-26.
To create land bank for future development, Modi said the company plans to invest more than ₹8,000 crore this fiscal to acquire land parcels in MMR, Pune and Bengaluru.
He said the company has set a target of acquiring multiple land parcels this financial year to develop projects, which can generate a revenue of ₹25,000 crore.
Under the new business development, Macrotech Developers purchases land outright and also partners with landowners.
In 2024-25 fiscal, the company acquired 10 land parcels with an estimated revenue potential of ₹23,700 crore.
“Last fiscal year, we invested ₹7,000 crore for new business development.
“To add new projects worth ₹25,000 crore, we will have to invest more than ₹8,000 crore in the current fiscal,” Modi said.
For joint development agreements (JDAs) with landowners, the company has to make some upfront payments to landowners.
On other operational metrics, Modi said the company has given a guidance of ₹21,000 crore worth of sale bookings for this fiscal, almost 20 per cent higher than the 2024-25 fiscal.
Earlier this month, the Mumbai-based firm had reported a 21 per cent increase in its sale bookings during 2024-25 fiscal to a record ₹17,630 crore from ₹14,520 crore in the 2023-24 financial year. The pre-sales guidance for 2024-25 was ₹17,500 crore.
On financial front, Macrotech Developers reported a 38 per cent increase in its consolidated net profit to ₹921.7 crore in the latest quarter ended March, aided by higher income.
Its net profit stood at ₹665.5 crore in the year-ago period.
Total income rose to ₹4,420.3 crore in the fourth quarter of the last fiscal from ₹4,083.9 crore in the corresponding period of the preceding year.
Net profit increased to ₹2,764.3 crore in 2024-25 fiscal from ₹1,549.1 crore in the preceding year.
Total income grew to ₹14,169.8 crore last fiscal from ₹10,469.5 crore in the 2023-24.
Macrotech Developers has delivered around 100 million square feet of real estate so far and is currently developing more than 110 million square feet under its on-going and planned portfolio.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
MOŽDA nisu na vrhu popisa stvari koje nam prvo padnu na pamet kad razmišljamo o uređenju kuhinje, ali mali dodaci često čine najveću razliku.
Bilo da se radi o keramičkoj zdjeli u kojoj stoji voće, kuhinjskoj krpi s efektnim uzorkom ili o dasci za rezanje koja izgleda dovoljno dobro da stoji na radnoj ploči čak i kad je ne koristimo – upravo su ti detalji oni koji prostoru daju osobnost.
Više od daske za rezanje – detalj koji mijenja dojam cijele kuhinje
Daske za rezanje odavno su prestale biti samo praktičan predmet. Danas ih biramo i po materijalu i po obliku i po tome koliko su “instagramične”. Osim za pripremu hrane, često ih koristimo i za serviranje doručka, kolača, sitnih zalogaja ili jednostavno kao dekorativnu podlogu u kuhinjskim kutovima.
Jedna daska koja ispunjava sve te zahtjeve – da je praktična, lijepa i dovoljno efektna da se uklopi u svaki kuhinjski kutak – dolazi iz Sinsaya. Posljednjih tjedana viđamo je posvuda na društvenim mrežama.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Planula je
Njezinu posebnost čine polukružni oblik i reljefni uzorak koji odmah privlače pozornost. Idealna je za serviranje, odlaganje sitnica ili kao stilski detalj koji prostoru daje toplinu i karakter.
S obzirom na popularnost ove daske i pristupačnu cijenu od samo 5.99 eura, ne čudi što se već rasprodala. Ipak, moguće je dobiti obavijest putem e-maila kada ponovno stigne na stanje, a Sinsay u ponudi ima i nekoliko sličnih modela.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Adopting robust AI governance frameworks is essential to ensure accountability and manage potential risks associated with artificial intelligence, according to the Confederation of Indian Industry (CII).
In its latest guidebook on AI adoption, released recently, CII emphasised that responsible AI use not only mitigates adverse impacts but also builds trust among stakeholders.
AI governance refers to the framework, policies, practices, and standards that guide the ethical, responsible, and accountable use of artificial intelligence (AI) within organisations.
The guidebook adds that the goal of AI governance is to ensure that AI is ethical, transparent, safe, reliable, responsible, fair, and compliant with legal and regulatory standards.
AI governance also involves managing the risks, quality, and accountability of AI systems and their outcomes. With the increasing integration of AI into various aspects of business, AI Governance has become a critical business imperative to minimise the potential harms, risks and misuse of AI (such as privacy breach, bias, security threat) while ensuring that the organisation reaps maximum benefits of AI, the Industry body added.
CII further added that the companies need to implement processes to identify and mitigate biases and risks associated with the use of AI in various aspects of business.
AI requires careful governance to fully leverage its capabilities while mitigating the risks and challenges it presents, CII said.
The Guidebook underlines that as AI continues to transform industries and business environments, Board members play a crucial role in steering organisations towards responsible and ethical AI adoption.
“Through thoughtful governance, executive Boards can guide their organisations in harnessing benefits of AI while safeguarding stakeholder trust and maintaining compliance with emerging regulations,” the CII added in the guidebook.
It emphasizes on criticality of establishing and upholding clear and enduring values for maintaining accountability in use of AI within business operations.
“By addressing both the opportunities and risks, Boards can navigate the complex AI landscape, ensuring sustainable, responsible, and value-driven innovation,” it added.
Furthermore, it highlights the importance of promoting interdisciplinary collaboration between AI experts, legal advisors, and business leaders.
Famed for his gritty voice and captivating stage presence, Joe Cocker is no stranger to the entertainment industry with a total of 22 studio albums under his belt. One of the most respected singers of his generation, Cocker’s unmistakable voice, with a blues-infused tone, has seen an impressive musical career that’s spanned over five decades. Cocker’s gritty, blues-infused voice and powerful delivery were instantly recognisable and set him apart from many other artists of his time.
His humble beginnings began in Sheffield in 1944, when Cocker took the musical world by storm and went on to have a lasting influence on popular music today. To recognise this legendary performer and take a trip down memory lane, Joe Cocker’s top 10 songs have been officially ranked by Spotify, with the list revealing a few surprises.
Cocker came up through the British rock universe in the late ’60s becoming a household name in 1970 when he received his first US hit with his cover of “The Letter”.
Many of the most iconic films ever made feature Cocker’s songs and includes The Bodyguard, The Wonder Years, 9½ Weeks and Harry and the Hendersons.
Up Where We Belong was a duet with Jennifer Warnes and was featured in the blockbuster film, An Officer and a Gentleman.
The song went on to become an international hit and reached number 1 on the Billboard Hot 100, bagging Cocker a Grammy Award for Best Pop Performance by a Duo.
The accolades for the smash hit didn’t end there as the song also won an 1983 Oscar for Best Original Song.and is no surprise it features in the top spot.
However, many would be surprised to see Cocker’s Feelin’ Alright?’ hit only featured in ninth spot.
The song strongly resonated with many Brits at the time, thanks to its emotional and raw energy, later seeing it become one of the most classic rock anthems.
But Feelin’ Alright? and its popularity also extended far beyond its musical merits and was described as being a symbol of a particular era, according to music experts.
It was also a reminder of the powerful connection between music and emotion, transcending generations and is still today an anthem beloved by many.
Cocker sadly passed away in 2014 at the age of 70 from lung cancer, with Jennifer Warnes leaving a special Billboard tribute for her singing partner after his death.
According to Spotify, with the analysis based on total streams, Joe Cocker’s top 10 songs of all time include:
When you think of the modern mid-size SUV, you probably think of growing families and mature drivers who appreciate grown up things like an elevated seating position and ground clearance.
But Honda sought to change that with the introduction of the ZR-V back in 2023. Rather than targeting the same old crowd, Honda blended elements of the HR-V, CR-V and Civic into a new nameplate aimed squarely at Generation Z.
With funky styling and a starting price south of $40,000, the ZR-V is still pitched as a car for big kids… except maybe this one.
While the base ZR-V VTi X+ received a welcome $2000 price drop for 2025, the flagship e:HEV LX remains a $54,900 proposition, and that’s before on-road costs.
Now, as a member of Gen Z myself, I’d hardly call that a friendly price tag for car buyers in their 20s.
And it’s a price point that also exposes the hybrid ZR-V to competition from all angles.
On one side there are segment staples like the Toyota RAV4 and Nissan Qashqai. On the other, a new wave of SUVs from China, both petrol and electric.
So where does that leave this top-spec ZR-V, now that it’s not so cheap and not so fresh? Let’s find out.
How does the Honda ZR-V compare?
View a detailed breakdown of the Honda ZR-V against similarly sized vehicles.
Honda
ZR-V
How much does the Honda ZR-V cost?
The Honda ZR-V range now opens at $37,900 drive-away for 2025, thanks to a $2000 price cut. However, pricing for the other three variants remains unchanged from last year.
Model
Drive-away price
2025 Honda ZR-V VTi X+
$37,900
2025 Honda ZR-V VTi L+
$43,400
2025 Honda ZR-V VTi LX
$49,000
2025 Honda ZR-V e:HEV LX
$54,900
The flagship e:HEV LX is priced to compete with the Toyota RAV4 XSE and mid-spec versions of the Mazda CX-5 and Nissan Qashqai.
To see how the Honda ZR-V stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
What is the Honda ZR-V like on the inside?
If it’s a premium experience you’re chasing, this top-spec ZR-V has you covered.
The interior of the e:HEV LX is plush for the price point, brimming with soft-touch materials and high-end features.
Exhibit A: the front seats. Trimmed in genuine black leather, the driver’s seat is super comfy with bucketloads of cushioning and rib-hugging side bolsters.
There’s plenty of electric adjustment for drivers of different shapes and sizes, plus three-stage heating to combat those cold winter mornings. While seat ventilation is missing from the equipment list, the front chairs are perforated to help you avoid a sweaty back in the summer heat.
The soft, thick steering wheel is also heated in the e:HEV LX. Soft, padded leather covers the centre console, central tunnel and sections of the door cards – no excuses for sore elbows at the end of a drive, then.
Sure, the roots of a far cheaper SUV can still be found if you go hunting for them, but who really cares what the door sills are made out of anyway?
While the top-spec ZR-V is undeniably comfortable and well-appointed, it’s not the only vehicle in the medium SUV segment to boast those traits. The new Nissan Qashqai presents just as well if not better in Ti-L guise, with Alcantara trim and massaging front seats.
Honda has also done well to distinguish the ZR-V from its CR-V and HR-V siblings in the interior design department, introducing unique elements like a tiered central tunnel and curved panels. And despite the trends of today, there’s no gloss black to be seen here – hallelujah!
As a package, the ZR-V is far more interesting that the aforementioned CR-V and HR-V. In top trim, it’s a step up in material quality too, although a bit of wobble in some interior panels belies that.
Creativity can come at the cost of functionality, but that’s not the case here. The ZR-V retains a straightforward layout with user-friendly controls, including physical climate controls with old-school buttons and rotary dials.
That familiarity extends to the interior technology suite, which consists of a small 9.0-inch touchscreen infotainment screen, and a 10.2-inch digital instrument cluster.
There’s nothing particularly unique or standout about either, to be frank. In particular, the infotainment system looks a bit old-hat and lacks the processing power offered by rivals.
However, it’s easy to navigate and comes with essentials like wireless smartphone mirroring and native satellite navigate.
In addition to wireless Apple CarPlay and Android Auto, wired USB-A and USB-C connections are located under the central tunnel. A wireless phone charger can be found behind the cupholders.
The ZR-V also features first-generation Honda Connect, the brand’s version of connected services. Within the Honda Connect app you can turn the lights on and off, remotely lock the doors, geo-locate your car, and check your fuel level, among other functions.
Like the infotainment system, the digital instrument cluster is rudimentary and unimaginative, but functional. A pair of traditional gauges dominate the standard setup, each with customisable inset readouts encompassing in-car audio, fuel efficiency, trip information and ADAS.
All information is displayed clearly, but there’s an absence of creative flair. Creativity isn’t so relevant when it comes to cabin storage, and the ZR-V houses a healthy amount of nooks and crannies.
The door bins are on the smaller side but perfectly shaped for a drink bottle, while the centre console is nice and deep. With that said, the glovebox is undersized and the tray between the front seats is deceptively narrow.
Moving back to the second row, the ZR-V isn’t as roomy as some of its key rivals. The Toyota RAV4 and Nissan Qashqai will seat five full-size adults in relative comfort, but this hybrid Honda is a little more restrictive.
Leg- and headroom are reasonable if not outstanding, and the seating arrangement is better suited to passengers with short legs and a longer torso. The rear seats themselves are supportive, heated, and slightly reclined for comfort over longer journeys.
The cozy second row in the ZR-V is enhanced by a swathe of useful amenities including two USB-C outlets, air vents, map pockets and a centre armrest with integrated cupholders.
In bad news for prospective buyers seeking space, the sloping roofline of the ZR-V also compromises boot space. Honda claims 370 litres of cargo capacity for the ZR-V, a figure that’s bested by most competitors including the Qashqai (504L), RAV4 (542-580L), Sportage (586L), and even the smaller Hyundai Kona (407L).
However, there’s more practicality here than you might think. The powered tailgate opens high, revealing a large square boot aperture free of an annoying load lip.
There are hooks for your grocery shopping and a 12-volt power socket, as well as space under the boot floor to stow the cargo blind. And, in true Honda fashion, the rear bench folds completely flat.
Regional owners will fret at the absence of a spare tyre, though, which drops off the equipment list for this model flagship.
Dimensions
Honda ZR-V e:HEV LX
Length
4568mm
Width
1840mm
Height
1620mm
Wheelbase
2655mm
Cargo capacity
370L (rear seats up incl. underfloor) 866L (rear seats folded, to window) 1302L (rear seats folded, to roof)
To see how the Honda ZR-V stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
What’s under the bonnet?
The e:HEV LX features a 2.0-litre four-cylinder hybrid with two electric motors and an e-CVT. Total system outputs are 135kW and 315Nm.
Specifications
Honda ZR-V e:HEV LX
Engine
2.0L 4cyl hybrid
Engine outputs
104kW 186Nm
System outputs
135kW 315Nm
Transmission
e-CVT
Drive type
Front-wheel drive
Kerb weight
1586kg
0-100km/h (claimed)
7.6s
Fuel economy (claimed)
5L/100km
Fuel economy (as tested)
5.3L/100km
Fuel tank capacity
57L
Fuel requirement
91 octane regular unleaded
CO2 emissions
115.2g/km
Emissions standard
Euro 6b
Braked towing capacity
750kg
To see how the Honda ZR-V stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
How does the Honda ZR-V drive?
Better than the vast majority of mid-size SUVs, that’s for sure.
The ZR-V has been developed as a utilitarian urban crossover with city commuters front of mind, and it nails that brief for the most part.
Honda’s parallel hybrid system strikes an excellent balance between efficiency, performance, and drivability, offering all in equal measure.
When driven in the real world many vehicles fail to come close to the fuel economy figure quoted in the brochure, but during our test the ZR-V hybrid came within six per cent of its impressive 5.0L/100km official claim.
And it achieves that level of efficiency without fuss. The ZR-V cruises around town in EV mode, saving fuel while offering a level of quiet refinement that hybrid-less rivals can’t match.
Acceleration from a standstill is smooth and swift, with no delay on throttle, and the petrol engine never makes a racket even when worked hard.
It pairs well with the e-CVT transmission, which works effectively when left to its own devices, but invites manual intervention via metallic shift paddles that make a satisfying click.
Indeed, the paddles work in tandem with a plush leather steering wheel and aluminium pedals to enhance the quality of the driving experience.
There’s more to the ZR-V than a clever powertrain and satisfying driver inputs – it’s a well-rounded and user-friendly package.
You sit sufficiently high with an expansive view of the road ahead, while thin A-pillars and a generous glasshouse maximise visibility left and right. Visibility is also aided by big, square side mirrors and a large rear window.
Size-wise, the ZR-V feels secure yet agile, which is perfect for the cut and thrust of city driving. You can throw it into tight corners with confidence, and multi-story parking lots are easily negotiated with the help of a wide view, high resolution 360-degree camera.
So far, so good. But this ZR-V isn’t perfect.
It’s unapologetically firm at lower speeds, bouncing over crests and ruts in the road. Even on the smoothest suburban streets, this top-spec e:HEV LX isn’t the most composed crossover going around.
That’s until you get it out on the highway, where the ride settles down and more strengths of the ZR-V make themselves known.
For one, the semi-autonomous driving system is among the best going around. Set the parameters via intuitive steering wheel controls, then the car will happily manage speed and steering inputs on your behalf.
Adaptive cruise control provides a visual representation of traffic flow on the instrument cluster – like having an extra set of eyes on the road.
Other advanced driver assist systems (ADAS) include blind-spot monitoring and forward collision warning, both of which are a bit too sensitive for my liking.
I had no issues with the driver attention monitoring system though, and the ZR-V lets you adjust ADAS settings through the infotainment screen.
On the topic of customisation, drive modes range from economy through to sport, the latter improving throttle response. I spent most of the week in economy, which suits the personality of the ZR-V to a tee.
When cruising at triple-figure speeds, efficiency and punchy performance remain trademarks of this left-field crossover.
But there’s some room for improvement in regards to NVH (noise, vibration, and harshness). Tyre roar is an issue at higher speeds, and noise from the outside world too easily finds its way into the cabin.
That’s less of an issue on quiet country roads, where there’s less noise pollution and you can enjoy the sporty handling dynamics of the ZR-V.
Regardless of variant, the ZR-V relishes twisty tarmac far more than many of its peers. Steering wheel inputs are met with swift responses, and there’s little of the body roll that afflicts less capable SUVs.
The only thing missing from the package is all-wheel drive, but I hardly missed it during our testing period.
To see how the Honda ZR-V stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
What do you get?
There are four variants in the ZR-V range, and the e:HEV LX tops the lot.
2025 Honda ZR-V VTi X+ equipment highlights:
17-inch alloy wheels
Space-saver spare
LED headlights
Adaptive high-beam
Active cornering lights
Dusk-sensing
Rain-sensing wipers
Power-folding exterior mirrors
Hill descent control
Electric parking brake with auto hold
Proximity entry with push-button start
9.0-inch touchscreen infotainment system
Wireless Apple CarPlay
Wired Android Auto
DAB+ digital radio
10.2-inch digital instrument cluster
8-speaker sound system
Dual-zone climate control
Rear air vents
Leather-wrapped steering wheel
Tilt and telescopic steering column adjustment
Fabric upholstery
LED map lights
5-year Honda Connect subscription
The VTi L+ adds:
18-inch alloy wheels
Hands-free power tailgate with walk-away closing
Heated exterior mirrors
LED ambient lighting
Leatherette and fabric upholstery
Heated front seats
Paddle shifters
The VTi LX adds:
18-inch two-tone alloy wheels
Body-coloured bumpers and wheel arches
Selectable drive modes
Wireless phone charger
Heated steering wheel
Leather upholstery
Satellite navigation
12-speaker Bose sound system
8-way power driver’s seat
4-way power passenger seat
Heated rear seats
Plasmacluster air purification system
The e:HEV LX adds:
Tyre repair kit (replaces space-saver spare)
Smart KeyCard
To see how the Honda ZR-V stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
Is the Honda ZR-V safe?
All Honda ZR-V variants have a four-star ANCAP safety rating based on testing conducted on hybrid models by sister organisation Euro NCAP in 2023.
Category
Honda ZR-V
Adult occupant protection
79 per cent
Child occupant protection
88 per cent
Vulnerable road user protection
81 per cent
Safety assist
68 per cent
Standard safety equipment includes:
11 airbags
Dual front and front knee airbags
Centre airbag
Front and rear side airbags
Full-length curtain airbags
Autonomous emergency braking
Pedestrian detection
Cyclist detection
Adaptive cruise control with low-speed follow
Blind-spot monitoring
Rear cross-traffic alert
Driver attention monitoring
Lane-keep assist
Traffic Jam Assist
Traffic sign recognition
Front and rear parking sensors
Tyre pressure monitoring
ZR-V VTi LX and above receive a surround-view camera.
To see how the Honda ZR-V stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
How much does the Honda ZR-V cost to run?
Honda backs its ZR-V range with a five-year, unlimited-kilometre warranty, and servicing is required every 12 months or 10,000km – whichever comes first.
Servicing and Warranty
Honda ZR-V
Warranty
5 years, unlimited kilometres
Roadside assistance
5 years
Service intervals
12 months or 10,000km
Capped-price servicing
5 years
Total capped-price service cost
$995 ($199 each)
The Japanese brand also offers a ‘Honda Extend’ program, through which owners can extend their vehicle’s warranty by up to three years if they service regularly at a Honda Service Centre.
An additional three years of roadside assistance is available under the same conditions.
To see how the Honda ZR-V stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
CarExpert’s Take on the Honda ZR-V
The mid-size SUV segment is highly competitive, and this top-spec ZR-V just doesn’t have a super-strength to set it apart from the rest.
Don’t get me wrong, it’s stylish, comfortable, efficient, pleasant to drive, and cheap to run, but no more than other players in the $55,000 ballpark.
I find the updated Nissan Qashqai to be more fancy, and the reputation of Toyota hybrids for efficiency is unparalleled. If you want to save on fuel, there are also plenty of electric alternatives at this price point.
Another significant advantage that rivals like the Qashqai and Toyota RAV4 have over the ZR-V is practicality. At a pinch, both alternatives can serve as family cars, but the Honda cannot.
Its boot is simply too small, and the second row of seating isn’t particularly friendly to taller passengers.
So, what you’re getting for $55k is a sub-premium, smallish mid-size SUV. It’s a tough price tag to justify, especially when you can get into a ZR-V for as little as $37,900 before on-road costs.
The base VTi X+ makes a lot more sense as a city runabout, especially when you consider it’s relatively efficient for a turbo-petrol without hybrid assistance.
If only you could pair the base trim with a hybrid powertrain…
Interested in buying a Honda ZR-V? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
Expert advises against blindly using the 4% rule for retirement planning. He emphasizes considering retirement age and inflation.
Financial planning is a daunting task and it is advised to take a professional help if you are confused.
Planning for retirement can be daunting, but the 4% rule offers a straightforward approach to determine if you’re financially ready to retire. This rule suggests that if 4% of your wealth covers your annual expenses, you can retire immediately. In other words, having 25 times your annual expenses means you can retire comfortably.
However, it shouldn’t be considered as a straightforward, with many ifs and buts exist to counter the theory. There are important factors to consider, such as your retirement age and inflation.
Anmol Gupta, Founder of 7Prosper – Your Personal Financial Planner, recently shared an insightful post on LinkedIn about retirement planning. He advises against using the 4% rule blindly.
Understanding The 4% Rule
The 4% rule suggests that if 4% of your wealth covers your expenses, you can retire immediately. To put it differently, having 25 times your annual expenses means you can retire. However, there are two crucial factors to consider, Gupta states:
Retirement Age Matters
This rule is best applied if you plan to retire around age 55-60, as it assumes a retirement period of approximately 30 years. If you aim to retire much earlier, you’ll need a larger corpus since you’ll be living longer without income.
Account for Inflation
Always estimate your future inflated expenses at the time of retirement, rather than today’s expenses. Ignoring inflation can lead to significant miscalculations.
Example Calculation
Consider this example:
– Current expenses: Rs 50,000/month (Rs 6 lakh/year)
– Current age: 30
– Target retirement age: 55
– Inflation rate: 6%
Using the Rule of 72, your expenses will double every 12 years. By age 55, your lifestyle will cost around Rs 24 lakh/year instead of Rs 6 lakh. Applying the 4% rule, you’ll need:
Rs 24 lakh × 25 = Rs 6 crore
Thus, you’ll require Rs 6 crore at age 55 to retire comfortably.
Why Rely On Thumb Rules?
In today’s era of AI, it’s better to use accurate calculators to estimate your retirement corpus rather than relying solely on thumb rules, says Anmol Gupta.
Stay updated with all the latest business news, including market trends, stock updates, tax, IPO, banking finance, real estate, savings and investments. Get in-depth analysis, expert opinions, and real-time updates—only on News18. Also Download the News18 App to stay updated!
Dogecoin (DOGE) created a buzz in 2021 by converting little investments into colossal wealth through viral energy and backing by individuals. Mutuum Finance (MUTM) is creating a splash currently by providing a new path towards decentralized finance. Currently at $0.025, MUTM is already at Phase 4 of its presale and will continue to grow to $0.03 in Phase 5. Experts predict that MUTM will hit $6 as early as mid-2025, an astronomical 24,000% rise from its current level.
This translates to a $1,000 investment today potentially climbing to $240,000, surpassing DOGE’s iconic surge. While the cryptocurrency market is unsteady, MUTM’s unique value proposition coupled with growing interest from investors translates to it perhaps being poised for liftoff.
Mutuum Finance Presale Gains Traction with Growing Investor Interest
Mutuum Finance is deep into Phase 4 of its presale and selling tokens for a low $0.025. The project has already reached more than $7.5 million in funds from more than 9,400 early investors to date, a strong sign of ever-growing confident markets. But time’s running out: Phase 4 is more than 50% sold, and when it’s full, the token price will increase 20% in Phase 5. With a planned launch price of $0.06, current buyers might save a potential 140% profit before the token even reaches exchanges.
Unlike tokens that depend on hype and social media trends, Mutuum Finance is built on tangible utility. The platform’s innovative dual lending model, combining Peer-to-Contract (P2C) and Peer-to-Peer (P2P) protocols, has garnered significant attention in the decentralized finance (DeFi) community.
The P2C model allows users to earn passive income by providing liquidity to smart contract-based pools. On the other hand, the P2P model eliminates intermediaries, enabling direct transactions between borrowers and lenders for greater efficiency and privacy. This hybrid approach offers a secure, flexible, and profitable platform that appeals to both conservative investors seeking stable returns and those looking for higher yields.
Stability in a Volatile Market
Mutuum Finance provides market stability in a volatile industry which makes it stand apart from traditional market players. The Ethereum blockchain hosts a stablecoin which receives full collateral through USD reserves to maintain stability. Project stability depends on over-collateralization because it provides protection from algorithmic stablecoin risks while ensuring trust through its design approach.
Open-source smart contracts together with regular third-party audits provide both security and transparency which solves vulnerability issues across multiple other DeFi projects.
Community Rewards and Incentives
The growing community of Mutuum Finance receives multiple incentives through their reward programs. Mutuum Finance established a $100,000 prize distribution that grants $10,000 MUTM tokens to each of its ten winners. Users can receive rewards through a referral program that offers benefits for recruiting new investors to join the platform. Live leaderboard technology displays positions of the top 50 token holders and gives bonus token rewards to participants who succeed in keeping their rankings. The ranks-based program combined with rewards mechanisms shape an interactive network which honors continuous member dedication through its gameplay elements.
Mutuum Finance (MUTM) is on track to potentially deliver returns rivaling Dogecoin’s 2021 surge. With its Phase 4 presale already raising $7.5 million from over 9,400 investors, the token’s current price of $0.025 could skyrocket to $6 by mid-2025, offering a 24,000% return. The platform’s unique dual lending model and USD-backed stablecoin provide real value beyond hype. Time is running out, Phase 4 is over 50% sold, and prices are set to rise. Don’t miss out on securing your position before the next price jump.
For more information about Mutuum Finance (MUTM) visit the links below:
The National Medical Commission (NMC) has directed immediate suspension of 26 MBBS students found complicit in NEET-UG 2024 malpractices and cancelled admission of 14 students for the academic year 2024-25 for resorting to unfair means during the entrance exam, an official source said.
National Eligibility cum Entrance Test, or NEET, is a pan-India exam to taken by aspirants to get admission into the country’s medical colleges.
As part of the ongoing investigations by multiple agencies into the NEET-UG 2024 paper leak case, the National Testing Agency identified instances of unfair means and debarred 42 candidates for three years — 2024, 2025 and 2026 — from taking the NEET-UG.
It also debarred nine candidates for 2025 and 2026 sessions.
The candidature of 215 candidates who appeared in the NEET-UG 2024 exam has been put on hold pending an investigation, the source said.
The action against the students has been initiated based on the findings of the Central Bureau of Investigation which is investigating the cases.
“Given the severity of these violations and their potential to undermine the credibility of the medical education system, the National Medical Commission has issued directives to the concerned medical colleges and institutions to immediately suspend the 26 MBBS students found to be complicit,” the source said.
The Commission stressed a “zero-tolerance” policy towards academic fraud and said it was committed to taking all measures to uphold integrity, transparency and accountability in medical admissions.
The directive comes ahead of the NEET-UG 2025 scheduled for May 4.
Do you find yourself constantly charging your iPhone when the Low Power Mode warning pops up? While phones hold less of a charge over time, you don’t want your phone to die on you while you’re using it to navigate on the road or in the middle of a conversation.
While your phone’s battery might not have the capacity to hold the charge it did when it was fresh out of the box, there are options that can help you squeeze more juice out of each charge. By disabling certain settings, you can ensure your iPhone battery can go the distance when you need it most.
You can also keep an eye on your Battery Health menu — it’ll tell you your battery health percentage (80% or higher is considered good), as well as show you how many times you’ve cycled your battery and whether or not your battery is “normal.”
We’ll explain three iOS features that put a strain on your iPhone’s battery to varying degrees, and show how you can turn them off to help preserve battery life. Here’s what you need to know.
Turn off widgets on your iPhone lock screen
All the widgets on your lock screen force your apps to automatically run in the background, constantly fetching data to update the information the widgets display, like sports scores or the weather. Because these apps are constantly running in the background due to your widgets, that means they continuously drain power.
If you want to help preserve some battery on iOS 18, the best thing to do is simply avoid widgets on your lock screen (and home screen). The easiest way to do this is to switch to another lock screen profile: Press your finger down on your existing lock screen and then swipe around to choose one that doesn’t have any widgets.
If you want to just remove the widgets from your existing lock screen, press down on your lock screen, hit Customize, choose the Lock Screen option, tap on the widget box and then hit the “—” button on each widget to remove them.
If you’re already low on battery, it’s best to just switch to a wallpaper that doesn’t have lock screen widgets.
Screenshots by Nelson Aguilar/CNET
Reduce the motion of your iPhone UI
Your iPhone user interface has some fun, sleek animations. There’s the fluid motion of opening and closing apps, and the burst of color that appears when you activate Siri with Apple Intelligence, just to name a couple. These visual tricks help bring the slab of metal and glass in your hand to life. Unfortunately, they can also reduce your phone’s battery life.
If you want subtler animations across iOS, you can enable the Reduce Motion setting. To do this, go to Settings > Accessibility > Motion and toggle on Reduce Motion.
Visual tricks like the parallax effect are fun, but they can affect your battery life.
Screenshots by Jason Chun/CNET
Switch off your iPhone’s keyboard vibration
Surprisingly, the keyboard on the iPhone has never had the ability to vibrate as you type, an addition called “haptic feedback” that was added to iPhones with iOS 16. Instead of just hearing click-clack sounds, haptic feedback gives each key a vibration, providing a more immersive experience as you type. According to Apple, the very same feature may also affect battery life.
Watch this: So Many iPhone Battery Complaints, but Why?
According to this Apple support page about the keyboard, haptic feedback “might affect the battery life of your iPhone.” No specifics are given as to how much battery life the keyboard feature drains, but if you want to conserve battery, it’s best to keep this feature disabled.
Fortunately, it is not enabled by default. If you’ve enabled it yourself, go to Settings > Sounds & Haptics > Keyboard Feedback and toggle off Haptic to turn off haptic feedback for your keyboard.
Every single time you type, you’ll feel a slight vibration for each key you hit.
Screenshots by Nelson Aguilar/CNET
For more tips on iOS, learn how to download iOS 18 and how to automatically delete multifactor authentication messages from texts and emails.
Gossiping gets a bad rap, but psychology experts say it could actually benefit our mental health.
The activity can help “make meaning of our world and situations,” according to Thea Gallagher, PsyD, director of wellness programs at NYU Langone Health.
“It can also help us be more informed about the intentions of others when we are sharing true information about what someone did or didn’t do,” she said in an interview with Fox News Digital.
ICE BUCKET CHALLENGE REVIVAL FOR MENTAL HEALTH SPARKS CONTROVERSY AMONG ALS COMMUNITY
Gossiping can be helpful in terms of exposing certain behaviors of others so that people can protect themselves, Gallagher noted.
“Or if it’s something that someone is struggling with, like an ill parent, it can actually give us more empathy [so we can] be more compassionate.”
Gossiping can be helpful in terms of exposing certain behaviors of others so that people can protect themselves, an expert said.(iStock)
Gossip can also help people process their feelings before reacting, Gallagher suggested.
“If you’re irritated at a friend and talk to another friend about it, you might actually be able to see the situation more clearly after you process it with someone,” she said.
THE SCIENCE BEHIND WHY ‘MEAN GIRLS’ ARE OFTEN SO POPULAR – EVEN AS ADULTS
The activity also offers a sense of bonding and connection with others, according to the expert.
“Human connection through shared information and communication is core to who we are and connects us to each other,” she said. “We might feel closer to someone when we know they are confiding in us with information and vice versa.”
“Human connection through shared information and communication is core to who we are and connects us to each other.”
“Just be careful not to jump to conclusions with little information,” she cautioned.
Janet Bayramyan, licensed clinical social worker in Los Angeles, also weighed in on the mental health impact of gossip, noting that it’s regarded as “inherently negative.”
STRESS AND ANXIETY CAN BE REDUCED OVER TIME IN ONE KEY WAY, STUDY SUGGESTS
“In some cases, it certainly can be, but gossiping can also serve as a form of venting or emotional regulation,” she told Fox News Digital.
“If someone has been wronged or is feeling confused by a social interaction, discussing it with a friend helps them process what happened, gain validation and potentially re-frame the experience.”
For kids and teens, gossiping can be a form of bullying, an expert warned.(iStock)
Dr. Brian Licuanan, a board-certified clinical psychologist in California, agreed that gossiping can be beneficial by providing a “safe place to talk and connect.”
“If someone is feeling alone, sad, rejected or mistreated, gossiping with others can create a commiseration that can help mitigate some of these emotions,” he told Fox News Digital.
The act can create a “level of unity” among certain groups who may “feel like outsiders,” Licuanan noted.
Potential negative impacts
Experts also warned that gossiping can sometimes backfire.
“People may lose trust in the person who gossips, because the belief could be that if this person is gossiping about others, they are likely to be gossiping about you,” Licuanan said.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
Overall, Licuanan said he considers gossip “unhealthy for the mind and spirit.”
“This behavior can typically perpetuate emotions such as anger and resentment,” he said. “The more a person engages in these behaviors outside of these emotions, the higher levels of stress they harbor — and, if done too much, this behavior can actually isolate them from others rather than bring them together.”
Despite the potential benefits, one expert claimed that gossiping is overall “unhealthy for the mind and spirit.”(iStock)
For kids and teens in particular, gossiping can sometimes be used as a form of bullying, especially if the information is not true and is meant to hurt someone, Gallagher noted.
Those who initiate gossip that could have a malicious outcome should explore the motivation for gossiping in the first place, she suggested.
Gossip in the workplace
LiveCareer’s recent Office Gossip Survey of 1,000 U.S. workers revealed that workplace gossip is “widespread,” as 58% of employees reported witnessing it weekly and one in three heard it daily.
Gossip in the workplace is “running rampant,” a career expert said.(iStock)
Forty-seven percent of respondents said office gossip creates “tension and distrust.” The same percentage said they don’t trust anyone at work with confidential information.
The survey also found that 43% of respondents had been the subject of workplace gossip, and 20% admitted to spreading gossip that turned out to be false.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
In an interview with Fox News Digital, career expert Jasmine Escalera commented that gossip in the workplace is driving company culture in a “negative direction.”
“Workplace gossip is running rampant and taking a serious toll on office culture,” said the Florida-based expert. “In a time of increased layoffs, burnt-out and disengaged employees, and increased economic uncertainty, we don’t need to add extra stressors to the mix.”
An expert warned that workplace gossip can lead to a toxic environment.(iStock)
“Gossip has a direct effect on workplace morale, erodes trust among coworkers, and can quickly lead to the onset of a toxic work environment,” she added.
Bayramyan suggested that in uncertain social environments, including the workplace, gossip can “sometimes help people make sense of complex dynamics, which can provide a feeling of control and predictability.”
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“It’s mainly important to make sure that gossip is not mean-spirited,” she advised, warning that “chronic negative gossiping” can cause stress and impact mental health.
Licuanan echoed that workplace gossip can be problematic and sometimes job-threatening — “especially if [gossiping] is viewed as slander or is damaging to one’s reputation.”
Angelica Stabile is a lifestyle reporter for Fox News Digital.
There is a new dining trend gaining popularity that blends creativity with cuisine – welcome to the world of “sip-and-paint” restaurants. They not only serve delicious food and drinks but also offer guests canvas and paint to unleash their inner artist. From one such venue, a lighthearted video went viral. It captures the joys – and minor mishaps – of the experience. Shared on Instagram by content creator Tori Ratima, the clip shows her painting with one hand while holding a cheese stick in the other. In a moment of confusion, she accidentally dips the cheese stick into pink paint instead of ketchup. After taking a bite and chewing for a few seconds, she realises the mix-up and bursts into laughter.
The side note read, “When you did more sip than paint.”
Also Read: ‘Please Put Bye On Cake,’ Bakery Follows Instructions Exactly, Internet Is In Splits
The viral video amused the internet and clocked more than 72 million views.
A user wrote, “The fact that you took a while to taste the paint and then took another while to look at the paint and figure out that it was paint bro, how much sipping did you do.”
Another added, “Your tongue-to-brain receptors are off by like 500 business days.”
Recalling a similar incident, a viewer wrote, “I was removing polish from my nails… had a cold bottle of Sprite next to the polish remover. Guess which bottle I took a swig from?! I could hardly breathe and became the Exorcist not long after.”
“I once went to dip my brush in my wine glass,” shared a user.
A person remarked, “Glad they make non-toxic paint now and not lead paint. Lol.”
Ever had your own sip-and-paint mishap? We would love to hear your story. Share it in the comments section below.
Also Read: Digital Creator Calls Chikoo ‘Exotic Potato’, Desis Cannot Stop Laughing
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-05-03/news-1D4M5fNAXw4/img/7acca880272f4a1f8d9c67ccb76d724d/7acca880272f4a1f8d9c67ccb76d724d.jpeg' alt='Australian Prime Minister Anthony Albanese arrives onstage after winning the general election at the Labor Party election night event in Sydney, May 3, 2025. /VCG'
Australia’s center-left Labor Party, led by Prime Minister Anthony Albanese, has won a second term in Saturday’s federal election.
Albanese said his Labor Party had won a majority in the election, vowing to steer the nation through a rough patch of global uncertainty.
“Thank you to the people of Australia for the chance to continue to serve the best nation on Earth,” the Labor leader told a jubilant crowd at a campaign party in Sydney on Saturday.
Australia’s right-leaning opposition leader Peter Dutton conceded defeat in a general election Saturday, saying he had spoken to Prime Minister Anthony Albanese.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
STIGLO je lijepo vrijeme, a s njime sve više ljudi uživa na svojim balkonima i terasama, naravno, oni koji ih imaju. U skladu s tim, posljednjih su tjedana društvene mreže preplavile objave i videozapisi u kojima ljudi uređuju svoje vanjske kutke. Čini se da mnogi posežu za istim rješenjem koje prostoru daje brzu preobrazbu – bez većih ulaganja i kompliciranih radova.
Riječ je o efektnim vanjskim podnim oblogama koje se jednostavno polažu na očišćenu podlogu i spajaju klik sustavom. Dostupne su u raznim bojama, od tamnosive i bež do onih u imitaciji drva ili trave.
U trenu promijene dojam cijelog prostora
Bez obzira na to je li na podu samo beton, stare pločice ili one čiji vam se dizajn više ne sviđa, ovakve podloge omogućuju brzu preobrazbu bez potrebe za većim zahvatima. Nije ni čudo da su postale hit na društvenim mrežama – u trenu promijene dojam cijelog prostora. Nakon toga dovoljno je samo postaviti vanjski namještaj, dodati biljke i vaš je kutak za uživanje spreman.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Ovakve podloge mogu se pronaći u raznim trgovinama, od IKEA-e, Jyska i Amazona do brojnih drugih trgovaca. U nastavku izdvajamo nekoliko primjera.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Samsung Limited-Period Deals: Samsung has announced exciting deals on select Galaxy A, M and F series smartphones as part of its limited-period offer. The offer will start from May 1. Check details –
Under this limited-period offer, Galaxy A55 5G, originally priced at Rs 42,999, will be available at Rs 26,999. While Galaxy A35 5G will be available at Rs 19,999. The phone was originally priced at Rs 33,999.
Samsung Limited-Period Deals: Offer on Galaxy M16 5G and Galaxy F16 5G
Galaxy M16 5G and Galaxy F16 5G, both originally priced at Rs 15,999, will be available at Rs 10,749.
Samsung Limited-Period Deals: Offer on Galaxy M06 5G and Galaxy F06 5G
Galaxy M06 5G and F06 5G will be available at Rs 8199. Galaxy M35 5G, launched at Rs 24,499, will be available at Rs 13,999.
Galaxy A35 5G and Galaxy A55 5G: Key Features
Galaxy A55 5G comes with a metal frame, while both the Galaxy A55 5G and Galaxy A35 5G are designed to withstand slips and falls-thanks to the Gorilla Glass Victus+ protection on the front and back. These devices are also IP67 rated. The vivid display of both devices features true-to-life colours with a 6.6-inch FHD+ Super AMOLED Display. Galaxy A55 5G comes with a 50MP main camera with OIS and a 12MP ultra-wide camera, while Galaxy A35 5G comes with a 50MP main camera with OIS and an 8MP ultra-wide camera. Both feature a 5MP macro camera as well. The Galaxy A55 5G features a 32MP front camera, while the Galaxy A35 5G comes with a 13MP front camera.
Galaxy A55 5G is powered by the Exynos 1480 processor, which is built on 4nm process technology, while the Galaxy A35 5G is powered by the Exynos 1380 processor, built on 5nm process technology. Both Galaxy A55 5G and A35 5G pack a 5000mAh battery with 25W charging, which provides up to 2 days of battery life.
Galaxy M16 5G and Galaxy M06 5G: Key Features
The Galaxy M16 5G features a 6.7” Full HD+ Super AMOLED display and is powered by the MediaTek Dimensity 6300 processor. It boasts a 50MP main camera, complemented by a 5MP ultra-wide lens and a 2MP macro camera. The device also includes Samsung Wallet with the Tap & Pay feature for payments.
The Galaxy M06 5G, on the other hand, features a high-resolution 50MP wide-angle lens with an F1.8 aperture, along with a 2MP depth camera. The device is also powered by the MediaTek Dimensity 6300 processor. The Galaxy M16 5G is just 7.9 mm slim, while the Galaxy M06 5G measures 8 mm.
Over six decades of a chart-topping career and icon status, elton john has experimented with the most diverse genres, worked with various artists – household names, niche pioneers, established or upcoming.
Since his debut in 1962, most of his singles have reached the ears of millions of listeners, and became known globally, surviving the eras of record players, cassette tapes, CDs and now reaching the digital soundwaves.
And by 2025, his most popular song in the streaming realm is not one most longtime fans might expect.
Released in 2021, ‘Cold Heart (PNAU Remix)’ is a song by the rocketman himself in collaboration with 21st century pop princess Dua Lipa.
In just over 3 minutes, it combines music from Elton John’s previous songs ‘Rocket Man’, ‘Kiss the Bride’, ‘Sacrifice’, and ‘Where’s the Shoorah?’. A mashup of sorts, but accompanied by Lipa’s dreamy and strong vocals and some fresh verses to tie it all together – with a dance-pop remix by PNAU.
Still in pandemic years, it was released alongside a music video that features a colorful animated journey of four friends dancing through a galaxy, ultimately celebrating with the cartoon versions of Elton and Dua.
The track was part of a series of collaborations released by John while most of the world was on quarantine – compiled in the album The Lockdown Sessions.
Then, he pursued a series of collaborations – including works with pop girls like Britney Spears, Rina Sawayama and Miley Cyrus, rappers such as Lil Nas X, Nicki Minaj and Yung Thug, modern hitmakers Ed Sheeran, Charlie Puth and Olly Alexander, and, of course, fellow icons Stevie Wonder, Stevie Nicks and Eddie Vedder.
The album’s songs were recorded over an 18-month period, remotely through Zoom or in strict compliance with the health and safety regulations of the time.
In the following awards season, ‘Cold Heart’ won Collaboration of the Year at the AMAs and Top Dance/Electronic Song at the Billboard Music Awards, was nominated as Song of the Year at the Brit Awards, and Best Collaboration and Song of the Year at the MTV Video Music Awards. The song is also Elton John’s most-streamed song in the digital age, amassing 2.4 billion listens on Spotify.
In number of streams, it is followed by ‘I’m Still Standing’ (1.3 billion), ‘Rocket Man’ (1.2 billion), ‘Your Song’ (1 billion), ‘Don’t Go Breaking My Heart’ (934 million), and ‘Tiny Dancer’ (854 million).
Another song from the Lockdown Sessions album can be found in his top 10, – among his older tracks – in 9th place: ‘Hold Me Closer’, with Britney Spears.
Over 150 brands, more than 30,000,000 new cars sold each year, and a focus on fast development proves China means business.
The People’s Republic is an industrial behemoth – a rolling stone that has no intention of slowing down. They build cities that house more people than the population of Australia in an area half the size of Greater Sydney. They can slap up roads and towers and tunnels in the time it takes our government to approve pre-planning for a roundabout.
So it should come as no surprise that their car industry is easily the most powerful on the planet, with more annual sales than Europe and the USA combined.
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
I was oblivious to any of this as I enjoyed some Easter chocolate. Little did I know how wide my eyes were about to open.
Easter Monday, Paul and I boarded a flight to Shanghai as guests of GWM Australia. The plan was to spend two days at the motor show, film a few videos and undertake the first ever CarExpert live cross, beaming into Sunrise live from Shanghai.
The first thing we noticed was the variation in cars.
GWM, BYD, Haval, Zeekr, Chery – they were just the ones we recognised. There were dozens of cars we were googling on the drive from the airport to the hotel. Surprisingly, the German marques were few and far between. In fact, I think I saw more Cadillacs and Buicks than I did Mercedes.
But arriving at the motor show was what really blew us away. I’ve been to SEMA in Las Vegas, which is probably the biggest auto show I’ve seen.
This put SEMA to shame. Designed to look like a four-leaf clover from above, the National Exhibition and Convention Centre Shanghai features 13 giant halls, each around 30,000 square meters – that’s about three rugby fields each. And the motor show filled nine of them.
There were brands you’ve never heard of, brands you will hear about soon, and brands that are well established around the world.
GWM was a big player at the show, taking up half a hall just with their displays, covering everything from the little Ora Good Cat right up to the massive Tank 700 – and a twin-turbo V8 drivetrain.
BYD also had a massive stand, along with the likes of Nio (the electric vehicle brand and battery-swapping company) and Chery. All of which dominated the halls they were in with their various sub-brands.
And the cars. Everything you can think of was there. Tiny econo-boxes, EV off-roaders, even “flying cars” – I say it like that because they are really just glorified drones with wheels on them.
Here in Australia, many like to think that Chinese cars are crude and rushed, slapped together in a shack by people who don’t know what they’re doing. I’m here to tell you, you couldn’t be further from the truth.
Yes, China’s development cycle is accelerated compared to legacy automakers and yes, they keep throwing new models out there.
But they aren’t messing about. They have filled their ranks with personnel from some of the largest and most trusted brands around the world. They’ve sent their engineers to some of the best schools in the world and they are putting huge amounts of energy into market research to ensure the vehicles they produce live up to the expectations of customers.
Trust me, if you want to do anything in China it takes 27 phone calls and a long list of people to sign off on it. These cars aren’t just getting slapped together willy-nilly. They are meticulously planned and built to a standard – even if that standard is different to what the good folks at Holden had.
China is in the middle of playing catch-up with legacy brands that have over 100 years of expertise behind them. They have done all this in the past 30 years, and now they make SUVs that produce 900Nm of torque and are as luxurious as a premium Euro-brand for a fraction of the price.
China is coming, I’ll probably buy one of their cars in the very near future – the iCar pickup is very tempting to park next to my future Ford Ranger Super Duty.
If you want to hate on them, or throw shade or just make loud exclamations with no real backup to your logic then please, go right ahead. That only emboldens them to push harder.
If you don’t want to buy a Chinese-built car, there’s nothing wrong with that. But what they are doing is providing vehicles that lower the barrier to entry for new car buyers. That can only be a good thing.
Warren Buffett is retiring as CEO of Berkshire Hathaway after over six decades. Gregory E. Abel, current vice chairman, will succeed him.
Who is Greg Abel, the one who will take the baton from Warren Buffett.
Warren Buffett Successor: Warren Buffett, the legendary investor known as the ‘Oracle of Omaha,’ has announced his retirement as CEO of Berkshire Hathaway after leading the company for over six decades. He will be succeeded by Gregory E. Abel, the current vice chairman of Berkshire Hathaway.
Gregory Abel’s Background
Gregory E. Abel, 62, joined Berkshire Hathaway’s Board of Directors in January 2018 as vice chair for non-insurance operations. Abel was confirmed as Buffett’s successor in 2021 after former Vice Chairman Charlie Munger unintentionally revealed the information at the annual meeting. Since then, Abel has mostly operated behind the scenes, although shareholders have gotten to know him during annual meetings and interviews alongside Buffett.
Formal Approval And Transition
Berkshire’s board will now vote on whether to formally approve Abel as the new CEO, who is expected to take over at the end of 2025. At the annual meeting in Omaha, Buffett expressed confidence that the approval would be unanimous.
Abel’s Experience And Contributions
He began his career as a chartered accountant with PricewaterhouseCoopers before joining CalEnergy in 1992, which later became Berkshire Hathaway Energy
Abel began his career in the utility and energy industry before becoming Buffett’s right-hand man. He first joined Berkshire when the firm acquired a controlling stake in MidAmerican Energy, where Abel was an executive.
He later served as the CEO of the company, which was renamed Berkshire Hathaway Energy.
Additional Roles And Board Service
Apart from his role at Berkshire, Mr. Abel serves as president for the Horatio Alger Association of Distinguished Americans, Inc. His recent past board service includes The Kraft Heinz Company, AEGIS Insurance Services, Inc., AEGIS London board of directors, the Mid-Iowa Council Boy Scouts of America executive board, Drake University board of trustees, and the American Football Coaches Foundation board of directors. He also previously served as a director and vice chair of Associated Electric & Gas Insurance Services Limited, a mutual insurance company.
Buffett’s Endorsement of Japanese Trading Houses
Warren Buffett recently expressed strong support for the five Japanese trading houses in which Berkshire Hathaway has invested. Speaking at Berkshire’s annual shareholder meeting in Omaha, Nebraska, Buffett highlighted the increased stakes in Itochu, Marubeni, Mitsubishi, Mitsui, and Sumitomo, which are now as high as 9.8%.
Stay updated with all the latest business news, including market trends, stock updates, tax, IPO, banking finance, real estate, savings and investments. Get in-depth analysis, expert opinions, and real-time updates—only on News18. Also Download the News18 App to stay updated!
First Published:
News business Who Is Greg Abel, Warren Buffett’s Successor As Berkshire Hathaway CEO?
A few days ago, Banxa temporarily suspended Pi transactions, likely due to pending KYB (Know Your Business) approval. During this time, it was widely known that Banxa had already acquired millions of Pi at low prices, suggesting they planned to return once regulatory approval was in place.
Banxa Now KYB Approved — Pi Available in 100+ Countries
Now, according to an update shared by Dr. Altcoin, Banxa is officially KYB approved. This is a big development for the Pi Network and its global community. With this approval, people in over 100 countries can now instantly buy Pi using cash through Banxa. This move also boosts accessibility and could drive greater adoption of the Pi Network.
BANXA is now KYB approved!
What does this mean for the Pi Community and beyond?
It means people in over 100 countries can now instantly buy Pi with cash through BANXA. This is a game-changer for accessibility and global adoption.
More platforms are expected to follow. BitMart, HTX, and others are likely to receive KYB approval within the next 10 days, showing growing institutional support for the project. It’s important to note that only KYB-approved companies are legally allowed to use and trade Pi. On the other hand, individuals participating in peer-to-peer (P2P) transactions must be KYC-approved and use non-custodial wallets.
$1 Target in Sight?
Meanwhile, Pi’s price has seen a decent rise. In the past 24 hours, $PI has climbed 2.5% and is now trading around $0.60. This comes after weeks of price pressure caused by ongoing token unlocks. However, with the pace of new unlocks expected to slow down after mid-May, the selling pressure could ease, giving room for potential growth. The next major resistance lies at $0.70. A breakout above that could open the path toward $1, a level that would signal stronger market confidence in the project’s future.
Designers can play a big role in making sustainable packaging from the farm to shelf, but convincing the consumer could be a problem, said Nandita Abraham, Dean, BITS Design School.
“We make everything so that the consumer will buy it. Then, we tell the consumer you must be sustainable, and, therefore, this is the way. So it’s a very interesting design problem, and probably it’s something that designers can play a very big role in,” Abraham told businessline in an online interaction.
The design school, part of the 60-year-old BITS, was set up a year and a half ago, offering an honours degree in design. Its students are working with biomaterials, sustainability systems and projects of supply chain, including agriculture. The students will be going out into the communities this month to understand their thoughts on sustainability, packaging of water and other such systems, she said.
Craft focused
“What makes it (design school) special is that it’s not craft-focused. So it’s not focused on just drawing or working with materials, but it’s around design thinking, collaboration, and we’re trying to develop disciplinary designers,” the dean said.
Designers can play a role in understanding the consumer and communicating it back to the consumer. Designers also play a role in systems thinking. “So not just looking at the package, but looking at it overall. How does a product get from the farm to the store? What are the different points along the way? What temperatures are needed to go through? What kind of sorting does it need to go through? Who are the people who will touch it, or what are the different processes along the way?
“So, creating a system which can also have less waste and can also be more sustainable. So I think in systems, designers can also look at packaging in a way to see what is easier to handle, what is easier to open, what is less likely maybe to be thrown away, what can be used after using it for something else,” she said.
Milk packet example
Pointing to milk packets, Abraham said the single plastic layer is used for many things at home. “So, designers play an innovative role in seeing what society adopts and how they can make behaviour change to use this packaging,” she said.
Designers can work with farmers too, with the focus now on natural farming. Farmers, together with designers, could co-create something sustainable that communicates what they want, the design school dean said.
On eco-friendly packaging, she said a lot of research is going on, including the material. “For example, single-layer plastic, like in salt sold by some companies, is fully recyclable. But nobody wants to buy that. People are looking at other ways that can be used,” Abraham said.
People are exploring bio-based materials. Seaweed, crustacean shells, and things such as milk casein are all being experimented with. “Also, seaweed casein layered with plastic is being experimented with,” she said.
Keep products fresh
Primarily, consumers want the packaging to keep the product fresh. “I don’t know if we have found a particular product that solves all these problems. But there is a lot of work that’s going on in this area also in recycled paper or board, with a layer of plastic like the cups that we use to drink water,” said Abraham.
Research is being done in nanotechnology and natural fibres too. Though jute, an agriculture produce, is sustainable, the availability is not ample, she said.
One way to extend the shelf life of agricultural products, Abraham said packaging is important to increase the shelf life and keep the product fresh. “Design plays an important role in material development. So it is designers who have made these sandwiched packaging, 3 layers, 7 layer packaging that protect the produce, but also causes harm to the environment. So material development is really important,” she said.
Abraham said that packing has become important as plastics are being dumped, and they, in turn, are consumed by fish. “We eat fish and so it always continues to be about us and how we want to want to live,” she said.
Understand climate change
Plastics in is are not a bad product. A single layer of single plastic can be melted and reused. It’s only when polyethylene, polyester, aluminium or multiple layers are used that it is difficult to recycle. It then turns into waste.
“Almost all consumers today understand that climate change is important. Most consumers want what they consume to be safe, and people are looking at organic and natural products. But do we have enough information about sustainable packaging? Probably no,” said Abraham.
People are happy to use sustainable packaging, but it has to protect products against moisture, air and ultraviolet rays. There is a need always to have that magic plastic inside the packaging, but consumers struggle with that,” the dean said.
Watch the Premier League in Australia from AU$7 a month
Optus Sport
Brentford will be looking to maintain its push for European qualification for the first time in its history on Sunday as it takes on a Man United team that may yet see its season end on a high, despite disappointing in the English Premier League.
Below, we’ll outline the best live TV streaming services to use to watch the game as it happens, wherever you are in the world, and how to use a VPN if the match isn’t available where you are.
Thomas Frank’s Bees are on a run of four games undefeated and hitting form at the right time. A win here would put them firmly in the mix for a place in next season’s UEFA Conference League.
Manchester United, meanwhile, come into this match riding high after an impressive 3-0 victory over Athletic Club in the first leg of their UEFA Europa League semifinal on Thursday. All that effort in Spain, along with the upcoming second leg next week, is likely to prompt manager Ruben Amorim to rotate his squad and draw on his reserves for this less critical fixture.
Brentford take on Manchester United on Sunday, May 4, at the Community Stadium in west London, with kickoff set for 2 p.m. BST local time. That makes it a 9 a.m. ET or 6 a.m. PT start in the US and Canada, and a 11p.m. AEDT kickoff in Australia.
Bruno Fernandes put in a captain’s performance against Athletic Club on Thursday as his two goals helped Man United to a commanding 3-0 away win in Bilbao.
Juanma/UEFA/Getty Images
How to watch Brentford vs. Man United in the US without cable
Sunday’s Brentford vs. Man United game will be broadcast on NBC and can also be streamed via Peacock. You’ll need a Peacock Premium or Premium Plus account to catch the game live.
Peacock/CNET
Peacock offers two Premium plans, and after the recent price increases, the ad-supported Premium plan costs $8 a month and the ad-free Premium Plus plan is $14 a month.
How to watch the Premier League 2024-25 season from anywhere with a VPN
If you’re traveling abroad and want to keep up with all the Premier League action while away from home, a VPN can help enhance your privacy and security when streaming.
It encrypts your traffic and prevents your internet service provider from throttling your speeds, and can also be helpful when connecting to public Wi-Fi networks while traveling, adding an extra layer of protection for your devices and logins. VPNs are legal in many countries, including the US and Canada, and can be used for legitimate purposes such as improving online privacy and security.
However, some streaming services may have policies restricting VPN usage to access region-specific content. If you’re considering a VPN for streaming, check the platform’s terms of service to ensure compliance.
If you choose to use a VPN, follow the provider’s installation instructions, ensuring you’re connected securely and in compliance with applicable laws and service agreements. Some streaming platforms may block access when a VPN is detected, so verifying if your streaming subscription allows VPN usage is crucial.
James Martin/CNET
Price $13 per month, $100 for the first 15 months (then $117 per year) or $140 for the first 28 months (then $150 per year)Latest Tests No DNS leaks detected, 18% speed loss in 2025 testsNetwork 3,000 plus servers in 105 countriesJurisdiction British Virgin Islands
ExpressVPN is our current best VPN pick for people who want a reliable and safe VPN, and it works on a variety of devices. It’s normally $13 a month, but if you sign up for an annual subscription for $100 you’ll get three months free and save 49%. That’s the equivalent of $6.67 a month.
Note that ExpressVPN offers a 30-day money-back guarantee.
61% off with 2yr plan (+4 free months)
Can I livestream Brentford vs. Man United in the UK?
Sunday’s early afternoon kickoff at the Community Stadium has not been selected for broadcast by a UK network.
That also means that if you’re in the UK traveling for pleasure or for work, you’re unlikely to be able to watch the game like you normally would at home, thanks to geoblocking.
There’s one option to get around this. By using a VPN, as explained above, you can set your location to a country where the match is being broadcast and go from there.
Livestream Brentford vs. Man United in Canada
If you want to stream this EPL game live in Canada, you’ll need to subscribe to Fubo Canada. Once again, the service has exclusive rights to every Premier League match this season.
Fubo
Fubo is the go-to destination for Canadians looking to watch the EPL this season, with exclusive streaming rights to every match. It costs CA$30 a month, though you can save some cash by paying quarterly or annually.
Livestream Brentford vs. Man United in Australia
Football fans down under can watch EPL matches live on streaming service Optus Sport, which is showing every single Premier League match of the 2024-25 season live in Australia.
Optus
With exclusive rights to stream all EPL matches live this season, as well as German Bundesliga and Spanish La Liga games, streaming service Optus Sport is a particularly big draw for Aussie soccer fans.
If you’re already an Optus network customer, you can bag Optus Sport for a reduced price, with discounts bringing the price down to as low as AU$7 a month. If you’re not, a standalone monthly subscription to the service starts at AU$25.
Quick tips for streaming the Premier League using a VPN
With four variables at play — your ISP, browser, video streaming provider and VPN — your experience and success when streaming EPL matches may vary.
If you don’t see your desired location as a default option for ExpressVPN, try using the “search for city or country” option.
If you’re having trouble getting the game after you’ve turned on your VPN and set it to the correct viewing area, there are two things you can try for a quick fix. First, log into your streaming service subscription account and make sure the address registered for the account is an address in the correct viewing area. If not, you may need to change the physical address on file with your account. Second, some smart TVs — like Roku — don’t have VPN apps you can install directly on the device itself. Instead, you’ll have to install the VPN on your router or the mobile hotspot you’re using (like your phone) so that any device on its Wi-Fi network now appears in the correct viewing location.
All of the VPN providers we recommend have helpful instructions on their main site for quickly installing the VPN on your router. In some cases with smart TV services, after you install a cable network’s sports app, you’ll be asked to verify a numeric code or click a link sent to your email address on file for your smart TV. This is where having a VPN on your router will also help, since both devices will appear to be in the correct location.
And remember, browsers can often give away a location despite using a VPN, so be sure you’re using a privacy-first browser to log into your services. We normally recommend Brave.
Breanna Bortner’s dog, Mochi, began fixating on her breast before she was diagnosed with stage 2B triple-negative breast cancer, showing unusual and intuitive behavior throughout her journey.
A Grammy-winning singer and his family have revealed the surprising early symptoms of his brain cancer.
Michael Bolton, who was diagnosed in December 2023 with glioblastoma — the most aggressive and fastest-growing form of brain cancer — first exhibited signs that something was amiss the month prior, according to his daughters.
During a family night at the bowling alley, Bolton, 72, bowled out of turn several times, they told People during a recent interview.
MICHAEL BOLTON’S BRAIN CANCER TREATMENTS HAVE HARSH SIDE EFFECTS, BUT SUCCUMBING IS ‘NOT AN OPTION’
That same night, the singer had also fallen out of his chair, which was “very unusual,” Taryn, 45, told the outlet.
“He’s super athletic, and he doesn’t drink,” she said. “So he fell, and we were like, ‘What just happened?’”
Michael Bolton is pictured during a press conference in Mexico City on June 5, 2023, a few months before his brain cancer diagnosis.(Getty Images)
“That was when we were like, ‘Something’s wrong with his brain.”
Looking back now, Bolton’s daughters recognize “so many things” they missed.
NEW PROSTATE CANCER TEST PINPOINTS DISEASE BETTER THAN PSA OPTION, STUDY FINDS
Earlier that fall, the Grammy winner had struggled to keep his balance and experienced nausea while performing at a charity event.
His daughters had assumed the strange symptoms were due to lack of sleep or excess stress, they said.
“He’d been working nonstop that whole time,” Taryn recalled while speaking to People.
“It is truly among the most tragic diseases.”
“Traveling, doing shows, doing all of these things. We were like, he’s getting older, he’s tired, he’s stressed out. All of these things we sort of explained in a way, one by one.”
Following the strange symptoms while bowling, Bolton began experiencing headaches, his daughters shared.
The following Monday, he received an MRI that detected a brain tumor, which was removed surgically and found to be glioblastoma.
ALTERNATIVE CANCER TREATMENT COULD REPLACE CHEMO AND SURGERY, STUDY SUGGESTS
While rare, glioblastoma is known for affecting people across all ages and for its fast, aggressive development, according to Michael Canney Ph.D., chief scientific officer of Carthera, a Colorado health tech company that develops medical devices to treat severe brain disorders.
“Although glioblastoma’s cause isn’t fully known, the disease begins when genetic changes in brain cells cause them to grow out of control,” Canney, who was not involved in Bolton’s care, told Fox News Digital.
Michael Bolton performs on stage during Starlite Occident 2023 at Cantera de Nagüeles on June 30, 2023, in Malaga, Spain. A few months later, he would undergo surgery to remove a glioblastoma brain tumor.(Getty Images)
“These cancerous cells rapidly invade surrounding brain tissue, making the tumor especially aggressive and hard to treat.”
Canney confirmed that the symptoms Bolton experienced — confusion, sudden falls and severe headaches — are consistent with glioblastoma warning signs.
WOMAN SAYS DOG DETECTED HER BREAST CANCER BEFORE DOCTORS DID: ‘HE’S KNOWN THIS WHOLE TIME’
“Other potential red flags include nausea, memory loss, personality changes, speech difficulties and vision changes,” he added.
“While the symptoms of glioblastoma are not unique to this disease, anytime you or a loved one experience an unexplained change in behavior, mental awareness or motor control, it’s important to see a medical professional.”
Michael Bolton is pictured during the 32nd annual Grammy Awards at Shrine Auditorium in Los Angeles on Feb. 21, 1990.(Getty Images)
After surgery, Bolton completed radiation and chemotherapy, which have so far kept cancer at bay, the report noted.
He receives ongoing MRIs every two months to ensure that he is still clear of tumors.
Treatment and prognosis
Glioblastoma is among the deadliest cancers, with patients living for an average of just over a year after diagnosis. The five-year survival rate is less than 5%.
“It is truly among the most tragic diseases,” Canney said.
“A number of clinical trials are underway that give us an immense sense of hope.”
Part of what makes glioblastoma so severe is its resistance to treatment, according to the expert.
“Around your brain, there’s a natural protective barrier called the blood-brain barrier,” he told Fox News Digital.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“While this barrier keeps the brain safe from toxins and other harmful substances, it also blocks the life-saving chemotherapy drugs used in treating most cancers.”
In some cases, including Bolton’s, glioblastoma treatment can begin with surgery to remove the tumor, provided it has not grown too deeply into the brain, Canney said.
Glioblastoma is among the deadliest cancers, with patients living for an average of just over a year after diagnosis. (iStock)
Other treatment options include radiation and chemotherapy, which can “modestly extend survival,” he noted.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“Although current treatment options are limited, a number of clinical trials are underway that give us an immense sense of hope,” Canney said, pointing out a new form of ultrasound-based technology that is showing promise.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
“If approved, this technology will enable doctors to safely and temporarily open the blood-brain barrier for the first time ever — allowing a greater number of potentially more effective chemotherapy drugs into the brain.”
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
Sara Tendulkar often posts about food on her Instagram page. Since she’s a nutritionist by profession, you might think her updates are all about eating healthy. But Sara candidly shares glimpses of her indulgences as well. Some of her recent Instagram stories highlighted her foodie side again. Sara gave us a sneak peek at her weekend binge, which featured South Indian delicacies at a popular chain restaurant. A collage of photos showed us the wide variety of treats she relished. Also Read: ‘It’s All About Balance’, Says Sara Tendulkar As She Indulges In Desserts After Pilates
What exactly was the reason for her “food coma,” as her caption indicated? It was an array of delicious dishes, including masala dosa, ghee podi idli, rasam idli, neer dosa and three portions of what seemed to be tamarind rice. These delicacies came with vibrant accompaniments, including sambar, different types of chutney, pickle and more. There were other side dishes kept on a separate plate in the background, but their exact contents were not clear.
Also Read: Sara Tendulkar Reveals She Is Feeling Guilty About Her Holiday Diet, Here’s Why
But that was not all Sara Tendulkar savoured at the iconic Rameshwaram Cafe. She also ensured she sipped classic South Indian filter coffee in the traditional way – poured between two brass cups of different sizes. Sara loved the hot beverage so much that she said, “This is what heaven looks, smells and tastes like.”
Like many of us, Sara Tendulkar likes to enjoy outside food on weekends. In the past, she shared updates about various yummy meals she had on a Sunday. Her love for South Indian cuisine was reflected in the fact that a “dosa date” was part of her plan. She also savoured a Gujarati thali. Click here to find out more.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-05-03/President-Xi-urges-youth-to-contribute-to-Chinese-modernization-1D4FL7d0LCw/img/c02efacbbfd240d7936e63fcbc7ae459/c02efacbbfd240d7936e63fcbc7ae459.jpeg' alt='A volunteer teacher works at a primary school in Tacheng, northwest China's Xinjiang Uygur Autonomous Region. /VCG'
President Xi Jinping has called on Chinese youth to dedicate themselves to the country’s modernization drive by serving where the nation needs them most.
Xi, also general secretary of the Communist Party of China Central Committee and chairman of the Central Military Commission, made the remarks in a reply letter to a group of volunteer teachers working in a remote border school in northwest China’s Xinjiang Uygur Autonomous Region.
On the occasion of China’s Youth Day that falls on May 4, Xi extended festive greetings to young people across the country and expressed high expectations for their contributions in the letter.
He commended the volunteers who are serving at the primary school in Karajol Township, Artux City, Kizilsu Kirgiz Autonomous Prefecture. The village school is located just 47 km from China’s border.
“You have responded to the Party’s call by teaching in the western border areas, where your efforts have not only promoted local education and ethnic unity but also contributed to prosperity and stability along the border,” Xi said.
Xi noted that more young people have chosen to serve as volunteers in the country’s western regions and rural areas over the years, demonstrating their spirit of dedication and sense of responsibility.
He urged the young people to stand firm in their ideals and convictions, cultivate patriotism, develop outstanding skills, and work hard to contribute to Chinese modernization.
Recently, the volunteers wrote to Xi to share their experiences and reaffirm their commitment to serving in China’s border areas.
Phoenix Mills Ltd, which is mainly into development of retail real estate, posted an 18 per cent decline in consolidated net profit to ₹268.82 crore during the March quarter on lower income.
It had posted a net profit of ₹326.73 crore in the year-ago period.
Total income also declined to ₹1,061.48 crore during the fourth quarter of the previous fiscal year from ₹1,343.14 crore in the corresponding period of the preceding year, according to a regulatory filing on April 30.
During the full 2024-25 fiscal year, net profit fell to ₹984.22 crore from ₹1,099.20 crore in the preceding financial year.
Total income declined to ₹3,964.47 crore from ₹4,109.86 crore a year ago.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
S DOLASKOM proljeća sunčane naočale ponovno zauzimaju važno mjesto u svakodnevnim kombinacijama kao praktičan, ali i stilski dodatak. Kad je riječ o ovogodišnjim trendovima, među najistaknutijima su maksimalizam, suptilni luksuz i retro okviri.
Na društvenim mrežama, osobito na TikToku, u fokusu su manji, elegantniji modeli i prepoznatljiva dizajnerska imena. Ovog proljeća, uz već popularne Miu Miu i Gucci naočale, izdvojio se još jedan favorit među ženskim modelima – onaj iz Bottege Venete, koji djevojke nazivaju “savršenim za 2025.”.
Bottega Veneta Knot mačkaste sunčane naočale savršen su spoj retro glamura i suvremene elegancije, čime idu ruku pod ruku s trendovima koji dominiraju. Mačkasti okvir naglašava crte lica i unosi dašak sofisticiranosti u svaki stajling, dok zlatne metalne ručkice s ukrasnim detaljima u obliku čvora dodaju luksuzan završni dojam.
Ženstven i upečatljiv dizajn
Dizajn je ženstven, upečatljiv i dovoljno svestran da se uklopi i u ležerne i u elegantnije kombinacije. Namijenjene su ljubiteljicama klasike s modernim zaokretom, a sudeći po tome koliko su brzo nestale iz online trgovina Bottege Venete, takvih je mnogo.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
U hrvatsku online trgovinu brenda trebale bi se uskoro vratiti na stanje, a dostupne su u dvije boje – crnoj i boji kornjačevine, po cijeni od 520 eura. Sudeći po komentarima, nema sumnje da će ponovno planuti čim se vrate u prodaju.
“Posvuda su se rasprodale”, “Tek sam nabavila Miu Miu sunčane naočale, nemoj mi to raditi”, “Nikada nisam vidjela savršenije sunčane naočale”, “Kupila sam ih prije par dana, opsjednuta sam s njima”, “Odmah kupujem”, “Htjela sam kupiti Guccijeve, ove su bolje”, “Prekrasne su”, “Trebaju mi”, “Savršenstvo su”, samo su neki od komentara djevojaka na TikToku ispod videa u kojem su upravo one u prvom planu.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
It has been eight years since the Houston Astros cheated their way through a year that included a World Series victory over the Dodgers. It has been five years since commissioner Rob Manfred publicly detailed the scandal and sanctioned the Astros and their leaders, if not their players.
Does A.J. Hinch, the manager of those Astros, still hear about it?
“Every day,” he said.
Hinch now manages the Detroit Tigers.
“As a manager, my name gets announced in every stadium, every night,” he said Friday at Angel Stadium. “So it gives everybody an opportunity to remind me that no one has forgotten.
“And no one should forget.”
We’ll get back to those Astros. But, first, we ought to tip our cap to these Tigers, the team with the best record in the American League.
The Tigers have surrendered the fewest runs in the AL and scored the third most through Friday’s games.
Their starting rotation includes defending Cy Young winner Tarik Skubal (2.21 ERA), former Dodger Jack Flaherty (3.34) and former first-round pick Casey Mize (2.70).
Mize preceded sluggers Riley Greene and Spencer Torkelson as first-round picks in Detroit; Greene and Torkelson have combined for one more home run (17) than the Dodgers’ Shohei Ohtani and Teoscar Hernández (16).
Hinch is something of an accidental manager. In 2009, he was the minor league director of the Arizona Diamondbacks when general manager Josh Byrnes asked him to manage the team.
“I thought he was crazy,” Hinch said.
What Byrnes saw and many others in baseball did not: The traditional wall between the front office and the coaching staff was crumbling. The analyst or executive coming into the clubhouse might be there to help the manager and coaches, not to usurp their authority.
“I think the Diamondbacks, for the first time, were ahead of the curve,” said Angels pitching coach Barry Enright, then a Diamondbacks pitcher. “It was rare back then to see a front-office member come into the coaches’ room. Now it’s all one big unit.”
Innovation is great when you win. The Diamondbacks did not, and Hinch did not manage even one full season before he and Byrnes were fired.
Look at Hinch now: The Tigers earned their first playoff berth in 10 years last season, with a fraying rotation held together by Skubal and duct tape. In the first round, they beat the — dramatic pause — Astros. Two ex-Dodgers on the current Detroit roster compare Hinch favorably to Dave Roberts.
“Two incredible managers,” Flaherty said. “I’ve been lucky enough to play for both of them.”
“The Dodgers, they can just go out there and roll out their guys: We’re here, we’re going to beat you,” said utilityman Zach McKinstry, who ranks eighth in the AL with a .311 batting average.
Tigers manager A.J. Hinch congratulates Zach McKinstry after he scored a run. McKinstry is a fan of Hinch’s managing style.
(Paul Sancya / Associated Press)
“The way we play the game, the way we know the game, the way we know our opponents beforehand, it’s just unmatched. It’s something I’ve never been a part of. We have to strategize and bring our best game every night.”
McKinstry is sensitive to the unfortunately common perception: How good a manager does Roberts have to be if he can write Ohtani, Mookie Betts and Freddie Freeman atop his lineup card every night?
“Managing superstars like that definitely comes with different challenges,” McKinstry said. “The way he uses his bullpen; he’s really good at that. Super good manager.
“He can control the media. He controls his players. He controls that locker room. All good things.”
When McKinstry was traded to Detroit in 2023, he was apprehensive about Hinch. McKinstry made his major league debut with the Dodgers in 2020, the year the Astros’ scandal exploded into view and Dodgers fans gathered to jeer the Astros’ team bus, even as pandemic restrictions prevented them from entering Dodger Stadium.
“You come over here and you’re like, ‘What am I going to think?’” McKinstry said. “I just kind of erased all that and came over here with open eyes and an open heart.”
Perhaps we all should, at least with respect to Hinch.
Manfred suspended Hinch and Jeff Luhnow, then the Astros’ general manager, for one year. Jim Crane, the Astros’ owner, then fired Hinch and Luhnow.
In his report, Manfred said Hinch did not devise, participate in or approve of the scheme to intercept the pitch calls of opposing teams on live video and communicate the upcoming pitch by banging on a trash can. However, Manfred said, Hinch did not put a stop to it.
“As the person with responsibility for managing his players and coaches,” Manfred said, “there simply is no justification for Hinch’s failure to act.”
In a year the American League is down, the Tigers are up. Does Hinch believe a World Series championship in Detroit would confer legitimacy upon him that the title in Houston might not, at least not to some fans?
“I don’t want to win for me, or for my story, or because of what we did previously in my career,” he said. “I want to win because of all the work that we put into it, and I want everybody to experience the feeling of being on top of the sport.”
His remorse sounds sincere, not coming in a scripted statement but as we talked in the visiting dugout Friday afternoon. Hinch could have declined to talk about the scandal, or he could have offered some version of “I’ve put that behind me,” but he did neither.
“It was wrong, and I should have handled it better,” Hinch said. “I understand my role in my time in Houston, but my goal is to always own it, and do everything I can to show people that I can impact a team.”
If adversity reveals character, as those of us in the sports world like to chirp, consider the reaction of the three most prominent men Manfred cited in his report.
Crane said: “I don’t think I should be held accountable.”
Luhnow said he had been held out as “the scapegoat for the organization” and sued the Astros.
The Committee constituted for the Framework on Repairability Index (RI) in the Mobile and Electronics Sector has submitted its report to Smt. Nidhi Khare, Secretary, Department of Consumer Affairs (DoCA), Government of India.
The report outlines a comprehensive and industry-friendly framework designed to help consumers assess the ease of repairability of electronic products—beginning with smartphones and tablets. The proposed Repairability Index will be self-declared by Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEMs) based on a standard scoring system, with no additional compliance burden imposed on the industry.
Repairability score to empower informed buying
The committee has recommended that the Repairability Index be clearly displayed at the point of sale, on e-commerce platforms, and on product packaging through a QR code. This aims to help consumers make informed choices and promote mindful product usage over wasteful consumption.
The Repairability Index is a step towards building a transparent repair ecosystem, enabling consumers to extend the lifecycle of their devices through easier access to repair information and services. This aligns with the government’s broader vision of fostering a sustainable, self-reliant, and consumer-centric economy.
Why It Matters: Rising consumer grievances
Data from the National Consumer Helpline (NCH) revealed a steady rise in consumer complaints related to mobile and tablet repairs—from 19,057 in 2022-23 to 21,020 in 2023-24 and further up to 22,864 in 2024-25. These figures highlight the growing need for accessible, reliable, and transparent post-sale services.
Committee ocmposition and key focus areas
The committee was formed in September 2024 under the chairmanship of Shri Bharat Khera, Additional Secretary, DoCA. It included representatives from major OEMs like Apple, Samsung, Google, Vivo, HMD Mobiles, Dell, and HP; industry associations such as ICEA and MAIT; consumer groups like EPIC; academic experts; and officials from DoCA, MeitY, MSME, BIS, and NTH.
Smartphones and tablets have been selected as the initial product categories for implementation. The committee has identified key components prone to frequent failure, including:
Battery
Display assembly
Back and front camera assemblies
Charging port
Mechanical buttons
Speaker
Microphones
Hinges and fold mechanisms
Audio connectors
How the Index Works
Repairability will be assessed based on six core parameters:
Disassembly Depth
Availability of Repair Information
Spare Parts Availability
Software Updates
Tools Required
Types and availability of fasteners
Each parameter carries a specific weightage, and the final score is presented on a five-point scale to reflect overall repairability.
Building on the right to repair portal
The initiative builds on the Right to Repair Portal India, launched in 2022 by DoCA to make repair information accessible across four sectors: Automobiles, Mobile & Electronics, Consumer Durables, and Farming Equipment. Over 65 companies have already onboarded the platform.
A National Workshop held in August 2024 reaffirmed the need for a Repairability Index, with stakeholders agreeing that such a framework would enhance consumer choice and product longevity. As India deepens its digital penetration and more consumers across rural and urban areas rely on electronic devices, the emphasis on equitable repair options and robust after-sales service becomes increasingly critical.The submitted report marks a milestone in ensuring consumers are not left in the dark post-purchase—and that repairing, not replacing, becomes the norm.
Swiss luxury blends precision, craftsmanship and exclusivity — qualities that define its world-renowned watches, gourmet cheeses and fine hospitality. Rooted in a legacy of excellence, Swiss luxury is not just about opulence but about perfection in service, attention to detail and immersive experiences that cater to the most discerning travellers.
Whether you seek downtime and privacy, haute cuisine or total mind-body rejuvenation, these 5 Swiss hotels ensure a heightened stay.(File Photo)
Switzerland’s gorgeous landscapes, tranquil lakes and charming alpine villages provide the perfect backdrop for a luxurious getaway. Early spring offers an opportunity to experience world-class amenities with added benefits—fewer crowds, clear sunny days and curated seasonal experiences. Whether you seek downtime and privacy, haute cuisine, or total mind-body rejuvenation, these five Swiss hotels ensure a heightened stay.
1. Grand Dolder – Zurich: Where heritage meets modern opulence
The Dolder Grand is an architectural masterpiece perched above Zurich, offering clear views of the city, Lake Zurich, and the Alps. Guests can immerse themselves in 4,000 square metres of spa luxury, featuring a Japanese-inspired meditation walk, the world’s only Snow Paradise cold therapy room, and a La Prairie Beauty Center.
Doldar Grand Zurich(File Photo)
Michelin-starred dining at The Restaurant under the mastery of Chef Heiko Nieder ensures an extraordinary culinary experience. Bespoke butler services and private art tours of the hotel’s extensive collection, including works by Dalí and Warhol, sublimate the stay.
2. Bürgenstock – Lucerne: A Hollywood-favourite hideaway
Nestled high above Lake Lucerne, Bürgenstock Resort has been a sanctuary for Hollywood icons like Audrey Hepburn and Sophia Loren. The hotel offers expansive lake and mountain views through floor-to-ceiling windows, blending Swiss natural beauty with a modern design philosophy.
Bürgenstock Resort Lake Lucerne(File Photo)
The Alpine Spa, spanning over 10,000 square metres, features an infinity-edge heated pool, offering a unique an unparalleled wellness retreat. Guests can arrive in style via the Bürgenstock boat and funicular railway, a quintessentially Swiss experience. Michelin-starred restaurant RitzCoffier delivers a curated menu inspired by classic French cuisine.
3. Victoria Jungfrau Grand Hotel and Spa – Interlaken: Elegance at the foot of the Jungfrau
Situated between Lake Thun and Lake Brienz, this historic hotel offers prime views of the Jungfrau massif. More than just a hotel, Victoria Jungfrau offers the exclusive Nescens Better-Ageing Program, blending Swiss medical expertise with luxury wellness treatments tailored to each guest.
Victoria Jungfrau Grand Hotel and Spa(File Photo)
For culinary excellence, guests can dine at La Terrasse Brasserie, a Michelin-starred restaurant serving locally sourced dishes. The hotel’s palatial Belle Époque interiors and handcrafted Swiss chocolates distributed to guests upon arrival add to its decadent charm.
4. Mandarin Oriental, Geneva: Discreet luxury on the Rhône river
A favourite among global dignitaries and business moguls, the Mandarin Oriental Geneva combines Swiss precision and Asian hospitality. Overlooking the Rhône River, the hotel boasts a newly redesigned Presidential Suite featuring a private terrace with sweeping city views.
Mandarin Oriental Geneva(File Photo)
Dining at SACHI offers one of Geneva’s finest Japanese culinary experiences, curated by a Nobu-trained chef. Bespoke experiences include a private guided tour of Geneva’s watchmaking ateliers, granting exclusive access to the world’s finest horologists.
5. Kempinski Palace Engelberg: Belle Époque charm in the Heart of the Alps
Blending timeless elegance with contemporary flair, Kempinski Palace Engelberg is a standout alpine retreat nestled in central Switzerland. Housed in a meticulously restored Belle Époque building, the hotel combines historic charm with five-star luxury. The rooftop infinity pool offers panoramic views of Mount Titlis, while the Kempinski Spa invites guests to rejuvenate with treatments inspired by Alpine herbs and traditions.
Kempinski Engelberg(File Photo)
Dining at Cattani Restaurant features locally sourced cuisine with a refined twist, and the Wintergarden Lounge is perfect for afternoon tea with a view. Whether it’s skiing, hiking, or simply soaking in the scenery, Kempinski Engelberg offers an unforgettable mountain escape.
A destination adored by global icons
From Bollywood legends to international business tycoons, Switzerland has long been a beloved retreat. Yash Chopra’s iconic Bollywood films captured the romance of the Swiss Alps and global celebrities continue to make these luxury hotels their preferred Swiss sanctuaries. Whether you are seeking adventure, serenity or bespoke indulgences, these five hotels offer the world’s finest.
This World War Two film has been described as ‘often copied but rarely bettered’ (Image: Getty)
It has been called the “most intense war film ever made” and “often copied but never bettered” with an opening scene that is “unforgettable”.
Its action sequences have been described as “extraordinary, utterly believable, horrifyingly graphic”, it widely received five stars and full marks from reviewers and currently has a 94% review rating on Rotten Tomatoes.
Saving Private Ryan is one of Steven Spielberg’s best films and was released in 1998, five years after another of his World War Two masterpieces, Schindler’s List. Starring Tom Hanks, Matt Damon, Tom Sizemore, Barry Pepper, Vin Diesel, Giovanni Ribisi and Ted Danson, it tells the story of a team of soliders led by Captain John H Miller (Hanks) sent to rescue Private James Ryan (Damon) when the US Armed Forces learn that all of Ryan’s three brothers have been killed in action.
Its astonishing opening scene takes place on D-Day and stunned audiences with its graphic portrayal of injuries as Allied forces landed on the beaches of Normandy where German troops were already lying in wait.
The opening scene of Saving Private Ryan in which soldiers land on Omaha Beach (Image: Getty)
Is Saving Private Ryan a true story?
Saving Private Ryan is not an entirely true story but it is inspired by Fritz Niland. He and his brothers, Bob, Preston and Edward, were all in the US Armed Forces during World War Two. A month before D-Day, Edward was captured by the Japanese forces, while Bob was killed storming the beaches of Normandy on D-Day and Preston was killed in Normandy the next day. Their mother reportedly found out about the deaths all on the same day.
When the US War Department heard that three of the four brothers had perished, they decided that the remaining brother needed to be brought home — just like in the film. Fritz was ordered home. In 1945, at the war’s end, it turned out that Edward had not been killed and was also able to return home to the United States.
Before Niland’s rescue, the Sullivan brothers of Iowa had all been killed in 1942 when the US Navy ship they were aboard was hit by a Japanese torpedo. After their deaths, there was a policy that brothers would not all be allowed to serve alongside each other.
The gravestone of Frederick ‘Fritz’ Niland, whose story inspired Saving Private Ryan (Image: Getty)
What people say about Saving Private Ryan
Saving Private Ryan received widespread praise and still has the power to shock today. Writing in The Times, Wendy Ide said: “The 24-minute sequence at the start of Steven Spielberg’s Second World War drama is one of the greatest pieces of combat cinema yet made.”
Peter Bradshaw in The Guardian said it was “an old-fashioned war picture to rule them all — gripping, utterly uncynical, with viscerally convincing and audacious battle sequences”. Leah Rozen, writing in People Magazine, said the film would make “many of us will look at our aging fathers or grandfathers with a newfound respect”.
And Jay Carr, writing for the Boston Globe, said it was “the war movie to end all war movies” and “the ultimate combat film, far outdistancing what until now had been the genre’s World War Two classics”.
Viewers have been equally full of praise, calling it “epic”, “emotional”, “brutal” and “one of, if not the, most powerful war films ever made”. And Empire magazine ranked it the 54th best film ever made, saying: “The sheer bludgeoning, blood-spilling, visceral power of its Omaha Beach, D-Day-landing opening act ensured that Steven Spielberg’s fourth World War Twomovie set the standard for all future battle depictions.”
It added that its style “has been often copied, but rarely bettered” since.
Saving Private Ryan tells the story of Private James Ryan (Matt Damon) (Image: Getty)
Where was Saving Private Ryan filmed?
Saving Private Ryan was filmed almost entirely on location in England and Ireland between June and September 1997. The opening Omaha Beach D-Day battle reportedly cost $12 million to film over a four-week period, using 1,500 background actors. It was filmed at the usually peaceful Curracloe Beach in County Wexford, Ireland, where “most of the explosive charges on that beach were real, so when they went off the beach shook,” BBC reports.
Saving Private Ryan’s unit production manager and associate producer, Mark Huffam, said the filming was “terrifying” to witness and said that, while Normandy was considered as a filming location, it was quickly ruled out due to post-war development along the coast.
The film’s other scenes were filmed at the Hatfield Aerodrome in Hertfordshire, England, including the building of the fictional town of Ramelle, where a battle takes place.
Tom Hanks during the opening scene of Saving Private Ryan (Image: Getty)
What awards did Saving Private Ryan win?
At the 56th Golden Globe Awards in 1999, Saving Private Ryan won Best Drama and Best Director. At the 71st Academy Awards (Oscars), it won Best Director, Best Cinematography, Best Film Editing, Best Sound and Best Sound Effects Editing. But it did not win Best Picture, losing out to Shakespeare in Love in a surprise result.
At the 52nd British Academy Film Awards (Baftas), it won Best Special Effects and Best Sound, but did not win Best Film, Best Direction or Best Actor.
If you’re shopping for an affordable, family-friendly small SUV, chances are the MG ZS has popped up on your radar.
2024 MG ZS Excite
2025 MG ZS Essence Turbo
The original MG ZS earned a solid reputation – and enough new owners to make it Australia’s most popular small SUV for several years – for being a no-fuss, budget-conscious option that ticked a lot of boxes for growing families.
Now, with the launch of the second-generation 2025 MG ZS, the Chinese brand has renewed its popular compact crossover – but is it a real step forward, or just a shinier version of what we already had?
So let’s see how far the MG ZS has progressed from generation to generation.
How much?
This time last year, the MG ZS model range consisted of eight variants across three powertrain options and four trim levels, starting at $22,990 drive-away for the entry-level Excite we have here – the only variant offered with a naturally-aspirated four-cylinder petrol engine.
You could spend a little more for the entry-level ZST with a turbo engine, which was essentially a upgraded ZS and started at $25,490 drive-away for the most affordable Core variant, and topped out at $30,490 for the flagship Essence trim.
Or could drop almost double the cash down on the fully-electric ZS EV, which cost from $39,990 for the Excite and maxxed out at $49,990 for the Long Range.
Model
Drive-away pricing (June 2024)
MG ZS Excite
$22,990
MG ZST Core
$25,490
MG ZST Vibe
$26,490
MG ZST Excite
$30,490
MG ZS EV Excite
$39,990
MG ZS EV Essence
$43,990
MG ZS EV Long Range
$49,990
Today, MG still has remaining stock of the previous-generation ZST and the ZS EV in dealerships, with a revised model lineup and pricing structure.
But it recently introduced the second-generation ZS with the option of a hybrid powertrain for the first time and, soon, a battery-electric version to replace the old ZS EV, called the ZS S5 EV.
The new MG ZS model range now starts at $26,990 drive-away for the base petrol-powered Excite and tops out at $40,217 drive-away for the Essence Hybrid.
Here’s the full rundown of the 2025 MG ZS lineup.
Model
Drive-away pricing
MG ZS Excite
$26,990
MG ZS Essence
$29,990
MG ZS Essence Turbo
$31,990
MG ZS Excite Hybrid
$37,091
MG ZS Essence Hybrid
$40,217
MG ZST Core
$25,490
MG ZST Vibe
$27,692
MG ZST Essence
$33,423
MG ZS EV Essence
$45,428
MG ZS EV Long Range
$50,683
If you want to see how the MG ZS compares against its rivals, be sure to check out our comparison tool
What do you get?
The on-paper specifications between the original and new MG ZS don’t tell the full story.
2024 MG ZS Excite
2024 MG ZS Excite
2025 MG ZS Essence Turbo
2025 MG ZS Essence Turbo
Even at its base level, the 2024 MG ZS Excite was reasonably well specced with synthetic leather trim, climate control air-conditioning, power windows, and an 8.0-inch colour infotainment display with Bluetooth, six-speaker audio and smartphone mirroring for Apple and Android devices.
The Essence grade added embedded sat-nav, keyless entry and push-button start, as well as a glass sunroof. But the new ZS has switched around a few key specifications.
The entry-level Excite replaces the synthetic leather with cloth trim and only has a four-speaker audio system, but it picks up sat-nav as standard, along with push-button start, a larger 10.25-inch infotainment touchscreen, and a more comprehensive suite of active safety systems (which we will dig into more detail later).
Step up to the Essence, and it brings more goodies with twin 12.3-inch digital screens including and instrument cluster for the driver, keyless entry, high-res 360-degree camera display, larger 17-inch alloy wheels, LED headlights, a sunroof, six-way electric adjustment for the driver’s seat and an extra two speakers for the audio system.
If you want to see how the MG ZS compares against its rivals, be sure to check out our comparison tool
What are they like inside?
It’s only when you get to experience the pair side-by-side that the generational change becomes more obvious.
2024 MG ZS Excite
2024 MG ZS Excite
2025 MG ZS Essence Turbo
2025 MG ZS Essence Turbo
For starters, the new ZS looks much sharper on the outside and highlights that MG’s design team are starting to find their own language. There’s more expression in its face, detail in its profile and a sleeker overall silhouette, whereas its predecessor looks far more generic, particularly in the base trim with its smaller 16-inch alloys.
The new ZS is also physically larger in almost every dimension, except overall height, which not only lends itself to looking sportier on the outside but also provides more space inside the cabin, and additional cargo carrying capacity in the boot.
Dimensions
2024 MG ZS
2025 MG ZS
Length
4314mm
4430mm
Width
1809mm
1818mm
Height
1644mm
1635mm
Wheelbase
2585mm
2610mm
Cargo capacity
359L / 1166L
443L / 1457L
That’s not to say the previous MG ZS was short on practicality. It offers a spacious cabin with excellent headroom, comfortable front seats, plenty of convenient storage solutions and a generous amount of rear legroom – enough for two adults to travel in relative comfort in the back.
2024 MG ZS Excite
2025 MG ZS Essence Turbo
The boot is also pretty decent with a deep well and storage nets to keep smaller items secure on either side, but there’s no rear latches to drop the 60:40-split folding rear seatback down when loading larger items in the back, and the seats don’t fold fully flat either.
It also misses out on rear vents and a USB outlet for rear-seat passengers, but there are large bottle holders in each door, cupholders in the centre console, and a small tray big enough (just) for a mobile phone in front of the gear lever.
While there are some neat design cues, such as the Audi-esque rotating air vents on the far side of the dashboard, the quality of materials leave a lot to be desired, with a mix of hard plastics, piano black highlights and tacky faux carbon-fibre trim elements.
In stark comparison, the new MG ZS looks and feels light years ahead of its predecessor. The cabin design is more modern – especially in our Turbo Essence test car – with its twin digital screen set-up, four consistent air vents across the top of the dash and the clever arrangement of the centre console.
2024 MG ZS Excite
2024 MG ZS Excite
2025 MG ZS Essence Turbo
2025 MG ZS Essence Turbo
It features an electronic gear shifter in front of a rubberised mat that’s next to the start/stop button, electric hand brake switch and drive mode toggles. It’s a pity the mat doesn’t have a proper non-slip surface as my phone often fell back into the cupholders under acceleration.
Not only does it look better, the quality of materials is significantly improved with a nice mix of soft-touch plastics and brushed black alloy highlights. In fact, you could remove the badge from the steering wheel and easily assume the ZS comes from a premium brand.
There’s a fraction more legroom in the back than the older model, and also more luxuries with a single rear vent and USB port on the back of the console.
The boot isn’t as deep, but it is longer and the release handles are more easily accessible for the back seats, which fold down a little further to better accommodate larger loads.
If you want to see how the MG ZS compares against its rivals, be sure to check out our comparison tool
Are they safe?
Here’s where the older MG ZS really shows it age.
Yes, it was okay for its time, scoring a four-star ANCAP rating when it was first tested in 2017, even though it featured a comprehensive array of active driver assist systems under the banner of MG Pilot.
This includes automated emergency braking, lane keep assistance, adaptive cruise control, blind spot detection and forward collision warning.
The new ZS also has a four-star ANCAP rating, but this was achieved under much stricter protocols in 2024.
It builds on its predecessor’s suite of active systems with additional functions such as lane change assistance, unsteady driver warning, speed limit assist, door opening warning and a 360-degree high-resolution reversing camera.
If you want to see how the MG ZS compares against its rivals, be sure to check out our comparison tool
What’s under the bonnet?
There’s an element of comparing an apple to a pear here with our two test vehicles.
2024 MG ZS Excite
2025 MG ZS Essence Turbo
Specifications
2024 MG ZS Excite
2025 MG ZS Essence Turbo
Engine
1.5L 4cyl petrol
1.5L 4cyl turbo-petrol
Power
84kW
125kW
Torque
150Nm
275Nm
Transmission
4-speed automatic
CVT automatic
Drive type
FWD
FWD
Weight
1255kg
1390kg
Fuel economy (claimed)
7.1L/100km
6.9L/100km
Fuel tank capacity
48 litres
55 litres
Fuel requirement
91 octane standard unleaded
95 octane premium unleaded
CO2 emissions
165g/km
161g/km
Braked tow capacity
500kg
500kg
The older MG ZS is the base model powered by a 1.5-litre naturally aspirated four-cylinder petrol engine linked to a four-speed automatic transmission driving the front wheels, while our newer ZS has a turbocharged version of the same engine with a CVT automatic transmission.
Whatever the case, the turbo engine is well worth the extra spend. Its outputs of 125kW and 275Nm are almost 40 per cent and 45 per cent higher respectively than the atmo version, which not only makes it feel more athletic through the bends but also more effortless to drive in town.
There’s a bit of delay under initial acceleration as the turbo builds boost and the CVT finds the engine’s sweet spot, which should be tuned better to make it feel more responsive. But, once underway, the turbo motor is smooth, gutsy and nicely refined.
The non-turbo motor in the older ZS, on the other hand, feels wheezy and needs to be worked harder to keep up with traffic. While it only requires standard unleaded, compared to premium for the turbo, it uses more of it and has a shorter overall driving range with a smaller fuel tank.
If you want to see how the MG ZS compares against its rivals, be sure to check out our comparison tool
How do they drive?
The improvements to the MG ZS go far beyond how it looks and the new tech.
2025 MG ZS Essence Turbo
There is a substantial upshift in the quality of its driving dynamics and the overall finesse of its on-road character, no matter whether you’re tootling through town or stretching its legs on a country road.
Where the older ZS is acceptable in terms of it ride quality, steering and general comfort, the new ZS is remarkably more refined.
The suspension is well tuned and irons out most road irregularities without crashing them through to the cabin, the steering feels better weighted and reacts more positively, and the overall noise suppression is significantly improved. It genuinely feels a level, or three, ahead of its predecessor in every conceivable way.
However, while most of the additional safety systems like the lane keeping assistance and adaptive cruise control are well calibrated, the speed sign recognition incessantly bings and bongs, even if you’re only a kay or two over the limit and particularly through school zones even when they aren’t active, which can be a bit annoying.
It can be disabled, but you have to do it each time you start the car, and rifle through the menu on the screen to do it.
If you want to see how the MG ZS compares against its rivals, be sure to check out our comparison tool
CarExpert’s Pick
If there is one thing that’s just as certain as death and taxes, it’s generational improvement in cars.
But the new MG ZS genuinely feels as though it has leapfrogged further in one bound than many others, not just because it features more up-to-the-minute technology but because of its massive steps forward in terms of quality, refinement, design and driving dynamics.
Interested in buying a MG ZS? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
Kotak Mahindra Bank Q4 Results: Its NII increases by 5 per cent YoY to Rs 7,284 crore, against Rs 6,909 crore a year ago.
Kotak Mahindra Bank Q4 Results.
Kotak Mahindra Bank on Saturday reported a 14 per cent YoY decline in its standalone net profit to Rs 3,552 crore for the fourth quarter ended March 31, 2025. However, its net interest income, the difference between interest earned and interest expended, increased by 5 per cent YoY to Rs 7,284 crore, against Rs 6,909 crore a year ago.
The private sector lender’s net profit had stood at Rs 4,133 crore in the corresponding quarter last year.
Kotak’s board has declared a dividend of Rs 2.50 per equity share for the financial year 2024-25.
“The board of directors of the bank has recommended a dividend of Rs 2.50 per equity share having face value of Rs 5, for the year ended March 31, 2025, subject to approval of shareholders,” Kotak Mahindra Bank said in a regulatory filing.
The bank’s provisions and contingencies, or funds set aside for potential bad loans, tripled to Rs 909 crore.
Its gross non-performing assets ratio, a key gauge of asset quality, was 1.42 per cent at the end of March compared with 1.50 per cent at the end of December.
Kotak’s loans rose 13 per cent in value terms in the March quarter, while deposits were up 15 per cent.
In February, the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) lifted a 10-month ban on Kotak that barred the lender from issuing credit cards and enrolling clients digitally due to gaps in its IT systems.
The net interest margin shrank to 4.97 per cent from 5.28 per cent a year earlier, but was higher than 4.93 per cent reported in the previous quarter.
In a falling interest rate scenario, lenders typically pass on central bank rate cuts to borrowers, making loans more attractive, but the pass-through to deposit rates comes with a lag, temporarily compressing margins until the adjustment is fully reflected across both sides of the balance sheet.
A majority of Kotak’s loan book is linked to the external benchmark, putting its margins under pressure.
Shares of Kotak Mahindra Bank on Friday fell by 0.94 per cent to Rs 2,185 apiece on the BSE.
Meanwhile, State Bank of India (SBI), the country’s largest lender, also reported its Q4 FY25 earnings on Saturday. The state-owned lender reported a 10 per cent decline in its net profit at Rs 18,643 crore for the fourth quarter ended March 31, 2025. However, its total income during January-March 2025 increased to Rs 1,43,876 crore as against Rs 1,28,412 crore in the year-ago period.
Stay updated with all the latest business news, including market trends, stock updates, tax, IPO, banking finance, real estate, savings and investments. Get in-depth analysis, expert opinions, and real-time updates—only on News18. Also Download the News18 App to stay updated!
First Published:
News business » banking-finance Kotak Mahindra Bank Q4 Results: Net Profit Falls 14% To Rs 3,552 Crore, Rs 2.5 Dividend Declared For FY25
Dogecoin (DOGE), the cryptocurrency born from a meme, is facing a turbulent 2025 as it trades at $0.1570, reflecting a steep 60% decline year-to-date. Over recent months, DOGE has been consolidating within a narrow range of $0.13 to $0.25, with key support levels at $0.30 and resistance around $0.48.
While analysts debate DOGE’s next move, savvy investors are pivoting to more promising projects like Ruvi, a rising star in the blockchain world offering groundbreaking presale rewards and unparalleled long-term potential.
Dogecoin’s Mixed Market Sentiment
Despite its rollercoaster performance, Dogecoin still holds onto its position as a top cryptocurrency by market cap, supported by vocal community members and occasional celebrity endorsements. However, its inability to breach critical resistance levels like $0.48 has left investors searching for alternative opportunities. Many are now looking toward Ruvi, which offers tangible rewards and a vision that extends beyond mere hype.
Ruvi’s Approach to Blockchain Innovation
Ruvi’s platform is setting a new standard in the crypto landscape by combining state-of-the-art technology with real-world applications. Its ecosystem integrates AI features, innovative DeFi tools, and green energy initiatives to solve pressing global challenges. But what truly captures the attention of early investors is Ruvi’s generously structured presale, which allows participants to benefit even before the official token launch.
How Ruvi’s Presale Rewards Set a New Benchmark
Ruvi’s presale offers are uniquely tailored to reward backers based on their level of commitment. Here’s how some potential investment scenarios could play out:
Maximize Value with a Modest Investment If an investor puts in $1,200 during the presale at a rate of $0.01 per token, they would receive 120,000 tokens. Thanks to a generous 60% bonus, they’d gain an additional 72,000 tokens, totaling 192,000 tokens. If Ruvi’s token reaches $2.75 post-launch, the investment could grow to an impressive $528,000.
Achieve Significant Returns with Larger Contributions Investors with deeper pockets can benefit even more. For example, an investment of $10,000 at a presale rate of $0.01 per token nets 1,000,000 tokens, along with a 100% bonus, adding another 1,000,000 tokens for a total of 2,000,000 tokens. If the token hits $4.00, this would amount to a $8 million payoff.
Exclusive Benefits for Presale Investors Beyond financial rewards, presale participants unlock unique privileges such as priority access to platform features, advanced DeFi integrations, and governance rights, positioning them at the forefront of Ruvi’s ecosystem.
Why Ruvi Stands Out in a Crowded Market
Unlike Dogecoin, which relies on sentiment and unpredictable market shifts, Ruvi offers a more calculated and sustainable approach. With its deflationary tokenomics that include strategic buybacks and burns, Ruvi ensures scarcity and continual value growth. Furthermore, its focus on practical applications like AI-enhanced tools and environmental solutions gives the project real-world utility that appeals to both seasoned investors and newcomers.
Seize This Opportunity Before It’s Gone
While Dogecoin continues to face resistance and unpredictable price swings, Ruvi’s presale is presenting a rare window of opportunity for investors. With token bonuses, early access to exclusive features, and the potential for exponential returns, Ruvi is not just another crypto project; it’s a revolution in blockchain innovation.
Learn More
Disclaimer and Risk Warning
The content featured on Coinpedia’s press release page is provided for informational purposes only. Coinpedia does not endorse, verify, or take responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, or reliability of any press releases or associated materials. Any views, opinions, or statements expressed in these press releases are those of the respective issuers and do not reflect the opinions or positions of Coinpedia. Coinpedia is not liable for any content, products, services, or actions mentioned in the press releases. Readers should independently verify the information before taking any actions related to the subject matter of the releases.
The University of Hyderabad (UoH) has signed an agreement with Krismo Biosciences Private Limited to develop therapies for inflammatory diseases and serious infectious conditions.
“A key focus will be on the design of antibody-based therapies to effectively combat viral infections, including dengue, COVID-19 and influenza, as well as potent toxins produced by harmful bacteria responsible for debilitating conditions like gas gangrene,” Nooruddin Khan, Professor at the School of Life Sciences of UoH, said here in a statement on Saturday.
Remember during the mid-20th century when vibrating belt machines were all the rage? They were promoted as weight loss aids that would slim you down. Fast-forward many decades, and now vibration plates are the latest fitness trend. Some claim they are an excellent alternative workout method with several health benefits. However, researchers continue to study the potential benefits of vibration exercise.
There’s a lot of hype around vibration plates, though the facts are harder to come by. That’s why we spoke with personal trainers and other fitness professionals to learn more about vibration plates and if you should use them at home.
What is a vibration plate?
A vibration plate is an exercise machine that shakes rapidly when you stand on it. By using a vibration plate, you’re engaging in a whole-body vibration exercise, where your muscles are forced to contract and relax quickly.
“The purpose of vibration plates is to generate quick vibrations that cause your body’s muscles to contract and relax several times per second,” says Dr. Leah Verebes, a physical therapist and assistant professor at Touro University’s School of Health Sciences. “At a far greater frequency, this resembles the spontaneous contractions that take place during exercise.”
“This stimulates a subconscious muscle activation each time the machine moves, meaning your muscles are activating far more than they would on a stable surface,” says Laura Wilson, a personal trainer at Life Time Fishers and director of training and curriculum at Power Plate, a company that produces vibrating exercise machines.
There are several ways to use a vibration plate, the most common being standing on its rectangular platform. However, you can also perform squats or push-ups on it.
Wilson says vibration plates can move in multiple directions: up and down, side to side and front to back. The harmonic vibrations move between 25 to 50 times per second, activating the corresponding muscles.
Are there actual benefits to using vibration plates?
Yes, there are health benefits to using vibration plates. According to Verebes, some of the advantages may include “improved muscle tone and strength, better circulation, higher bone density, improved flexibility and balance, lymphatic drainage and the possibility of weight loss when paired with a healthy diet and regular exercise.”
However, experts agree that vibration plates offer the most benefits when used as part of an overall health and wellness plan. In other words, you shouldn’t expect to lose weight or increase muscle strength just by standing on a vibration plate — even if social media makes it seem so. Instead, experts suggest supplementing vibration exercise with other healthy habits, including a balanced diet and aerobic and strength training.
“Vibration plates are not a magic bullet or a replacement for traditional exercise,” warns Michael Betts, a personal trainer and director at TRAINFITNESS. “The benefits are modest and work best when combined with other forms of training.”
Still, research indicates that using vibration plates can have positive effects on your health. For example, one 2021 study looked at whether whole-body vibration training could improve muscle strength in older adults, concluding that it “may be an alternative exercise method to boost the effect of strengthening exercise.”
Similarly, a 2007 study investigated the effects of whole-body vibration training in men over 60 and found that it has the “potential to prevent or reverse the age-related loss in skeletal muscle mass, referred to as sarcopenia.”
For most, vibration plates are generally safe. However, like any other type of exercise, they come with a few potential risks, including “aggravation of existing conditions, temporary dizziness and joint stress if used incorrectly,” according to Betts.
There are also certain groups of people who should avoid using vibration plates altogether. “Vibration plates shouldn’t be used by anyone with cardiac or circulatory disorders, such as deep vein thrombosis (DVT) or pacemakers; pregnant women; people who have just had surgery; and people who have severe osteoporosis,” Verebes says.
“People with pre-existing disorders, including herniated discs, joint issues or acute inflammation, may experience worsening symptoms when using vibration plates,” she adds. “The vibrations may also be disconcerting to people who have inner ear problems or balance abnormalities.”
Verebes points out that “excessive use or high-intensity vibrations may strain ligaments, muscles or joints.”
Even if you don’t have one of these conditions, it’s still a good idea to talk to your doctor before getting on a vibration plate.
It’s also worth mentioning that a 2015 study discovered a link between regular exposure to whole-body vibration and a higher risk of lower back pain and sciatica. However, the participants in that study were regularly exposed to vibration as part of their jobs, so the results may not apply to vibration plate users.
How long and often should you use a vibration plate?
If you’re new to whole-body vibration training, it’s important to start slowly.
“To allow the body to adapt to vibrations, beginners should start with 5 to 10 minutes at a low intensity,” says Verebes. “Moderation is key, as excessive use may lead to fatigue or injury.”
As a beginner, it’s best to limit yourself to two to three sessions per week, says Betts. Over time, you can work toward longer and more frequent sessions. “As your body adapts, you can increase to 15- to 20-minute sessions up to 3 to 4 times a week,” he says. “Never go over 30 minutes, as this can cause fatigue and joint stress.”
For proper recovery, Betts also recommends leaving at least 24 hours between vibration plate sessions. “Listen to your body and adjust accordingly,” he advises. “Quality of movement matters more than duration.”
LordHenriVoton/Getty Images
Exercises you can do on a vibration plate
To use a vibration plate, you can simply stand in place with slightly bent knees. You can also engage in other exercises — like squats or push-ups — while using the machine.
“Incorporating exercises such as squats, lunges, planks, push-ups and core workouts enhances results by engaging more muscle groups and boosting calorie burn,” says Verebes.
If you’re up to the challenge, here are three vibration plate exercises to try, as recommended by Wilson:
Push-ups
“Push-ups work your chest and shoulders — and doing them on a vibration plate activates many more muscle fibers per second than if you were to do them on the floor,” says Wilson.
To perform a push-up on a vibration plate, follow these steps:
Get into a high plank position by placing your palms flat on the platform and stretching your legs long behind you.
Lower into a push-up position slowly. Your chest should come close to touching the platform.
Perform three sets of 10 reps, taking 30 seconds of rest between each set.
High plank holds
You can also use a vibration plate to perform a high plank hold, which is “great for your core and upper body strength,” says Wilson. Here’s how:
Get into a high plank position by placing your palms flat on the platform and stretching your legs long behind you.
Hold for 30 seconds. Perform three sets, taking 15 seconds of rest between each set.
Tricep dips
“This exercise works the back of the arm as well as the shoulder,” says Wilson. “You’re going to experience much more muscle activation when doing it on a vibration plate machine.” Here’s how:
Sit on the edge of the platform.
Place your palms on the platform (just outside of your hips). Keep your feet flat on the ground with your knees bent at a 90-degree angle.
Scoot forward until you’re hovering in front of the platform, only supported by your arms and legs.
Lower your hips toward the ground by bending at the elbows, stopping when your elbows reach 90 degrees or when you can’t lower your hips further.
Push through your palms and return to the starting position.
Perform three sets of 10 reps, taking 30 seconds of rest between each set.
urbazon/Getty Images
Do vibration plates work if you just stand on them?
You don’t need to perform exercises while using a vibration plate, but experts say moving your body — rather than standing still — will help you get more out of the machine.
“Actively moving while using the plate maximizes its benefits, even though simply standing on it can support circulation and balance,” says Verebes.
Betts agrees, adding: “Standing still on a vibration plate provides some stimulus through the muscle contractions, but adding movement increases the benefits. Static positions can help with circulation and muscle activation, but dynamic exercises will give you strength gains, balance improvements and overall training effects.”
If you’ve never used a vibration plate before, you could begin by standing in place or squatting while you’re on the machine. As you get more comfortable, you can incorporate different exercises and positions. Or you can alternate between standing still and exercising, suggests Betts.
“Combine both approaches — use static holds to build comfort and awareness, then move for optimal results,” he says. “Form and progression are key regardless of whether you’re moving or holding positions.”
The bottom line
Simply scrolling through social media, you might get the idea that vibration plates are an easy, low-commitment way to transform your body. While it’s true that vibration plates offer some compelling benefits, they aren’t a shortcut to fitness.
To get the best results from your vibration plate training, experts also recommend following a healthy diet and participating in other forms of exercise. It’s also a good idea to speak with your doctor before you start using a vibration plate — especially if you’ve had blood clots, joint issues or other health conditions.
A vibration plate can help you lose weight when paired with a balanced diet and regular exercise. However, standing on a vibration plate without exercise will not.
Vibration plates generate quick vibrations that contract and relax your body’s muscles several times per second, resembling at a greater frequency the spontaneous contractions that happen when you exercise normally. They can also move in multiple directions, activating different muscles.
Scientist shares reversal of liver disease in new trial
Arun Sanyal, M.D., director of the VCU Stravitz-Sanyal Institute for Liver Disease and Metabolic Health, discusses the clinical trial involving 800 participants, in which a weekly dose of semaglutide was effective at treating fatty liver disease.
Using semaglutide injections, scientists were able to reverse life-threatening cases of liver disease in a new clinical trial published in The New England Journal of Medicine.
Semaglutide, which is traditionally a treatment for type 2 diabetes, was given to participants who had been diagnosed with a life-threatening form of liver disease called metabolic dysfunction associated steatohepatitis (MASH).
“This is a major step forward in the field,” said Arun Sanyal, M.D., director of the VCU Stravitz-Sanyal Institute for Liver Disease and Metabolic Health, in a video from VCU. “It provides patients with additional choices when we think about treating fatty liver disease.”
JOE ROGAN GAVE UP DRINKING ALCOHOL FOR THIS ONE SIMPLE REASON
MASH is a severe form of metabolic dysfunction-associated steatotic liver disease (MASLD), which was previously known as non-alcoholic fatty liver disease, according to WebMD.
MASH is a severe form of metabolic dysfunction-associated steatotic liver disease (MASLD), which was previously known as non-alcoholic fatty liver disease.(iStock)
Both MASH and MASLD are marked by excessive fat in the liver, which can be dangerous.
“Over time, the buildup of fat in the liver can lead to inflammation, liver fibrosis, cirrhosis and liver cancer,” stated a press release about the study.
FIRST GLP-1 PILL FOR WEIGHT LOSS, DIABETES SHOWS SUCCESS IN LATE-PHASE TRIAL
Researchers chose to investigate semaglutide as a potential treatment because this class of drug has previously been shown to reduce fat and liver scarring for people with MASH.
Between 2021 and 2023, 800 randomly selected participants across 37 countries received once-weekly injections of either semaglutide or a placebo, the press release stated. More than half had type 2 diabetes and around 75% were obese.
Participants treated with semaglutide had improvements in liver enzymes and other blood measures of liver fibrosis, along with 10.5% weight loss. (iStock)
After 72 weeks of treatment, 62.9% of participants had less inflammation and fat accumulation in their livers.
In the placebo group, only 34.3% of participants experienced a decrease in symptoms.
“The liver actually starts looking substantially better under the microscope in these patients,” noted Sanyal.
OZEMPIC, OTHER SEMAGLUTIDES LINKED TO HAIR LOSS: HERE’S WHAT TO KNOW
The researchers also found that 36.8% of the semaglutide group saw improvements in their liver fibrosis, versus 22.4% in the placebo group.
Participants treated with semaglutide also saw improvements in liver enzymes and blood measures of liver fibrosis, as well as 10.5% weight loss.
“I’ve been working with GLP-1 treatments for 16 years and these results are hugely exciting.”
Some adverse experiences were more common in the semaglutide group, including nausea, diarrhea, constipation and vomiting.
“Novo Nordisk continues to explore semaglutide across metabolic and cardiovascular health, including MASH, a condition with limited treatment options for patients and healthcare professionals,” said Anna Windle, PhD, senior vice president of clinical development, medical and regulatory affairs at Novo Nordisk, maker of Ozempic and Wegovy, in a press release provided to Fox News Digital.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“We are encouraged by these published findings in the NEJM and what this could mean for patients. Based on these data, we look forward to working with regulatory authorities to bring this potential new treatment option to patients.”
“While these results must be treated with caution, the analysis shows semaglutide can be an effective tool to treat this advanced liver disease,” said the leader of the trial.(iStock)
“While these results must be treated with caution, the analysis shows semaglutide can be an effective tool to treat this advanced liver disease,” said lead researcher Professor Philip Newsome, director of the Roger Williams Institute of Liver Studies at King’s College London, in the release.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“I’ve been working with GLP-1 treatments for 16 years and these results are hugely exciting,” he added.
Sanyal noted that semaglutide had previously been shown to be beneficial for obesity, diabetes and heart disease.
“Now we can add liver disease to that list.”
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
Looking ahead, the research team plans to gather data from nearly 1,200 participants in 37 countries for up to five years to determine semaglutide’s impact on long-term liver complications.
Khloe Quill is a lifestyle production assistant with Fox News Digital. She and the lifestyle team cover a range of story topics including food and drink, travel, and health.
First, let us take a moment and wish David Beckham a very happy belated birthday. The Manchester United legend turned 50 on May 2. Be it relishing Michelin-starred meals or enjoying home-grown produce, the British legend approaches food with the same dedication that defined his football career. Not to miss, he also offers glimpses of his gastronomical escapades on Instagram. You might already know how much David Beckham loves to cook. And today, we have decided to take a look at his top foodie moments.
Also Read: ‘Just Like His Dad’: David Beckham Is Impressed By His Son’s Cooking. Here’s What He Made
Here Are 6 Top Foodie Moments Featuring David Beckham
1. When David Beckham Posed With Radishes
After retiring from his illustrious career, David Beckham has embraced a quieter life. In his social media entries, the star footballer is often seen basking in the joy of farm life with wife Victoria and children Brooklyn, Romeo, Cruz and Harper. More recently, he shared a picture on his Instagram Stories, holding a bunch of fresh radishes in his lush garden. David’s proud smile said it all.
2. When David Beckham Offered A Peek Into His Farm Life And Organic Produce
On another page, David Beckham walked fans through his home farm and its occupants. In the viral video, the footballer shared glimpses of his chicken coop and different types of vegetables grown in the pasture. David proved his expertise in horticulture by talking about seasonal cycles and the nurturing required by every crop. His garden is filled with spring onions, plums, red cabbage, kale, potatoes and a variety of other veggies.
3. When David Beckham celebrated Pancake Day 2025 With His Daughter Harper
On March 4, David Beckham celebrated Pancake Day with his daughter Harper. In one video, the star was seen trying to execute a pancake-flipping attempt. Quite deftly, he flipped the sweet treat high in the air twice and managed to catch it both times. The second time, however, the pancake was subtly folded but remained intact. When Harper asked, “Did you ruin my pancake?”, a surprised David replied, “Ruin it? It’s perfect” before serving it on a plate. Click here to find out whether Harper was able to flip the pancake.
4. When David Beckham Cooked For His Wife Victoria’s Family
Previously, David Beckham showcased his culinary skills by preparing a scrumptious cottage pie. The occasion? Victoria’s family members were coming over. In the video, David spoke about his epicurean skills, claiming that Victoria’s loved ones were coming only to enjoy his meals. Read all about it here. Also Read: This Is David Beckham And Daughter Harper’s Idea Of ‘Salsa Saturday’
5. When David Beckham Indulged In Traditional Indian Dishes
Did you know David Beckham is a fan of Indian cuisine? On his trip to the country, the English legend set forth on a gastronomical adventure. He savoured a traditional thali featuring palak saag (a spinach dish), a dry aloo (potato) preparation, and what appeared to be paneer makhani, served with two other gravies. The meal was accompanied by tandoori kulcha and makki ki roti served with oodles of desi ghee. Next, David Beckham treated his taste buds to lip-smacking appetisers — chicken malaik tikka and paneer tikka. They were placed alongside a plate of delicious biryani and dal gosht. From the chaat corner, the footballer dug into a dahi delight, garnished with pomegranate seeds, sev and green chutney. For dessert, David Beckham revelled in the joy of Delhi’s winter staple — Daulat Ki Chaat, garnished with almonds. Click here to read the full story.
6. When David Beckham Rang In His Birthday By Cutting Three Cakes
On David Beckham’s 48th birthday, he cut not one but three mouth-watering cakes. The first one was a vanilla wonder loaded with fresh cream. Dessert number two featured a classic New York-style cheesecake served with cherries. The third was another vanilla-flavoured cake topped with rainbow sprinkles and chocolate icing. Read on to know more.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-05-02/Australian-PM-opposition-leader-make-final-pitch-to-voters-1D3esFZkjg4/img/3d460ed155b84b939deac43214d89a0c/3d460ed155b84b939deac43214d89a0c.png' alt='Voters queue to receive their ballots from Australian Electoral Commission volunteers at a pre-polling center inside the Brisbane City Hall in Brisbane, Australia, May 2, 2025. /VCG'
Australia’s prime ministerial candidates have delivered their final pitch to voters on the eve of the country’s general election.
Prior to election day on Saturday, incumbent Prime Minister Anthony Albanese, leader of the governing Labor Party, and opposition Coalition leader Peter Dutton both campaigned across the country on Friday in a bid to secure the support of voters.
Albanese visited the states of Queensland, Victoria and Tasmania as he aims to become the first leader of either major party to win consecutive elections since 2004.
Speaking at a press conference in Brisbane on Friday morning, Albanese said that the Coalition’s campaign has shown that the conservative party is “just not ready” to form government.
“Australia deserves better and I’ll give them better,” he said.
Opinion polls unanimously predict that Labor will win a second term in power, although projections vary on whether the party will win a clear majority of the 150 seats in the lower house of parliament or if it will need to rely on the support of minor parties and independents to form a minority government.
Despite trailing in the polls, Dutton, who on Friday campaigned in South Australia and Western Australia, said he remains confident that he can win the election, invoking the 2019 election when the Coalition defied opinion polls to retain power.
“I think there will be some big surprises on election night,” he told Australian Broadcasting Corporation radio.
In his final pitch to voters, Dutton pledged at a press conference in Western Australia that life would be “cheaper” for Australians under a Coalition government.
If neither Labor nor the Coalition wins a clear majority in the lower house where the government is formed, the left-wing Greens, Australia’s third-largest political party, could hold the balance of power. The Greens enter the election holding four lower house seats.
According to data published by the Australian Electoral Commission on Friday, 5.6 million of Australia’s 18 million registered voters had already cast their ballots at pre-poll locations across the country as of Thursday and an additional 1.5 million had returned postal ballots.
It marks the highest number of early votes cast at pre-poll locations in Australian history, surpassing the previous record set in 2022, with data for Friday, traditionally the biggest day for early voting, still to come.
Data released by the ABC on Friday from its ongoing Vote Compass survey revealed that respondents identified cost of living, the economy, government operations, climate change and housing as the most important election issues.
Over 90 percent of respondents agreed that it is more difficult for current young Australians to buy a home than it was for previous generations, and 49 percent said that Australia should accept many or somewhat fewer migrants, with 16 percent wanting a higher migrant intake.
The same survey in the lead-up to the 2022 election found that 49 percent of Australians said that the country should welcome many or somewhat more immigrants.
Under the present rule, REITs and InvITs are required to get their assets valued regularly and submit these valuation reports to stock exchanges and unitholders
| Photo Credit:
HEMANSHI KAMANI
Markets regulator SEBI on Friday proposed alignment of valuation report timelines with financial results for real estate investment trusts (REITs) and infrastructure investment trusts (InvITs).
These proposals are aimed at promoting ease of doing business, SEBI said in its consultation paper.
Under the present rule, REITs and InvITs are required to get their assets valued regularly and submit these valuation reports to stock exchanges and unitholders.
However, currently, the timelines for conducting valuations, submitting valuation reports, and filing financial results are not aligned, causing inefficiencies.
Accordingly, SEBI has proposed that annual valuation reports should be submitted within 60 days from the financial year-end — matching the timeline for annual financial results.
It suggested that half-yearly or quarterly valuation reports should be submitted within 45 days, aligning with quarterly financial result timelines.
The regulator proposed that quarterly valuations for high-debt InvITs should also follow the 45-day deadline and proposed to remove the 15-day separate submission rule to reduce redundancy.
SEBI has sought feedback on whether the trading lot and minimum investment amount should be aligned for consistency and investor convenience.
With evolving investor protection frameworks like SCORES 2.0 and Online Dispute Resolution (ODR), SEBI proposed to update and standardise investor charters for REITs and InvITs.
The SEBI has sought public comments on the proposals till May 22.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
MNOGI u Lidl ne dolaze samo po namirnice, već i zbog povoljne ponude proizvoda za dom, odjeće i raznih drugih artikala. Zahvaljujući funkcionalnosti, estetici i pristupačnoj cijeni, pojedini proizvodi iz Lidla nerijetko postaju pravi hit na društvenim mrežama. Tako je i jedan komad namještaja iz ponude ovog trgovca nedavno postao viralan na TikToku.
Riječ je o kupaonskom namještaju iz kolekcije Livarno Home koji uključuje zidno ogledalo, ormarić ispod umivaonika i nekoliko dodatnih ormarića. Posebno je pažnju privukao visoki, uski ormarić koji se zbog svojih dimenzija lako uklapa i u manje kupaonice, a istovremeno nudi puno prostora za pohranu.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Praktičan i estetski privlačan uski ormarić za kupaonicu
TikTok korisnica koja stoji iza profila Daily Home Dose nazvala ga je pravim otkrićem po pristupačnoj cijeni. “Život u stanu znači manje prostora za pohranu, ali ovaj pristupačni ormarić iz Lidla pokazao se kao pravo rješenje”, napisala je u opisu videa u kojem prikazuje kako ga je smjestila u svoju kupaonicu i ispunila kozmetikom, sredstvima za čišćenje, ručnicima i drugim potrepštinama.
Cijena: 55 eura
Ako ste i sami u potrazi za uskim ormarićem koji je praktičan i lijepog dizajna, dobra vijest je da se ovaj komad, s ostatkom kupaonskog asortimana Livarno Home, ovoga tjedna pojavio u našim Lidl trgovinama. Visoki ormarić dimenzija je 32 × 180 × 28 cm, a cijena mu je 55 eura. Cijeli asortiman možete pogledati u novom Lidl letku ovdje.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Amazon Prime Day 2025: Amazon has announced the return of its much-awaited Prime Day sale, which is set to take place in July this year. This will mark Amazon India’s ninth Prime Day event, where customers can avail themselves of great deals and discounts on major brands, trending items, Amazon-exclusive products, and more.
“Today, Prime members in India get unlimited free same-day delivery on 10 lakhs+ products, next day delivery on 40 lakhs+ products, and 4-hour delivery on more than 20,000 products. We know members love savings, so we are working hard to offer the best deals from both new & existing brands and sellers,” Amazon said in a press release on Wednesday, April 30.
Prime members to avail exclusive offers
In July, Prime members will be able to access exclusive offers across all categories, including electronics, kitchen, beauty, apparel, and more. However, the e-commerce giant has yet to announce the specific date for Prime Day 2025.
Which countries are participating in Prime Day 2025?
In addition to India, Prime Day 2025 will take place in the following countries: Australia, Austria, Belgium, Brazil, Canada, Egypt, France, Germany, Italy, Japan, Luxembourg, Mexico, the Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Saudi Arabia, Singapore, Spain, Sweden, Turkey, the United Arab Emirates, the United States, and the United Kingdom.
Prime Day 2024 highlights
Last year, Amazon reported delivering more than 410 million items on the same day or the next day during Prime Day 2024.
“Independent SMBs receiving a sale during Prime Day 2024 reached an all-time high across all editions, with over a 30% increase compared to the previous year. SMBs—including women entrepreneurs, weavers, and artisans—sold over 1,600 units per minute,” Amazon added.
Backpacks are a staple luggage essential. From the college going grads to solo-travellers, there is a backpack for everyone. And if you happen to be looking to buy a backpack for your next adventure trip, then Amazon Summer Sale is the perfect time to do so.
Backpacks at up to 60% off on Amazon Sale
During the Amazon Summer Sale, you can get up to 60% off on a wide range of backpacks from brands like Fur Jaden, Safari, American Tourister, Wildcraft, and more. So, bring home a backpack from our 8 comfortable picks.
Take your travel game a notch above with the Samsonite MVS Spinner Backpack, a smart fusion of mobility and functionality. Its unique spinner wheels and ergonomic backpack straps helps it transition between backpack and rolling luggage. Perfect for professionals and travellers alike, it features multiple compartments for laptops, clothes, and other valuables.
Designed for serious photographers, the Vanguard Alta Sky 68 is a robust and fully customizable camera backpack. It provides unmatched gear protection with padded, modular dividers and supports carrying a full professional setup including DSLR bodies, lenses, drones, and even a tripod. Its ergonomic harness, rain cover, and breathable back panel ensure comfort during long shoots.
The SwissGear 5358 redefines tech-savvy travel with its USB-equipped ScanSmart design. TSA-friendly and stylish, this backpack lets you breeze through airport security while keeping your devices charged and protected. The multiple compartments of this backpack offer organized space for laptops, tablets, books, and accessories. Its padded shoulder straps and airflow back panel deliver all-day comfort.
A timeless classic, the JanSport Unisex Navy Backpack combines simplicity with functionality. Loved by students and commuters alike, its iconic design includes one spacious main compartment, a front utility pocket, and padded shoulder straps for comfortable wear. Its durable build makes it a reliable companion for daily use, be it for students, professionals, or hikers.
Turn heads with the quirky, vibrant Teriyaki Backpack. Inspired by street fashion and food culture, this bag is a statement piece that also delivers functionality. Its spacious interior, padded laptop sleeve, and bold graphic design make it perfect for creative spirits who need a daily dose of flair.
Get adventure-ready with the MOKOBARA Campfire Backpack. Its premium water-resistant built, and thoughtful layout make it ideal for day trips, commutes, and quick getaways. Equipped with a cushioned laptop compartment, magnetic flap, and sleek finishes, it’s as stylish as it is functional. Be it hiking or simply a road trip, the Campfire backpack is ready to go where you go.
Meet your ultimate travel partner: the Arctic Hunter Travel Backpack. Engineered for the modern nomad, it features a sleek, water-resistant exterior, USB charging port, anti-theft pockets, and spacious compartments to hold everything from tech gear to travel essentials. With a structured built and cushioned support, it’s ideal for both short commutes and long-haul journeys.
The FUR JADEN Pro Series Smart Tech Backpack is a fortress for your tech essentials. Featuring an anti-theft design, USB charging port, and RFID-blocking pocket, it’s perfect for professionals who prioritize security without sacrificing style. Its sleek silhouette hides a roomy interior that fits laptops, accessories, and more. Ideal for the urban commuter or tech-savvy traveller seeking peace of mind and premium utility.
Similar articles for you:
Beyond basics: Fun and fashionable backpacks for girls; Top 8 picks
Backpacks for men: Top picks where durability meets design
₹2500″>Travel smarter, not harder: Your guide to affordable trolley bags under ₹2500
₹199: Amazon finds you did not know about!”>Bag and backpacks starting at ₹199: Amazon finds you did not know about!
FAQ for backpack on sale
What types of backpacks are included in the Summer Sale?
The sale includes a wide range of backpacks, such as travel backpacks, school backpacks, hiking backpacks, laptop backpacks, and fashion backpacks for men, women, and kids.
How long does the Summer Sale last?
The duration of the Summer Sale varies, but typically runs for a limited time. Check the product page for the sale end date or countdown timer.
How do I choose the right backpack size?
Check the product description for dimensions, capacity (in liters), and intended use. Customer reviews and Q&As can also help guide your choice.
Are backpacks different for students and professionals?
Yes, backpacks are different for students and professionals.
Disclaimer: At Hindustan Times, we help you stay up-to-date with the latest trends and products. Hindustan Times has an affiliate partnership, so we may get a part of the revenue when you make a purchase. We shall not be liable for any claim under applicable laws, including but not limited to the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, with respect to the products. The products listed in this article are in no particular order of priority.
It’s a controversial conversation you’ve likely had more than once – but this time it might not be the order you expect. It’s to once again rank the Harry Potter movies. Whether you are a big lover of the Fantastic Beasts movies, or prefer the earliest films of the series, it’s up for discussion. Each film is quite different from the other but all give you that magical escapism that is needed at times. Especially in the run-up to Christmas.
Here are all of the Harry Potter films as ranked by Parade. And while many Potter fans believe that Prisoner of Azkaban is the best due to its clever transition between the more children friendly vibe of the first two films and the darker world of Lord Voldemort later on, it’s another film that’s come out on top in this ranking – and it completely bucks a trend we’ve seen over the years of latter films in series flopping at the Box Office.
11. Fantastic Beasts: The Secrets of Dumbledore (2022)
The third Fantastic Beasts movie promised a thrilling war in the Wizarding World, but it didn’t deliver. Fantastic Beasts: The Secrets of Dumbledore mostly consists of scenes where characters walk in and out of rooms and explain the plot to each other, it’s uninteresting and dour.
10. Fantastic Beasts and Where to Find Them (2016)
It’s very hard not to get sucked into Rowling’s original Potter series but Fantastic Beasts, despite taking place in the same magical universe, does not have the same charm as the original characters. The film needed deeper material to work with. It is however the only Wizarding World entry so far to win an Academy Award – for veteran designer Colleen Atwood’s beautiful costumes.
9. Fantastic Beasts: The Crimes of Grindelwald (2018)
The follow-up to Fantastic Beasts is arguably a more engaging, largely because there’s less focus on cute critters and more on the witches and wizards mythology we’ve grown so fond of. However, it still fails to take off two movies in. The story is disappointing and none of the subplots leave a lasting impression. A common theme with the Fantastic Beasts series is that the plot is often overexplained.
8. Harry Potter and the Order of the Phoenix (2007)
If this is the peak of the Harry Potter series, it speaks volumes about the high standard of the entirity of it. Interestingly, Order of the Phoenix is the longest of all the books, yet the shortest film, leaving quite some room for disparity. It can feel rushed and the pacing is also off. The movie is still very fun and entertaining but could have been even better.
7. Harry Potter and the Goblet of Fire (2005)
I bet most people would place this one further up. However, falling right in the middle of the dense saga Goblet doesn’t stand as well on its own. Mostly however, it is just a great movie, following the Triwizard Tournament – and also does well to navigate teenage hormones as the iconic trio begin to show signs of growing up. It was the first Potter film to carry a PG-13 rating, due to a blood-soaked finale and the shocking murder of a student.
6. Harry Potter and the Chamber of Secrets (2002)
A lot of people do consider the first two Potter films to be the weakest for being slavishly faithful to the books and too kid-friendly, but others enjoy their sentimentality. Director Chris Columbus’ inaugural pair did what they needed to: pleased the broadest possible audience while laying the groundwork for a series that would become increasingly dark, frightening and complex.
5. Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone (a.k.a. Harry Potter and the Philosopher’s Stone, 2001)
Our introduction to Harry (Daniel Radcliff), Ron (Rupert Grint) and Hermione (Emma Watson) still casts a spell of classically influenced, movie enchantment more than two decades later. Some of the CGI effects looked fairly question even in 2001 and many of them have not held up. However, the Quidditch match is still a marvel to behold.
4. Harry Potter and the Deathly Hallows – Part 1 (2010)
Rowling’s final novel was split into two halves on the big screen. Like its immediate predecessor The Half-Blood Prince, Deathly Hallows Part 1 has much of the DNA of classic horror; it’s filled with atmosphere, shadows and death. Once we get into the business of the Horcruxes, the themes Rowling explores here are disturbing by any metric, but ultimately gripping.
3. Harry Potter and the Half-Blood Prince (2009)
The most purely haunting of the Potter films, Half-Blood Prince juggles light and dark with remarkable grace. This is probably the funniest film of the bunch. It feels like the calm before the storm and is largely centred around teenage love and coming of age, similar to Goblet of Fire. It is often somber and intense, too though and carries a PG rating. This is the probably the most underrated of the Potter series.
2. Harry Potter and the Prisoner of Azkaban (2004)
Alfonso Cuarón’s addition is the most stylish of the series. Azkaban is a turning point; the previous two worked well as self-contained adventures, and this is when Harry steps into a larger, morally murky world. The picture cuts out much of the book. The director’s camera is almost constantly moving, which creates a a sense of moving forward and risk. It’s almost like an out-of-body experience. Cuarón’s vision of Rowling’s fantastical world is the most visually ingenious and the most dynamic.
1. Harry Potter and the Deathly Hallows – Part 2 (2011)
As for the top two Potter films, while Azkaban is the most inventive and artistically ambitious of the series, Deathly Hallows 2 is the mightiest. So many film series and trilogies have, to varying degrees, stumbled in the final outing, but the Harry Potter series ended with a streamlined crash of thunder. The filmmakers saw the potential here and made the right decisions across the board to realize it; it’s hard to imagine this turning out any better than it did.
Cadillac will soon reveal the Optiq-V, which will be only the third SUV and the second electric vehicle to wear its vaunted V-Series performance nameplate.
And it won’t be coming here.
“No, [Optiq-V isn’t] coming here. We’ll have a Lyriq-V,” GM Australia and New Zealand managing director Jess Bala told CarExpert.
“We haven’t done a V-Series here before, so we want to assess that one first and then we have to look at different regulations within battery architectures and things like that.
“So we’ll start with Lyriq-V, and we’ll continue to assess if there are opportunities that arise.”
Hundreds of new car deals are available through CarExpert right now. Get the experts on your side and score a great deal. Browse now.
Optiq-V
As both an electric SUV and a member of the V-Series line, the Optiq-V is expected to get a more powerful dual-motor all-wheel drive electric powertrain than the regular Optiq, which is due on sale here in 2026.
The larger Lyriq-V is also due here in 2026.
General Motors’ luxury brand has yet to confirm powertrain details for the Optiq-V, recently releasing only a pair of teaser images, but it says its engineers have “delivered a unique package prioritising precision, dynamic suspension and tight steering for an exhilarating driving experience”.
The regular dual-motor all-wheel drive Optiq produces 224kW of power and 480Nm of torque, with power supplied by an 85kWh nickel manganese cobalt (NCM) lithium-ion battery.
It features strut front suspension, and as with the larger Lyriq there’s a five-link rear suspension system and Passive Plus Dampers all round.
Lyriq-V
Visible changes evident from Cadillac’s two teaser images include V-Series badging and a rear spoiler, though we’d also expect other aesthetic upgrades to include more aggressive rocker panels and unique wheels.
The Optiq-V will slot in under the Lyriq-V – at least in the US market – with the larger SUV featuring a dual-motor electric powertrain producing 459kW and 880Nm.
Cadillac claims a 0-60mph (0-96km/h) time of just 3.3 seconds in V-Mode or Velocity Max mode.
That just shades the 3.4-second sprint time of the supercharged V8-powered CT5-V Blackwing sedan when equipped with an automatic transmission, despite being down 40kW and 13Nm and weighing more.
The Lyriq-V pumps out an extra 71kW and 270Nm over the regular dual-motor Lyriq, though it doesn’t gain Magnetic Ride Control like other V-badged models within Cadillac’s lineup. Instead, it features standard Continuous Damping Control.
Changes over the regular Lyriq include a quicker steering ratio, Brembo front brakes, a new artificial propulsion sound, and new Competitive and customisable V-Mode drive modes.
While it’s quick, it’s quite different from the traditionally V8-powered models that have worn the V-Series nameplate over the years.
Cadillac’s first V-Series model was the 2004 CTS-V sedan, which featured an overhead-valve 5.7-litre V8 (later a 6.0-litre) shared with the Chevrolet Corvette, mated with a six-speed manual transmission.
(front to back) Cadillac XLR-V, STS-V and CTS-V
It was soon joined by the STS-V sedan and XLR-V convertible, which used a supercharged version of Cadillac’s Northstar overhead-cam V8, mated with a six-speed automatic.
These lasted a single generation, but the CTS-V went for two more generations, both with supercharged V8 power.
V-Series models were later joined by tamer VSport models, which swapped V8 power for twin-turbocharged V6 engines. That said, not every hardcore V-Series model has packed a bent eight, with the BMW M3-rivalling ATS-V for example being the first V with a twin-turbo V6.
In recent years, Cadillac revised its V-Series strategy, rolling out models like the CT4-V and CT5-V that are less powerful than previous Vs – the CT4-V even features a four-cylinder engine, a first for a V-Series – but replacing the full-fat ATS-V and CTS-V models with new CT4-V Blackwing and CT5-V Blackwing models.
It also introduced the first ever Escalade-V, the first time the V-Series name has been used on an SUV.
Thus far, the more hardcore Blackwing nameplate hasn’t graced an electric vehicle.
Ripple’s Chief Legal Officer, Stuart Alderoty, recently spoke out about the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission’s (SEC) handling of cryptocurrency cases. Commenting on the agency’s decision to drop its appeal against Ripple, Alderoty questioned why the SEC even pursued such cases in the first place.
He pointed out that the SEC hasn’t just withdrawn its case against Ripple, but has started backing down from actions against other crypto companies as well. According to Alderoty, this is because the SEC has been enforcing rules without clearly explaining what those rules are.
“We never had proper guidelines and regulations for crypto in this country,” Alderoty said. “Now, it’s time to clean up the mess, focus on running our businesses, and work alongside Congress to create smart, clear crypto regulations.”
He said that these new regulations should protect consumers, ensure market integrity, keep bad actors out, and most importantly — allow innovation in the crypto space to grow.
President Donald Trump announced plans Friday to revoke Harvard University’s tax-exempt status, intensifying his administration’s ongoing campaign against elite U.S. universities.
| Photo Credit:
REUTERS/Faith Ninivaggi
U.S. President Donald Trump on Friday said he planned to strip Harvard University of its tax-exempt status, the latest salvo against the Ivy League school amid a larger crackdown on elite U.S. universities.
“We are going to be taking away Harvard’s Tax Exempt Status. It’s what they deserve!” Trump said in a post on his social media platform, without specifying when he might take action.
Representatives for Harvard could not be immediately reached for comment on the president’s post.
Since taking office in January, Trump has targeted major U.S. universities by freezing federal funding, launching investigations, revoking student visas and making other demands, saying higher education has been gripped by antisemitic, anti-American, Marxist and “radical left” ideologies.
Harvard has pushed back, suing the administration over the halted U.S. research funding and other demands, and joining more than 200 university and college presidents in protesting Trump’s higher education policies.
Recent updates to ChatGPT made the chatbot far too agreeable and OpenAI said Friday it’s taking steps to prevent the issue from happening again.
In a blog post, the company detailed its testing and evaluation process for new models and outlined how the problem with the April 25 update to its GPT-4o model came to be. Essentially, a bunch of changes that individually seemed helpful combined to create a tool that was far too sycophantic and potentially harmful.
How much of a suck-up was it? In some testing earlier this week, we asked about a tendency to be overly sentimental, and ChatGPT laid on the flattery: “Hey, listen up — being sentimental isn’t a weakness; it’s one of your superpowers.” And it was just getting started being fulsome.
“This launch taught us a number of lessons. Even with what we thought were all the right ingredients in place (A/B tests, offline evals, expert reviews), we still missed this important issue,” the company said.
OpenAI rolled back the update this week. To avoid causing new issues, it took about 24 hours to revert the model for everybody.
The concern around sycophancy isn’t just about the enjoyment level of the user experience. It posed a health and safety threat to users that OpenAI’s existing safety checks missed. Any AI model can give questionable advice about topics like mental health but one that is overly flattering can be dangerously deferential or convincing — like whether that investment is a sure thing or how thin you should seek to be.
“One of the biggest lessons is fully recognizing how people have started to use ChatGPT for deeply personal advice — something we didn’t see as much even a year ago,” OpenAI said. “At the time, this wasn’t a primary focus but as AI and society have co-evolved, it’s become clear that we need to treat this use case with great care.”
Sycophantic large language models can reinforce biases and harden beliefs, whether they’re about yourself or others, said Maarten Sap, assistant professor of computer science at Carnegie Mellon University. “[The LLM] can end up emboldening their opinions if these opinions are harmful or if they want to take actions that are harmful to themselves or others.”
(Disclosure: Ziff Davis, CNET’s parent company, in April filed a lawsuit against OpenAI, alleging it infringed on Ziff Davis copyrights in training and operating its AI systems.)
How OpenAI tests models and what’s changing
The company offered some insight into how it tests its models and updates. This was the fifth major update to GPT-4o focused on personality and helpfulness. The changes involved new post-training work or fine-tuning on the existing models, including the rating and evaluation of various responses to prompts to make it more likely to produce those responses that rated more highly.
Prospective model updates are evaluated on their usefulness across a variety of situations, like coding and math, along with specific tests by experts to experience how it behaves in practice. The company also runs safety evaluations to see how it responds to safety, health and other potentially dangerous queries. Finally, OpenAI runs A/B tests with a small number of users to see how it performs in the real world.
Is ChatGPT too sycophantic? You decide. (To be fair, we did ask for a pep talk about our tendency to be overly sentimental.)
Katie Collins/CNET
The April 25 update performed well in these tests, but some expert testers indicated the personality seemed a bit off. The tests didn’t specifically look at sycophancy, and OpenAI decided to move forward despite the issues raised by testers. Take note, readers: AI companies are in a tail-on-fire hurry, which doesn’t always square well with well thought-out product development.
“Looking back, the qualitative assessments were hinting at something important and we should’ve paid closer attention,” the company said.
Among its takeaways, OpenAI said it needs to treat model behavior issues the same as it would other safety issues — and halt a launch if there are concerns. For some model releases, the company said it would have an opt-in “alpha” phase to get more feedback from users before a broader launch.
Sap said evaluating an LLM based on whether a user likes the response isn’t necessarily going to get you the most honest chatbot. In a recent study, Sap and others found a conflict between the usefulness and truthfulness of a chatbot. He compared it to situations where the truth is not necessarily what people want — think about a car salesperson trying to sell a vehicle.
“The issue here is that they were trusting the users’ thumbs-up/thumbs-down response to the model’s outputs and that has some limitations because people are likely to upvote something that is more sycophantic than others,” he said.
Sap said OpenAI is right to be more critical of quantitative feedback, such as user up/down responses, as they can reinforce biases.
The issue also highlighted the speed at which companies push updates and changes out to existing users, Sap said — an issue that’s not limited to one tech company. “The tech industry has really taken a ‘release it and every user is a beta tester’ approach to things,” he said. Having a process with more testing before updates are pushed to every user can bring these issues to light before they become widespread.
The Illinois Department of Public Health (IDPH) is sounding the alarm on a potential measles exposure at Chicago O’Hare International Airport.
In a news release on April 30, the department identified two confirmed measles cases in Cook County.
These are the first two cases in the county, following the state’s first confirmed case in a southern Illinois adult on April 23.
MEASLES OUTBREAKS EMERGE ACROSS US: SEE WHICH STATES HAVE REPORTED CASES
One case was identified as a suburban Cook County adult with an unknown vaccination status who sought medical care at a local hospital on April 28.
Travelers at O’Hare International Airport in Chicago, Illinois, on Aug. 13, 2024. The Illinois Department of Public Health alerted about a potential measles exposure at O’Hare this week.(Al Drago/Bloomberg via Getty Images)
The second case was identified in a Chicago adult who traveled internationally through O’Hare Airport in April.
MEASLES OUTBREAKS NOW DECLARED IN 8 STATES, INCLUDING MICHIGAN’S FIRST IN 5 YEARS
The patient, who had one prior dose of the MMR (measles-mumps-rubella) vaccine, reported a rash onset on April 25.
Both individuals have been isolated at home since being diagnosed.
As of May 1, there have been 935 total cases of measles confirmed across the U.S.
The state health department listed the following locations where there was potential for public exposure:
Monday, April 21, 2025: Fittingly Delicious, 3939 W. Irving Park Rd.
Tuesday, April 22, 2025: O’Hare Airport, 10 a.m. to 8 p.m., especially Terminal 1
Wednesday, April 23, 2025: O’Hare Airport, 10 a.m. to 8 p.m., especially Terminal 1
Friday, April 25, 2025: Aldi: 7235 39th St, Lyons, IL 6053, 10 a.m. to 12:30 p.m.
Sunday, April 27, 2025: Shell: 3901 S. Harlem Ave., Stickney, IL 60402, 10 a.m. to 12:30 p.m.
Monday, April 28, 2025: Mobil: 2945 S. Harlem Ave, Berwyn, IL 60402, 10:20 a.m. to 1 p.m.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
IDPH urges all people over the age of 12 months to receive two doses of the MMR vaccine prior to traveling internationally.
The state health department listed O’Hare Airport as a location of possible measles exposure on April 22 and April 23.(Vincent Alban/Bloomberg via Getty Images)
Individuals who may have been exposed should monitor for symptoms and notify their healthcare provider if they are unsure of prior vaccinations.
If symptoms arise, they should notify the healthcare provider before arriving at a facility to ensure “special arrangements” that will prevent others from infection, according to health officials.
IS MMR VACCINE SAFE FOR KIDS? DR. NICOLE SAPHIER ADDRESSES CONCERNS AS MEASLES CASES RISE
Measles is highly contagious and spreads easily through the air, IDPH noted, adding that 90% of people close to an infected person will also become infected if not immunized against it.
As of May 1, there have been 935 total cases of measles confirmed across the U.S., according to CDC data.
“We encourage anyone who is unvaccinated, or under-vaccinated, to speak with their medical provider and take appropriate steps to get up to date on the recommended shots,” said the IDPH director.(iStock)
IDPH Director Dr. Sameer Vohra wrote in a press release statement that while Illinois public health officials are working to prevent further spread, being fully immunized “remains the best and most effective way for everyone to protect themselves and those they love.”
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
“The MMR vaccine is safe and effective,” he said. “We encourage anyone who is unvaccinated, or under-vaccinated, to speak with their medical provider and take appropriate steps to get up to date on the recommended shots.”
Interim Cook County Department of Public Health COO Dr. Kiran Joshi added that there is a resurgence of measles in the U.S., despite the effectivenes of the MMR vaccine.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“Misinformation has contributed to declining vaccination rates and fueled recent outbreaks,” he said.
“The MMR vaccine has been in use for over 50 years, is highly effective, and has protected millions of lives.”
Angelica Stabile is a lifestyle reporter for Fox News Digital.
Hair fall is something most of us go through at some point. It might be the changing weather, stress, or just plain bad luck with genes. For many, it is not just a passing phase—it sticks around. While shampoos and fancy treatments are what we turn to first, what you eat makes a much bigger difference than you think. That is right. Healthy hair starts with your plate. What you eat shows up in your strands. Iron and folic acid deficiency are often to blame for weak, thinning hair. But here is the fun part—there is a super simple salad that might actually help. A nutritionist has shared a quick Whole Masoor Dal Salad Bowl recipe that is packed with everything your hair has been asking for. But before we get to the recipe, let us break down what whole masoor dal really does for your body.
Also Read: 12 Benefits Of Amla (Indian Gooseberry) For The Hair
Here Are 5 Health Benefits Of Whole Masoor Dal:
The hero of this salad, whole masoor dal, is loaded with nutrients that your body—and hair—love. Check this out:
1. Packed With Protein
Whole masoor dal is a top source of plant-based protein. It helps rebuild and repair tissue, which is exactly what your hair and skin need to stay strong and healthy.
2. High In Fibre
This dal is rich in fibre, which supports better digestion and gut health. When your gut is happy, your body absorbs nutrients better, especially the ones that help your hair grow.
3. Loaded With Antioxidants
Masoor dal has polyphenols and antioxidants that help your body fight off free radicals. Less stress in the body equals happier, healthier hair and skin.
4. Supports Blood Sugar
Nutritionist Rupali Datta says masoor dal has a low glycaemic index, making it great for people with diabetes. She recommends eating whole dals every day to help manage sugar levels.
5. Rich In Essential Minerals
Whole masoor dal is not just about iron—it also has potassium, magnesium, and zinc. These minerals are key for everything from stronger hair to better heart health.
Why This Whole Masoor Dal Salad Bowl Works For Hair Fall
This salad is not just tasty; it is a proper hair health booster. Nutritionist Leema Mahajan says that every 100 g of whole masoor dal gives 7.5 g of iron. Iron improves the oxygen flow to your scalp, which is crucial for healthy hair growth. That is not all. Lemon juice, bell peppers, and raw vegetables bring in vitamin C, which helps your body absorb iron better. Beetroot and masoor dal also contain folic acid, which helps raise your haemoglobin levels and prevent hair thinning. So, yes, this easy salad could be your go-to fix for hair fall—and it will leave your hair naturally shiny and strong.
How To Make Whole Masoor Dal Salad Bowl | Iron-Rich Salad Recipe
This salad recipe is super easy to put together. Nutritionist Leema Mahajan posted it on Instagram, and it is ideal if you want to include more iron-rich food in your diet. Here is how you do it:
1. Prepare Lentils And Veggies
Start by chopping up vegetables like carrots, sweet corn, and beetroot. Soak the masoor dal, then steam it along with the veggies for about 5–8 minutes until everything is soft.
2. Make The Salad Dressing
In a bowl, mix lemon juice, apple cider vinegar, honey, cumin powder, carom seeds, pink salt, and black salt. This dressing ties all the flavours together.
3. Put It All Together
Add chopped onions, cucumbers, bell peppers, and coriander leaves to a big bowl. Add the steamed lentils and veggies. Throw in some roasted peanuts and pour the dressing on top. Mix everything well and enjoy!
Watch the full video below:
Also Read:Yoga for Hair Growth: 6 Effective Poses for Healthy and Strong Hair
Now that you know how to tackle hair fall with something this simple, it might be time to ditch the pills and try this salad instead. Your scalp will thank you.
Editor’s note: Chinese President Xi Jinping urged young people to take the lead in key areas including scientific and technological innovation, rural revitalization, green development and social services in a recent article published in Qiushi Journal. As China celebrates Youth Day on May 4, CGTN presents a three-part series recounting the stories of young individuals contributing to the country’s modernization across various sectors.
While most graduates flock to cities chasing dreams, Wang Lingli, a 1990s-born college graduate, defied expectations. In 2015, she turned her back on urban opportunities and returned to her rural hometown in southwest China – not as a visitor, but as a determined farm manager.
Her journey began with a daunting challenge: managing a 3,000-mu (200-hectare) cooperative in Chongzhou City, Sichuan Province, while facing skepticism from locals. “You went to university just to come back and farm?” villagers questioned. Others dismissed her: “This city-educated girl won’t last a season.”
But Wang didn’t just persevere – she revolutionized. Introducing advanced machinery and smart farming techniques, she transformed productivity: yields surged, farmers’ incomes jumped, and soon, she was overseeing multiple cooperatives.
In 2023, her operations spanned 7,000 mu (467 hectares), producing over 6,000 tonnes of wheat and rice, benefiting over 2,000 households. During peak farming periods, average yields per mu rose by 25 kilograms, farmers earned more than 5,000 yuan (around $688) per month, and machinery operators could make 300 to 400 yuan a day.
In recognition of Wang’s contributions to local rural revitalization, she was honored as a national role model worker in Beijing on Monday, ahead of International Labor Day. It’s the first time someone from her hometown has received this distinction.
Wang is part of a new generation of “farm managers,” often called “new farmers.” These well-educated young people bring fresh ideas and skills to rural communities, choosing to pursue opportunities in the countryside instead of urban careers.
These “new farmers” are becoming a key driving force in China’s rural revitalization, using innovative solutions to tackle longstanding challenges. According to Han Wenxiu, executive deputy director of the Office of the Central Committee for Financial and Economic Affairs, more than 12 million people have relocated to rural areas to start businesses – marking a major trend in rural development.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-05-02/Youth-power-drives-China-s-rural-revitalization-push-1D2Tv923LXi/img/6f1b49d7b63c46f0b1a46776cfdcc1b0/6f1b49d7b63c46f0b1a46776cfdcc1b0.png' alt='Young farmers operate a drone on farmland in Yichang City, central China's Hubei Province, April 16, 2025. /VCG'
Chinese President Xi Jinping has long emphasized the vital role of youth in China’s modernization efforts.
“A nation will prosper only when its young people thrive. For China to develop further, our young people must step forward and take on their responsibilities,” President Xi said in his 2023 New Year Address.
In a 2023 letter to students from China Agricultural University participating in a rural work-study program, Xi encouraged them to integrate textbook knowledge with hands-on practice in the countryside and dedicate their youth and energy to accelerating rural and agricultural modernization.
The government has introduced a range of policies to support young people eager to contribute as China’s rural development strategy enters a new phase of comprehensive revitalization.
In 2017, China released the Youth Development Plan for 2016–2025, its first state-level initiative focused specifically on youth. The plan aims to narrow educational disparities and increase investment in less-developed western regions. By 2023, China’s gross enrollment ratio for higher education had reached 60.2 percent, according to the Ministry of Education.
The government has also rolled out initiatives to support young people and other groups, such as migrant workers, in returning to their hometowns to start businesses. These measures include guaranteed loans, financial subsidies and professional training programs.
In 2022, 1.95 million young people received government-subsidized entrepreneurship training, helping them start businesses in their local communities.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
NEW Balance nastavlja širiti granice sportskog i lifestyle dizajna svojim najnovijim modelom 1906L Loafer Grey Days koji predstavlja hibrid tenisice i mokasinke. Ovaj model dio je ekskluzivne kolekcije Grey Days, a prvi je put prikazan na Pariškom tjednu mode tijekom modne revije Junya Watanabe MAN FW24.
Glavna značajka ovog modela je njegova svestranost, jer se bez napora uklapa u ležerne dnevne kombinacije i u elegantnije outfite.
Poseban je naglasak stavljen na udobnost
Gornjište je izrađeno od kombinacije kvalitetne kože i prozračne mrežaste tkanine, a kombinira sivu i bijelu boju što dodatno naglašava minimalistički, ali luksuzni karakter obuće.
Potplat uključuje naprednu tehnologiju apsorpcije udaraca, koja pruža vrhunsku potporu pri svakom koraku, dok lagana konstrukcija omogućava nošenje tijekom cijelog dana bez osjećaja umora.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Prepoznatljivi logo brenda decentno je postavljen sa strane, dok se suptilni detalji brendiranja nalaze i na peti.
Što se tiče dostupnosti, model će biti moguće kupiti isključivo putem službene New Balance trgovine i odabranih distributera od 14. svibnja. Preporučena maloprodajna cijena iznosi 160 američkih dolara, što je otprilike 150 eura.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
LOUISVILLE, Ky. — The Kentucky Derby dropped to 19 horses on Friday when Grande was scratched from the race with a foot bruise. Grande is trained by Todd Pletcher and was to be ridden by John Velazquez. The owner is Mike Repole.
Grande joins Rodriguez, trained by Bob Baffert, as scratches since the race was drawn last Saturday. Both are coming out of the Wood Memorial at Aqueduct. Rodriguez won the race and Grande was second.
Two years ago, Forte, also trained by Pletcher and owned by Repole, was scratched as the morning-line favorite. This is the first time in 21 years that Pletcher has not had a Derby starter. Pletcher has won the Derby twice with Super Saver in 2010 and Always Dreaming in 2017.
Grande did not race as a 2-year-old and had run only three times. He won his maiden and then an allowance before finishing second in the Wood. A son of Curlin, he was purchased for $300,000.
He was scheduled to break from nine, wearing the saddlecloth of 10. All horses on the outside of him will move in one gate.
Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra Discount Offer: Samsung on Thursday, May 1, announced a limited-period offer on its Galaxy S24 series. Starting today, customers can avail of exciting deals on the Galaxy S24, S24 Ultra, and S24FE. Here’s what you need to know about the offer –
Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra Limited Period Offer: Price drop by Rs 65,000
Starting today, Galaxy S24 Ultra, originally priced from Rs 1,29,999, will now be available at a never-seen-before price of Rs 84,999, as per the official release.
Samsung Galaxy S24, Galaxy S24 FE Limited Period Offer
The Galaxy S24 will be available at Rs 44,999, and the Galaxy S24 FE will be available starting at Rs 34,999. The original price of S24 is Rs 74,999.
Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra: Key features
The Samsung Galaxy S24 Ultra is the first-ever Galaxy phone to feature a titanium frame. The device is equipped with the Snapdragon 8 Gen 3 Mobile Platform and boasts a 200MP wide-resolution camera, 12MP ultra-wide, 10MP 3x optical zoom, and a new 50MP telephoto lens with 5x optical zoom.
Its 200MP camera is powered by the ProVisual Engine — a comprehensive suite of AI-powered tools that transform image-capturing abilities and maximize creative freedom. Additionally, the smartphone includes a 1.4 μm pixel size for enhanced Nightography capabilities.
Samsung Galaxy S24: Key features
It has a streamlined one-mass design and comes with a 50MP triple camera setup. Equipped with a 6.2” display, the Galaxy S24 can reach up to 2600 nits of peak brightness. The device also features a 1–120 Hz adaptive refresh rate. The Smartphone also comes with Call Assist, offering real-time translations during phone calls and can also provide text-based assistance for calls.
Samsung Galaxy S24 FE: Key features
Galaxy S24 FE offers a 6.7-inch Dynamic AMOLED 2X display, a long-lasting 4700mAh battery, and a powerful Exynos 2400 series chipset. The camera setup features a 50MP wide lens and 8MP telephoto lens with 3x optical zoom — both supported by optical image stabilisation (OIS) — plus a 12MP ultra-wide lens and a 10MP selfie camera.
Looking for something a little different for your next trip? Want to go beyond the usual hotspots? In an interview with HT Lifestyle, Karan Agarwal, director of Cox and Kings, shared a list of places in Europe that deliver a decent dose of culture but also have the requisite food, fun, and photo opportunities. Also read | Europe and its rich cultural heritage: A travel guide for tourists
You could visit Iceland, renowned for its breathtaking Northern Lights displays, also known as the Aurora Borealis. (Freepik)
Some travellers map every step. Others prefer to follow instinct. According to Karan, Europe allows for both. He says, “Its landscapes change as easily as moods: gothic towers in Prague, whitewashed villages in Portugal, the quiet hush of an Icelandic fjord. And no matter who you are or what your pace is, the continent never asks you to change — it simply meets you where you are.”
Here are the cities and experiences to add to your bucket list:
Did you know the Hungarian Parliament Building in Budapest, Hungary, was designed by the architect Imre Steindl in neo-Gothic style and opened in 1902? (Freepik)
1. If you’re travelling light — on luggage and budget
Karan suggests: “Eastern Europe is quietly spectacular. Cities like Budapest and Prague offer postcard views, deep history, and warm plates of goulash — all without needing to count every euro.”
● Group journeys across Prague, Vienna, and Budapest start around ₹1.25 lakh per person for 7 nights, he says.
2. If your family needs a pause — and a storybook setting
He adds, “Switzerland and Austria are almost too cinematic to be real. Glacier trains, mountaintop castles, chocolate-making workshops — the kind of trip that turns into dinner-table stories for years.”
● Seven-night family journeys start from ₹2.5 lakh per person, designed for multi-generational ease, Karan says.
3. If it’s a love story — new, old, or somewhere in-between
He says, “In Italy, romance isn’t orchestrated. It happens over a glass of wine in a quiet piazza, in the stolen silence between ruins and rooftops, in a place that feels both ancient and entirely your own.”
● Private 6-night escapes through Venice, Florence, and Rome begin at ₹1.8 lakh per person, Karan adds.
Visiting the Eiffel Tower in Paris is a must-do experience for many travellers. (Freepik)
4. If you believe indulgence should be effortless
Karan says, “France and Monaco are all about elegant restraint — a river cruise instead of a cab ride, a private art tour that ends with champagne. It’s not about more. It’s about better.”
● Luxury journeys begin at ₹4.5 lakh per person, built around time, taste, and space, he says.
5. If you travel to feel small in the best way
Karan adds, “In Iceland and Norway, the scale of nature rearranges your sense of time. You don’t just visit a glacier — you remember how long it’s been there. You don’t chase the Northern Lights — they reveal themselves, if they want to.”
● Adventures from ₹3 lakh per person, led by local guides and calibrated for curiosity, he says.
6. If you seek rhythm, soul, and something slow-burning
He adds, “Spain and Portugal are not loud. They’re rich. In a quiet fado performance, you feel them in the clink of cutlery during tapas in the gold light that hits a tiled alley just so.”
● 7-night cultural journeys begin at ₹1.7 lakh per person, with local-led experiences stitched in, Karan concludes.
At almost 83, Harrison Ford continues to be a Hollywood titan and among the highest-grossing actors of all time.
The Oscar-nominee, who started out as a professional carpenter, is not only Han Solo and Indiana Jones, but also Rick Deckard and Jack Ryan.
After starring in many major films over the last seven decades, including some of the greatest ever made, which of his are the very best?
According to film fans on IMDb, the following is Ford’s Top 10 of all time, and incredibly, Indiana Jones and the original Star Wars missed out on No 1.
The Polestar 2 is a niche player in a fairly niche segment of the Australian auto market.
The mid-size battery-electric liftback first launched here in 2021, received slight cosmetic tweaks in 2022, and was given a more significant overhaul under the skin in 2023 that, most notably, switched it from front- to rear-wheel drive.
Those were all important – if not borderline mandatory – improvements for a model that came with much promise from an electric vehicle (EV) brand whose Australian launch coincided with this very car’s.
Polestar now has three models on sale here, and the Polestar 2 is both the cheapest and the oldest. That means the Chinese-owned Swedish auto brand has had plenty of time to get a foothold in the market with this car, and to establish it as the volume-seller of its range.
But its biggest hurdles are twofold. It still costs a pretty penny even at the bottom of the range, and Polestar is nowhere near established enough in Australia to build the trust and brand loyalty necessary to justify those prices, let alone convince people to pay them.
The Polestar 2 came into 2025 with price tag that were at least $5000 lower across the board than a year ago, which should have made it a more compelling prospect for those in the market for a medium electric sedan, and which had been expected to boost sales.
WATCH: Paul’s video review of the 2023 Polestar 2 Long range Single motor
But that hasn’t happened. And before you consider its rivals, the Polestar 2 isn’t even Polestar’s best-selling vehicle in Australia these days.
That distinction goes to the Polestar 4, a more radical, rear window-less, mid-size SUV that costs nearly $20,000 more than the Polestar 2. The 4 has so far managed 245 sales in 2025, while the 2 has recorded just 123 – which is at least more than the eye-wateringly expensive Polestar 3 large electric SUV, which has found 21 new homes this year.
In contrast, the Polestar 2’s most direct rival, the Tesla Model 3, has attracted 2046 buyers to the end of March 2025, while even the pricier BMW i4 notched up 309 sales and the cheaper BYD Seal managed 302. For some geographical context, the Model 3 and Seal are also built in China, but Tesla and BYD are more established in Australia.
On test here is the Polestar 2 Long Range Single Motor, which sits one rung from the bottom of a model range that offers distinctive Scandinavian design and tech, at a price. Is it worth paying extra for a relatively unknown EV?
How does the Polestar 2 compare?
View a detailed breakdown of the Polestar 2 against similarly sized vehicles.
Polestar
Polestar 2
How much does the Polestar 2 cost?
The Long Range Single Motor is the second-cheapest Polestar 2 variant on sale in Australia, priced at $66,400 before on-roads.
Model
Price before on-road costs
2025 Polestar 2 Standard Range Single Motor
$62,400
2025 Polestar 2 Long Range Single Motor
$66,400
2025 Polestar 2 Long Range Dual Motor
$71,400
2025 Polestar 2 Long Range Dual Motor with Performance Pack
$80,380
Across the board, it’s roughly $5000 cheaper now than it was as recently as 2024. That means it’s now closer to the Model 3 in particular, and therefore a much more realistic proposition for more Australian EV buyers.
That doesn’t mean it’s cheap though. The most comparable Model 3 is the base RWD, which costs $54,900 before on-roads. Stepping up to the Model 3 Long Range brings the price to within $1500 of the Polestar tested here, but that model has the advantage of all-wheel drive.
Meanwhile, the entire Seal range is considerably cheaper. The Dynamic and Premium are both rear-wheel drive and cost $46,990 and $52,990 before on-roads respectively, while the range tops out at $61,990 before on-roads for the all-wheel drive Performance.
There’s also the lower-volume Hyundai Ioniq 6, which starts at $67,300 before on-roads.
To see how the Polestar 2 stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
What is the Polestar 2 like on the inside?
Overwhelming in its simplicity, especially if you’re coming from an older car.
There are hardly any buttons in here – not physical ones, anyway. In fact, it’s so sparse that there isn’t even a button to turn the vehicle on; you instead just hop in, select Drive, and set off.
We’ll touch on that again in our drive impressions further down, but as someone with limited Polestar experience before driving the Polestar 2, I was thrown for a loop. We’d expect others to be the same upon initial acquaintance, though not if they’re used to Teslas.
Once you’re in and have a moment to soak everything up, you’ll find the Polestar 2 offers a comfortable, well-sorted interior. The seats are of a high quality in both their construction and finish, and are easily adjustable thanks to their powered movement.
A theme throughout this car (and all other Polestars) is the use of environmentally friendly materials, which tend to wear names like “animal welfare traced Nappa leather” or “vegan WeaveTech”.
Fortunately, there has been no compromise on material quality, and everything is comfortable and nice to interact with – not to mention pleasing for those worried about their carbon footprint. Everything in here has a trace of Mini, at least in appearance.
The lack of… well, anything, makes it a visually clean interior. Its headline feature is that 11.15-inch portrait-style infotainment system, which is your primary control centre for the entire vehicle.
Entertainment applications are expectedly found here, but it is somewhat disappointing that Apple CarPlay is only wired, via either of two USB-C ports under the central display. That isn’t a dealbreaker – the Model 3 doesn’t have CarPlay at all – but it is something we would like to see for this money.
As tends to be the case with wired phone mirroring connections, it’s at least reliable and isn’t at all prone to dropping out on the move. When the CarPlay interface is open, Polestar’s brutalist icons and controls will still be accessible via permanent ribbons at the top and bottom of the display.
The bottom is where you’ll find climate-related controls, and if you need more than what’s typically shown, you can swipe up from the bottom for more nuanced settings.
It’s a similar story at the top, where you have shortcuts for camera views, vehicle settings, apps, and user profiles.
They’re all fairly self-explanatory, but it’s still worth pointing out a couple of standout features. For one, the apps shortcut is where you’ll find the built-in Android Automotive program with Google integration.
It’s simple to navigate and takes the place of typical Android Auto. In here is also where you access Apple CarPlay and other native apps like the car’s range assistant.
Within the vehicle settings menu are the Polestar 2’s most crucial functions. Here, you can change the way the steering feels, which driver assists are active, how the motors behave, and just about anything else you’d want to fiddle with.
Once again we’ll delve into this later on, but the theme here is simplicity. The menus are all populated by large black and orange square buttons, with information presented in Polestar’s typical bland typeface.
It’s certainly distinctive, and we won’t argue that having such bold and basic design elements is in any way distracting. In practice, these menus are exceptionally easy to navigate and read at a glance – more than can be said about a lot of new cars with mountains of scrollable menus.
The same theme carries through to the instrument display. It’s a simple setup headlined by a stripped-back speedometer readout and power meter, along with other basic information scattered around the place.
The best part about it is just how functional it is, and that it has Apple Maps integration. There isn’t even much to scroll through in terms of separate menus; there’s only a couple, and they’re primarily there to show you trip information and energy consumption.
This is opened using the menu button on the right of the steering wheel. Things like volume can also be controlled using the directional buttons or the dial found on the centre console.
The only complaint we do have is regarding material choice, because while we do like the way all the ‘environmentally safe’ surfaces look, we don’t love the use of gloss black plastic, even if it isn’t everywhere. It’s found in places like the steering wheel, where it’s plastered all over the buttons.
There’s also a little bit around the funky-looking gear selector, as well as that small strip of controls ahead of it. It looks good new, especially when offset by the light-coloured woodgrain paneling in our tester, but even the little bits get grubby far too quickly.
Outside of that, the gear selector itself presents like a cheap piece of plastic, and it’s the only item in the cabin to do so. Sure, there are some other harder-wearing materials to protect against shoe marks, but they’re mostly out of sight.
The illuminated Polestar logo on the selector is a nice touch. We also like the leather-wrapped steering wheel, which is ‘just right’ in diameter and thickness, and offers a wide level of adjustment to suit practically all driving positions. Other areas, like the armrests, are appropriately padded.
In terms of storage, you have two cupholders up front, though only one is exposed; the other is inside the central storage box and is removeable. Storage space is compromised with it in place.
There are also storage slots and bottle holders in the doors, slots in the sides of the centre console but without a large tray or pass-through, and a traditional glovebox with no electric opening like in other Polestars.
Additionally, you can tuck your phone away below the central display when plugged in, which is also where you’ll find the wireless charging pad.
Stepping into the back of the Polestar 2 reveals a comfortable space. Headroom has been preserved because the vehicle doesn’t have a roof line that slopes aggressively towards the rear, but you’ll find less legroom than in a Model 3.
Legroom for those seated in the middle will also be compromised by quite a large driveline tunnel, but at least second-row occupants can bask under the panoramic glass roof on sunny days.
Items for comfort back here include two rear-facing air vents – albeit with no separate climate control interface – and two USB-C ports hidden under that circular lid.
There’s also a fold-down central armrest with cupholders, along with storage nets on the front seatbacks and storage cubbies in the doors.
Plus, you get more of that high-quality upholstery. It’s just disappointing that this vehicle platform’s internal combustion roots such as that raised centre hump continue to compromise interior space.
The Polestar 2’s boot is acceptable. While you get plenty of space, the load floor is fairly low in relation to the boot opening, making loading heavy items harder.
The floor is otherwise flat, and you get a storage net on the right-hand side to stop smaller items rolling around. There’s also an under-floor cubby that’s relatively deep, which is a perfect place to store items like a charging cable.
Making it easier to access is a powered tailgate, which can be opened using a button next to the steering wheel. You can also unlock the tailgate alone by pressing the button on the key.
Despite being largely a screen-only interior, you’d be surprised how easy it is to get up to speed. Then again, it is worth weighing up whether you’ll be able to stay patient for the first few months as you learn how to live with the Polestar 2.
It’s fundamentally no different to any other Polestar, but we don’t blame you if you still want a more traditional setup.
To see how the Polestar 2 stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
What’s under the bonnet?
A storage cubby with 41 litres of capacity. The Polestar 2 Long Range Single Motor drivetrain comprises a single, rear-mounted electric motor producing up to 220kW of power and 490Nm of torque, with energy sourced from an 82kWh lithium-ion battery.
Specifications
Polestar 2 Long Range Single Motor
Drivetrain
Single-motor electric
Battery
82kWh
Battery chemistry
Lithium-ion
Peak power
220kW
Peak torque
490Nm
Drive type
Rear-wheel drive
Kerb weight
2009kg
0-100km/h (claimed)
6.2 seconds
Energy consumption (claimed)
14.9-15.8kWh/100km
Energy consumption (as tested)
15.1kWh/100km
Claimed range
659km
Max AC charge rate
11kW
Max DC charge rate
205kW
Braked towing capacity
1500kg
Our week with the car involved primarily highway driving, with some inner-suburban stints also thrown in. Despite the EV-unfriendly freeway skew, our recorded energy consumption was right in the ballpark of what Polestar claims.
To see how the Polestar 2 stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
How does the Polestar 2 drive?
Once again in a no-frills fashion, which we appreciate.
The driving process starts when you unlock the vehicle. As mentioned above, there’s no start/stop button to press once you’re inside and ready to go.
Instead, the driver must simply depress the brake pedal and shift into Drive, after which the Polestar 2 is then ‘on’. It’s confusing at first, especially if you’ve not been shown around the car or are used to jamming a key into the ignition.
Once you’re used to it though, you’ll find it’s quite intuitive and not too dissimilar to a Tesla. Not that pressing a button is prohibitively difficult, but we like that you’re able to jump in and go on a whim, so long as the key is in your pocket.
To turn it off, simply pop it in Park, get out, and lock the doors. This will also take some getting used to, and you’d be forgiven for struggling to trust that your car is off and locked, at least in the teething phase.
Once you’re moving, unassuming is probably a word that may come to mind.
Even if the concrete-grey finish applied to our tester isn’t a dead giveaway, it’s not surprising that there are no cutesy sounds or extravagant displays for the driver to soak up while on the move.
Instead, it’s quiet, refined, and simply goes about its job routinely. That’s supported by a lack of intrusive driver assist tech, as well as that comfortable interior setup with unremarkable yet functional ergonomics and support.
A strength is the Polestar 2’s cabin refinement. Travelling along at suburban speeds reveals little road noise, with most of the sound you’ll hear coming from the vehicle’s motors in the form of a subtle whirr – that changes on rural highways where the asphalt tends to be a bit coarser.
The standard wheels and tyres fitted to our tester likely help with this, at least in comparison with the optional 20-inch alternatives. These tyres also do well to keeping the car’s weight in check, which at just over two tonnes is nothing to sneeze at.
As is the case with many other EVs, this relatively small-looking, jacked-up sedan is unfortunately quite heavy. Despite that, Polestar has done well to not only mask that but also use it as an advantage.
For one, the ride is excellent. It may not be as plush as some of the larger, more expensive Polestars, but the suspension feels well-tuned and faithfully soaks up bumps and all manner of imperfections. There’s a plush quality to the Polestar 2’s ride as a result, even if it is still on the sportier side.
The car feels firmly planted at all speeds, particularly on the freeway. This is where the weight is a benefit, and you get the impression that it’s able to roll along like a fairly sleek tank instead of a tin can getting blown about by the wind.
Another strength is how subtly quick the Polestar 2 can be. Even though our tester was only rear-drive model, it still has delivers quietly confident 6.2-second 0-100km/h time, giving it the ability to scurry away from a stop and keep you from losing too many red-light drag races.
That’s on top of the Polestar 2 matching its decent efficiency claim. I tend to do a fair bit of freeway driving, but even so, it remained remarkably efficient.
Helping this is its one-pedal driving system, which can be toggled between either ‘standard’, ‘low’, or ‘off’ using the vehicle settings menu on the central screen. We found that even in its ‘low’ setting, the force of the car’s regenerative braking was stronger than we would have expected.
‘Standard’ mode still behaves like a typical one-pedal driving setup, but I’d like greater differentiation between the two modes. Maybe that’s just me, and it’s still fairly easy to be smooth thanks to its progressive braking application.
Using the traditional brake pedal, meanwhile, will also charge the battery. Unlike what we’ve seen in some other EVs, the Polestar 2’s brake pedal still feels as it should, without any sponginess or glazed-disc feelings.
You’re also able to toggle auto-hold and select whether or not the car will creep forward from a standstill, as in an automatic internal combustion car would, through the same interior menu, alongside three different strength settings for steering weight.
Switching stability control into Sport mode makes it possible to kick out the car’s rear-end in corners, particularly when it’s wet. The single-motor Polestar 2s are still restrained enough not to buck you off if you have a heavy right foot, and the others boast even more traction with all-wheel drive.
The steering is direct, responsive and feelsome for an EV, and the RWD Polestar 2’s handling is sharp enough to deliver great road holding and prevent you from keeling over in higher-speed turns. The adjustability in steering feel offers a good range for most tastes, and its unfettered point-and-go nature is a product of its rear-wheel drive layout, since there’s no front-wheel drive torque steer to contend with.
To round it out, the Polestar 2 is solidified by the fact that it shares in Volvo’s reputable safety legacy. In this case you get Polestar’s Pilot Assist, a well-tuned autonomous driving system that works reliably to match the speed of traffic around while holding the car firmly in its lane.
It has no issue getting up to speed with adaptive cruise control active either. With these systems off, the Polestar 2 won’t be fighting you for control if it thinks you’re getting too close to the lane markings.
That means you get the control of a traditional car without the safety nannies found in a lot of newer ones. They’re all still there, of course, just patiently waiting in case something goes genuinely wrong.
All up, it’s a refined package that drives confidently and satisfyingly. There’s not a lot we’d change, except perhaps adding an even softer suspension option. For those with a sportier bent, there are also spicier handling goodies available higher up in the Polestar 2 range, like adjustable Öhlins dampers.
To see how the Polestar 2 stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
What do you get?
Despite four apparent trim levels, the Polestar 2 shares almost all the same equipment across its range.
2025 Polestar 2 equipment highlights:
19-inch Aero alloy wheels with aero inserts
Michelin Primacy 4 tyres
Metallic paint
Pixel LED headlights with adaptive high-beam
LED front fog lights with cornering function
Automatic high-beam
Power tailgate
11.15-inch touchscreen infotainment system
Android Automotive with Google built-in
Apple CarPlay
DAB+ digital radio
Google service connectivity included for three years
12.3-inch digital instrument cluster
4 x USB-C ports (two up front, two in the rear)
Wireless phone charger
Eight-speaker 250W sound system
Dual-zone climate control
Rain-sensing wipers
Keyless entry and start
Charcoal headliner
Embossed textile ‘vegan’ upholstery in Charcoal or Zinc with 3D etched deco
Semi-electric front seats with four-way power lumbar and driver’s memory
Heated front seats
60/40 split/fold rear seats
‘Mid-level’ interior illumination
To see how the Polestar 2 stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
Options
Three option packs and several standalone options are available for the Polestar 2.
Climate pack: $1500
Heated rear seats
Heated wiper nozzles
Heated steering wheel
Heat pump
Pro pack: $1900
20-inch Pro alloy wheels
Black seatbelts with Swedish Gold striping
Gold valve caps
Plus pack: $3900
Fixed panoramic glass roof with projected Polestar symbol
Electrically adjustable seats including 4-way lumbar support, driver seat memory, front cushion leg extension and backrest storage nets
WeaveTech seats in Charcoal or Slate with Black Ash decor inlays
Polestar Digital key
Air Quality – PM2.5 sensor and filter
High-level interior illumination
LED front fog lights with cornering
Power-operated tailgate with hands-free opening and soft close
Rear load floor lid-in-lid with bag holder
Standalone options, depending on the variant, include:
20-inch Pro graphite alloy wheels ($600)
Pixel LED headlights ($1600)
Charcoal animal welfare-secured Nappa leather upholstery with ventilated front seats ($6000)
Harman Kardon 600W, 13-speaker sound system ($1400, standard on Long Range Dual Motor)
Tinted rear windows ($400, standard on Long Range Dual Motor)
To see how the Polestar 2 stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
Is the Polestar 2 safe?
The Polestar 2 has a five-star ANCAP safety rating based on testing conducted by sister organisation Euro NCAP in 2021.
Category
Polestar 2
Adult occupant protection
92 per cent
Child occupant protection
87 per cent
Vulnerable road user protection
80 per cent
Safety assist
82 per cent
Standard safety equipment includes:
Autonomous emergency braking
Vehicle, cyclist, pedestrian detection
Steering support
Reverse AEB
Blind-spot assist
Cross-traffic alert and assist
Run-off Road Mitigation
Lane-keep assist
Post-impact braking
Traffic sign recognition
Front, rear and side parking sensors
Surround-view camera
Eight airbags: front, side, inner-side and curtain
Adaptive cruise control
Pilot Assist
Emergency stop assist
To see how the Polestar 2 stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
How much does the Polestar 2 cost to run?
The Polestar 2 is backed by a five-year, unlimited-kilometre vehicle warranty and an eight-year/160,000km high-voltage battery warranty. Impressively, it also comes with five years of free scheduled servicing.
Servicing and Warranty
Polestar 2
Warranty
5 years, unlimited kilometres
Battery warranty
8 years, 160,000km
Roadside assistance
5 years
Service intervals
2 years, 30,000km
Capped-price servicing
5 years, 100,000km
Total capped-price service cost
Free
To see how the Polestar 2 stacks up against its rivals, use our comparison tool
CarExpert’s Take on the Polestar 2 Long Range Single Motor
Before getting the keys to the Polestar 2, I wasn’t quite sure what to expect.
It’s easy to look at and assume it’s another electric sedan – albeit one with a distinctive Scando design – that rarely appears in the wild, made by a brand that still isn’t widely known in Australia, at least not compared to the likes of Tesla and its Model 3.
But after you spend some time behind the wheel, and all those nuances hiding behind its relatively understated exterior begin to reveal themselves. The Polestar 2 well-built and rides like something much larger and more expensive – without being excessively large or exorbitantly expensive.
That said, the price is still a critical factor. While it is significantly cheaper than it used to be, there’s no getting around the fact that the base Polestar 2 is a lot pricier than the comparable Model 3, which will be a big turn-off for many buyers.
Then, there’s the elephant in the room. BYD also builds its cars in the same country as Polestar and, for Australia, Tesla. But the Seal is the only electric sedan priced from under $50,000 in this market.
It’s unfortunate that prices for the Polestar 2 aren’t lower still, perhaps even sub-$60,000 for the base Standard Range, because it’s a great car by any measure.
Its interior is comfortable and, despite being screen-heavy, still characteristically Polestar with its graphic design cues and general layout. Space in the second row could definitely be improved, but that would call for a fundamental structural change that’s unlikely to happen until the next generation.
The reliance on tech is something that will be a learning curve for new owners, especially those getting on in years or those coming from a vehicle that is. It’s 2025, and that’s something buyers will have to get used to when shopping around in the new EV market, not just in the relatively unpopular sedan segment.
As part of Polestar’s Australian catalogue, the 2 makes sense. It’s the smallest model in the lineup and now the cheapest by some margin. But when it still costs at least $65k on the road, some potential buyers will find it difficult to see the value proposition.
The lack of wireless Apple CarPlay is still a gripe too, especially for a tech-focussed brand like Polestar. Perhaps an over-the-air update will remedy this, but even then it’s hard to see the 2 overtaking the Model 3 to become a favourite EV among private customers any time soon.
Still, I have seen more Polestar 2s on Melbourne roads in recent months, even if many of them are rideshare vehicles. But everyone knows the Toyota Camry won’t be handing over the crown in that department without a fight either, so Polestar’s debut Australian model could well be destined to remain niche for a while yet.
Interested in buying a Polestar 2? Get in touch with one of CarExpert’s trusted dealers here
